Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D17-0227 - TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER
TSD TECHNOLOGY CENTER 4160 S 144 ST D17-0227 Parcel No: Address: 0 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: htto://www.TukwilaWA.eov 1523049013 4160 S 144TH ST DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Project Name: TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER Permit Number: D17-0227 Issue Date: Permit Expires On: 1/2/2018 7/1/2018 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: KING CO LIBRARY SYSTEM 960 NEWPORT WAY NW , ISSAQUAH, WA, 98027 ALEXANDER CLARK AIA Phone: (206) 624-4222 105 SOUTH MAIN ST #323 , SEATTLE, WA, 98116 JB CONST CONSULTING INC Phone: (206) 715-7835 12535 15 AV NE - SUITE 100 , SEATTLE, WA, 98125 JBCONCC918QP TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Address: 4640 S 144TH ST, TUKWILA, WA, 98168 4- Expiration Date: 11/17/2019r DESCRIPTION OF WORK: COMMERCIAL TENANT IMPROVEMENT TO EXISTING TECHNOLOGY & MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTER BUILDING. ALTERATIONS INCLUDE INTERIOR WALL PARTITIONS AT EXISTING SPACES Project Valuation: $350,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: NO Fire Alarm: NO Type of Construction: VB Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA Fees Collected: $6,310.36 Occupancy per IBC: B Water District: 125 Sewer District: VALLEY VIEW Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2017 2017 2017 2015 Public Works Activities: Channelization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Number: 0 Permit Center Authorized Signature: r—"?.j Date: (_?-I S I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature:tn �� a fume- Print � Print Name: E� � � \-Ube__O Date: \" — l D This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: Signs are not approved as part of this permit. A separate sign permit is required 5: The total number of fire extinguishers required for a light hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3,000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "all purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. The travel distance to any extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 2: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 3: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 4: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 7.2, 7.3) 6: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 7: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1010.1.9) 8: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically. retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 9: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 10: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1010.1.9.1) 11: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1013.1) 12: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "1", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1013.6.1) 13: Aisles and aisle access ways serving as a portion of the exit access in the means of egress system shall comply with the requirements of this section. Aisles or aisle access ways shall be provided from all occupied portions of the exit access which contain seats, tables, furnishings, displays and similar fixtures or equipment. The required width of aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1018.1) 14: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on-site generator. (IFC 1013.6.3) 15: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1008.3.5) 17: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2437. 18: Maintain square foot coverage of detectors per manufacturer's specifications in all areas including: closets, elevator shafts, top of stairwells, etc. (NFPA 72-17.5.3.1) 20: Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding automatic fire detectors. (NFPA 72-17.5.3.1) 21: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 19: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 22: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 0 0 23: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 24: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.11 of the International Building Code. 25: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 16: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 26: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 27: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 28: ***BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 29: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 30: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 31: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 32: Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 33: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 34: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 35: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 36: Every occupied space other than enclosed parking garages and buildings used for repair of automobiles shall be ventilated in accordance with the applicable provisions of the International Mechanical Code. 37: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 38: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 39: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 40: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL** 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1400 FIRE FINAL 0409 FRAMING 0606 GLAZING 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING CITY OF TUKA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TulcwilaWA.gov o Building Permit No. ') l 1 6'7 Project No. Date Application Accepted: 481-)2 ` 7 • ( p Date Application Expires: (For office use only) CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** SITE LOCATION 4 o fr° King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 1523049013 Site Address: A61TSouth 144th Street Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name: Tukwila School District - i rreA rate-- >' 471OYli9-// litG7YGE ge-eiGe G ptr deli PROPERTY OWNER Name: Jeffrey Feeney-KMB, Dr. Judith Berry -TSD Name: Tukwila School District City: Olympia State: WA Zip: 98501 Address: 4640 South 144th Street Email: jefffeeney@kmb-architects.com, City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98168 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: Jeffrey Feeney-KMB, Dr. Judith Berry -TSD Address: 906 Columbia Street SW Suite 400 City: Olympia State: WA Zip: 98501 Phone: (360) 352-8883 Fax: Email: jefffeeney@kmb-architects.com, . beer J e WPcv tLA . win/7.6014 GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: TBD Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: 9/41/1/1/ r 7 �� A oqiwD �r Flo. 029- t1zzt- a/ec,c%1< L nri/apielarch. f`r—. New Tenant: ❑ Yes ..No ARCHITECT OF RECORD Name: Tukwila School District Company Name: Rolluda Architects, Inc. City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98168 Architect Name: Alex E. Rolluda Address: 105 South Main Street Suite 323 City: Seattle State: WA Zip: 98104 Phone: (206) 624-4222 Fax: 741-3900 Email: alex@rolludaarchitects.com ENGINEER OF RECORD Name: Tukwila School District Company Name: Reid Middleton City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98168 Engineer Name: Paul Crocker Address: 728 134th Street Suite 200 City: Everett State: WA Zip: 98204 Phone: (425) 741-5022 Fax: (425) 741-3900 Email: perocker@reidmiddleton.com LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or , greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: Tukwila School District Address: 4640 South 144th Street City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98168 H:\Applications\FErms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 1 of 4 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATIC 206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 350,000 Existing Building Valuation: $ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): COMMERCIAL TI TO EXISTING TECHNOLOGY & MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTER BUILDING. ALTERATIONS INCLUDE INTERIOR WALL PARTITIONS AT EXISTING SPACES Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes 0.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? 0 Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: 0 Sprinklers 0 Automatic Fire Alarm gl None 0 Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes ZI No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:Wpplications\Forms-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC 1s` Floor 5,451 VB ,.. B 2nd Floor 3rd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? 0 Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: 0 Sprinklers 0 Automatic Fire Alarm gl None 0 Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes ZI No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:Wpplications\Forms-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFO( )ATION — 206-433-0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ...Water District #125 ❑ ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate O .. Highline ❑ ...Valley View 0 .. Renton ❑ ...Sewer Availability Provided ❑ .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle Septic System: 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): 0 ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way ❑ Non Right-of-way ❑ ❑ ...Total Cut ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards cubic yards ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑ ...Traffic Control ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection Irrigation Domestic Water ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ... Hold Harmless — (SAO) ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (ROW) ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ .. Storm Drainage ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Pavement Cut 0 .. Looped Fire Line ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... WO # ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size .. 1,WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size 1,WO # ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension Public 0 Private ❑ ❑ ...Water Main Extension Public 0 Private 0 ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑ ... Deduct Water Meter Size FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line 0 ...Water 0 ...Sewer 0 ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) Day Telephone: Mailing Address: City State Zip Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Mailing Address: Day Telephone: City State Zip H:\Applications\Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-I I.docz Revised: August 2011 bh Page 3 of 4 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Value of Construction — In all 'cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE Lk OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUT Signature: ORI. ED Date: 08/23/2017 Print Name: Alexander Clad r Day Telephone: (206) 624-4222 Mailing Address: 105 South Main Street, Suite 323 H:\Applications\Forms-Applications On Line\201 I Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Seattle WA 98104 City State Zip Page 4 of 4 DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $3,899.30 D17-0227 Address: 4060 S 144TH ST Apn: 1523049013 $3,899.30 DEVELOPMENT $3,713.83 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $3,709.33 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $185.47 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R12640 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $185.47 $3,899.30 Date Paid: Tuesday, October 24, 2017 Paid By: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Pay Method: CHECK 96029 Printed: Tuesday, October 24, 2017 3:57 PM 1 of 1 Cash Register Receipt.. City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT ( QUANTITY PermitTRAK PAID $3,899.30 D17-0227 Address: 4160 S 144TH ST Apn: 1523049013 $3,899.30 DEVELOPMENT $3,713.83 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $3,709.33 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $185.47 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R13073 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $185.47 $3,899.30 Date Paid: Thursday, December 21, 2017 Paid By: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Pay Method: CHECK 96415 Printed: Thursday, December 21, 2017 10:30 AM 1 of 1 CISYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID PermitTRAK $2,411.06 D17-0227 Address: 4640 S 144TH ST BLDG 03 Apn: 1523049108 $2,411.06 DEVELOPMENT $2,411.06 PLAN CHECK FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R12192 R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $2,411.06 $2,411.06 Date Paid: Wednesday, August 23, 2017 Paid By: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Pay Method: CHECK 95722 Printed: Wednesday, August 23, 2017 2:53 PM 1 of 1 CRWYSTEMS INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING D 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Dt7—oz27 PERMIT NO. IVISION (206) 431-367 Project: TSD Teelr►nol Genies% Ty a of Ins ction: 1� 1 ng It N A-1— c UU 4160QJo // / 61, Date Called: U Date Special Instructions: Date Wanted: S " -20 S a.m. p.m. ReC ester: ilii � L berg Phone No: i -20(0-115-7P35 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Ici n A Fitted prove i Adedrrss rtie. Inspector:3 r t Date: c� 1 _ 2-0/3 /3 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 D/1 On Project: n �5�, 1econo C Type of Inspection: "g lid1vrc Flvlr.L Address: U� L//(a s NY &S,4 Date Called: O �� Special Instructions: Date Wanted: �.r»� Y/30/2�1, p.m. Requester: Phone No: oApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: A / 416)11(dC Inspector: ]a) Date: 4/.50, za>„ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 D17 - 02Z'7 Project: �.. 15d- std �,1e.r Ty a of Insp ction: �, la 1%15- F'1 L Address /4/17° 11-49 0 (St Si Date Called: Special Instructions: / PH o Date Wanted:q Z7 zoe cgs Requester: —TIM 11 bar , - Phone No: 7Q ,35 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: FitiaL f.J"d'( res aAft cike/eJS d'nrng Inspector: % i20 CO— Date: q_ 27,20 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 117-0227 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: Typinsp�ion: .amu' i n5t rt et -L 1 TSD -1 ec�►10 Li Address: [JL - V I c 060 S. Nil 01-0 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. 3-27- a,o/g_ p.m. Requester: Phone No: LJApproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: XCorrections required prior to approval. CD'r AGAro r -Cat V.ed- r!'�4NCe ( lcd i ;o r _P4/0 Ci 1 inspector: ,cLe CaZ_ Date: 3/127/201 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit l)7-0227 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: 0-..y Type of Inspection: ® SVS i'`G�C %� at II `,� �♦y •I Address: f 105 .SS. /9L/-- 5• Date Called:. 3-/2-2D4 Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 3.13-2101 cts p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to apps -oval. lnspector oct Date: 3-/ --20g/ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 5outhcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 tr7 0227 Project: Type of Inspection: &Llai 45 T6 ' 1ecl►n.olr�y CRITIC,- A dress:7HS 'O(a S, / / r �-- Date Called: 3.42- zc special Instructions: Date Wanted: 3-63-zo%r a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: pri Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: GLsiztff inspecto REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit D17-0227 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: -i r —1- rr G zAiz_ Type of Inspection: VV1 d1'LG- Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: 4--t- frpps Date Wanted: 1-22 -1'8 a.m Requester: 11 wt Phone No: 20(e— 7/5-- 73' Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: o <- fealmi Inspector: Date: j-2 2 —i, REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit I)/ - -0 2:2- PERMIT 2 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: ( 0 5 -11-ero ( iks 1 Type of Inspection: 42-7 rL"-' Address: ' Suite #: 6 4 a -/44i7— S Contact Person:' Ti 1/1� w II 6ej Special Instructions: Phone No.: Nem e:6--- ..,4.w...,• 4...4.14,-.....,_• Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 7 Sprinklers: rL"-' Hrs.: Fire Alarm: y -a 5 Hood & Duct: E rg-- (-t f-er/,'� MSS (1`�, Cog , p (i),-1 Nem e:6--- ..,4.w...,• 4...4.14,-.....,_• Pre -Fire: -r Permits: - _ ------( (e- r"---(/-/ il-e._ pesc) Needs Shift Inspection: 7 Sprinklers: rL"-' Hrs.: Fire Alarm: y -a 5 Hood & Duct: Monitor: W14/1 . /l.- ..,4.w...,• 4...4.14,-.....,_• Pre -Fire: -r Permits: Occupancy Tye: 9 .._ Inspector: (.- 7 5 41— Date: +fLill( Hrs.: 1 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD INSPECTION Retain a copy with permit Li f1 -02-'2-7-- `(c< - &-= LL� PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project �k er- b1 `c Type of Inspectio/re aX t ` (,4((ii T/ ASuiteddress:#: 4666`7 _ -2 / I 14`� Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: NO Fire Alarm: i Hood & Duct: N .Monitor: t Pre -Fire: r,/ k .---:---,,..)4--/.._ ,/ �2- % f-oV—A p t -)\/t t n/ Permits: --- 4—Do 6` L r `vc cam- " 7,Ni spa -6-4-6,---- 109 K4. C/t-a- 113 a sic --1- — 1-09-66-1_ 4-1_ e o f ?-1D-S tn' / 12 NI 6&-`15 Ery '72- 6( 67 f-/77/`' i Aa % re, z0 --' 1l6 `-) ADO `1— L t 6 f"Ci-7" & P () Tfezv K ry 7 - Needs Shift Inspection: E' Sprinklers: NO Fire Alarm: i Hood & Duct: N .Monitor: t Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: " v ` Ste. Date: 3,244/<‘Hrs.: 1 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ��S-F-o2s PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: � I � % 5o 60 Date:j/2_/// Hrs.: St T &s ype of Inspection;/ F./ ' FI N f L--- Address:A Suite #: ��4 �i . / 4 -v -C- 6€iLI,,/614--79-T b&-7 rcrvIzS. VAc contact 4.1_ Person: Special Instructions: e F- 1-4- w7 9:- 7- per%- r-=61)24.1, Pi*21 Q f2 To t Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Date:j/2_/// Hrs.: F/19- /v67- -b--0 : ,i 6 6~1 -Li w/ i9t-L Govt Di 77 (N s o�iJ 1711.--Y)-76 f r/i/ta dt--) ,9it E- S E' /. ,e. N.ee) L-tp 4N O , c' -y 3 Ar & Duct: 4 -v -C- 6€iLI,,/614--79-T b&-7 rcrvIzS. Monitor: °, GPr"y , l E --7"h ( 71�T- e F- 1-4- w7 9:- 7- per%- r-=61)24.1, Pi*21 Q f2 To /tee7� Occupancy Type: Needs Shift Inspection:Sprinklers: Inspection:. Date:j/2_/// Hrs.: Fire Alarm: 147 Lv✓-- JHood & Duct: Monitor: °, "Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: �J Inspector: f pfl 5 + Date:j/2_/// Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 :;e, Tukwila School District Auxiliary Project Package #1 Technology & Maintenance Service Center Fn. �„f Tukwila • SCHOOL DISTRICT Date of Specifications: August 11, 2017 PERMIT PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 of 2 Divisions 0 - 13 rolluda architects 105 South Main St., Suite 323 Seattle, Washington 98104 206.624.4222 tel 206.624.4226 fax www.RolludaArchitects.com CORRECTION LTR# � 22.7 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 02 2011 PERMIT CENTER TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 00 00 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000001 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 000107 PROJECT DIRECTORY 1 DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - NA DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 6 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 10 064600 WOOD TRIM 6 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 10 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 8 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 6 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 12 088000 GLAZING (DOORS ONLY) . 10 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 6 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 6 092900 GYPSUM BOARD • 6 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 8 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 2 096520 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 5 096800 CARPET 2 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 6 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101200 SIGNAGE 8 102238 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 8 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 01 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 00 00 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 115213 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 4 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 4 VOLUME 2 DIVISION 21— FIRE SUPPRESSION 210010 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 8 DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220010 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 8 - 220020 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 19 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 4 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 6 221005 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 11 221006 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 8 221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 7 221319 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 5 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 7 DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) r1 230010 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 8 J (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS 230020 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, 22 AND AIR-CONDITIONING j 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 11 230713 DUCT INSULATION 6 .z.._.1 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 6 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 13 E 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 7 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 6 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 7 fl 238127 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 6 _ DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL '� JI 260500 COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 12 260501 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 01 - 2 c -n L j 1 j 1 j 0 fl J LJ J 7. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 00 00 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 4 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 5 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - 3 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 14 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 8 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL - 6 260923 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 6 262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING 3 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS 3 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 7 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 8 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 01 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center OWNER: A. Tukwila School District 4640 S 144th Street, Tukwila, WA 98168 Owner's Representative: Jeff Feeney T: 206-979-9370 E: JeffFeeney@KMBDesign.com DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD A. Architect:. Rolluda Architects 105 South. Main Street, Suite 323, Seattle, WA 98104 Project Contact: Alexander Clark AIA T: 206-624-4222 F: 206-624-4226 E: Alex.Clark@RolludaArchitects.com B. Structural Reid Middleton 728.134th ST SW, Suite 200, Everett, WA 98204 Contact: Paul Crocker T: 425-741-3800 E: perocker@reidmiddleton.com C. Mechanical Tres West Engineers 2702 S 42nd street, #301, Tacoma, WA 98409 Contact: Reid Herron T: 253-472-3300 E: 'rsh@reswest.com D. Electrical: Tres West Engineers 2702 S 42nd street, #301, Tacoma, WA 98409 Contact: Scott Felton T: 253-472-3300 E: flr@treswest.dom END OF DOCUMENT 000107 00 01 07 PROJECT DIRECTORY PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 01 07 - 1 r n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1. Demolition and removaYof selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner -occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. r 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall .� where indicated. 1,1 r D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor: 1.4 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -demolition Conference: Conductconference at Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS n A. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. fl SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 0241 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Transportation BLDG: Relocate portable toilet. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. Insert warranted system. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 0241 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated . to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. Provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 3.3 . PREPARATION 0241 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and. structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire - suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41.19- 4 n tzr- 0 0 cn j 0 0 i TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 0241 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 6. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." J B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end -of -Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. fl 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. -� 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: '-1 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition, and cleaned and reinstalled in their 114 original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA -approved landfill. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 2. 'Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction. Waste Management and Disposal." - . 1 B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 3.6 CLEANING 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Retain first subparagraph below if steel angles or other shapes are used to support countertops between cheek walls. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.2 COORDINATION Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint. and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 4. Miscellaneous steel trim. 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post -installed anchors, from ICC -ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M,.,"Structural Welding Code Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders: B. Structural Performance of Ladders: ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre - consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. D. E. F. G. H. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold -formed steel tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. Zinc -Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741. 1. Wire -Rope Fittings: Hot -dip galvanized -steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. I. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: As indicated. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 coating; 0.108 -inch nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; minimum thickness; unfinished. J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class requir B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. for exterior use ASTM F 1941, ed. with hex nuts, METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. E, Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry" and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. H. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." Section 099123 Interior Painting." B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. C. Water -Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. H. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout .specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and. methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed Welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. METAL FABRICATIONS - 05.50 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2:6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS • A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent. construction. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2 -inch baseplates with four 5/8 -inch anchor bolts and 1/4 -inch top plates. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. F. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc -rich primer where indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 6 0 0 9 9 a 0 0 a 0 0 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center C. Galvanize and prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer. 2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for :items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc -rich primer is indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES . A. As -Fabricated Finish: AA -M12. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 8 fl *-7 r n IL- TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center — 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces: 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END -OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY . Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Utility shelving. 6. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. - 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology .& Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 6. For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES: 1. Wood -preservative -treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 3. Power -driven fasteners. 4. Powder -actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research orevaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an, inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber. and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 2. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors . shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 ,percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: See drawings. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 a 0 0 0 9 0 9 D 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber as indicated on drawings. C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north); Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir; Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS . Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than as shown on drawings nominal thickness. 1. Tele Com backing board to be fire rated. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equalto six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire -retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal -thickness. 3 Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with. function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated: Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION . A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 -by -2 -inch nominal -size furring at 16 inches o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 8E TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 10 J -1 u I' j LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Closet and utility shelving. 3:. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 4. Shop priming of wood trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for installing wood trim and concealed within other construction before wood trim installation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. Product Data : For installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Product Data: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. PVC edge material. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM 2. Lumber and panel products with shop -applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with one- half of exposed surface finished. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. • D. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant -treated materials, from ICC -ES. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels, during the remainder of the construction period. WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building n 1.7 COORDINATION n ^i fl .J 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Economy. B. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. 2.3 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. • Grade: Economy. B. Shelf Material: thermoset decorative panel with PVC T -mold edge. C. Cleats: 3/4 -inch panel product. J 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain -sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Materials: 10 to 15 percent. 3. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM B. _ Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 2.6 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. B. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Nails for Exterior Use: hot -dip galvanized or stainless steel. C. Screws for Exterior Use: hot -dip galvanized or stainless steel. D. Provide self -drilling screws for metal -framing supports, as recommended by metal -framing manufacturer. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. F. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 4 u LJ Li Li •TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM G. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Back -priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end -grain surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back -priming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number .of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch. up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064600 WOOD TRIM 064600-6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. . Silicone joint sealants. 2. Non -staining silicone joint sealants. 3. Urethane joint sealants. 4. Mildew -resistant joint sealants. 5. Polysulfide joint sealants. 6. Butyl joint sealants. 7. Latex joint sealants. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product. 1. Product Data : For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2 -inch -wide joints formed between two 6 -inch -long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. 1.4 ,INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion. D. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion -Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing' specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. E. Field -Adhesion -Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to; repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. . Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less. C. Low -Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California . Department of Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. JOINT SEALANTS . . 07 92 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. 2. Exterior windows & B. Silicone, M, P, 100/50, T, NT: •Multicomponent, pourable, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT: Non -staining, multicomponent, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Tremco Incorporated. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, non -sag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). e. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. f. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Exterior concrete as required. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 n n r1 n Lj .E fl n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 2.5 SILYL-TERMINATED POLYETHER (STPE) JOINT SEALANTS A. STPE, S, NS, 50, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). e: Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. 2.6 MILDEW -RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew -Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 50, NT: Mildew -resistant, single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl,terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. - b. Toilet rooms as required. 2.7 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl -Rubber -Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Non-visible flashing 2.8 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building b. Pecora Corporation. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). d. Tremco Incorporated. 2.9 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Sealant Backing Rods: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION fl n n j 1 j 1 LJ fl n, A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: t' JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce- a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Complywith recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL LJ A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint fl Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in .J ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. n 2. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: LJ a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field -adhesion hand -pull test criteria. 3. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8 n n L n J n J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS B. Evaluation of Field -Adhesion -Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in, writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow -metal doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 COORDINATION Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core . descriptions, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT • AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow -metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow -metal .door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with,two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4 -inch -high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Gensteel Doors, Inc. 4. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand. 5. West Central Manufacturing, Inc. B. Interior Doors: Ceco, Medallion or approved equal C. Exterior Doors: Ceco, Medallion Maxim or approved equal. D. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1. Smoke- and Draft -Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy -Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Face welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre - consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES. 08 11 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. G. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated. H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke-, developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000"Glazing." J. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FABRICATION Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 n C-1 n fl n r- n r Li Li r r - u L! 7 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. c. Post -installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow - metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of.interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at. factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door . hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM- HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center g. 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post -installed expansion anchors. . 3'. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a Iiner90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. c. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Factory -Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 8 n j r -- f -- u r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1. Solid -core doors with plastic -laminate faces. 2. Factory fitting .flush doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifications. 1. Product Data: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. . 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 n n r n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods,'Inc. 2. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 3. Oregon Door. 4. Vancouver Door Company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that comply with the testing and product requirementsof the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. D. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Extra Heavy Duty: New Transportation Building Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 • TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 2.3 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED DOORS 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors at New Transportation Building: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Plastic -Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 3. Colors: To match Marshfield, DurableDoor, Color: Chocolate Pear or as indicated on drawings. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces. 5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 6. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. 2.4 FABRICATION A Factory -fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed -steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire -rated doors. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft -control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire - rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. b. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 2. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complieswith requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 5 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. This Section includes, items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Door Hardware. 2. Door silencers or mutes. C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing. 1. Division 8: Section = Steel Frames. 2. Division 8: Section - Wood Doors. 1.2 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.) A. BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware E. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated F. SDI - Steel Door Institute 1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE B. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into "Hardware Sets" with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1. Include a Cover Sheet with; a. Job Name, location, telephone number. . b. Architects name, location and telephone number. c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number. 2. Job Index information included; a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number. b Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand -book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted. c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware. f. Clarification statements or questions. g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer's technical data and instructions. C. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate' benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution. _ D. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 n fl fl J L TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 2.`. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain finalinstructions in writing. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods. C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience. D. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved -bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation. B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers' original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work. C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc. D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers' regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows: 1. Locksets: Seven (7) years. 2. Electronic or VIP Locks: One (1) year. 3. Closers: Ten (10) years, except electronic closers shall be two (2) years. 4. Exit devices: Three (3) years. 5. All other hardware: Two (2) years. 1.7 MAINTENANCE DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre -installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section. B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector. C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review District's keying standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes A Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney B. Locks, Latches & Cylinders Schlage None C. Exit Devices Von Duprin None D. Closers LCN None E. Push, Pulls & Protection Plates . Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI F. Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI G. Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI H. Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI I. Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI J. Overhead Stops Glynn -Johnson None K. Thresholds National Guard Pemko, Zero L. Seals & Bottoms National Guard Pemko, Zero DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 L -7 1 n J n 1 fl s J 1 J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.2 MATERIALS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. Hinges: Exterior out -swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non -rising pins. 1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following: a. Height: 1) Doors up to 41" wide: 4-1/2" inches. 2) Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches. b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height. 2. Furnish non -removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out -swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels. B. Extra Heavy duty Commercial Mortise Locks: Schlage "L" Series as scheduled with "03" Style Lever and "A" Style Rose. 1 Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims. Locksets shall also comply with UL10C Positive Pressure requirements 2. Lock case shall be manufactured with heavy 12 gauge steel with fully wrapped design. Lock cases with exposed edges are not acceptable. Lock case shall be multi -functional allowing transformation to a different function without opening lock case. 3. Latchbolt shall have 3A" throw and be non -handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. Solid latchbolts and / or plastic anti -friction devices are not acceptable. 4. The deadbolt, when used, shall be 1" throw stainless steel with a 3/4" internal engagement when fully extended. 5. All trim shall be through -bolted with the spring cages supporting the trim attached to the lock cases to prevent torquing. 6. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions. Exteriorlever assembly to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Interior lever assembly shall be attached by screwless shank 7. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Locks using a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable. Spindles shall be independent, designed to "break -away" at a maximum of 75psi torque. 8. Hand of lock chassis to be changeable by simply moving one screw from one side to the case to the other and pulling and reversing the Latchbolt. 9. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Locks utilizing screws and / or stamped retainers are not acceptable. C. Deadlocks: Rotating cylinder trim rings of attack -resistant design. Mounting plates and actuator shields of plated cold -rolled steel. Mounting screws of Vs" diameter steel and protected by drill -resistant ball bearings. Steel alloy deadbolt with hardened steel roller. Strike alloy deadbolt with reinforcer and two 3" long screws. ANSI A156.5, 2001 Grade 1 certified. D. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSIBHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards. 2. All internal parts shall be of cold -rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating. 3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140". 4. Compression spring engineering. 5. Non -handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions. 6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners. 7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with 3/a" throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear. 8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required. 9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement. 10. Lever Trim: "Breakaway" design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of .130" thickness, match lockset lever design. 11. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required. 12. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 1008.1.9 and shall be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor surface. The unlatching force shallnot exceed 15 lbs. applied in the direction of travel. E. Closers: LCN as scheduled: Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc. 1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat- treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSIBHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. 2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications. 3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one-piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16" steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold- opeb arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation, high strength and long life. 4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw valve. 5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees. 6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. 7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed. 8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Door shall take at least 3 seconds to move from an open position of 70 degrees to a point of 3 inches from the latch jamb. 9. Provide sex -bolted or through bolt mounting for all door closers. F. Flush Bolts & Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures. 1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled. 2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts. G. Door Stops: 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type. 2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 1133B.8.6). 3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non -plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field -changeable hold -open, friction and stop -only. functions. H. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges. Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors. 1. Fire -rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified, Category "J" listed seals complying'with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 Standards. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements. 2. Fire -rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Category "G" furnish fire -labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required. 3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide Category "H" listed seals complying with NFPA 105 for use on "S" labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies. J. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at all exterior out -swing doors. K. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire -resistive -rated door assemblies. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.3 KEYING 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center or a local authorized commercial dealer. B. Furnish mechanical keys as follows: 1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code. 2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change, key code. 3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set. 4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set. 5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders. 6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination. 2.4 FINISHES A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted. B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630) unless otherwise noted.. C. Door closers shall be powder -coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood. B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full -thread type. C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish. D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry. E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head. F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work. G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI. B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute. Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF. • D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber sealant. G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost. H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware. I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation. J. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re -adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. 3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Conform to ADAAG and the drawings for access -compliant positioning requirements for the disabled. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that hardware and it's installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.6 SCHEDULE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE A. The items listed in following schedule shall conform to requirements of foregoing specifications. B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door. Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.) IVE = Ives LCN SCE SCH VON ZER = LCN Schlage Electronics Schlage Lock Company Von Duprin = Zero Intern'l Hardware Group No. 02 For use on mark/door #(s): 106, 109 Hinges, Pivots, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust ProofStrikes, Push. Pull 8,z Kick Plates, Door Stops & Silencers Door Closers Electronic Door Components Locks, Latches & Cylinders Exit Devices Threshold, Gasketing Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: (fit Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB 1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 03L 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 3 EA SILENCER , SR64 Finish 652 626 626 GRY Mfr IVE SCH IVE IVE Operational Description: Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is locked. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress. Hardware Group No. 04 For use on mark/door #(s): 102, 103 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: (�yt Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050P 03L 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 3 EA SILENCER SR64 Finish 652 626 Mfr IVE SCH 626 IVE GRY IVE Operational Description: Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is made inoperative by key Outside or by turning inside thumb -turn. When outside is locked, latchbolt is retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever remains locked until thumb -turn is returned to vertical or unlocked by key. DOOR HARDWARE . 08 71 00 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building END OF SECTION 08 71 00 PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12 frt a C C D D 0 D 0 D C 0 C rn 7 J L TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ,J A. Section includes: f n J u ri 4 L. 1 Glass for doors. 2 Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters per ASTM C 1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lies of an insulating -glass unit. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary_bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.4 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each type of. product. 1. Product Data: For field -applied glazing sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12 -inch lengths. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating -glass units with sputter -coated, low -E coatings. B. Product Certificates: For glass. C. Product Test Reports: For insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating -Glass Units with Sputter -Coated, Low -E Coatings: A qualified insulating -glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated -glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. . Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 J n 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. b. Hartung Glass Industries. c. Viracon, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications forglazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 2. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North . American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 r -i TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. C. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation: 1. Construction: Laminate glass to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant . manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2 Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable. for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Field -applied sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 4. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 1 LJ n n u n 1, TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers .of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. G Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. H. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets atcorners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8 '—1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT '—i AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Lj Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING u 7 1 J Li n G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed -stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 08 80 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center GLAZING END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10 Li L n 1 r 1 Li TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: from ICC -ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load -bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre - consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply,with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1. Steel Studs and Runners: 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings D. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth .of studs. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 -inch (1.34 -mm) minimum base -metal thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068 -inch- (1.72 -mm-) thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm). H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Hat shaped. I. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053 -inch (1.34 -mm) uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges. J. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or non -slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- (1.21 -mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers' and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 fl �I r-, CJ n n fl n u LJ n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building • 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. 2. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.053 -inch (1.34 -mm) uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Hat shaped. G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building controland expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Generally, indicate stud spacings on Drawings and delete "Single -Layer Application," "Multilayer Application," and "Tile Backing Panels" subparagraphs below. ASTM C 754 includes tabulations of maximum framing spacing based on thickness and orientation of gypsum board panels and deflection and lateral loading. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 ri n J• n r L. n J n Li TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING C. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. E. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install' to maintain continuity of fire -resistance - rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. F. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS . Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter -splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4 Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck (stet). 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically .join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 n ni �1 7 n L 7 J 7.] �1 J 0 n n n n J 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco). Patch and repair. 1.02 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. - Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. E - Samples for Verification: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified, 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each substrate and finish texture indicated for cement plastering, including accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3.. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. . PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure. plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3 Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. PART 2- PRODUCTS - 2.01 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold -rolled carbon -steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 1. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Self -furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. B. Paper Backing: (2) layers FS UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor -permeable paper. 1. Provide paper -backed lath at exterior locations. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 3. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc steel. a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc; square -edged style; with expanded flanges. 5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc; one -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. _ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 2 n f n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. 2.04 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 1. Color for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Architect's sample. D. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Factory -mixed acrylic -emulsion coating systems formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic -based finishes: 1. Match Acrylic Finish on adjacent wall 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Match existing building color and finish. 2.05 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Mixes: PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. D. Factory -Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: For acrylic -based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Match existing finish texture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. ' Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.03 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install diamond -mesh lath. 3.04 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners: 1. Install cornerbead at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. b. Horizontal and Other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 2 At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 -feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 4 LJ n fl n J n 7 1 n n .TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.05 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10 -foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. 4. Furr out as required to match existing adjacent finish. B. Walls; Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three -coat plasterwork with 3/4 -inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match existing adjacent or Architect's sample. D. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING . 09 24 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 6 v J LJ n J f n j n n LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long length for eachtrim accessory indicated. , 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected agairist weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according .to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. • STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by. an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre -consumer recycled content not less than 10 percent.. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: USG Corporation, Pabco, Georgia Pacific, CertainTeed Corporation, American Gypsum, or approved equal. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Typical Walls: install at all interior walls unless noted 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 1/2" type "x" for 104/105. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2: Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 1 J J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD c. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. rt 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS ^! A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 7 B. Joint Tape: n 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. ! 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. J 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. J 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. J 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation .Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. ^? 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre - consumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 09 29.00 GYPSUM BOARD A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 cJ n L r �1 J • tJ r 7 J 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Use unless indicated on drawings. 3. Abuse -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: In restrooms, kitchens, and locker rooms. 5. Glass -Mat Interior Type: Showers and wet areas. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels as required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. U -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. cJ tJ 3.6 PROTECTION A Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. 7 B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 0 n v J r1 tJ 7 L 11 n J J j :31 J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Concealed suspension systems. 3. 'Direct attachment of tiles. 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre -consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For ceiling systems, adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 -inches -in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension -System Members: 6 -inch -long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6 -inch -long Samples of each type and color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension -system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC -ES. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension -System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT "? AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. C. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's, standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES (ACT -1) A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following to match existing adjacent: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Cortega 2. CertainTeed Corporation., Baroque 3. USG Corporation., Aspen B. Color: Match existing adjacent. C. LR: Not less than 0.80. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123-3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS D. NRC: Not less than 0.55. E. CAC: Not less than 40. F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square, kerfed and rabbeted; tongue and grooyed; or butt. G. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. H. Recycled Content: 40% I. Modular Size: Match existing adjacent. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135 -inch- diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs' not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04 -inch -thick, galvanized -steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch -diameter bolts. F. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces. G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles in-place. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Corporation. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 4 J n j n 7 r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS B: Direct -Hung, Double -Web, Fire -Rated Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold -rolled steel sheet, pre -painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G30 coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. Access: Upward and, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 48 inches. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Steel furring channels sized per ceiling manufacturer requirements C. Staples: 5/16 -inch -long, divergent -point staples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet -placed substrates such as cast -in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT. AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. a. Slope ceiling with structure where indicated. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire -resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter -splaying, or other equallyeffective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. '6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or post -installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension -system flanges into kerfed edges so tile -to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material. 1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf -type, spring -steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire - resistance -rated assembly. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIRECTLY ATTACHED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. Install metal furring channels perpendicular to joints spaced as recommended by ceiling tile manufacturer. 1. Attach ceiling tiles to furring channels as recommended by tile manufacturer/ B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 8 fl J 1 J -i tJ 7 LI J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Resilient base 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES A. Product Data: For each type and color of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Manufacturer Data indicating low emitting materials and adhesives for schools 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and packaged with protective covering. Identify with labels describing contents. Furnish 2% linear feet of each type and color. 1.4 DELIVERY, .STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. B. Low emitting materials and adhesives. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less 2.2 TRANSITION STRIPS A. 'Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the. Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Approved Equal. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Roppe. B. Johnsonite Adaptor strips: Carpet to tile, VCT to carpet, and VCT to tile. 1. Type A, C, and D as required. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions. Adhesives shall have VOC content of 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of , resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Maintain minimum dimension of 24 inches between joints. D. Miter internal corners. At external corners, "V" cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends use pre -molded units. E Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. F. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. G. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 2 r 7-1 9 9 0 0 0 Q D 9 0 u 0 C a 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1- - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes vinyl sheet flooring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 09 65 20 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. C. Samples: For• each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 -by -9 -inch (150 -by -230 -mm) sections. D. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg. C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store rolls upright. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 20 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS 09 65 20 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following time periods:. 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation .and until. Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation. n D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation. fl E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. rt PART 2 - PRODUCTS 7 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS r-; A Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. n B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore E certification. C. Low -Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using 1 Environmental Chambers." 2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOORING 1 A. MRF: Armstrong. Style: Timekeepers call. Color: Sand Dune Run #B6361 B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1913. C. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm). D. Wearing Surface: Smooth. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 20 - 2 -TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 ' Technology & Maintenance Service Center E. Sheet Width: 12 Feet. F. Seamless -Installation Method: Chemically bonded. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 09 65 20 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided'or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Seamless -Installation Accessories: 1. Chemical -Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams. a. Bonding compound shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. b. Bonding compound shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Methodfor the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 20 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 3.2 PREPARATION 09 65 20 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.- 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring. B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low -traffic areas.. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 20 - 4 n r-, LJ EJ n fl j r fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 65 20 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface. imperfections. Seamless Installation: 1. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical -bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096520 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 20 - 5 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 09 68 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center CARPET District Administration Building SECTION 096800 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Carpet patching 1.2 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For carpet following, including installation recommendations. B. Samples: For each product required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, list experience with patching and repairing carpet B. Product Test Reports: For carpet, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Master II certification level. B. Mockup: Install mockup to demonstrate aesthetics and quality standards for installation. .1. Install test patch in location as selected by. Architect. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups will become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. CARPET 09 68 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 09 68 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center CARPET District Administration Building 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. . Where partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Color and Pattern: Match existing adjacent carpet color and texture. As approved by Architect. , 1. Fiber Content: 100% solution dyed nylon, Level -loop pile. B. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum per ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 3. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Releasable, water-resistant, mildew -resistant, non -staining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Seam Adhesive: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for defects. CARPET 09 68 00 - 2 rJ fl '--1 LLJ fl n n C TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 09 68 00 Technology & Maintenance Service Center CARPET District Administration Building B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue -Down Installation." B. Install carpet patches in areas noted on plans and in areas damaged during construction. 1. Prepare carpet patch using new carpet as template. 2. Cut existing carpet as required to fit carpet patch. 3. Remove adhesive and prepare concrete slab for new carpet patch. 4. Install releasable adhesive 5. Lay down seam tape and bond edges together 6. Roll seam and weight seam to set seam tape. 7. Clean all exposed adhesive. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 09 68 00 CARPET 09 68 00 - 3 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 099113. EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D., Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Miller Paint Co. 2. Pratt & Lambert. 3. Rodda Paint Co. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL CJ n LJ A MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for usewithin each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. n EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3. B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. C. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69. 2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Exterior Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11. B. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6: MPI #119. 2.5 SOLVENT -BASED PAINTS A Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9. B.- ' Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81. C. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center PART. 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ' EXAMINATION ' 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1: Masonry (Clay and CMU): 23 percent. 2. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 3.3 APPLICATION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller (racking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services .of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology and Maintenance Service Center 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: 1. Acrylic Latex over Alkali -Resistant Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PANTING 09 91 13 - 6 n L n 4-7 j n n n Lie fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 09 91 23 IN 1ERIOR PAINTING A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 7 n L3 . Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Product Data : For paints and coatings, including printed statement of.VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 7 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. J 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 1 j :J Ly 1 n 4-3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50and95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 4. Kelly -Moore Paint Company Inc. 5. Miller Paint Co. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry -Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc -Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4. 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. B Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45. C. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING D. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Rust -Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107. B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. 2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147. 2.7 CLEAR STAIN A. Daly's, clear and non -yellowing, polyurethane, semi -gloss 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 7 J 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be .present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and.CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Verify suitability of substrates,including surface conditions and compatibility -with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Alumihum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 1 Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 5. Glu -Lam beams (from above) #2 exposed clear finish architectural grade. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 n J - n J 7 J j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfacds. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules maybe omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Not applicable 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2: If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, , Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove .spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activitiesof other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. • 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. B. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust -inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. C. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGI; #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center Wood Substrates: Including wood trim. 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex -System: 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. d. Glu -Lam beams & admin counter clear sealer and stain. E. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odorNOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odorNOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. END OF SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 • SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wall mounted sign with pin mounted letters 2. Pin mounted letters and numbers on existing sign pedestal. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.3 COORDINATION Furnish templates for placement of sign -anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Submittals: 1. Product Data: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Signage under this section is intended to include items for identification, direction, control, and information of building where installed as complete integrated system from a single manufacturer. B. ADA design requirements: 1. Signage requiring tactile graphics: a. Wall mounted signs designating permanent rooms and spaces such as, room numbers and restroom, department, office, and fire exit identifications. b. Individually applied characters are prohibited. 1. Signage not requiring tactile graphics but require compliance to other ADA requirements: All other signs providing direction to or information about function of space such as, directional signs (signs with arrow), informational signs (operating hours, policies, etc.), regulatory signs (no smoking, do not enter), and ceiling and projected wall mount signs. C. ADA performance requirements: 2. Tactile graphics signs mounting requirements: SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 2 7 j n J fl 0 u 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE a Single doors: Mount 60" to sign centerline above finish floor and on wall adjacent to latch side of door. b. Openings: Mount 60" to sign centerline above finish floor adjacent opening. c. No wall space adjacent latch side of door, opening, or double doors: Mount 60" to sign centerline above finish floor on nearest adjacent wall. 2.2 SIGNS A. BUILDING SIGN: Wall Mounted at Technology M.S.C. 1. Sign board with smooth, uniform surfaces; and pin mounted letters. a. Text: "Tukwila School District, Tech M.S.C. 2. Sign Board a. Luster Board Plywood, aluminum surfaced, laminated hardwood core. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square. c. Color: As selected by architect. d. Material: Aluminum faced sign plywood. e. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with. f. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner. g. Thickness: 1/2 inch. B. PEDESTAL SIGN 1. Pin Mounted Letters a. Height: 5 inches b. Material: clear anodized aluminum c. Stud mounted, 3/4 inch stand off. d. Text style: Helvetica 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal -Fastener Components, General: a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated. SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes. 5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work. B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Two -Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high -bond, foam -core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with. adhesive on both sides. D. Magnetic Tape: Manufacturer's standard magnetic tape with adhesive on one side. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies per requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to .greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket -mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 2.5 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommendedby aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 4 r- L j n I j 1 • TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal -Fastener Components, General: a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen -head slots unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes. B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Two -Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high -bond, foam -core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with 11 adhesive on both sides. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies per requirements indicated. .tet f • L 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in local ions concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding°and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket -mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying. a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border. surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. B. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Verify that electrical service incorrectly sized and located to accommodate signs. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 6 'TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10 14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE 3.2 INSTALLATION General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and per manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do hot protrude or obstruct per the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Paint existing pedestal with color selected by architect. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. D. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs per manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423 SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #1 10.14 23 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SIGNAGE PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center n PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. `J B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire -rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track. 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1.2 DEFINITIONS t1 A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class. B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. C. STC: Sound Transmission Class. . 1 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation sequence, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches square. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door -operating device. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale; on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets: c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke detectors. B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support - beam, mounting -hole template. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Includeseismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2. ' Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based. and their installation requirements. E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. 1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner -furnished panel facing material complies with requirements. F. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. - G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 2 1 fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Panel Finish -Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity .that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above. B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound -Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound -transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10.22 38 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 10 22 38 Technology & Maintenance Service Center OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 2. Noise -Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for sound -absorption performance according to ASTM C 423, and rated for not less than the NRC indicated. . 3. Noise -Isolation Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for 10 dB less than STC value indicated. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol. E. Fire Resistance: Provide fire -rated operable panel partition assemblies complying with NFPA 80, based on testing according to UL 10B for fire -rated door assemblies. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hufcor Inc. B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. Panel Width: Equal widths. E. STC: Not less than 47 F. Panel Weight: 10 lb/sq. ft. maximum. G. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS H. Panel Materials: 1. Recycled Content of Steel: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent by weight. 2. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness for uncoated steel. 3. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension -leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel.. 4. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use. a. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum. 5. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 6. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288. 7. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 8. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 9. Plywood: DOC PS 1; made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 10. Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Initial Closure: Flexible, resilient PVC, bulb -shaped acoustical seal. 2. Final Closure: Constant -force, lever -operated mechanical closure expanding from panel edge to create a constant -pressure acoustical seal. J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Vertical Seals: Deep -nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with continuous PVC acoustical seal. C. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous -contact, extruded -PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track. D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous -contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire -test -response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew -resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges tightly butted, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor. B. Wall Finish's: Porcelain steel marker/projection surface, white full height all exposed sides. C. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory -painted finish. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Cap -Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter -edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel and finish facing, finished as follows: 1. Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Aluminum: Finished with manufacturer's standard clear anodic finish. E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around. panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel -to -panel joints. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, �r adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory -applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory -applied, decorative, protective finish. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 6 LJ 1 J r-, u 1 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS D. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, corrosion -resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. F. Light -Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. Perform test and make adjustments before NIC testing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. NIC Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition installation(s) for testing. 2. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements. B. An operable panel partition installation will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10 22 38 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 3.4 ADJUSTING 10 22 38 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS A Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement. of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable -partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102238 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 102238-8 tJ n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers and cabinets B. Related Sections: 1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers." 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material. descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, . door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 1.5 COORDINATION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS LJ n . Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. t' 1 B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Apply decals on field -painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 3 mm thick. E. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength. F. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell -cast sheet), 1.5 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation;. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc;. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 2 L. 7. n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT 1 AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 J Technology & Maintenance Service Center j J 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;. e: Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.;. f. Moon -American;. g. Potter Roemer LLC;. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.;. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. 1. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428 -inch -thick, cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8 -inch -thick, fire -barrier. material. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. C Cabinet and Shelf Material: Steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. Rolled -Edge. Trim: 2 -1/2 -inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel. H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. I. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Break -Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. 3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect . a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center J. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint. 2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2.3 FABRICATION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and Jock for break -glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 13 - 6 C D C D C C 9 D 0 0 0 c c TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: whiteboard projection screens and projector B. Related Requirements: 1.. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front -projection screens. 2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for screen installation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front -projection screens. Include the following: 1. Drop lengths. 2. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 3. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units. 4. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes. 5. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units. 6. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units. 7. Accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface -mounted screen cases. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For front -projection screens to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front -projection screens until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.5 COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of front -projection screens with adjacent construction, including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partitions. PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 11 52 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front -projection screens from single manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen manufacturer. 1. Epson or approved equal 2.2 PROJECTORS A. General: Manufacturer's standard spring -roller -operated units, consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. B. Manufacturer and Model: Epson, Brightlink Pro 1430Wi with whiteboard projection screen 1. Mounting: Wall mounted 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Color: White 2.3 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS WITH WHITEBOARD A. General: Manufacturer's standard spring -roller -operated units, consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. 1. Manufacturer and Model: Epson V12H831000 2. Screen Mounting: Wall mounted 3. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Combined project and dry erase surface for use with WXGA projectors 5. Color: Matte white, low gloss 6. Thin bezel design allows for above board mounting of interactive touch module 7. Size: 54.6" x 86.6" x 1" B. Matte -White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface. C. Mildew -Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G 21. D. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701. E. Flame -Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84. F. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams. G. Edge Treatment: masking borders. PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 11 52 13 - 2 n u u 1 J 1 J J n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. Install front -projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions: B. Install front -projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 1. Install low -voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL -listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3. Test manually operated units to verify that screen -operating components are in optimum functioning condition. END OF SECTION 115213 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 11 52 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK PROJECTION SCREENS & PROJECTOR 11 52 13 - 4 L. LJ j j 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center PART 1 - GENERAL 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum.slats. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind. B. Product . Test Reports: For each type of horizontal louver blind, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated,. but no fewer than two units. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. HORIZONTAL. LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CACO, Inc., Window Fashions. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. Levolor Contract; a Newell Rubbermaid company. 4. Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract. B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 1. Width: 1 inch. 2. Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch. 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust -repellent, baked polyester finish. 5. . Features: Lift -Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and locate near back (outside) edge of slat to -maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or r rolled. Headrails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides. 1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ends: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Manual Lift Mechanism: Enclosed worm -gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a. Lift -Cord Lock: Top locking; stops lift cord when blind is in fully opened or fully closed positions only; equipped with ring pull not more than 4 inches long. b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift -cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. c. Tilt: Full, two -direction, positive stop or lockout limited at 60. degree angle from horizontal. d. Operator: Corrosion -resistant steel rod. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13 - 2 n LJ LJ n n j LJ LJ n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS e. Over -Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear. 2. Manual Lift -Operator and Tilt -Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Manual Lift -Operator and Tilt -Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 4. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face. D. Bottom Rail: Formed -steel or extruded -aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal -capped ends. Manufacturer's standard. E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrai1 at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. Reinforced ' vinyl and cloth tape options in "Type" Subparagraph below are available only for slats that are 1 inch wide or wider. Reinforced vinyl tape, manufacturer's standard width. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. H. Overhead Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. I. Hold -Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. J. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard. K. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head -to -sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion -resistant -coated materials. D. Lift -and -Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. E. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center - 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS F. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. G. Color -Coated Finish: Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges.. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13 - 4 Tukwila School District Auxiliary Project Package #1 Technology & Maintenance Service Center U. Tukwila e SCHOOL DISTRICT Date of Specifications: August 11, 2017 PERMIT PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME2of2 Divisions 21 - 33 6250 REGISTERED ARCH ..- / ,l,7 /ex E. Roll, da S TE OF WASHINGTON rolluda architects 105 South Main St., Suite 323 Seattle, Washington 98104 206.624.4222 tel 206.624.4226 fax www.RolludaArchitects.com CORRE�ION LTR# `I 0 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 02 2011 PERMIT CENTER TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. B. This section of the specification applies to the entire mechanical work, both interior and exterior, as specified herein after and shown on the plans. C. This Contractor is responsible for coordination with all other trades. 1.2 SCOPE A. All services to within five (5) feet of the building, shall be provided as shown on plans, and final connections to these services shall be made by the Mechanical Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Owner's representative of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the specifications or plans. B. The term "provide" means the furnishing and installing of equipment (including connections and appurtenances) complete and ready for use. C. The terms "Mechanical Contractor (MC)" and "Electrical Contractor (EC)" as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refers to those subcontractors working under the direction of the "General Contractor (GC)." 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact details and locations, nor all offsets in piping. Contractor shall provide additional fittings, offsets and extensions in piping and related mechanical insulation as required to meet the intent of the documents, and shall include these items in his bid. Contractor shall also include in his bid provisions to relocate or shift piping where conflicts exist with Structural, Architectural, or Electrical components. B. Refer to the complete set of Architectural, Structural, Electrical, and Civil Plans and Specifications for additional details of the work. Review Plans and Specifications of other trades to identify other requirements. Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner's representative immediately before ordering material or beginning work. GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.5 COORDINATION 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS A. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Structural and Electrical drawings before work is started. Consult with each of the other Contractors regarding locations and spaces required for work and lay out work to avoid interference. Maximum clearance shall be maintained for service access and maintenance of all equipment. Failure to coordinate shall be justification to require Contractor, at his own expense, to move his work to provide the necessary space for the other contractors. B. Mechanical systems have space priority as follows, listed with highest priority first: Graded Drainage Piping, then Ductwork, Drainage Vents, Hydronic Piping, Domestic Water Piping, Natural Gas Piping, and Fire Protection Piping. MC to make certain that priority access is maintained. This shall be coordinated by the GC and MC without assistance from Owner's representative, Engineer, or Architect. C. Contractor shall be responsible for his own coordination between all other trades. Development of Shop Drawings shall be a collaborative effort between the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor and all other subcontractors working on the project. Shifting of piping, ductwork and other mechanical items shall be the responsibility of the Team to maintain the intent of the documents. Submit shop drawings to the Owner's representative. D. Detail Drawings By Contractor: Whenever the Contractor's work is of sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing, or when requested by the Owner's representative, this contractor shall prepare additional detail drawings to scale 1/4" = 1' on paper same size as Contract Drawings. With these layouts, the Contractor shall coordinate this work with the work of other trades. Such detail work shall be clearly identified on the drawings as to the area to which it applies. Do not submit these drawings for approval. At completion, include a set of such drawings with each set of As -Built Drawings for Owner's record purposes. 1.6 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.7 CODES AND REFERENCES A Codes and Standards listed shall be the most current issue as adopted by the Local Jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict of codes, the most stringent code will apply. 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. Washington State Energy Code 5. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 2 n if r -n j n h LJ n n _l n 0 n 0 I n L TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.8 PERMITS AND FEES 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and construction or utility fees. Furnish final certificate to Owner showing compliance with code requirements. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Comply with requirements of General Specifications. 1.10 PRIOR APPROVALS A. Specifications have been written around equipment and material selected for this project based on quality, size, capacity, and performance required to meet building design criteria. Any equipment and/or material used in this project that is not as specified, must have prior approval from the Owner's representative. B. Request for Approval must be submitted with substitution request form included in Division 0 to Owner's representative a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to bid date. This letter shall be accompanied with complete information regarding items to be substituted. If supplier requires a reply to the request for approval, he is to send a self-addressed, stamped envelope with request. C. Those items that receive prior approval will be listed in the Mechanical Addenda. D. Supplier and/or Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that substituted material or equipment is of the same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. Any changes and costs required during construction, due to contractor's/supplier's neglect to properly select substituted equipment, shall be paid by the contractor/supplier. E. Prior approval to bid does not mean automatic final approval of material or equipment by the Owner's representative. Final approval will be given after final submittal data has been presented to Owner's representative, with complete information regarding weights, . capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. 1.11 MATERIAL AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. All material used on the project shall be new material and free from defects. This Contractor shall submit catalog data and engineering data on all equipment as specified or having received prior approval. B. Material and equipment specified is designated by various manufacturer's catalog numbers. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are also listed. Such manufacturers are exempt from the 10 - day prior approval clause of these specifications, but must submit standard submittal data for final approval as otherwise noted. GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS C. Submittal shall be arranged in numerical order, according to specification section number and item number. Submittal shall be bound in hard cover, loose-leaf binder(s). D. Submittal shall be as follows: Before ordering or installing any of the materials, this Contractor shall submit copies of complete information on the materials to be used on the project. Submittal may be electronic or in hard copy. If contractor chooses to submit printed copies, he shall provide five copies to the Owner's representative. Submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following. 1. Contractor's Cost Breakdown. 2. Complete List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. 3. Pipe, Valves and Specialties for fire protection systems. 4. Fire Sprinkling Systems. 5. Fire pumps. 6. Insulation. E. The Owner's representative will return one set, electronic or printed copy, of this submittal to the contractor showing any corrections, additions, and/or deletions. If the Contractor needs additional printed copies, he shall photocopy his approved copy of the required items. This Contractor shall resubmit those items that need to be corrected or added. 1.12 CONTRACTOR'S COST BREAKDOWN A. Mechanical Contractor shall submit, with the bound submittals, a cost breakdown of the major portions of his work, pursuant to the following outline. 1. Job organization and submittals. 2. Outside site utilities. 3. Fire protection systems. -. 1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall maintain a set of Contract Drawings at the site on which the actual installed location of piping, equipment, etc., shall be shown in a legible, neat manner. This set of plans shall show actual dimensions (including depth of bury) of underground piping from construction lines, so they can be readily found after covering. Upon completion of the project, the as -built information shall be transformed into AutoCAD version 2010 or greater. Record drawings shall be the same size as contract drawings. This set of plans shall be submitted for final approval. Drawings shall be one full size set, one half size set and on CD in PDF and .dwg format. The contractor shall be ready for review of the on-site as-builts monthly prior to submitting his billing. Failure to have drawings available for review may delay monthly billings. 1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Operate all systems through complete cycles in the presence of designated Owner's representative. Give instructions for operation, care and maintenance. All systems shall be GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS '21 00 10 - 4 CJ J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT '1 AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 9 J j 1 I J n i j 0 0 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS operated through complete operating cycles for a minimum period of 7 days in conjunction with the designated Owner's representative before acceptance. 1.15 TRAINING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall digitally record all Owner Mechanical training sessions and shall provide copies on DVDs. Training sessions shall be provided for all mechanical systems. Three copies of these DVDs shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the project. 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&Ms) A. General: Provide one preliminary bound set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals including maintenance information and parts list furnished by the manufacturer with the equipment, together with supplementary drawings where necessary, to itemize serving and maintenance points. Include the Valve Tag list(s) as posted in the Mechanical spaces. Include filter maintenance, methods of operation, seasonal requirements, manufacturer's data and warranty forms. Warranty forms are to be located in the front of the manuals as well as in each applicable section. Provide address and 24-hour phone number of the firms responsible under warranty. Items requiring service or correction during the warranty period shall be serviced within 24 - hours of notification by Owner. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies, posted on 8 1/2" x 11" sheets, with operation and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment installed. Drawings shall be accordion folded. An index shall be provided with all contents listed in an. orderly presentation according to specification section. B. Number of Copies: A preliminary set of the O&M Manuals shall be submitted for approval. After this set has been approved, two additional sets shall be prepared and the three sets shall be transmitted to the Owner's representative. C. Binding: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Copies shall be submitted in 3 -ring binders. Covers shall include the name of the Job, Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and the year of completion. The back edge of the binder shall include a label with the name of the Job, the Owner and the year completed. Each copy shall have a typewritten index and tabbed dividers between equipment categories. Binders to be no more than 80% full. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS A. Provide written certification that work has been fully completed in strict accordance with Plans and Specifications and request final inspection. B. Provide written certification that Contractor will replace materials and workmanship that prove defective for one (1) year after date of acceptance or extended warranty as listed in individual sections. GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS C. Provide written certification of inspection from the Authority Having Jurisdiction, stating that all work has been inspected, accepted, and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes. D. Provide written certification that Owner's representative has been fully instructed in the operation and function of all mechanical systems. E. Provide copies of certifications in the 0 & M Manuals. 1.18 DOCUMENTS A. Present the following documents to the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance of buildings. Final payment of the Contract will be contingent upon receiving these documents: 1. Record (as -built) drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (3 sets). 3. Final material -submittal. 4. Warranties and Extended Warranties. 5. State of Washington certification of all pressure vessels installed on the project. Affix a copy to each tank. 6. Final certificates of inspection and code compliance. 7. RPBF device tests. 8. All applicable forms required by these Specifications. 9. Provide copies of the above documents in 0 & M Manuals. 1.19 WARRANTY A. All fire sprinkling equipment and systems, including controls and all parts thereof, shall be warranted (parts and labor), for a period of one (1) year after the date of substantial completion as determined by the documentation. B. Contractor shall repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative any defective material, equipment, or poor workmanship, which may show itself during this warranty period. C. All compressors used in fire sprinkling systems shall have an additional four-year parts warranty. 1.20 MECHANICAL ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The noise criteria (NC) end resultant for each space shall be per Code as accepted by local jurisdiction. 1.21 DEMOLITION A. Complete all Demolition Work as shown on the drawings and where required to install the new work shown on the drawing and as specified herein. Demolition work shall not be started until LJ GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS the occupants have moved out. The move will be scheduled in stages and the contractor must phase out his work in stages (with advance coordination with the Owner's Representative) to cause as little disruption to the Owner's work flow as possible. B. Work To Be Removed By Owner Before Starting Work: The Owner will remove from the construction areas all equipment that is to remain the property of the Owner, but not reused or installed later as part of the work. Contractor to notify Owner prior to the need for area or building, and allow the Owner a reasonable time to accomplish removal or move as determined by the Owner's representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL A. Owner's representative's review of submittals is for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Marking or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project Plans and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and assembly and for safe performance of his work. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Complete all demolition, wrecking, and removal of work necessary for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and/or as specified. All mechanical materials designated for removal shall be removed from site and disposed of legally. The Owner shall be offered the right of first refusal for demolished mechanical equipment and components. Loading and disposal as described here shall be at no expense to the Owner. Care shall be taken in making openings in walls and roofs as not to damage any of the existing walls, floors and roofs. Where holes are left from removal of mechanical equipment this Contractor shall be responsible for patching same to match the surrounding finishes unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Debris: Allow no debris to accumulate at, or in buildings, on grounds, streets, and/or walks. Haul away from site as soon as removed. Allow no debris to remain in the building and/or outside the building overnight. Legally dispose of at Contractor's expense. C. Interior Dust Control: Provide dust tight partition around area to be cut and as required to prevent dust from entering the ventilation system. Equip partition with adequate access doors that can be closed dust tight while cutting work is in progress. Remove dust tight partitions when no longer required. D. Building Protection: Protect the inside of the building from foul weather by covering wall and roof openings. GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21 00 10 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 21 00 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS E. Asbestos Materials: Notify the Owner's representative if the presence of asbestos is suspected. Immediately stop work in that area. F. Refrigeration Recovery: The recovery of all refrigerant from existing equipment shall conform to accepted industry standards and methods and shall be in compliance with all applicable regulations. Refrigerant shall not be vented to atmosphere. G Structural Members: Check with, and gain approval from, the Owner's representative prior to cutting or altering structural members. END OF SECTION 21 00 12 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 21.00 10 - 8 fl n ti n fl J fl u 1 rl J LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. B. This section of the specification applies, to the entire mechanical work, both interiorand exterior, as specified herein after and shown on the plans. C This Contractor is responsible, for coordination with all other trades. 1.2 SCOPE A. All services to within five (5) feet of the building shall be provided as shown on plans, and final connections to these services shall be made by the Mechanical Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Owner's representative of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the specifications or plans. B. _ The term "provide" means the furnishing and installing of equipment (including connections and appurtenances) complete and ready for use. C. The terms "Mechanical Contractor (MC)" and. "Electrical Contractor (EC)" as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refer to those subcontractors working under the direction of the "General Contractor (GC)." 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact details and locations, nor all offsets in piping. Contractor shall provide additional fittings, offsets and extensions in piping and related mechanical insulation as required to meet the intent of the documents and shall include these items in his bid. Contractor shall also include in his bid provisions to relocate or shift piping where conflicts exist with Structural, Architectural or Electrical. B. Refer to the complete set of Architectural, Structural, Electrical, and Civil Plans and Specifications for additional details of the work. Review Plans and Specifications of other trades to identify other requirements. Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner's representative immediately before ordering material or beginning work. GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.5 COORDINATION 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS A. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Structural and Electrical drawings before work is started. Consult with each of the other Contractors regarding locations and spaces required for work and lay out work to avoid interference. Maximum clearance shall be maintained for service access and maintenance of all equipment. Failure to coordinate shall be justification to require Contractor, at his own expense, to move his work to provide the necessary space for the other contractors. B. Mechanical systems have space priority as follows, listed with highest priority first: Graded Drainage Piping, then Ductwork, Drainage Vents, Hydronic Piping, Domestic Water Piping, Natural Gas Piping, and Fire Protection Piping. MC to make certain that priority access is maintained. This shall be coordinated by the GC and MC without assistance from Owner's representative, Engineer, or Architect. C. Contractor shall be responsible for his own coordination between all other trades. Development of Shop Drawings shall be a collaborative effort between the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor and all other subcontractors working on the project. Shifting of piping, ductwork and other mechanical items shall be the responsibility of the Team to maintain the intent of the documents. Submit drawings to the Owner's representative. D. Detail Drawings By Contractor: Whenever the Contractor's work is of sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing, or when requested by the Owner's representative, this contractor shall prepare additional detail drawings to scale 1/4" = '1' on paper same size as Contract Drawings. With these layouts, coordinate this work with the work of other trades. Such detail work shall be clearly identified on the drawings as to the area to which it applies. Do not submit these drawings for approval. At completion, include a set of such drawings with each set of As - Built Drawings for Owner's record purposes. 1.6 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.7 CODES AND REFERENCES A. Codes and Standards listed shall be the most current issue as adopted by the Local Jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict of codes, the most stringent code will apply. 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. Washington State Energy Code 5. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.8 PERMITS AND FEES 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and construction or utility fees. Furnish final certificate to Owner showing compliance with code requirements. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Comply with requirements of General Specifications. 1.10 PRIOR APPROVALS A. Specifications have been written around equipment and material selected for this project based on quality, size, capacity, and performance required to meet building design criteria. Any equipment and/or material used in this project, that is not as specified, must have prior approval from the Owner's representative. B. Request for Approval must be submitted with substitution request form included in Division 0 to Owner's representative a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to bid date. This letter shall be accompanied with complete information regarding items to be substituted. If supplier requires a reply to the request for approval, he is to send a self-addressed, stamped envelope with request. C. Those items that receive prior approval will be listed in the Mechanical Addenda. D. Supplier, and/or Mechanical Contractor, shall be responsible for ensuring that substituted material or equipment is of the same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. Any changes and costs required during construction, due to contractor's/supplier's neglect to properly select substituted equipment, shall be paid by the contractor/supplier. E. Prior approval to bid does not mean automatic final approval of material or equipment by the Owner's representative. Final approval will be given after final submittal data has been presented to Owner's representative, with complete information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. 1.11 MATERIAL AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. All material used on the project shall be new material and free from defects. This Contractor shall submit catalog data and engineering data, on all equipment as specified or having received prior approval. All Plumbing Fixtures, Trim, Piping and Valves in contact with potable water shall be certified lead free (less than 1/4 of 1%). Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards, or be NSF -61-G certified to all requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 (health effects) and all requirements of Annex G and NSF/ANSI 372 (lead content) via third -party testing and certification. GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS C. Material and equipment specified is designated by various manufacturer's catalog numbers. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are also listed. Such manufacturers are exempt from the 10 - day prior approval clause of these specifications, but must submit standard submittal data for final approval as otherwise noted. D. Submittal shall be arranged in numerical order, according to specification section number and item number. Submittal shall be bound in hard cover, loose-leaf binder(s). E. Submittal shall be as follows: Before ordering or installing any of the materials, this Contractor shall submit copies of complete information on the materials to be used on the project. Submittal may be electronic or in hard copy. If contractor chooses to submit printed copies, he shall provide five copies to the Owner's representative. Submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following. 1. Contractor's Cost Breakdown. 2. Complete List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. 3. Pipe, Valves and Specialties for each system including storm and sanitary drainage systems, domestic water systems, plumbing systems, and all outside systems including fire protection systems. 4. All Plumbing Fixtures. 5. All pumps for Plumbing. 6.. Water Heaters. 7. Insulation. 8. Gas Systems. F. The Owner's representative will return one set, electronic or printed copy, of this submittal to. the contractor showing any corrections, additions, and/or deletions. If the Contractor needs additional printed copies, he shall photocopy his approved copy of the required items. This Contractor shall resubmit those items that need to be corrected or added. 1.12 CONTRACTOR'S COST BREAKDOWN A. Mechanical Contractor shall submit, with the bound submittals, a cost breakdown of the major portions of his work, pursuant to the following outline. 1. Job organization and submittals. 2. Outside site utilities. 3. Plumbing rough -in. 4. Plumbing fixtures. 5. Plumbing piping and insulation. 6. Plumbing specialties - compressed air, hospital gases, shop gases and shop lube. 1.13 RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall maintain a set of Contract Drawings at the site on which the actual installed location of piping, equipment, etc., shall be shown in a legible, neat manner. This set of plans shall show actual dimensions (including depth of bury) of underground piping from construction lines, so they can be readily found after covering. Upon completion of the project, the as -built information shall be transformed into AutoCAD version 2007 or greater. Record GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 4 n j n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT r"'` AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS `j drawings shall be the same size as contract drawings. This set of plans shall be submitted for final approval. Drawings shall be one full size set, one half size set and on CD in PDF and .dwg format. The contractor shall be ready for review of the on-site as-builts monthly prior to submitting his billing. Failure to have drawings available for review may delay monthly billings. 1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Operate all systems .through complete cycles in the presence of designated Owner's representative. Give instructions for operation, care and maintenance. All systems shall be operated through complete operating cycles for a minimum period of 7 days in conjunction with the designated Owner's representative before acceptance. 1.15 TRAINING a A. The Mechanical Contractor shall digitally record all Owner Mechanical training sessions and shall provide copies on DVDs. Training sessions shall be provided for all mechanical systems. Three copies of these DVDs shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the project. u 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&MS) A. General: Provide one preliminary bound set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals including maintenance information and parts list furnished by the manufacturer with the equipment, together with supplementary drawings where necessary, to itemize serving and maintenance points. Include the Valve Tag list(s) as posted in the Mechanical spaces. Include filter maintenance, methods of operation, seasonal requirements, manufacturer's data and warranty forms. Warranty forms are to be located in the front of the manuals as well as in each applicable section. Provide address and 24-hour phone number of the firms responsible under warranty. Items requiring service or correction during the warranty period shall be serviced within 24 - hours of notification by Owner. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies, posted on 8 1/2" x 11" sheets, with operation and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment installed. Drawings shall be accordion folded. An index shall be provided with all contents listed in an orderly presentation according to specification section. B. Number of Copies: A preliminary set of the O&M Manuals shall be submitted for approval. After this set has been approved, two additional sets shall be prepared and the three sets shall be transmitted to the Owner's representative. C. Binding: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Copies shall be submitted in 3 -ring binders. Covers shall include the name of the Job, Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and the year of completion. The back edge of the binder shall include a label with the name of the Job, the Owner and the year completed. Each copy shall have a typewritten index and tabbed dividers between equipment categories. Binders are to be no more than 80% full; binders that are over 80% full will be sent back for dividing into additional binders. GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide written certification that work has been fully completed in strict accordance with Plans and Specifications and request final inspection. Provide written certification that Contractor will replace materials and workmanship that prove defective for one (1) year after date of acceptance or extended warranty as listed in individual sections. C. Provide written certification of inspection from the Authority Having Jurisdiction, stating that all work has been inspected, accepted, and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes. D. Provide written certification that Owner's representative has been fully instructed in the operation and function of all mechanical systems. E. Provide copies of certifications in the 0 & M Manuals. 1.18 DOCUMENTS A. Present the following documents to the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance of buildings. Final payment of the Contract will be contingent upon receiving these documents: 1. Record (as -built) drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (3 sets). 3. Final material submittal. 4. Warranties and Extended Warranties. 5. Approved Final Balancing logs. (Air and Hydronic Systems) (3 sets). 6. State of Washington certification of all pressure vessels installed on the project. Affix a copy to each tank. 7. Final certificates of inspection and code compliance. 8. Domestic water test results. 9. RPBF device tests. 10. All applicable forms required by these specifications. 11. Provide copies of the above documents in 0 & M Manuals. 1.19 WARRANTY A. All Plumbing systems, and all parts thereof, shall be warranted (parts and labor), for a period of one (1) year after the date of substantial completion as determined by the documentation. B. Contractor shall repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative, any defective material, equipment, or poor workmanship which may show itself during this warranty period. C. Test and Balance shall be warranted for two (2) years total, from date of final acceptance. GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 6 r1 E. 0 0 ti4 j r n n 0 n j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 1.20 MECHANICAL ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The noise criteria (NC) end resultant for each space shall be per Code, as accepted by Local Jurisdiction. 1.21 DEMOLITION A. Complete all Demolition Work as shown on the drawings and where required to install the new work shown on the drawing and as specified herein. Demolition work shall not be started until the occupants have moved out. The move will be scheduled in stages and the contractor must phase out his work in stages (with advance coordination with the Owner's Representative) to cause as little disruption to the Owner's work flow as possible. B. Work To Be Removed By Owner Before Starting Work: The Owner will remove from the construction areas all equipment that is to remain the property of the Owner, but not reused or installed later as part of the work. Contractor to notify Owner prior to the need for area or building, and allow the Owner a reasonable time to accomplish removal or move as determined by the Owner's representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL Owner's representative's review of submittals is for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Marking or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project Plans and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and assembly and for safe performance of his work. 3.2 DEMOLITION Complete all demolition, wrecking, and removal of work necessary for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and/or as specified. All mechanical materials designated for removal shall be removed from site and disposed of legally. The Owner shall be offered the right of first refusal for demolished mechanical equipment and components. Loading and disposal as described here shall be at no expense to the Owner. Care shall be taken in making openings in walls and roofs as not to damage any of the existing walls, floors and roofs. Where holes are left from removal of mechanical equipment this Contractor shall be responsible for patching same to match the surrounding finishes unless otherwise shown or specified. GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10. - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS B. Debris: Allow no debris to accumulate at, or in buildings, on grounds, streets, and/or walks. Haul away from site as soon as removed. Allow no debris to remain in the building and/or outside the building overnight. Legally dispose of at Contractor's expense. C. Interior Dust Control: Provide dust tight partition around area to be cut and as required to prevent dust from entering the ventilation system. Equip partition with adequate access doors that can be closed dust tight while cutting work is in progress. Remove dust tight partitions when no longer required. D. Building Protection: Protect the inside of the building from foul weather by covering wall and roof openings. E. Asbestos Materials: Notify the Owner's representative if the presence of asbestos is suspected. Immediately stop work in that area. F. Refrigeration Recovery: The recovery of all refrigerant from existing equipment shall conform to acceptedindustry standards and methods and shall be in compliance with all applicable regulations. Refrigerant shall not be vented to atmosphere. G. Structural Members: Check with, and gain approval from, the Owner's representative prior to cutting or altering structural members. END OF SECTION 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10 - 8 fl .11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. General requirements for basic materials and methods. • 1.2 REFERENCES 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). B. "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 GENERAL A. See specific sections for this requirement. 9 2.2 PRODUCT TESTING n A. Any piece of equipment used in this project and hereinafter specified which, by its nature, requires electrical connection, such as pumps, water heaters, booster heaters, etc., must be provided with an approval label from one of the agencies hereinafter listed. B. Approval of agency must be for the total package (approval of individual components not i--• acceptable). All labels must be located outside of equipment and shall be visible to inspector. Comply with all requirements of RCW 19.28.010 and NEC Sections 90-7 and 110-3 (1993). C. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor or the equipment supplier to meet the requirements of this section. Any agency costs to provide appropriate label for a piece of equipment must be included in this bid. Failure by Mechanical Contractor or supplier to obtain approval labels prior to bid shall be sufficient cause for the Mechanical Contractor/supplier to obtain all such labels at no additional cost to Owner. The following is a list of approval testing laboratories: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., www.ul.com 2. Canadian Standards Association, www.csagroup.org C 3. American Gas Association, www.aga.org 4. Factory Mutual Systems, www.fmglobal.com 5. MET Electrical Testing, www.metlabs.com 6. Intertek Testing, www.intertek.com BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.3 PRESSURE VESSELS A At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide State of Washington Certification of all pressure vessels installed on the project. Affix certification on the vessels and provide a copy in the O&M Manual.. 2.4 DAMAGED OR REJECTED MATERIALS A. Remove from the site immediately. 2.5 STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS A. All starters shall be provided and installed by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. B. All disconnects shall be provided and installed by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. VFDs shall be provided by the Control Contractor, installed by the Electrical Contractor, and controlled by the Control Contractor, unless otherwise noted. D. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate VFDs based on direction provided in the contract specification. All VFDs are to be of a single manufacture and/or provided by a specific contractor. The MC shall be responsible for compliance with the specification, or shall correct problems at his expense. E. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and provide voltage, phase, horsepower, and amperage for all of the mechanical equipment being provided, based on approved submittals and the actual equipment being provided. F. Starters, disconnects, and VFDs shall be provided in a timely manner, so as to not delay the Electrical Contractor's work. 2.6 FIRE INTEGRITY - PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers 1. 3M Fire Products 2. Holdrite 3. Approved equal B. The penetration sealing systems shall be provided with F -Rating and/or T -Rating as required by IBC Section 714.3 and 714.4. Penetrations include the following: 1. Through -penetration firestopping in fire -rated construction. 2. Construction -gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire- rated construction. 3. Construction -gap firestopping occurring within fire -walls, floor or floor -ceiling assemblies. 4. Construction -gap firestopping in smoke partitions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 2200 20 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT - AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 5. Through -penetration smoke stopping in smoke partitions. 6. Construction -gap smoke stopping in smoke partitions. 7. All and piping penetrating mechanical spaces, mechanical mezzanines, mechanical lofts, mechanical boiler rooms, or other mechanical spaces, shall be fire caulked, even if the walls are not rated. Visible piping penetrations shall be covered by split chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates. C. All products shall be listed in Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory. 1. Through -penetration firestop devices (XHCR). 2. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV). 3. Through -penetration firestop systems (XHEZ). 4. Fill, void or cavity material (XHHW). D. All material shall be tested per American Society for Testing and Material Standards, ASTM E814: Standard test method for fire tests of through -penetration firestops. E. Firestopping for penetrations and voids shall be UL -tested systems. 2.7 HANGERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell 2. Michigan Hanger 3. Tolco 4. PHD- 5. Anvil 6. Holdrite 7. Approved equal B. Provide all anchors, hangers and all supports for piping and equipment included in contract. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard, commercially -accepted pipe hangers and accessories. D. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of ASME B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping , and Manufacturers Standardization Society Documents MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69. 2.8 INSERTS AT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Holdrite 2. Buckaroos 3. Cooper 4. Metro Supply Company 5. Value Engineered Products, Inc. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 6. Hydra-Zorb Klo-Shure 7 -series or 8 -series strut -mount and Clevis 7. Approved equal B. Insulated pipe inserts shall be provided at hanger, support, anchor, and guide locations on piping requiring insulation. The insert is to consist of either hydrous calcium silicateor polyisocyanurate foam insulation (urethane) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe with a 360 -degree PVC (1/16" thick) or galvanized steel jacket (20 gauge minimum). Inserts are to be installed on piping during piping installation, by the Piping Contractor. Provide continuous insulation vapor barrier. Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic. C. For elastomeric insulation, provide Hydra-Zorb Klo-Shure 7 -series 8 -series strut -mount or Clevis Hanger Insulation Couplings or approved equal. D. Insulation and covering shall meet the flame spread index and smoke developed index as noted in the International Building Code. E. Insert thickness shall match Code -required insulation thickness as a minimum. F. Provide pipe covering protection saddle for piping on rollers; Anvil figure 160 through 166A or approved equal. Inserts for piping in plenums shall have appropriate flame/smoke spread rating. 2.9 SUPPORT FOR ROOF -MOUNTED PIPING A. Manufacturers 1. B1ox 2. Dura-blok 3. Mifab 4. Approved equal B. For piping run across roof areas, provide the following support system, detail the type and locations of the different configurations required, and submit for approval prior to starting work: C. Mount on roof per manufacturer's recommendation; do not penetrate the roofing material. Receive approval from the roofing contractor before gluing down bases. Support bases are to be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Do not exceed support assembly weight limits or that of the roof. Coordinate with the Architect and GC prior to installing the specified system. E. Secure piping to the support system. 2.10 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Minimum efficiencies of electric motors shall comply with the Washington State Energy Code. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 4 fl CJ n tJ 0 LJ • TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B. For VFD applications, provide motors rated for VFD (inverter ready) service only. 2.11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Milcor 3. Mifab 4. Approved equal. B. 16 gauge steel door and frame with concealed hinge and cylinder lock. Provide matching latches/locks keyed the same for multiple panels in a project. When "B" dimension is 24" or more, provide additional latches at the top and bottom of door. Provide finish and material as noted in Part 3 — Execution. 2.12 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell 2. Kinsdorf 3. Elcen 4. Approved equal. B. Inserts in concrete for the suspension of piping and equipment shall be provided by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Inserts in "poured -in-place" concrete shall be Grinnell 282 galvanized, or approved equal. 2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries 3. Amber -Booth 4. I.S.A.T. 5. Flexicraft 6. Twin City Hose 7. Approved equal. B. General 1. If equipment is internally isolated by the manufacturer, internal isolation (base and isolator) shall be equivalent to the scheduled base and isolator and the isolator shall meet the scheduled spring static deflection. 2. Size anchoring bolts to withstand lateral seismic shear and isolate bolts from direct contact with structure using bolt isolation washer and bushing. 3. Bases specified in the schedule can be supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment if they meet the specification given herein. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 4. Electrical connections shall be made with floppy length of flexible cable. 5. Piping in connected to vibrating equipment shall be supported from resilient ceiling hangers or from floor mounted resilient supports. C. Pipe Isolation - General 1. Hung Type Isolators: Double -Deflection Neoprene Hanger to 4", Deflection - 30 degree Swing Spring and Double Deflection Neoprene Hanger - 6" and larger. 2. Isolator Deflection: 1/4" to 4", 1" - 6" and larger. 3. Motion Restraint Snubber: seismic restraint cable, rod clamp for standard 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" unistrut, and clevis cross brace. D. Piping not requiring sway bracing is as follows: 1. Piping in mechanical spaces less than 1". 2. All other piping less than 2-1/2". 3. Piping suspended by hangers 12" or less in length measured from the top of the pipe to bottom of hanger support where the hanger is attached. E. Pumps (Up to 7.5 HP) 1. Base Type: Integral structural steel base. Structural steel support members with welded -- on isolator support brackets and pre -located and drilled anchor bolt holes, supplied by the equipment manufacturer with the equipment. Grout for leveling and bolt directly to floor. 2. Flex Connector: Flexible Pipe Connection. 3. Provide seismic restraint cable for inline pumps. 2.14 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Where non-metallic piping is buried, provide detectable aluminum foil plastic -backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3" minimum width, color -coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "Caution: Buried Water Piping Below" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYING OUT WORK A. Locate all general reference points as established by the General Contractor and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, grading for utilities and other work executed under the Contract. Exercise proper precautions to verify figures shown on drawings before laying out work, and be responsible for any errors resulting from failure to exercise such precaution. The coordination of the utility installation with the final site grading and elevation by the General Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Locate existing utility lines which will be affected by the BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 6 fl (T 9 J n n r7 • n I I j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS building location before any footing work begins. Report conflicts with the Plans to the Owner's representative for adjustment before proceeding with the work. Failure to follow this instruction will result in the Contractor being required to alter his work at his own expense. r 3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK {� A. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specification shall conform to all applicable portions of the Electrical section of the Specifications, and shall conform to all n applicable Codes. l j 3.3 WORKMANSHIP cl Furnish and install all equipment for a neat and finished appearance. If, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, any portion of the work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner, or has been left in a rough, unfinished manner, Contractor will be required to remove and reinstall the equipment, and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's representative, without any increase in cost to the Owner. 3.4 EXCAVATION - GENERAL j A. Perform all necessary excavation, shoring and backfilling required for the proper installation of work inside the buildings and premises, or outside as may be necessary. Slope sides of excavation to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Sewer trenches shall be excavated to the grade with the bottom rounded to the outside of the sewer piping. Bell holes shall be hand excavated to ensure that piping rests for its entire length upon the bottom of the trench. B. Excess excavation shall be backfilled with gravel or sand and mechanically compacted to give full support to the piping. In case of sewer lines in rock excavation, the excavation shall be made at least 6" deeper than required and backfilled with sand to outside invert grades to provide cushion. No underground lines shall be covered until the installation has been approved by the Owner's representative and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. All backfill shall be thoroughly compacted. C. No cinders shall be used for backfilling where steel, iron or copper piping is used. All trenches near or under footings shall be cut only after approval of the Owner's representative, and all backfilling of such trenches shall be according to his direction. D. All items of grading which will in any manner affect the bearing capacity of the soil foundations upon which will be placed floor slabs, walls, column footings or pipe -beds shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. All soil foundation areas which will in any manner support any of the above -stated construction will be compacted by the use of mechanical tampers to at least 95% of the maximum density of the soil foundations as determined by the compaction control test, in accordance with the "Method of test for Moisture BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Density Relations of Soils, ASTM Designation D1557." The moisture control at the time of compaction shall be uniform throughout the area and shall not vary more than 5% above or below the optimum moisture content as determined by the above described " Compaction Control Test." Place fill in 8" loose layers, each layer compacted. E. Division 31, (31 23 16 - Excavation, 31 23 23 Fill, 31 26 16.13 Trenching), shall provide Excavation, Fill and Trenching for the Mechanical Contractor, as needed to complete his work. 3.5 EXCAVATION DEWATERING A Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations, and from a flooding project site and/or surrounding area. B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. C. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions, outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collection points or run off areas. Do not use trench excavation as temporary drainage ditches. 3.6 EXCESS EXCAVATION MATERIAL 3.7 Dirt and debris from trench excavation shall be disposed of by this Contractor, as directed by the Owner's representative. 3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Lay piping in straight lines with uniform slope, leave no pockets. Care shall be taken to keep all foreign materials out of the piping during installation. Where ground water is present, provide suction pumps to keep trenches free of water, and cap ends of piping exposed to ground water when work is interrupted. B. All underground piping used for the distribution of domestic water systems and waste drainage systems located outside the building perimeter shall be buried a minimum of 36" from finish grade to top of piping. C. Piping run above the floor SHALL NOT BE LOCATED OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS OR SWITCHBOARDS, except where located above a structural ceiling, or with drain pans approved by the AHJ. This piping includes, butis not limited to, waste and vent and domestic water lines. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS D. All piping SHALL BE ROUTED AROUND Elevator Equipment Rooms unless placed above a structural ceiling. Piping may serve the room, but may not pass through it. Follow all codes applicable to these areas. E. Isolation Valves: 1. Provide isolation valves on inlets and outlets of all major pieces of equipment, to facilitate serving and removal of such equipment without the necessity of draining the associated system. Provide whether or not shown on Plans. 2. Provide isolation ball or butterfly valves with positive shutoff for all hot water, cold water and hot water recirculation piping serving restrooms. 3. Provide isolation ball or butterfly valves at all branches off the mains. 4. Isolation valves shall be located above T -Bar ceiling where possible. 5. Provide access panels to isolation valves located above hard ceilings. F. Do not solder within 12" of valves, flanges, etc., manufactured from any bismuth alloy. 3.9 OPENINGS IN PIPING A. Keep all openings covered tightly with plastic during the work. 3.10 PIPE SLEEVES A. General: Provide pipe sleeves for piping passing through foundations, walls, floors, partitions, and roof to allow piping to pass freely through. B. Foundation Walls: Where piping passes through walls below finished grade, but does not enter the building spaces, the sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Provide a modular seal between the sleeve and the piping. C. Building Walls (Below Grade) and Floor Slabs: Where piping passes through building walls below grade, and floor slabs on grade or below grade, the sleeves shall extend a minimum of 1" inside the building wall or above the finished floor level, and shall be made watertight and gas tight by the appropriate modular seal. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel_pipe. If the sleeve and modular seal are subject to trapping water on the top side, pack with water resistant foam and caulk with flexible caulking or grout. D. Building Walls and Floor Slabs (Above Grade) - New Construction: Where domestic hot and cold water and hot water circulation piping passes through concrete walls or floors within the building, the sleeves shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the pressure and concrete pouring operation without deforming or rupturing. Sheet metal ductwork with end slit and formed into flanges is not acceptable; Sleeves shall extend 1" above the finished floor. Sleeves in walls shall be flush on both sides. E. Building Walls (Above Grade) - Existing Construction: Where domestic hot water and hot water circulation piping passes through concrete or masonry walls, provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves. When piping passing through is insulated, the sleeve shall be large enough to permit the covering to pass through. Where the wall is a fire separation, the opening between BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING - 22 00 20 - TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS the sleeve and insulation shall be sealed with intumescent material; see Paragraph "Fire Integrity" in this section. The wall around sleeves shall be patched to original finish. F. Piping Subject to Expansion: Where piping is subject to motion due to expansion, such as domestic hot water piping, the sleeve shall be made large enough to allow free motion. When piping passing through is insulated, the sleeve shall be large enough to permit the covering to pass through. 3.11 WALL/FLOOR PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Where piping passes through any wall, floor or ceiling, it shall be fitted with chromium -plated escutcheons, with suitable set screws or other approved holding device. Where extended sleeves are necessary, the plates shall be of sufficient depth to cover the sleeves. 3.12 CHASES IN CONCRETE A. Where the installation of equipment and piping requires a chase in concrete or masonry walls, such chases shall be provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall arrange for such chases with the General Contractor, in- time to not delay the progress of the work. If the Mechanical Contractor does not cooperate, causing extra work to be done, the Mechanical Contractor shall do the work at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. 3.13 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Inserts shall be installed in forms as work progresses. B. See structural detail for hangers in pre -cast floor panels system. 3.14 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Where thermal movement in the pipe line will occur, the pipe hanger assembly must be capable of supporting the line in all operating conditions. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each hanger location, in order to prevent excessive stress in either pipe or equipment connections. B. See Specification Section 22 07 19 for Plumbing Insulation. C. Where piping is to be supported from building steel, beam clamps shall be used. Beam clamp selection shall be for the required load and the configuration of the steel at the point of attachment. Drilling holes in the steel for hanger rod will not be permitted unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Use only adjustable side beam clamps (Type 25); standard beam clamps are not acceptable. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS D. Riser Clamps (Vertical Piping): Piping shall be supported at each floor with a riser clamp or at sufficient intervals to carry the weight of the piping and its contents. Stacks shall be supported at their base by a concrete pier or by a suitable hanger located on the horizontal run, close to the riser. Riser clamp extensions shall rest on the building structure where possible; auxiliary steel supports shall be provided where it is impractical to rest directly on the building structure. E. Angle Clips: Where piping is to be supported from building wood structure, angle clips shall be used with lag bolts sized to support the load in shear. Any attachment to wooden structural members shall be subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer. F. Hanger Rods: Hanger rod size shall be selected on the basis of loading from the following table: 3/8" 610# 1/2" 1,130# 5/8" 1,810# 3/4" 2,710# 7/8" 3,770# 1"' 4,960# 1-1/8" 6,230# 1-1/4" 8,000# 1-1/2" 11,630# 1-3/4" 15,700# 2" 20,700# 2-1/4" 27,200# G. Hangers shall be subject to tensile loading only. Where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, use suitable linkage in hanger rod to permit swing. DO NOT BEND RODS. H. All rods shall be electro -plated to prevent corrosion. I. All rods shall be double -nutted, on both ends if applicable, and excess rod on the bottom shall be cut flush and ground for safety. J. Hanger Spacing: The maximum allowable spacing for pipe hangers shall be in accordance with the following. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings, etc., occur, closer spacing will be necessary and shall be based on the weight supported and recommended loads for the hanger components. 1. Spacing: a. Cast Iron Hub and Spigot - Compression Gasket: 1) Horizontally: Every other joint unless over 4', then support at each joint. See notes 1, 2, and 3. 2) Vertically: Base and each floor not to exceed 15'. b. Cast Iron Hubless - Shielded Coupling: 1) Horizontally: Every other joint, unless over 4', then support each joint. See notes 1, 2, 3, and 4. 2) Vertically: Base and each floor not to exceed 15'. c. Copper Tube and Piping - Soldered, Brazed or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 1-1/2" and smaller, 6'; 2" and larger, 10'. 2) Vertically: Each floor, not to exceed 10'. See note 5. d. Steel and Brass Piping for Water or DWV - Threaded or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 3/4" and smaller, 10'; 1" and larger, 12'. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center • District. Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2) Vertically: Every other floor, not to exceed 25'. See note 5. e. Steel, Brass and Tinned Copper Piping for Gas - Threaded or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 1/2", 6'; 3/4" and 1", 8'; 1-1/4" and larger, 10'. 2) Vertically: 1/2", 6'; 3/4" and 1", 8; 1-1/4" and larger, every floor level. f. Schedule 40 PVC and ABS DWV - Solvent Cemented. 1) Horizontally: All sizes, 4'. Allow for expansion every 30'. See notes 3 and 6. 2) Vertically: Base and each floor. Provide mid -story guides. Provide for expansion every 30'. See note 6. g. CPVC - Solvent Cemented. 1) Horizontally: 1" and smaller, 3'; 1-1/4" and larger, 4'. 2) Vertically: Base and each floor. Provide mid -story guides. See note 6. h. Notes For Above: 1) Support adjacent to joint not to exceed 18". 2) Brace at not more than 40' intervals to prevent horizontal movement. 3) Support at each horizontal branch connection. 4) Hangers shall not beplaced on the coupling. 5) Vertical water lines may be supported in accordance with recognized engineering principles with regard to expansion and contraction when first approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 6) See the appropriate IAPMO Installation Standard for expansion and other special requirements. K. Hangers - Horizontal Piping: 1. General: All hangers shall be provided with means of vertical adjustment. The following schedule shall be followed to select acceptable hangers for the type of service. a. Non -Insulated Steel Piping: 1) Adjustable Split Ring Swivel Hanger 2) Adjustable steel Band Hanger 3) Clevis Hanger b. Non -Insulated Copper Piping: 1) Copper Tubing Hanger 2) Copper Tubing Band Hanger 3) Copper Tubing Clevis Hanger c: Insulated Steel Piping: 1) Adjustable Steel Band Hangers with Shield 2) Clevis hanger with Shield. d. Insulated Copper Piping: 1) Adjustable steel Band Hanger with Shield. 2) Clevis hanger with Shield. e. Insulated pipe inserts shall be provided at hanger, support, anchor, andguide locations on piping requiring insulation. See paragraph "Inserts at Hangers and Supports" in this Section. f. Plastic, Glass, or Aluminum Piping: 1) Plastic Coated Steel Band Hanger 2) Plastic Coated Clevis Hanger 2. Roller Hangers: Provide roller hangers for all applications where thermal movement causes hanger rods to deviate more than 4 degrees from vertical, or where longitudinal BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 12 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS movement exceeds 1/2". Provide roller hangers used in conjunction with protection saddles to suit the insulation thickness. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Where piping is grouped in parallel, provide manufactured strut or trapeze hangers consisting of two steel angles bolted back to back, with space between for a hanger rod at each end. Where the length of angles is greater than 24", there shall be - three rod supports. Piping shall be able to move independently, and hanger spacing shall be dictated by the smallest pipe. 4. Brackets and Racks: Where piping is run adjacent walls or steel columns, welded steel brackets shall be used as base supports. Multiple pipe racks or trapeze hangers shall be designed and fabricated to suit conditions. 5. Vibration Control: Provide a vibration control hanger for all piping within a mechanical room and at the first three hanger locations from any motor -operated equipment. Hanger shall consist of steel frame and spring, with neoprene washers. 6. Anchors, Guides and Sliding Supports: Shall be as shown on the drawings or as necessary to prevent excessive stress in either piping or equipment. 7. Auxiliary Steel: All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, and shall receive one shop coat of primer paint. 8. Submittals: The Contractor shall submit, prior to installation, the following information and data for approval. a. Data Sheets on all cataloged items to be used. b. Sketches covering all specially designed hanger assemblies and fabrications. 3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING (NEW WORK) A. Furnish dimensions and locations of openings to other Contractors doing the work. Provide ample time to avoid delays and unnecessary labor. Cutting and patching made necessary to admit work, repair defective material or workmanship, or by neglect to anticipate proper requirements, shall be done by the General Contractor. at the expense of the Mechanical Contractor. 3.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING (EXISTING STRUCTURE) A. All necessary cutting and patching of existing structures necessary for installation of mechanical work shall be done by the Mechanical Contractor, as directed by the Owner's representative. B. All surfaces must be patched upon completion of the work to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. Final finish of all patched surfaces shall be done per Architectural finish schedule, by the General Contractor. All excavation necessary for the Mechanical Contractor shall be performed by the MC. Surfaces shall be patched as herein before specified and all backfilling shall be done in accordance with requirements of this section and other related notes in the Contract Documents. If none specified, restore to original condition. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 13 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.17 ACCESSIBILITY 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A: Locate valves, traps, damper operators, etc., so as to be easily accessible in mechanical spaces or through access panels, specified hereinafter. Otherwise, obtain Owner's representative's approval of location. B. .Any equipment requiring maintenance clearances for servicing of filters, motors, compressors, etc., shall be carefully installed to avoid servicing problems. Failure of Contractor to comply with this requirement shall be sufficient cause for Contractor to make all necessary changes at no cost to the Owner. To avoid problems with interpretation of the NEC, allow 42" for all electrical clearances. 3.18 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS n EL, n n A. Locations of panels shall be carefully selected during construction, so as not to be located behind cabinets, etc. Coordinate closely with the Architectural and Electrical Plans before `l installing panels. �J B. In areas such as janitor's room or on painted walls, etc., access panels shall be prime -coated and painted by the General Contractor; install . before surrounding surfaces have been painted. In areas such as toilet rooms, the access panels shall be stainless steel or chrome -plated. In other finished areas such as on ceilings, all access panels shall have the same type of finished surface as that of the surrounding area. C. Verify with the Owner's representative location and finish prior to ordering; failure to get the Owner's representative's approval may result in replacement of access panels at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. Minimum size of access doors is 12" x 12"; actual size depends on the specific circumstance, and panel shall be large enough to accomplish replacement or repair of the item requiring access. The Owner's representative shall have the final say on whether or not the access is of sufficient size. D. Provide access panels for all wall cleanouts on drainage piping and concealed valves for all piping. E. Doors shall have cylinder lock latches, all keyed alike. F. Provide fire -rated access doors for one-hour or two-hour rated walls and ceilings; units shall be UL labeled. 3.19 MECHANICAL ACCESSES A. Provide suitable access to all mechanical equipment requiring servicing, maintenance, replacement, or repair. In concealed spaces where access has not been provided by the Architect by means of doors, hatchways, walkways or other means, provide wall or ceiling access doors of a type suitable to the Owner's representative, sized to provide easy access to all equipment. Location of such doors shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades, to avoid conflict BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 14 CJ- InIII Li n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT —1 AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 22 00 20 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building n therewith, and such locations shall be approved by the Owner's representative prior to installation of access panels. U fl n n u r 3.20 PAINTING, TAGS, ETC. A. Field painting of all equipment, piping etc., located in and exposed in occupied spaces, shall be by the General Contractor. See Architectural painting specification. B. Identification Tags: Provide identification tags for each main shut-off and control valve throughout the building indicating the system served. Tags shall be black phenolic plastic with white engraved inscription attached with chrome chain. C. Provide valve tag lists under glass. Locate as directed by the Owner's representative. D. Each major item of Equipment shall be provided with the name of the item, i.e., Water Heater No. 1, etc., in labels of black phenolic plastic with white engraved inscription. Minimum size of lettering is 1" with a maximum of 2". Select appropriate sizes for the size of the equipment being labeled. Align labels with edges of equipment and locate labels so as to be visible. Pipe Markers: 1. Piping throughout the building shall be equal to Brady Corporation No. B-946, M.S.I. No. MS -900, meeting or exceeding ANSI A13.10-1981. Pipe markers shall consist of two. wraps of arrows in the direction of flow, color, and wording as indicated in the following schedule. Stencils shall be visibly located and spaced on maximum 20'-0" centers for long straight pipe runs. Stencils shall be located on both sides of a wall, within the first 3'. 2. Color Code Schedule: (Service, Color, Stencil) Domestic Cold Water Green C.W. Domestic Hot Water Yellow H.W. Domestic Hot Water Recirc. Yellow H.W.C. Waste and Vent Lines Yellow D.W.V. 3. Ceiling Tile Access Labels: Where it is necessary to remove ceiling tile(s) to access valves, etc., provide and install round 1/2" diameter, yellow, self-adhesive labels on the metal ceiling grid, visible near all four corners of each tile requiring removal. 3.21 TEST PLUGS AND GAUGES A. Pressure or temperature test plugs shall be installed on inlet and discharge of all pumps, coils, boilers and other hydronic equipment, even if they are not shown on Plans. B. Pressure or temperature test plugs shall be installed adjacent all temperature and/or pressure sensors, even if they are not shown on Plans. C. A minimum of six (6) compatible pressure gauges (including pressure gauge adapters) and six (6) compatible temperature gauges shall be provided. D. P&T test plugs included on other devices that serve the same purpose and that provide the same information are acceptable; duplicates are not required. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 15 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.22 FIRE INTEGRITY 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. All penetrations of fire -rated walls, ceilings, roofs or floors by piping must be protected by appropriately -rated assemblies and caulking to maintain integrity of structure. 3.23 CLEANING UP A. Comply with requirements of the General Specifications. B. Remove tags, labels, etc., from all plumbing fixtures. Clean all fixtures and trim. 3.24 CAULKING A. Caulk all openings and flash around all piping and equipment passing through roof, floor, and walls. All caulking shall be water resistant. See also Paragraph "Fire Integrity" for rated wall, ceiling, roof, or floor penetrations. B. All piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors shall be caulked. A chrome -plated escutcheon plate shall be installed at each visible pipe penetration of walls, ceilings, or floors. 3.25 OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Contractor is responsible during all periods of balancing and testing. Provide temporary utilities as required. 3.26 TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTION A. Test all work thoroughly and systematically, both during construction and after completion. Notify Owner's representative 48 hours in advance of all tests. Tests shall be maintained until approved. Tests shall be as hereinafter specified. B. The Contractor shall test the completed installation as in regular service. Any defects or imperfections that may show up are to be promptly corrected. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire system and all parts thereof for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall repair or replace any part which may show signs of failure during that time, if such failure, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, is due to imperfections in material or to improper workmanship. C. No system, whether prescribed for testing or not, shall be covered or concealed below ground, in walls, in ceiling spaces, or generally from ease of viewing, without first notifying the Owner's representative. Failure to notify the Owner's representative for inspection of concealed systems shall be cause to require this Contractor to uncover and recover such systems at no additional. cost. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 16 n n v J n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS D. A log of all tests shall be kept. The log shall note dates, time of day test started, system or portion of system tested, length of test, test results, and who witnessed the test (AHJ, Owner's representative, or GC). Contractor shall includelegible names of witnesses. Contractor to submit a copy of the contractor's test log monthly to the Owner's representative. Review the project to determine when final inspection is appropriate and advise Owner's representative. Mechanical Contractor is required to complete his work before requesting final inspection. F. See specification section of piping used for test methods or procedures used. 3.27 FINAL INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall thoroughly review and inspect the project to determine when final inspection is required, and shall so advise the Owner's representative. It shall be understood that the work is to be essentially complete. If such is not the case and more than one final inspection and one backcheck are necessary, this Contractor may be billed for the additional back checks at the then governing rate for the personnel involved. The fmal inspection punchlist shall be legibly signed on a copy of the punch list by a person responsible for the trade involved, and transmitted to the Owner's representative, before the backcheck will be scheduled. - 3.28 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. All equipment and material installed by this Contractor shall be properly protected from damage during the course of construction. Enamelware or china fixtures which are plastered around and/or over shall be protected with heavy, thoroughly -secured, wrapping paper. All fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before final inspection. Remove all pasted paper labels from plumbing fixtures. B. In attic or other spaces where piping such as domestic water lines, etc. have been installed at floor level and interfere with foot traffic, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide covers to protect these pipes. Wood or other such material will be acceptable. C. Provide and protect walking paths in mechanical spaces. Maintain 6'-8" headroom for all piping. If required clearance is not possible, obtain permission from the Owner's representative to violate the above requirement, and comply with protective measures required. 3.29 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Exercise maximum precaution to protect the building and equipment from damage of any kind, and in particular, prevent water and dust seepage into new equipment. 3.30 BALANCING WORK A. Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing as required in this section of the specification. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 17 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.31 INSTRUCTION PERIODS FOR OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Scope: Following installation of mechanical work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner's representatives. B. General Description of Instruction Periods: Each period shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures, settings, and available adjustments. C. Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration shall be given to the Owner's representative at least two weeks prior to the instruction periods, and agreement reached as to the date at which the instruction periods are to be performed. Advise Owner's representative two weeks prior to date when ready to conduct instruction and demonstrations; receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangements. l 3.32 ON-SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SAFETY MEASURES A. During its progress, all work shall be subject to observation by the Owner's representative, and of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, State and Local Inspectors. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractorwill be totally responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Owner's representative to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" in the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the State and/or Federal Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether he is or is notin compliance with State and/or Federal regulations. Furthermore, the Contractor distinctly assumes all risk or damage or injury to any persons or property wherever located resulting from any action or operation under this contract or in connection with the work. 3.33 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING UTILITIES AND SHUTDOWNS A. General: Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times, as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 18 CJ J L CJ n j r -i r C J n n j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Shutdowns: While building is in operation, utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for weekends, holidays, or at night, if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings. The actual time and date is to be coordinated with and approved by the Owner's representative at least 72 hours in advance. C. Costs: The Contractor shall include in his bid proposal all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes, or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. Liquidated Damages: The Contractor shall reconnect utilities at the end of utilities shutdown period. If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work and return the utilities service within the time limits herein specified, or any extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as part of the Contract, to pay the Owner the liquidated damages commensurate to the loss of building usage with the amount as specified in the project Supplementary General Conditions. 3.34 .DRAFT STOPS A. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor performing his trade to verify with Architectural Plans and to maintain the integrity of draft stops, whenever his work requires penetration of these areas. Patch as required to maintain integrity of draft stops. 3.35 COMMISSIONING A. This Contractor will be required to participate in the commissioning process. See Section 23 08 00 and the Commissioning Section in the Architectural Section of the specification. The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the start-up forms and be available to assist in the commissioning process. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in his bid all cost associated with his portion of the commissioning process. B. The following Mechanical Items shall be commissioned. 1. Water heaters END OF SECTION 22 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 00 20 - 19 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Valve Tags. C. Pipe Markers and Arrows. D. Equipment Identification Nameplates. E. Ceiling Tile Access Markers. F. Valve Chart Frame. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. B. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification, include matching size and colored arrows. B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves, on As-Built's. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation B. Seton Identification Products C. Marking Services, Inc. D. Approved equal. 2.2 NAMEPLATES 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height, Equipment: 1-1/2" 3. Background Color: Black. 2.3 VALVE TAGS Metal Tags: Brass with stamped blackened letters; tag size. minimum 1-1/2" diameter with smooth edges, 40 mils thick. Tag Lettering: First Line = System Abbreviation; Second Line = Consecutive Valve Numbers, staring at 01. C. Beaded Chain: #6 x 4-1/2" - Nickel Plated. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS AND ARROWS B. C. Comply with ASME A13.1. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Plastic Tape Pipe Arrows: Nominal sizes and colors to match pipe markers. 1", 2" and 4". D. Size of pipe markers: 1. 3/4" to 1-1/4" OSD of covering = 2. 1-1/2" to 2" OSD of covering 3. 2-1/2" to 6" OSD of covering 4. 8" to 10" OSD of covering 5. Over 10" OSD of covering 1/2" letters. 3/4" letters. 1-1/4" letters. 2-1/2" letters. 3-1/2" letters. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05.53 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 22 05 53 J Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING District Administration Building AND EQUIPMENT LJ 2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Description: 1. Plastic Laminate 1-1/4" letters and arrow. 2. Vinyl Markers 1-1/4" letter and arrow. 3. Color per ASME standards. '-1 j 2.6 CEILING TILE ACCESS MARKERS A. Description: Vinyl or Plastic markers, 1/2" diameter minimum with color coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow. `--J 2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red. 3. Plumbing Valves: Green. 1 2.7 VALVE CHART FRAME n JA. Description_ : Anodized aluminum frame, letter size, to hold typewritten chart under clear plastic window. PART 3 - EXECUTION ✓ 1 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION J A Install plastic nameplates and markers with corrosion -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion. B Install tags with nickel -plated chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install a circular rwrap of arrows at each end of the pipe marker. D. Install plastic tape pipe arrows completely around pipe in accordance 'with manufacturer's instructions. .-i E. Identify all mechanical equipment, air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, water treatment devices, etc., with plastic nameplates. n IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT F. Identify control panels and major control components on outside of panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify ALL valves with tags. H. Tag automatic controls, instruments, valves and relays. Key to control schematic, show on control As-Builts. Provide tags identical to valve tags. First line = abbreviation [EMCS]. Number consecutively starting at 01. Provide Valve Chart Frames and Control Device List on walls in an accessible location, and well lighted space, in each Mechanical Space. (Does not include Janitor Rooms). Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20' on center for straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. J. Identify all ductwork with plastic or vinyl nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number, system (Outside Air, Return Air, Exhaust Air, Supply Air, etc.) and area served. Locate identification as ducts leave or return to Air Handling Unit, on duct runs not to exceed 20' on center, adjacent each branch, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Do not install labels on exposed ductwork. K. Provide ceiling tile access markers to locate Mechanical Equipment, Filters, Valves, Dampers, etc., above T -bar type panel ceilings. Locate on the metal ceiling grid near all four corners of the tile requiring removal. L. Install Valve Chart Frames and Valve Lists on walls in an accessible, well -lighted location in each Mechanical Space. (Does not include Janitor Rooms). END OF SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 4 n fl LJ n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation, Rigid and Semi -Rigid B. Glass Fiber Board Insulation, Rigid C. Cellular Glass D. Jackets E. Plastic Piping Sound Lagging 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. D. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. F. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. G. ASTM. C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. H. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. I. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. J. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. K. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. • PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION L. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. M. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association. N. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. All insulation material and installations shall meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code. P. All codes and standards shall be latest version as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials, thickness for each service, and locations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING . Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR. ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50 maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. B. Provide thickness of insulation to meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code and/or local codes, whichever is more stringent. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2 • fi n LJ n II n n J j �1 i t TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A Knauf Fiberglass B. Johns Manville Corporation C. Owens Coming Corporation D. CertainTeed Corporation E. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation F Armacell International G. Approved equal 2.3 GLASS FIBER 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION A. Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible, with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume. B. Semi -Rigid Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3: Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume. C. Rigid Tank or Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 547; pre -formed fiberglass board. Density to be 3 to 5 lbs/cubic foot and "K" value shall be 0.24 at 75 degrees F. D. Usage: Domestic Water, Hydronic Piping - Interior - Medium to Low Temperature, bare tanks and uninsulated plumbing equipment. E. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper, Foil -Scrim -Kraft, (FSK), with 2" overlapped joints, and glass -fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm -inches. F. Tie Wire: 0.048" stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12" centers. G. • Vapor Barrier Coating: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -35 b. Approved equal. 2. Compatible with insulation. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building H. Insulating Mastic/Coating: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -10/11 b. Approved equal. I. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 ounces per square yard. 2. Blanket: 1.0 pounds per cubic foot density. 3. Weave: 5x5. J. Combination Coating and Lagging Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -50A HV2 b. Approved equal. K. Fibrous Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -97 b. Approved equal. 2.4 CELLULAR GLASS A. Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1. 1. 'K' value: 0.37 at 100 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F. 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch. 4. Water Absorption: 0.2% by volume, maximum. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION B. Usage: Ilydronic Piping - Exterior - High to Low Temperature. C. Flashing Compound and vapor seal: 1. Manufacturer: Childers Model CP -70 or approved equal. 2.5 JACKETS A Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.040" sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2" laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016" thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8" wide; 0.010" thick stainless steel. B. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Thickness: 0.016". 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Fittings: 0.010" thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8" wide; 0.010" thick stainless steel. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 2.6 SOUND LAGGING FOR ABOVE -GROUND PLASTIC WASTE AND VENT PIPING Manufacturers: 1. Sound Seal 2. Acoustical Solutions 3. Acoustical Surfaces, Inc. 4. Approved equal B. Model B-10 LAG/QFA sound -proofing pipe and duct wrap, one (1) pound per square foot with an STC rating of at least 27. C. All plastic waste and vent piping above ground is to be sound lagged. fl Lj PART 3 -EXECUTION 0 n 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards, have a copy on site for reference. Employ only skilled tradesmen specializing in this kind of work. C. Exposed Piping: Locate seams of insulation and cover in least visible locations. D. Insulated piping conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated piping conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding stainless steel staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent piping. Finish with PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment. Bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 1. Provide standard jackets with vapor barrier, factory -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding stainless steel staples. Maintain a continuous vapor barrier. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: Provided and installed by piping contractor at each hanger. Reference Section 22 00 20. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. J. Insulate all domestic cold water, rain leaders and roof drain bowls with a minimum of 1/2" insulation or as required by the Washington State Energy Code and or local codes, whichever is more stringent. K. Piping Exposed in Mechanical Spaces less than 10' above finished floor: Finish with aluminum jacket and aluminum fitting covers. L. Piping Exposed in Finished Spaces less than 10' above finished floor: Finish with stainless steel jacket and stainless steel fitting covers. M. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish vapor barrier. Cover with stainless steel jacket with seams located on side of horizontal piping, lapped so that water cannot enter; make watertight. N. Provide sound lagging on all above -ground plastic (ABS, PVC, CPVC, etc.) waste and vent piping. 3.3 SCHEDULES OF THICKNESSES A. Provide thicknesses of insulation to meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code and or local codes, whichever is more stringent. END OF SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 6 rl j LJ 1 j r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Piping, Buried to 5' outside of Building B. Water Piping, Above Grade C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings D. Pipe Hangers and Supports E. Gate Valves F. Globe Valves and Angle Valves G. Ball Valves H. Swing Check Valves 1.2 I. J. K. L. Water Pressure Reducing Valves Relief Valves Solenoid Valves Strainers M. Drain Valves A. B. C. 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Section 22 07.19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. Division 31 - Excavation, Fill, and Trenching. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Mechanical Engineers; (ANSI B16.18). B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING C. ASME B16.51 Copper and Copper Press -Connect Pressure Fittings D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; (ANSFASME B31.9). E. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. F. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. G. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. H. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. L AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society. J. ICC LC 1002 PMG Listing Criteria for Press Connection Fittings for Potable Water Tube and Radiant Heating Systems . MSS SP -58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. L. MSS SP -67 - Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. M. MSS SP -69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. N. MSS SP -80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. O. MSS SP -89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. P. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. Q. NSF 61 & NSF 372 Drinking water system components and drinking water systems components — lead content. R. NSF 61-G Annex G Lead Free Designation S. All codes and standards shall be - latest version as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 2 n fl j 1 IJ 1 9 n, G TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.4 SUBMITTALS 221005 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Product Data: Provide data on all materials, tubing, tube fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings covering all specially -designed hanger assemblies and fabrications. Also provide drawings showing assemblies of standard manufactured hangers based upon this particular project's requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, buried piping, and any other changes made to contract drawings. D. Mechanical Contractor to submit sketches covering all hangers proposed for use on this project. Manufacturer's data shall also be submitted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. All domestic water piping and valves in contact with potable. water shall be certified lead free (less than 1/4 of 1%). Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards, or be NSF -61-G certified to all requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 (health effects) and all requirements of Annex G and NSF/ANSI 372 (lead content) via third - party testing and certification. D. Do not solder within 12" of valves manufactured from any bismuth alloy. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept products on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. . Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 n WATER PIPING, BURIED TO 5' OUTSIDE OF BUILDING Copper Tube: ASTM B42, hard drawn, type K. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.2 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Hard Drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: a. ASTM B 32, lead-free solder. b. Extracted collars approved for pipe sizes 1/2" to 2". For joints made with a T -Drill. mechanical extractor, follow manufacturer's operating instructions. c. Mechanical Couplings: See paragraph "Flanges, Unions and Couplings" 2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 2" and Under: 1.. Copper tube: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic b. Gruvlok c. Approved equal 2. Two. or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C -profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 3. Grooved mechanical couplings. 200 psi minimum joint working pressure, cast ductile iron housing conforming with ASTM A-536. Gaskets for domestic water service, EPDM per ASTM D-2000. 4. Grooved mechanical flange adapters shall be ductile iron (ASTM A-536), engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly into ANSI Class 150 steel flanged components. Gasket material similar to coupling gasket material noted above. 5. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 6. Housing Material: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. 7. Housing Coating: Copper -colored alkyd enamel. 8. Gasket Material: Grade EHP or EP, UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 for cold +86°F/+30°C and hot +180°F/+82°C potable water service. 9. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized. 10. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools if required by manufacturer's warranty. C. Dielectric Connections 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic b. Gruvlok c. Approved equal 2. Provide dielectric waterway fittings that maintain external electrical continuity while maintaining internal isolation. Fittings shall comply with ASTM F 492, and be listed by IAPMO. For pipe sizes 2" and less used dielectric nipples and for pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger use dielectric flange kits. Do not use dielectric unions. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 4 7 'i Li r+ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT rZ AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 vl Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS fl 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with ASME B31.9, MSS SP -58 & SP -69. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP -58 & SP -69 recommendations, see Section 22 00 20. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Supports for roof mounted pipe, for flat roof applications, see Section 22 00 20 • B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2" to 2": Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Water Piping Sizes 2" and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Adjustable side beam clamps MSS-SP69-Type 25 or approved equal. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support for Cold Piping: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and or steel support. 8. Floor Support for Hot Piping: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and steel support. 9. Floor Support for Hot Piping Sizes 6" and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel screws, and steel support. 10. Copper Tube Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 11. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, zinc plated. 12. All hanger materials to be zinc or cadmium plated. 13. Isolate all pipe work within the first 50' of vibration isolated equipment or within the mechanical spaces, whichever is greater. 14. Provide roller hangers for all applications where thermal movement causes hanger rods to deviate more than 4 degrees from vertical or longitudinal movement exceeds 1/2". Provide protection saddles for use with roller hanger. 15. All auxiliary steelnecessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook and furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and shall have one coat of primer paint prior to or after installation. 16. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard, commercially -accepted pipe hangers and accessories. 2.5 VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong 2. Apollo 3. Asco 4. Griswold Controls 5. Gruvlok DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 5. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 6. Kitz 7. Milwaukee Valve Company 8. Nexus 9. Nibco, Inc. 10. Red -White Valve Corporation 11. Stockham Valve Company 12. ThermOmegaTech 13. Tour Anderson 14. Victaulic 15. Viega, LLC 16. Watts Regulator Company 17. Zurn-Wilkins Industries 18. Approved equal 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING B. Gate Valves 1. Up To and Including 2": a. MSS SP -80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, union bonnet, inside screw, solid wedge disc; solder or threaded ends. C. Globe Valves And Angle Valves 1. Up To and Including 2": a. MSS SP -80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, union bonnet, bronze disc, solder or threaded ends. D. Ball Valves 1. 2" and Smaller: a. MSS SP -110, 150 psig SWP, 600 psig CWP, bronze, two-piece body, chrome - plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow -out -proof stem, lever handle, with solder, threaded, or grooved ends; provide stem extension to allow operation without interfering with pipe insulation. E. Swing Check Valves 1.. Up to 2": a. MSS SP -80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with bronze seat, solder or threaded ends. F. Water Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Combination High/Low Valves a. Water pressure reducing valve with integral by-pass check valve and 3/4" low flow by-pass kit. b. Wilkins 500XLFCBP or approved equal. 2. Range 30 to 150 psi for dead end service. Spring to act directly on valve stem. Delivery pressure shall not vary more than one psi for each 10 psi variation in inlet pressure. G. Relief Valves 1. Pressure Relief: a. CSA certified to ANSI Z21.22, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct -pressure actuated. Capacity ASME(BPV IV) certified and labeled. -. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING : 22 10 05 - 6 L 0 u Li TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 2. Temperature and Pressure Relief: a. CSA certified to ANSI Z21.22, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct -pressure actuated. Temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F. Capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labeled. H. Solenoid Valves 1. 2-1/2" and smaller; brass or stainless steel body, stainless steel internal components, 24vdc or 120vac operation, watertight or watertight/explosion-proof solenoid enclosure, CSA certified. Valves shall be line size and full port. Asco 8210 or approved equal. Strainers 1. Size 2" and Under: a. Threaded bronze body for 175 psi working pressure, Y -pattern with 1/32" stainless steel perforated screen. Equal to Watts 777. Provide lead-free models where in contact with potable water. J. Drain Valves 1. Provide a full -port ball valve with 3/4" hose connection, cap and chain at all low points and at equipment drains. Nibco T-585-70HC or approved equal. 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. j B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. n C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt; protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean and disinfect system. n j 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Lead type solders are not allowed on the jobsite. U C. Use only water soluble paste flux designed to work with lead free solders. D. Do not solder within 12" of valves, flanges, etc., manufactured from any bismuth alloy. j DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 221005. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING E. Provide non -conducting dielectric waterway connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Dielectric unions are not allowed. F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. G. Install piping to maintain 6'-8" headroom minimum, conserve space, and do not interfere with use of the space. H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed, minimum size 12" x 12". K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. L. Provide circuit balance and check valves between domestic hot water and hot water circulating branch lines on the return leg, even if not shown on the Plans. All branches are to be balanced. M. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. N. Copper Tube Extracted Joints may be used on copper tubing. Dimple branch connection to control insertion. Brazed joints only. O. Tube Press Fit Joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked after pressing against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully inserted into the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using only the tool approved by the manufacturer. P. Copper Tube Rolled Groove joints shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. . Provide sleeves for pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Use commercially manufactured modular seals for sleeves passing through floors, below -grade walls and floor slabs below grade. Make these penetrations water -tight against ground water pressure. R. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard commercially -accepted pipe hangers and accessories. 2. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9 and MSS SP -89. 3. Use only adjustable side beam clamps (Type 25); standard beam clamps are not acceptable. 4. Inserts and shields are to be placed at each hanger by the piping contractor. Reference Section 22 00 20. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 8 fl fl L n 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 5. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1/2" space between finished covering and adjacent work. 6. Place hangers within 12" of each horizontal elbow. 7. Use hangers with 1-1/2" minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 8. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected. horizontal piping. 9. Where more than one piping run can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 10. Provide copper -plated hangers and supports for un -insulated copper tubing. Pipe -tight hangers are acceptable only for piping conveying fluids at ambient temperatures. All Hot Water, Hot Water Circulating, Cold Water, Heating Water, Condensing Water, and Chilled Water piping, etc., is to be insulated. 11. Provide hangers adjacent motor -driven equipment with vibration isolation. 12. Auxiliary Steel: All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, and shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. 13. All steel rods, hangers and brackets, shall be electro -plated. Custom fabricated steel brackets or hangers shall receive one shop coat primer paint by this Contractor. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Provide unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Provide gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Provide globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. Do not use for shut-off or isolation. �j E. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where required or indicated. F. Provide isolation valves with positive shutoff for domestic hot water, cold water and hot water recirculation at restrooms. Isolation valves shall be located above T -bar ceiling in area adjacent restrooms where possible. If located above a hard ceiling, provide access panel. r-; G. Connect hot water circulating piping to hot water piping within 24" of plumbing fixtures. Bring circulating piping down into wall as needed to meet this distance requirement. 3.4 TOLERANCES v A. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32" per foot, and arrange to drain at low points. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 9 1 j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.5 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean. B. Inject disinfectant (free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form) throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. C. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution, and test for disinfectant residual at minimum of 15% of outlets. D. Leave disinfectant in system for 24 hours. E. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. F. Flush disinfectant from system until residual is equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L." G. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10% of outlets and from water point of entry; analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. H. Provide copies of certified test reports from the Health Department to the Owner's Commissioning Agent, Owner's representative, and General Contractor prior to occupancy. 3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS Provide new water service complete with the following components in a Water Header as detailed on the contract drawings. 1. Approved reduced pressure backflow preventer (RPBP); do not install bypass or add drains or vents upstream of the RPBP. 2. Pressure reducing valve (PRV) with bypass and globe valve. 3. Y -Strainer, to share bypass with PRV. Pipe strainer blow -off to nearest drain; provide full -port ball valve on drain. 4. System -rated water hammer arrestors: Provide PPP SCS Series 150 -pound flanged, 3" minimum size. 5. Drain valves: Provide at low point on header. 6. Pressure Gauges. Provide two minimum, located on each side of PRV. 7. Provide sleeves in walls or floors for service mains. Make watertight with commercially - manufactured modular seals and pliable material. Anchor service main inside of building to concrete walls or floors. 8. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve around service main to 1" above finished floor. 9. See detail on Plans. .3.7 TESTING A. Test Domestic Water a minimum of 100 PSI or 1-1/2 times incoming pressure whichever is greater and hold pressure for two hours, without loss of pressure. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building END OF SECTION 22 10 05 22 10 05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 10 05 - 11 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK j n rl ( j tl 1-7 n j 1 �1 u TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Interior Hose Bibbs B. Non -Freeze Wall Box Hydrants C. Washing Machine Box D. Refrigerator Recessed Box E. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer F. Double Check Valve Assemblies. G: Water Hammer Arrestors H. Trap Primers I. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 22 10 05 - Domestic Water Piping. B. Section 22 40 00 = Plumbing Fixtures. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES A. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011). B. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering. C. ASSE 1019 - - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants: Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; (ANSI/ASSE 1019). D. PDI -WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute. E. All cbdes and standards shall be latest version as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.4 SUBMITTALS 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. All Domestic Water Piping Specialties in contact with potable water shall be certified lead free (less than 1/4 of 1%). Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards, or be NSF -61-G certified to all requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 (health effects) and all requirements of Annex G and NSF/ANSI 372 (lead content) via third - party testing and certification. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on-site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply for Owner's use in maintenance of project: 1. One extra loose key for each inside and outside hose bibb and/or hydrants. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for installation of backflow preventing devices. B. Provide certificate from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow preventing devices. ` •PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucet Company 2. Woodford Manufacturing Company 3. Acorn Engineering Company DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 2 f471 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 0 0 0 �f t 0 0 4. Zurn 5. Approved equal 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES B. Interior Hose Bibbs: (Install where shown on the Plans) 1. Bronze or brass, wall mounted, box type, single service faucet with hose thread spout, with chrome -plated wheel handle and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. a. Woodford B24-3/4" or approved equal for installation at chase wall. 2. Recessed box -type with single service faucet. a. Box construction: Stainless steel, 18 -gage box, 16 -gage flange and door. Include cylinder lock with two (2) keys. b. Valve: Chrome-platedcast bronze, cartridge -operated with removable loose key wheel handle, screwdriver -operated stop, and vacuum breaker. c. Acorn model 8151 or approved equal for installation at non -chase wall. C. Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs: (Where shown) 1. Bronze or brass, wall mounted close -coupled box -type double -service faucet with hose thread spout, chrome -plated wheel handle and vacuum breaker . a. Woodford B22CC or approved equal for installation at chase wall. 2. Recessed box -type with dual -service faucets (hot and cold). a. Box construction: Stainless steel, 18 -gage box, 16 -gage flange and door. Include cylinder lock with two (2) keys. b. Valve: Chrome -plated cast bronze, cartridge -operated with removable loose key wheel handle, screwdriver -operated stop, and vacuum breaker. c. Acorn model 8156 or approved equal for installation at non -chase wall. 2.2 NON -FREEZE HYDRANTS Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company 2. Woodford Industries 3. Zurn 4. Approved equal Wall Hydrant, Single Temperature, ASSE 1052 • 1. Box Type, freeze -resistant, self -draining type with Nickel Bronze Box, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and integral vacuum breaker. Stem to be hardened stainless steel. a. Woodford B67 -RCP or approved equal. 2. Exposed hose connection, integral vacuum breaker, nickel -plated bronze, quarter -turn, with wall clamp and T -handle key. 3. Jay R. Smith 5609QT or approved equal. 4. Box -type, integral vacuum breaker, nickel -plated bronze, quarter -turn, with wall clamp and T -handle key. 5. Jay R. Smith 5509QT or approved equal. 6. Box -type for cored 6" diameter hole. Integral vacuum breaker, nickel -plated bronze, quarter -turn, with wall clamp and T -handle key. a. Jay R. Smith 5509QT-R or approved equal. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221006-3. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 7. Exposed hose connection, integral vacuum breaker and dual check valve, nickel -plated bronze, quarter -turn, with wall clamp and T -handle key. a. Jay R. Smith 5619 or approved equal. 8. Box -type, integral vacuum breaker and dual check valve, nickel -plated bronze, quarter - turn, with wall clamp and T -handle key. a. Jay R. Smith 5519 or approved equal. C. Wall Hydrants, Dual -Temperature, ASSE 1052 1. Freezeless, self -draining, with nickel -plated bronze box, hose connection, wall clamp, and vacuum breaker; 3/4" inlet. a. Jay R. Smith 5561QT or approved equal. 2. Freezeless, rough -brass box, self -draining, with mixing handle, wall clamp, and vacuum breaker. a. Woodford HCB67 or approved equal. D. Ground Box Hydrants, box -type for floor or ground installation, ASSE 1052 1. Freeze -resistant, vacuum breaker, gray iron enamel coated box, lockable recessed box, hose thread spout, removable key. a. Jay R. Smith 5830 or approved equal. 2.3 WASHING MACHINE BOXES A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS / Guy Gray 2. Oatey 3. Water-Tite 4. Sioux Chief 5. Approved equal B. Epoxy -coated steel box, brass valves, water hammer arresters, socket for 2" waste; Guy Gray "T" series or approved equal. C. Fire -rated box: Epoxy -coated steel box, brass valves, water hammer arresters, and intumescent pads; Guy Gray FR -12 or approved equal. 2.4 REFRIGERATOR ICE -MAKER OUTLET BOX A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Guy Gray 2. Oatey 3. Sioux Chief 4. Approved equal B. Epoxy -coated steel rough -in box, lead-free valve, hammer arrester; Guy Gray IMOB, or. approved equal. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 4 p fl J (1, 0 T) n n L r? TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES C. Fire -rated box: Epoxy -coated steel rough -in box, brass valves, water hammer arresters, and intumescent pads; Guy Gray FR -12 or approved equal 2.5 DISHWASHER VALVE BOX Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Guy Gray 2. Oatey 3. Approved equal B. Epoxy -coated steel box, brass valve, hammer arrester. 2.6 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company 2. Zurn/Wilkins Industries, Inc. 3. Approved equal B. All reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be listed by the State of Washington Department of Health as an approved cross -connection control device. C. Provide air -gap fitting and route drainage piping to nearest floor drain. D. Reduced -Pressure Backflow Preventers 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating spring-loaded check valves, diaphragm -type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves, third check valve that opens under backpressure in case of diaphragm failure, non -threaded vent outlet, assembled with two ball valves (gear -operated butterfly valves on 2-1/2" and larger), and four test cocks. a. Watts 957BFG - Silver Eagle or approved equal. 2. Gate valves to be bronze, or substituted with butterfly valves. E. Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly 1. A Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly shall be installed at each potential health hazard location to prevent backflow due to back -siphonage and/ or back -pressure. 2. The assembly shall consist of an internal pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check modules with captured springs and silicone seat discs. Seats and seat discs shall be replaceable in both check modules and the relief valve. There shall be no threads or screws in the waterway exposed to line fluids. Service of all internal components shall be through a single access cover secured with stainless steel bolts. Body and shutoffs shall be constructed using Lead Free* cast copper silicon alloy materials. The assembly shall also include two resilient seated isolation valves, four resilient seated test cocks, and an air gap drain fitting. 3. Lead Free* reduced pressure zone assembly shall comply with state codes and standards requiring reduced lead content. The assembly shall meet the requirements of: USC; ASSE Standard 1013 and AWWA Standard C511; CSA B64.4. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building Watts Series LF009 or approved equal. 2.7 DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company 2. Zurn / Wilkins Industries, Inc. 3. Approved equal 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES B. Double -Check Valve Assemblies: 1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion -resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. Watts 757BFG or approved equal. 2. No iron gate valves, substitute 'butterfly or bronze gate valves, check with WA State approvals. 2.8 . WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company 2. Precision Plumbing Products 3. Zurn Industries, Inc. 4. Approved equal B. Water Hammer. Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows -type, sized in accordance with PDI -WH 201. 2. Precharged, suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. 2.9 TRAP PRIMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 2. Jay R Smith 3. Approved equal B. General 1. Provide ball valve shut-off at each trap primer. 2. Provide an access panel large enough to remove and replace trap primer assembly; panel minimum size is 12" x 12". C. Trap Primer for Individual Drains: Provide Prime -Rite PR -500 automatic trap primer for each floor drain and funnel floor drain. Primers shall be concealed, located in pipe space or wall. cavities. Installation shall be per manufacturer's installation instructions. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 6 j j 0 0 r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES D. Trap Primer for Multiple Drains: In addition to the trap primer specified above, add Prime -Rite primer valve DU -2, DU -3, or DU -4 distribution unit. A maximum of 4 floor drains may be fed off of one trap primer valve. Install additional trap primer valves as needed. 2.10 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Powers 2. Leonard Valve Company 3. Bradley 4. Lawler 5. Approved equal B. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: • 1. Valve: Cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment. Valve to have cold water bypass in case of valve failure or loss of hot water. Valve to be Certified lead free. ASSE 1017. 2. Capacity: See schedule. 3. Accessories: a. Stem thermometer on outlet. b. Strainer stop checks on inlets. 4. Cabinet: 16 gage stainless steel, for recessed mounting with keyed lock. C. Individual Lavatory Mixing Valve 1. ASSE 1016, bronze body with corrosion -resistant internal parts, 1/2" NPT. Includes integral checks with screens and thermal actuator to compensate for inlet temperature fluctuations. Valve to be factory set at 105 degrees F. Install under individual lavatories to mix and adjust hot water temperature. Each tempering valve shall serve an individual lavatory or sink. Valve to be Certified Lead Free. 2. Piping connections are to be made so as to permit proper operation of integral check valves. 3. Equal to Powers LFe480. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur, as required or as shown on the Plans. C. Pipe drain' from reduced pressure backflow preventer to nearest drain, utilizing an air gap fitting. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology. & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES D. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for providing water to trap primers and running primer lines to the drains. Verify location of trap primers with Owner's representative before installing. ALL floor drains and floor sinks, including showers, are to have primers. Show trap primer locations on Record Drawings. E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories, sinks, washing machine outlets, etc. for fixtures equipped with quick -closing valves. Install on cold water supply for any fixtures with flush valves. Install behind access panel for future maintenance; minimum panel size 12" x 12". F. Heat Tape/Heat Trace 1. Mechanical Contractor to coordinate installation of heat tracing with Electrical Contractor and all subcontractors, and inspect prior to allowing insulation to be installed. 2. Mechanical Contractor to confirm that heat tracing is installed per manufacturer's written instructions. G. Safety Shut -Off System 1. Safety Shut -Off Equipment Piping: This Contractor shall furnish all equipment. Install and make final connections to all piping systems, where indicated by Plans and Specifications. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Safety Shut -Off Panic Reset: Unless stated elsewhere on the Plans, the Utility Controller shall be configured. so that reset of the Panic State may only occur at Service Enabling Key Switch on the door of the Controller. 3. Safety Shut -Off Control Wiring: Provide 24v control wiring from the controller to each component of the system. Make connections at controlled device and terminate at output terminal on controller's control panel. Minimum wiring to be 18awg. Provide cable required plus two spares. Conductors shall be run in conduit. The installation of the conduit and conductors shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and Control Subcontractor with power wiring by Electrical Contractor. Control panels are rated for low voltage only. Run 120v wiring into rated junction boxes only; all other wiring to be low voltage. Comply with all applicable codes. 4. Safety Shut -Off Controls: Each utility controller system shall be configured so that pressing the Panic Button will disable Hot and Cold Water and Gas (and Air if installed) to all stations in the room. The controller will provide a signal to the Alarm Light and Audible Sounder. The controller will also provide a signal to the relay panel, which will be used by the Electrical Contractor to activate the Electrical Panel Shunt Trip. 5. Safety Shut -Off Startup: Prior to placing the Utility Controller System into service, perform all start-up procedures and checklists as suggested by the manufacturer and as required by the Commissioning Authority. H. Provide access panels for all concealed valves in walls or above hard ceiling. END OF SECTION 22 10 06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and connections for piping systems B. Sanitary Sewer Piping, Buried to 5' Outside of Building C. Sanitary Sewer piping, Above. Grade D. Storm Water Piping, Buried to 5' Outside of Building E. Storm Water Piping, Above Ground F. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings G. Pipe Hangers and Supports 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. C. Division 31 - Excavation, Fill, Trenching. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; (ANSUASME B31.9). B. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. D. ASTM A888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications E. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. F. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING G. MSS SP -58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. H. MSS SP -69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. I. MSS SP -89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. J. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 0 i i 0 k 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B. Provide sketches covering all specially designed hanger assemblies and fabrications. Also provide sketches showing assemblies of standard manufactured hangers based on this particular project's requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept products on-site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AB&I B. Charlotte C. Tyler D. Approved equal SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 2 0 0 r-) r 0 C TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED TO 5' OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, hubless. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket or stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1277. a. Manufacturers 1) Clamp -All Hi -Torq 125 2) Approved equal; must be listed for underground application. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, and be listed by NSF International. • B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, hubless. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joints: Heavy-duty shielded, stainless steel couplings, with stainless steel shield, stainless steel bands and tightening devices and ASTM C56A rubber sleeve. a. Manufacturers 1) Clamp -All Hi-Torq 125 2) Husky SD 4000 3) Or Approved Equal. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, and be listed by NSF International. 2.4 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED TO 5' OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe institute, and be listed by NSF International. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, hubless. SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joints: Heavy-duty shielded, stainless steel couplings, with stainless steel shield, stainless steel bands and tightening devices and ASTM C56A rubber sleeve. a. Clamp -All Hi-Torq 125 b. Husky SD 4000 c. Or Approved Equal. 3 Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, and be listed by NSF International. 2.5 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, and be listed by NSF International. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, hubless. 1. Fittings: Iron. 2. Joints: Heavy-duty shielded, stainless steel couplings, with stainless steel shield, stainless steel bands and tightening devices and ASTM C56A rubber sleeve. a. Clamp -A11 Hi-Torq 125 b. Husky SD 4000 c. Or Approved Equal. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, and be listed by NSF International. 2.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2" to 1-1/2": Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2" and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Adjustable side beam clamps MSS-SP69-Type 25 or approved equal. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and steel support. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 4 r vJ 9 n i j V TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt, protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. D. After completion, fill, clean and flush system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. C. Install piping to maintain 6-8" minimum headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, or joints. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly; All pipe shall be flashed, flashing shall extend to at least 10" in all directions from pipe and run at least 12" above roof around pipe. Each pipe shall be counter -flashed or turned down inside of pipe. Vent flashing shall be made watertight. Two-piece flashings are not acceptable. H. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard commercially -accepted pipe hangers and accessories. 2. Use only adjustable side beam clamps (Type 25), standard beam clamps are not acceptable. 3. Inserts: Insulated pipe inserts shall be provided at hanger, support, anchor, and guide locations on piping requiring insulation. The insert is to consist of either hydrous calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate foam insulation (urethane) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe, with a 360 -degree PVC (1/16" thick) or galvanized steel jacket (20 gauge minimum). Inserts are to be installed on piping during piping installation, by the piping contractor. Provide continuous insulation vapor barrier. Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. 4. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1/2" space between finished covering and adjacent work. 5. Place hangers within 12" of each horizontal elbow. SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING 6. Use hangers with 1-1/2" minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 7. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 8. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 9. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation. 10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 11. Auxiliary Steel: All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, and furnished and installed by this Contractor. 12. All steel rods, hangers and brackets, shall be electro -plated. Custom -fabricated steel brackets or hangers shall receive one shop coat of primer paint by this Contractor. J. Indirect drain piping shall terminate two (2) pipe diameters above the flood rim of the receptor and shall be cut at a 45 degree angle. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2" vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4" per foot slope. 3.4 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. Provide sleeves in walls or floors for service mains. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with modular seals and pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete walls or floors. C. Sleeves around service mains to be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe to 1" above finished floor. D. Backflow Protection: Fixtures installed on a floor level that is lower than the next upstream manhole cover of the public or private sewer shall be protected from backflow of sewage by installing an approved type of backwater valve (reference Section 22 13 19). Fixtures on such floor level that are not below the next upstream manhole cover shall not be required to be protected by a backwater valve. Fixtures on floor levels above such elevation shall- not discharge through the backwater valve. Cleanouts for drains that pass through a backwater valve shall be clearly identified with a permanent label stating "Backwater Valve Downstream". 3.5 TESTING A. Test the Drainage Systems as required by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22.13 16 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, & STORM PIPING END OF SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE, VENT, AND STORM PIPING 22 13 16 - 7. THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK a 0 a 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 a G D 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and Floor Drains B. Cleanouts C. Vandal -Proof Hooded Vent Caps 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 10 05 — Domestic Water Piping. B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures. C. Division 31 - Excavation, Fill, and Trenching. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. • B. ASME A112.6.4 - Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. C. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. D. Washington State Department of Health, Publication 337-027, "On-site Sewage System Tanks", dated 7/1/07. Publication covers Exterior Sewage Tanks and Grease Interceptors. E. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. C. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Light commercial drains and cleanouts are not acceptable. If found on this project they will be removed and replaced by the Mechanical Contractor, at no cost to the Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DRAINS • Manufacturers: 1. Froet Industries 2. Jay R. Smith 3. Wade, Inc. 4. Zurn Industries, Inc. 5. Josam 6. - Mifab 7. Sioux Chief 8. Approved equal. B. Roof Drains (RD): 1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Galvanized cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable cast iron, galvanized dome with vandal proof screws. 4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Roofing Section. a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Controlled flow weir. f. Leveling frame. g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension. j. Expansion Joints, where needed. C. Combination Roof/Overflow Drain: 1. Galvanized cast iron, body with clamp collar, has the same features as RD and ROFD above, in a single drain body. D. Downspout Nozzles (DN): SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 2 171 (71 tJ j 0 0 n LJ 0 0 1 0 `�i TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 1. Polished bronze body, round with straight bottom section, decorative face and threaded inlet, secure with solid bronze screws. 2.2 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Wade, Inc. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc. 4. Josam 5. Mifab 6. Sioux Chief 7. Approved equal. B. Floor Drain (FD): 1. ASME A112.6.3; galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, trap primer connection, vandal -proof screws, and round, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. C. Floor Drain (FD -1): 1. ASME A112.6.3; galvanized cast iron two piece body with drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, trap primer connection, vandal -proof screws, and square, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2: Zurn Industries, Inc. 3. Wade, Inc: 4. Mifab 5. Josam 6. Sioux Chief 7. Approved equal. B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (SCO): 1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover, marked "CO". C. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (SCO): 1. Same as above except with 18" x 18" x 4" concrete pad around cleanout. D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, threaded top assembly, and round scoriated secured nickel bronze cover in a round. depressed frame, with ABS tapered threaded plug. 2. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas for Carpeted Floors: a. Where cleanout is installed in carpeted areas, provide nickel bronze carpet clamp frame. SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES b. MC to coordinate carpet clamp rings or correct after carpet installation. 3. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas for Tile Floors: a. Where cleanout is installed in tiled areas, provide nickel bronze top with 1/8" tile recess cover; obtain tile piece to insert into cover. E. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (WCO): 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and ABS tapered thread plug, and round smooth stainless steel access cover secured with stainless steel machine screws. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO): Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. G. Provide cleanouts at each pair of 45 -degree elbows. At each 90 -degree turn, and at each 50' of straight run. H. Cleanouts shall be line size up to and including 3" piping, and 4" for piping 4" and larger. 2.4 VANDAL -PROOF HOODED VENT CAPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Zurn Industries, Inc. 3. Wade, Inc.. 4. Josam 5. Mifab 6. Approved equal. B. Provide vandal proof vent caps on all vents passing through the roof. Vent caps to be lacquered cast iron body and dome. All units to be secured with fasteners internal to the units. Vent caps do not need flashing sleeves unless roofing membrane extends up vent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. MC to coordinate the height of floor drains with the GC. C. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. D. Ensure adequate clearance at Floor Cleanouts and Floor Drains for rodding of drainage system; 18" minimum required. Do not install Floor Cleanouts or Floor Drains directly under toilet partitions. SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 4 l.( 171 n L n li L n J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES E. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. F. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor: Mechanical Contractor to coordinate with floor finisher for a smooth finished floor. G. Provide traps and trap primers for all drains (floor drains, trench drains, floor sinks, etc.) H. Provide two-way cleanout at junction of building drain and building exterior sewer. Provide concrete pad around cleanout; see contract drawing details. I. All downspouts shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 5 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK n j n LJ 7 • n n J r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing Fixtures. . B. Fixture Carriers. C. Faucets and Trim. D. Water Efficiency Standards 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 22 10 05 - Domestic Water Piping. B. Section 22 10 06 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties C. Section 22 13 16 - Sanitary Waste, Vent Piping, and Storm Piping D. Section 22 13 19 - Sanitary and Storm Piping Specialties 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. B. ASHRAE Standard 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking -Water Coolers with Self - Contained Mechanical Refrigeration. C. ARI 1010 - Self -Contained, Mechanically -Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. D. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. E. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. F. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. G. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. H. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES I. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. J. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. All Plumbing Fixtures in contact with potable water shall be certified lead free (less than 1/4 of 1%). Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards, or be NSF -61-G certified to all requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 (health effects) and all requirements of Annex G and NSF/ANSI 372 (lead content) via third -party testing and certification. 1.6. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 2 n LJ fl 1 n 1 fl fl J.J n J nII n U n �J T L_i n J LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Manufacturers: The following manufacturers' products are approved. Select . products and provide submittals to suit specific requirements of Specifications and Plans. 1. Acorn 2. American Standard 3. Brasscraft 4. Brocar Products, Inc. 5. Chicago Faucets 6. Delaney 7. Eastman 8. Eljer 9. Elkay 10. Fiat 11. Guy Gray/IPS 12. Halsey Taylor 13. Haws 14. Jay R. Smith 15. Josam 16. Just 17. Kohler 18. Mansfield 19. McGuire 20. Mifab 21. Mustee 22. Oasis 23. Olsonite 24. Precision Plumbing Products 25. Sloan 26. T&S Brass 27. Truebro, Inc. 28. Wade 29. Watts 30. Zurn 31. Approved equal Fixtures are specified in the plumbing fixture schedule, followed by the catalog designation of the listed manufacturers. Similar fixtures of equal quality and type from manufacturers listed above are acceptable alternates subject to final approval. C. Fixtures shall be new, free from flaws and blemishes with bright, smooth surface. All vitreous ware shall be non-absorbent, even color, unwrapped, two -fired china. Enameled ironware shall be acid resisting porcelain enameled cast-iron. D. Flush valves shall be Sloan Royal models as listed in the fixture schedule. Similar flush valves of equal quality and type manufactured by Delaney or Zurn are acceptable alternates. PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES E. Water closet seats for other than residences or hotel/motel rooms shall be open front, less cover, with concealed stainless steel, self-sustaining check hinge and shall be sized to fit bowl size of water closet specified. F. Fixtures shall be white unless noted otherwise. G. All handicapped -accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with the American With Disabilities Act (ADA) standards and procedures latest effective date. This Contractor shall verify these requirements with each manufacturer specified or acceptable alternate prior to the submittal process. All handicapped lavatories and sinks shall be provided with offset -type tailpieces. H Handicapped -accessible sinks shall meet the size requirement below and shall comply with the American With Disabilities Act (ADA) standards and procedures latest effective date. The depth of the sinks shall be no more than 6-1/2", the front to back shall be no more than 19-1/2", the left to right dimension may vary. See the Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings. If the scheduled sink is greater than the dimensions listed above, the MC shall coordinate the larger sink sizes with the Owner's representative and GC prior to ordering. I. All Plumbing Fixtures in contact with potable water shall be certified lead free (less than 1/4 of 1%). Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards via third -party testing and certification. J. Flush control for manual handicapped water closets shall be mounted for use from wide side of the water closet area. K. P -traps: P -traps shall be chrome -plated cast brass body with cleanout, 17 gauge seamless tubular wall bend with cast brass slip nuts. Trap shall be certified by CSA or other recognized testing authority. P -trap shall bear manufacturer and testing mark. P -traps shall be McGuire, Eastman, or approved equal. L. Plumbing Fixture Schedule: See Schedule on Plaris. 2.2 FIXTURE CARRIERS A. Manufacturers 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Josam 3. Mifab 4. Wade 5. Watts 6. Zurn 7. Approved equal B. Provide carrier types noted for the plumbing fixtures listed. Check and verify plumbing chase requirements with Plans. Provide back-to-back carriers where back-to-back fixtures are shown. Where floor mount carriers are called for, anchor foot assembly to floor per manufacturer's written instructions. Floor -mounted single water closet carriers shall be back -bolted to the floor PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES with two bolts via factory -provided bracket. Loose carriers will require re -working at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. 1. Water Closet: Adjustable horizontal above floor or compact vertical carriers. Carrier shall be rated for 500 pounds. See plans and riser diagram for typeof carrier required. Equal to Zurn Z1203-ND4, Z1203 -N4, Z1204-ND4, Z1204 -N4. 2. Urinals: Floor mounted with bearing plate. 3. Lavatories: Floor mounted with concealed arm carriers or exposed arm carriers, see schedule. 4. Drinking Fountain/Water Coolers: Floor mounted with bearing plate. 2.3 FAUCETS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers 1. Delta 2. Chicago Faucets 3. T&S Brass 4. McGuire 5. Brasscraft 6. Approved equal B. Faucets and other trim shall be as listed in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule Similar faucets and other trim of equal quality and type from manufacturers listed above are acceptable alternates subject to final approval.. C. Provide all plumbing fixtures complete with all fittings, stops, risers, accessories, connections to waste, hot and cold water and /or flush connection as required to make each individual "P" unit pursuant to Plans a completely finished and working plumbing fixture. D. All trim and exposed piping shall be chrome -plated brass. Supplies, wastes and traps in cabinets or under counters shall be considered exposed to view. E. All faucets shall have ADA -acceptable handles, even if the.fixtures are not designated as ADA. F. Piping for flush valves shall be anchored to prevent movement in the wall. Products such as Holdrite 114-C shall be acceptable for use with water closets. G. Bubblers provided at sinks shall be provided with separate supply stops and risers. H. Any product designed for dispensing potable water must meet both the NSF 61 and NSF 372 test standards via third -party testing and certification. Provide insulation on exposed hot water supply, cold water supply and waste piping to ADA lavatory and ADA sink fixtures. 1. Manufacturers a. Brocar Products, Inc.- Trap Wrap b. Truebro, Inc. - Handi-Lav-Guard c. McGuire - ProWrap d. Zurn ADA Products PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building e. Approved equal. 2.4 WATER EFFICIENCY STANDARDS 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All plumbing fixture water usage flow rates shall be in full compliance with the latest Washington State amendments to the Uniform Plumbing Code and/or requirements of local jurisdictions, whichever is more restrictive. Where more restrictive flows are shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule, these requirements shall take precedence. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. B. Handicapped Mounting Heights: 1. Water Closets: Mounting height from floor to top of seat shall be a maximum of 19" and a minimum of 17". 2. Urinals: Front lip of basin shall not exceed 17" above finished floor. 3. Lavatories: Lavatory rim or counter surface shall not be higher than 34" above the finished floor. 4. Mechanical Contractor to coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural Drawings and applicable codes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome -plated rigid or braided stainless steel flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, quarter -turn ball valves, reducers, and escutcheons. Where chrome -plated pipe and fittings are not available, typically commercial -type kitchen equipment installation, paint the pipe and fittings with chrome paint or provide stainless steel drain pipe and fittings. - C. Install components level and plumb. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 6 r 1 n } -J. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES E. Seal fixtures to wall andfloor surfaces with sealant adhesive caulk, color to match fixture. F. Install each fixture in accordance with architectural details. Unless otherwise noted, each fixture shall be located symmetrically, with its center line congruent with the center of windows, stall spaces, wall spaces, or casework. Unless noted otherwise, mounting height of fixtures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's rough -in Standards. G. Provide escutcheon plates for all lines through the walls and floors. H. Attach floor -mounted water closets to the floor with solid brass closet bolts, not brass plated. I. Connect hot water circulating piping to hot water piping within 24" of plumbing fixtures. Bring circulating piping down into wall as needed to meet this distance requirement. J. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all power wiring and low voltage wiring to flush. valves and other fixtures as needed. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide flush valve trim and any transformers needed. Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors to coordinate prior to starting rough -in. K. Install carrier bolts in cured concrete only; test and prove to the Owner's representative that all carrier bolts are secured in the floor. On the second floor and above, through -bolt the carrier feet with longer bolts, 2" x 2" heavy square washers, lock washers and double nuts. Contractor is. responsible for following the manufacturer's installation requirements and the installation results. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures so as to prevent splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING . Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. END OF SECTION 22.40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 7 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 9 a v 0 0 0 D D TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. B. This section of the specification applies to the entire mechanical work, both interior and exterior, as specified herein after and shown on the plans. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. as shown on Plans and as described in contract documents. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Owner's representative of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the specifications or plans. B. The term "provide" means the furnishing and installing of equipment (including connections and appurtenances) complete and ready for use. C. The term "Mechanical Contractor (MC)" and "Electrical Contractor (EC)" as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refers to those subcontractors working under the direction of the "General Contractor (GC)." 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact details and locations, nor all offsets in ductwork and piping. Contractor shall provide additional fittings, offsets and extensions in piping, ductwork and related mechanical insulation as required to meet the intent of the documents. Contractor shall include. in his bid provisions to relocate or shift piping and ductwork where conflicts exist with Structural, Architectural, or Electrical. B. Refer to the complete set of Architectural, Structural, Electrical, and Civil Plans and Specifications for additional details of the work. Review Plans and Specifications of other trades to identify other requirements.. Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner's representative immediately before ordering material or beginning work. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Structural and Electrical drawings before work is started. Consult with each of the other Contractors regarding locations and spaces required for work and GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 1 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS lay out work to avoid interference. Maximum clearance shall be maintained for service access and maintenance of all equipment. Failure to coordinate shall be justification to require Contractor, at his own expense, to move his work to provide the necessary space for the other contractors. B. Mechanical systems have space priority as follows, listed with highest priority first: Graded Drainage Piping, then Ductwork, Drainage Vents, Hydronic Piping, Domestic Water Piping, Natural Gas Piping, and Fire Protection Piping. MC to make certain that priority access is maintained. This shall be coordinated by the GC and MC without assistance from Owner's representative, Engineer, or Architect. C. Contractor shall be responsible for his own coordination between all other trades. Development of Shop Drawings shall be a collaborative effort between the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor and all other subcontractors working on the project. Shifting of piping, ductwork and other mechanical items shall be the responsibility of the Team to maintain the intent of the documents. Submit shop drawings to the Owner's representative. D. Detail Drawings By Contractor: Whenever the Contractor's work is of sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing, or when requested by the Owner's representative, this contractor shall prepare additional detail drawings to scale 1/4" = 1' on paper same size as Contract Drawings and with these layouts, coordinate this work with the work of other trades. Such detail work shall be clearly identified on the drawings as to the area to which it applies. Do not submit these drawings for approval. At completion, include a set of such drawings with each set of As - Built Drawings for Owner's record purposes. 1.6 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.7 CODES AND REFERENCES A. Codes and Standards listed shall be the most current issue as adopted by the Local Jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict of codes, the most stringent code will apply. 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. Washington State Energy Code 5. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible 1.8 PERMITS AND FEES A. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and construction or utility fees. Furnish final certificate to Owner showing compliance with code requirements. GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 2 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS 7 J n n 7 j J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.9 SCHEDULING 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of General Specifications. 1.10 PRIOR APPROVALS A. Specifications have been written around equipment and material selected for this project based on quality, size, capacity, and performance required to meet building design criteria. Any equipment and/or material used in this project, that is not as specified, must have prior approval from the Owner's representative. B. Request for Approval must be submitted with substitution request form included in Division 0 to Owner's representative, a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to bid date. This letter shall be accompanied with complete information regarding items to be substituted. If supplier requires a reply to the request for approval, he is to send self-addressed, stamped envelope with request. C. Those items that receive prior approval, will be listed in the Mechanical Addenda. D. Supplier, and/or Mechanical Contractor, shall be responsible for ensuring that substituted material or equipment is of the same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. Any changes and costs required during construction, due to contractor's/supplier's neglect to properly select substituted equipment, shall be paid by the contractor/supplier. E. Prior approval to bid does not mean automatic final approval of material or equipment by the Owner's representative. Final approval will be given after final submittal data has been presented to Owner's representative, with complete information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. 1.11 MATERIAL AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. All material used on the project shall be new material and free from defects. This Contractor shall submit catalog data and engineering data on all equipment as specified or having received prior approval. B. Material and equipment specified is designated by various manufacturer's catalog numbers. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are also listed. Such manufacturers are exempt from the 10 - day prior approval clause of these specifications, but must submit standard submittal data for final approval as otherwise noted. C. Submittal shall be arranged in numerical order, according to specification section number and item number. Submittal shall be bound in hard cover, loose-leaf binder(s). D. Submittal shall be as follows: Before ordering or installing any of the materials, this Contractor �? shall submit copies of complete information on the materials to be used on the project. Submittal may be electronic or in hard copy. If contractor chooses to submit printed copies, he n J GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 3 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS shall provide five copies to the Owner's representative. Submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following. 1. Contractor's Cost Breakdown 2. Complete List of Subcontractors and Suppliers 3. All Air -Handling Equipment 4. Heat Pumps 5. Air Terminals 6. Air Filters 7. HVAC Ductwork 8. Natural Gas Systems 9. Tests and Adjustments - Air and Hydronic Balancing 10. Integrated Automation - Energy management and control system E. Owner's representative's review of submittals is for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Marking or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project Pans and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and assembly and for safe performance of his work. F. The Owner's representative will return one set, electronic or printed copy, of this submittal to the contractor showing any corrections, additions, and/or deletions. If the Contractor needs additional printed copies, he shall photocopy his approved copy of the required items. This Contractor shall resubmit those items that need to be corrected or added. 1.12 CONTRACTOR'S COST BREAKDOWN A. Mechanical Contractor shall submit, with the bound submittals, a cost breakdown of the major portions of his work, pursuant to the following outline. 1. Job organization and submittals. 2. Outside site utilities. 3. HVAC Equipment, including air handling units, heat pumps, heat exchangers, boilers, cooling towers/fluid coolers, fans and heating circulation pumps. 4. HVAC ductwork and air terminals. 5. HVAC piping and insulation. 6. Tests and adjustments - air balance. 7. Integrated Automation - Energy management and control system. 1.13 RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall maintain a set of Contract Drawings at the site on which the actual installed location of piping, equipment, etc., shall be shown in a legible, neat manner. This set of plans shall show actual dimensions (including depth of bury) of underground piping from construction lines, so they can be readily found after covering. Upon completion of the project, the as -built information shall be transformed into AutoCAD version 2007 or greater. Record drawings shall be the same size as contract drawings. This set of plans shall be submitted for final approval. Drawings shall be one full size set, one half size set and on CD in PDF and .dwg format. The contractor shall be ready for review of the on-site as-builts monthly prior to GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 4 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building submitting his billing. Failure to billings. 1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS have drawings available for review may delay monthly A. Operate all systems through complete cycles in the presence of designated Owner's representative. Give instructions for operation, care and maintenance. All systems shall be operated through complete operating cycles for a minimum period of 7 days in conjunction with the designated Owner's representative before acceptance. 1.15 TRAINING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall digitally record all Owner Mechanical training sessions and shall provide copies on DVDs. Training sessions shall be provided for all mechanical systems. Three copies of these DVDs shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the project. 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&Ms) A. General: Provide one preliminary bound set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals including maintenance information and parts list furnished by the manufacturer with the equipment, together with supplementary drawings where necessary, to itemize serving and maintenance points. Include the Valve Tag list as posted in the Mechanical spaces. Include filter maintenance, methods of operation, seasonal requirements, manufacturer's data and warranty forms. Warranty forms are to be located in the front of the manuals as well as in each applicable specific section. Provide address and 24-hour phone number of the firms responsible under warranty. Items requiring service or correction during the warranty period shall be serviced within 24 hours of notification by Owner. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies, posted on 8-1/2" x 11" sheets, with operation and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment installed. Drawings shall be accordion folded. An index shall be provided with all contents listed in an orderly presentation according to specification section. B. Number of Copies: A preliminary set of the O&M Manuals shall be submitted for approval. After this set has been approved, two additional sets shall be prepared and the three sets shall be transmitted to the Owner's representative. C. Binding: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Copies shall be submitted in 3 -ring binders. Covers shall include the name of the Job, Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and the year of completion. The back edge of the binder shall include a label with the name of the Job, the Owner and the year completed. Each copy shall have a typewritten index and tabbed dividers between equipment categories. Binders to be no more than 80% full; binders that are over 80% full will be sent back for dividing into additional binders. GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 5 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS A. Provide written certification that work has been fully completed in strict accordance with Plans and Specifications and request final inspection. B. Provide written certification that Contractor will replace materials and workmanship that prove defective for one (1) year after date of acceptance or extended warranty as listed in individual sections. C. Provide written certification .of inspection from the Authority Having Jurisdiction, stating that all work has been inspected, accepted, and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes. D. Provide written certification that Owner's representative has been fully instructed in the operation and function of all mechanical systems. E. Provide copies of certification in the 0 & M Manuals. 1.18 DOCUMENTS A. Present the following documents to the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance of buildings. Final payment of the Contract will be contingent upon receiving these documents: 1. Record (as -built) drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (3 sets). 3. Final material submittal. 4. Warranties and Extended Warranties. 5. Approved Final Balancing logs. (Air Systems) (3 sets). 6. State of Washington certification of all pressure vessels installed on the project. Affix a copy to each tank. 7. Final certificates of inspection and code compliance. 8. RPBF device tests. 9. All applicable forms required by these specifications. 10. Provide copies of the above documents in 0 & M Manuals. 1.19 WARRANTY A. All mechanical equipment and systems including Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning systems, including controls and all parts thereof, shall be warranted (parts and labor), for a period of one (1) year after the date of substantial completion as determined by the documentation. B. Contractor shall repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner's representatives any defective material, equipment,- or poor workmanship, which may show itself during this warranty period. All compressors used in HVAC equipment shall have an additional four-year parts warranty. D. Controls shall be warranted for two (2) years total parts and labor, from date of final acceptance. GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 6 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS E. Test and Balance shall be warranted for two (2) years total, from date of final acceptance. 1.20 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY - OFF -GASSING AND BAKE -OUT A. Mechanical Contractor shall provide in his bid provisions for Off -Gassing and Bake -out of new materials installed in this contract. HVAC systems shall be run continuously for a minimum of two (2) week period prior to occupancy, at the completion of each area of the project. HVAC systems shall maintain a constant temperature of 70 to 78 degrees F, in all zones at 60% minimum outside air. Coordinate this requirement with the General Contractor. 1.21 MECHANICAL ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The noise criteria (NC) end resultant for each space shall be per Code as adopted by Local Jurisdiction. 1.22 DEMOLITION A. Complete all Demolition Work as shown on the drawings and where required to install the new work shown on the drawing and as specified herein. Demolition work shall not be started until the occupants have moved out. The move will be scheduled in stages and the contractor must phase out his work in stages (with advance coordination with the Owner's Representative) to cause as little disruption to the Owner's work flow as possible. B. Work To Be Removed By Owner Before Starting Work: The Owner will remove from the construction areas all equipment that is to remain the property of the Owner, but not reused or installed later as part of the work. Contractor to notify Owner prior to the need for area or building, and allow the Owner a reasonable time to accomplish removal or move as determined by the Owner's representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL Owner's representative's review of submittals is for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Marking or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project Plans and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and assembly and for safe performance of his work. GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 - 7 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.2 DEMOLITION 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all demolition, wrecking, and removal of work necessary for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and/or as specified. All mechanical materials designated for removal shall be removed from site and disposed of legally. The Owner shall be offered the right of first refusal for demolished mechanical equipment and components. Loading and disposal as described here shall be at no expense to the Owner. Care shall be taken in making openings in walls and roofs as not to damage any of the existing walls, floors and roofs. Where holes are left from removal of mechanical equipment this Contractor shall be responsible for patching same to match the surrounding finishes unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Debris: Allow no debris to accumulate at, or in buildings, on grounds, streets, and/or walks. Haul away from site as soon as removed. Allow no debris to remaininthe building and/or outside the building overnight. Legally dispose of at Contractor's expense. C. Interior Dust Control: Provide dust tight partition around area to be cut and as required to prevent dust from entering the ventilation system. Equip partition with adequate access doors that can be closed dust tight while cutting workis in progress. Remove dust tight partitions when no longer required. D. Building Protection: Protect the inside of the building from foul weather by covering wall and roof openings. E. Asbestos Materials: Notify the Owner's representative if the presence of asbestos is suspected. Immediately stop work in that area. F. Structural Members: Check with, and gain approval from, the Owner's representative prior to cutting or altering structural members. END OF SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL HEATING, VENTILATING, AND 23 00 10 8 AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) REQUIREMENTS TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING . General requirements for basic materials and methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). B. "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. See specific sections for this requirement. 2.2 PRODUCT TESTING A. Any piece of equipment used in this project and hereinafter specified which, by its nature, requires electrical . connection, such as fans, pumps, air handling equipment, etc., must be provided with an approval label from one of the agencies hereinafter listed. B Approval of agency must be for the total package; approval of individual components not acceptable. All labels must be located outside of equipment and shall be visible to inspector. Comply with all requirements of RCW 19.28.010 and NEC Sections 90-7 and 110-3 (1993). C. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor or the equipment supplier to meet the requirements of this section. Any agency costs to provide an appropriate label for a piece of equipment must be included in this bid. Failure by Mechanical Contractor or supplier to obtain approval labels prior to bid shall be sufficient cause for the Mechanical Contractor/supplier to obtain all such labels at no additional cost to Owner. The following is a list of approval testing laboratories: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., www.ul.com 2. Canadian Standards Association, www.csagroup.org 3. American Gas Association, www.aga.org. 4. Factory Mutual Systems, www.fmglobal.com 5. MET Electrical Testing, www.metlabs.com 6. Intertek Testing, www.intertek.com BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 1 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.3 PRESSURE VESSELS A. 23 00 20 r' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide State of Washington Certification of all pressure vessels installed on the project. Affix certification on the vessels and provide a copy to the Owner in the 0 & M Manual. 2.4 DAMAGED OR REJECTED MATERIALS A. Remove from the site immediately. 2.5 STARTERS, DISCONNECTS AND VFDS A. All starters shall be provided and installed by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. B. All disconnects shall be provided and installed by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. VFDs shall be provided by the Control Contractor, installed by the Electrical Contractor, and controlled by the Control Contractor unless otherwise noted. D. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate VFDs, based on direction provided in the Contract Specifications. All VFDs are to be of a single manufacture and/or provided by a specific contractor. The MC shall be responsible for compliance with the specification or shall correct problems at his expense. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and provide voltage, phase, horsepower, and amperage for all of the mechanical equipment being provided, based on approved submittals and the actual equipment being provided. F. Starters, disconnects, and VFDs shall be .provided in a timely manner, so as to not delay the Electrical Contractor's work. 2.6 FIRE INTEGRITY A. Manufacturers 1. 3M Fire Products 2. Holdrite 3. Approved equal B. The penetration sealing systems shall be provided with F -Rating and/or T -Rating as required by IBC Section 714.3 and 714.4 Penetrations include the following: 1. Through -penetration firestopping in fire -rated construction. 2. Construction -gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire - rated construction. 3. Construction -gap firestopping occurring within fire -walls, floor or floor -ceiling assemblies. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 2 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING j n LJ LJ n fl n; TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 4. Construction -gap firestopping in smoke partitions. 5. Through -penetration smoke stopping in smoke partitions. 6. Construction -gap smoke stopping in smoke partitions. 7. All ductwork and piping penetrating mechanical spaces, mechanical mezzanines, mechanical lofts, mechanical boiler rooms, or other mechanical spaces, shall be fire caulked, even if the walls are not rated. Visible piping penetrations shall be covered by split chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates. Visible ductwork penetrations shall be covered by painted angle -iron frames. C. All products shall be listed in Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory. Firestopping for penetrations and voids shall be UL -tested systems. 1. Through -penetration firestop devices (XHCR). 2. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV). 3. Through -penetration firestop systems (XHEZ). 4. Fill, void or cavity material (XHHW). D. All material shall be tested per American Society for Testing and Material Standards, ASTM E814: Standard test method for fire tests of through -penetration firestops. E. Firestopping for penetrations and voids shall be UL -tested systems. 2.7 HANGERS Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell 2. Michigan Hanger 3. Tolco 4. PHD 5. Anvil 6. Holdrite 7. Approved equal B. Provide all anchors, hangers and all supports for piping and equipment included in contract. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard, commercially -accepted pipe hangers and accessories. D. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of ASME B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping, and Manufacturers Standardization Society Documents MSS SP -58 and MSS SP -69. 2.8 INSERTS AT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Holdrite BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 -.3 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 2. Buckaroos 3. Cooper 4. Metro Supply Company 5. Value Engineered Products, Inc. -6. Hydra-Zorb Klo-Shure 7 -series or 8 -series strut -mount and Clevis 7. Approved equal B. Insulated pipe inserts shall be provided at hanger, support, anchor, and guide locations on piping requiring insulation. The insert is to consist of either hydrous calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate foam insulation (urethane) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe with a 360 -degree PVC (1/16" thick) or galvanized steel jacket (20 gauge minimum). Inserts are to be installed on piping during piping installation, by the Piping Contractor. Provide continuous insulation vapor barrier. Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic. C. For elastomeric insulation, provide Hydra-Zorb Klo-Shure 7 -series 8 -series strut -mount or Clevis Hanger Insulation Couplings or approved equal. D. Insulation and covering shall meet the flame spread index and smoke developed index as noted in the International Building Code. E. Insert thickness shall match Code -required insulation thickness as a minimum. F. Provide pipe covering protection saddle for piping on rollers; Anvil figure 160 through 166A or approved equal. G Inserts for piping in plenums shall have appropriate flame/smoke spread rating. 2.9 SUPPORT FOR ROOF -MOUNTED PIPING A. Manufacturers 1. Blox 2. Dura-blok 3. Mifab 4. Approved equal B. For piping run across roof areas, provide the following support system, detail the type and locations of the different configurations required, and submit for approval prior to starting work: C. Mount on roof per manufacturer's recommendation; do not penetrate the roofing material. Receive approval from the roofingcontractor before gluing down bases. Support bases are to be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Do not exceed support assembly weight limits or that of the roof. Coordinate with the Architect and GC prior to installing the specified system. E. Secure piping to the support system. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 4 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 2.10 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Minimum efficiencies of electric motors shall comply with the Washington State Energy Code. B. For VFD applications, provide motors rated for VFD service (inverter ready) only. 2.11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Manufacturers: 1.. Jay R. Smith 2. Milcor 3. Mifab 4. Approved equal. B. 16 gauge steel door and frame with concealed hinge and cylinder lock. Provide matching latches/locks keyed the same for multiple panels in a project. When "B" dimension is 24" or more, provide additional latches at the top and bottom of door. Provide finish and material as noted in Part 3 — Execution. 2.12 CONCRETE INSERTS A. B. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell 2. Kinsdorf 3. Elcen 4. Approved equal. Inserts in concrete for the suspension of piping and equipment shall be provided by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Inserts in "poured -in-place" concrete shall be Grinnell 282 galvanized, or approved equal. 2.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. B. Manufacturers: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries 3. Amber -Booth 4. I.S.A.T. 5. Flexicraft 6. Twin City Hose 7. Approved equal. General BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 230020-5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 1 If equipment is internally isolated by the manufacturer, internal isolation (base and isolator) shall be equivalent to the scheduled base and isolator and the isolator shall meet the scheduled spring static deflection. 2. Size anchoring bolts to withstand lateral seismic shear and isolate bolts from direct contact with structure using bolt isolation washer and bushing. 3. Bases specified in the schedule can be supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment if they meet the specification given herein. 4. Electrical connections shall be made with floppy length of flexible cable. 5. Piping in connected to vibrating equipment shall be supported from resilient ceiling hangers or from floor mounted resilient supports. C. Pipe Isolation - General 1. Hung Type Isolators: Double -Deflection Neoprene Hanger to 4", Deflection - 30 degree Swing Spring and Double Deflection Neoprene Hanger - 6" and larger. 2. Isolator Deflection: 1/4" to 4", 1" - 6" and larger. 3. Motion Restraint Snubber: seismic restraint cable, rod clamp for standard 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" unistrut, and clevis cross brace. D. Piping not requiring sway bracing is as follows: 1. Piping in mechanical spaces less than 1". 2. All other piping less than 2-1/2". 3. Piping suspended by hangers 12" or less in length measured from the top of the pipe to bottom of hanger support where the hanger is attached. E. Air Handling Unit or Inline Fan - Up to 5000 CFM 1. Base Type: Integral structural steel base. Structural steel support members with welded - on isolator support brackets and pre -located and drilled anchor bolt holes, supplied by the equipment manufacturer with the equipment. 2. . Hung Type Isolator: 1" Deflection - 30 degree Swing Spring and Double Deflection Neoprene Hanger. 3. Floor Type Isolator: 1" Deflection - housed/restrained cast open -spring isolators. 4. Flex Connector: Flexible duct connection manufactured from UL listed fire -retardant neoprene -coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, with minimum density of 30 ounces per square yard. 5. Motion Restraint Snubber: Seismic Restraint - Cable. F. Air Cooled Condensing Units 1. Base Type: Integral structural steel base. Structural steel support members with welded - on isolator support brackets and pre -located and drilled anchor bolt holes, supplied by the equipment manufacturer with the equipment. 2. Floor Type Isolator: Neoprene waffle pads, ,40 durometer hardness, minimuml/2"; maximum loading 60 psi. 3. Flex Connector: Flexible pipe connection for refrigerant piping; see Section 23 23 00. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 6 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 2.14 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Where non-metallic piping is buried, provide detectable aluminum foil plastic -backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3" minimum width, color -coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "Caution: Buried Water Piping Below" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYING OUT WORK A. Locate all general reference points as established by the General Contractor and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, grading for utilities and other work executed under the Contract. Exercise proper precautions to verify figures shown on drawings, before laying out work and be responsible for any errors resulting from failure to exercise such precaution. The coordination of the utility installation with the final site grading and elevation by the General Contractor shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Locate existing utility lines which will be affected by the building location before any footing work begins Report conflicts with the Plans to the Owner's representative for adjustment before proceeding with the work. Failure to follow this instruction will result in the contractor being required to alter his work at his own expense. 3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable portions of the Electrical Section of the Specifications, and shall conform to all applicable codes. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP A. Furnish and install all equipment for a neat and finished appearance. If, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, any portion of the work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner, or has been left in a rough, unfinished manner, Contractor will be required to remove and reinstall the equipment, and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's representative, without any increase in cost to the Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 7 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE#2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.4 EXCAVATION - GENERAL 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING A. Perform all necessary excavation, shoring and backfilling required for the proper installation of work inside the buildings and premises, or outside as may be necessary. Slope sides of excavation to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. B. Excess excavation shall be backfilled with gravel or sand and mechanically compacted to give full support to the piping. In case of sewer lines in rock excavation, the excavation shall be made at least 6" deeper than required and backfilled with sand to outside invert grades to provide cushion. No underground lines shall be covered until the installation has been approved by the Owner's representative, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. All backfill shall be thoroughly compacted. C. No cinders shall be used for backfilling where steel, iron or copper piping is used. All trenches near or under footings shall be cut only after approval of the Owner's representative, and all backfilling of such trenches shall be according to his direction. D. All items of grading which will in any manner affect the bearing capacity of the soil foundations upon which will be placed floor slabs, walls, column footings or piping beds shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. All soil foundation areas which will in any manner support any of the above stated construction will be compacted by the use of mechanical tampers to at least 95% of the maximum density of the soil foundations, as determined by the compaction control test, in accordance with the "Method of test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils, ASTM Designation D1557." The moisture control at the time of compaction shall be uniform throughout the area and shall not vary more than 5% above or below the optimum moisture content as determined by the above described Compaction Control Test." Place fill in 8" loose layers, each layer compacted. Division 31, (31 23 16 - Excavation, 31 23 23 Fill, 31 26 16.13 Trenching), shall provide Excavation, Fill and Trenching for the Mechanical Contractor, as needed to complete his work. 3.5 EXCAVATION DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations, and from a flooding project site and/or surrounding area. B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. C. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions, outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collection points or run off areas. Do not use trench excavation as temporary drainage ditches. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 8 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING j r"t n i j R J f'1 (I j rj.4 0 fl 0 fl j J r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 3.6 EXCESS EXCAVATION MATERIAL A. Dirt and debris from trench excavation shall be disposed of by this contractor, as directed by the Owner's representative. 3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Lay piping in straight lines with uniform slope, leave no pockets. Care shall be taken to keep all foreign materials out of the piping during installation. Where ground water is present, provide suction pumps to keep trenches free of water, and cap ends of piping exposed to ground water when work is interrupted. B. Piping and ductwork run above the floor SHALL NOT BE LOCATED OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS OR SWITCHBOARDS, except where located above a structural ceiling, or with drain pans approved by the AHJ. This piping includes, but is not limited to, heating water lines. C. Isolation valves: Provide isolation ball or butterfly valves with positive shutoff on all inlets and outlets of all major pieces of equipment to facilitate serving and removal of such equipment without the necessity of draining the associated system. These valves are required even if not shown on the Plans. 3.8 OPENINGS IN PIPING AND DUCTWORK Keep all openings covered tightly with plastic during the work. 3.9 PIPE SLEEVES A. General: Provide pipe sleeves for piping passing through foundations, walls, floors, partitions, and roof to allow piping to pass freely through. B. Foundation Walls: Where piping passes through walls below finished grade, but does not enter the building spaces, the sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Provide a modular seal between the sleeve and the piping. C. Building Walls (Below Grade) and Floor Slabs: Where piping passes through building walls below grade, and floor slabs on grade or below grade, the sleeves shall extend a minimum of 1" inside the building wall or above the finished floor level, and shall be made watertight and gas tight by the appropriate modular seal. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. If the sleeve and modular seal are subject to trapping water on the top side, pack with water resistant foam and caulk with flexible caulking or grout. D. Building Walls and Floor Slabs (Above Grade) - New Construction: Where piping passes through concrete walls or floors within the building, the sleeves shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the pressure and concrete pouring operation without deforming or rupturing. Sheet BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 9 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING Metal Ductwork with end slit and formed into flanges is not acceptable. Sleeves shall extend 1" above the finished floor. Sleeves in walls shall be flush on both sides. E. Building Walls (Above Grade) - Existing Construction: Where piping passes through concrete or masonry walls, provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves. Where piping passing through is insulated, the sleeve shall be large enough to permit the covering to pass through. Where the wall is . a fire separation, the opening between the sleeve and insulation shall be sealed with intumescent material; see Paragraph "Fire Integrity" in this section. The wall around sleeves shall be patched to original finish, and covered with Chrome plated floor and ceiling plates F. Piping Subject to Expansion: Where piping is subject to motion due to expansion, such as hot water heating mains, the sleeve shall be made large enough to allow free motion. Where piping passing through is insulated, the sleeve shall be large enough to permit the covering to pass through. 3.10 WALL/FLOOR PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Where piping or ductwork passes through any wall, floor or ceiling, it shall be fitted with chromium -plated escutcheons or stainless steel angle/trim rings for ductwork, with suitable set screws or other approved holding device. Where extended sleeves are necessary, the plates shall be of sufficient depth to cover the sleeves. 3.11 CHASES IN CONCRETE A. Where the installation of equipment and piping requires a chase in concrete or masonry walls, such chases shall be provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall arrange for such chases with the General Contractor, in time to not delay the progress of the work. If the Mechanical Contractor does not cooperate, causing extra work to be done, the Mechanical Contractor shall do the work at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. 3.12 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Inserts shall be installed in forms as work progresses. B. See structural detail for hangers in pre -cast floor panels system. 3.13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General 1. Submittals: The Contractor shall submit, prior to installation, the following information and data for approval. a. Data Sheets on all cataloged items to be used. b. Sketches covering all specially designed hanger assemblies and fabrications. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 10 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 2. Where thermal movement will occur, the hanger assembly must be capable of supporting in all operating conditions. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each hanger location, in order to prevent excessive stress on piping, ductwork, and/or equipment. 3. See paragraph VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS this section. 4. See Specification Section 23 19 13 for HVAC Piping Insulation. 5. Concrete Inserts: Where piping or ductwork is supported from the concrete structure, inserts shall be provided for rod sizes up to 3/4". Where support rod sizes exceeds 3/4" diameter or where load exceeds the recommended load for the inserts, use two inserts with a trapeze -type connecting member below the concrete. 6. Where piping or ductwork is to be supported from building steel, beam clamps shall be used. Beam clamp selection shall be for the required load and the configuration of the steel at the point of attachment. Drilling holes in the steel for hanger rod will not be permitted unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Use only adjustable side beam clamps (Type 25); standard beam clamps are not acceptable. 7. Angle Clips: Where piping or ductwork is to be supported from building wood structure, angle clips shall be used with lag bolts sized to support the load in shear. Any attachment to wooden structural members shall be subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer. 8. Hanger Rods: Hanger rod size shall be selected on the basis of loading from the following table: 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/4" 610# 1130# 1810# 2710# 3770# 4960# 6230# 8000# 11630# 15700# 20700# 27200# 9. Hangers shall be subject to tensile loading only. Where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, use suitable linkage in hanger rod to permit swing. DO NOT BEND RODS. 10. All rods shall be electro -plated to prevent corrosion. 11. All rods shall be double -nutted with lock washer and cut washer, on both ends if applicable, and excess rod on the bottom shall be cut flush and ground for safety. 12. Brackets and Racks: Where piping or ductwork is run adjacent walls or steel columns, welded steel brackets shall be used as base supports. Multiple pipe racks or trapeze hangers shall be designed and fabricated to suit conditions. 13. Vibration Control: Provide a vibration .control hanger within a mechanical room and at the first three hanger locations from any motor operated equipment. Hanger shall consist of steel frame and spring with neoprene washers. 14. Auxiliary Steel: All auxiliary . steel necessary for the installation of the hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, and shall receive one shop coat of primer paint. B. Hangers for Piping: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 11 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 1. Riser Clamps (Vertical Piping): Piping shall be supported at each floor with a riser clamp or at sufficient intervals to carry the weight of the piping and that of its contents. Stacks shall be supported at their base by a concrete pier or by a suitable hanger located on the horizontal run, close to the riser. Riser clamp extensions shall rest on the building structure where possible; auxiliary steel supports shall be provided where it is impractical to rest directly on the building structure. 2. Hanger Spacing for Piping: The maximum allowable spacing for pipe hangers shall be in accordance with the following. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings, etc., occur, closer spacing will be necessary and shall be based on the weight supported and recommended loads for the hanger components. a. Copper Tube and Piping - Soldered, Brazed or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 1-1/2" and smaller, 6'; 2" and larger, 10'. 2) Vertically - Each floor, not to exceed 10'. See note 1. b. Steel Piping - Threaded or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 3/4" and smaller, 10'; 1" and larger, 12'. 2) Vertically: Every other floor, not to exceed 25'. See note 1. c. Steel, Brass and Tinned Copper Piping for Gas - Threaded or Welded. 1) Horizontally: 1/2", 6'; 3/4" and 1", 8'; 1-1/4" and larger, 10'. 2) Vertically: 1/2", 6'; 3/4" and 1", 8'; 1-1/4" and larger, every floor level. d. Notes For Above: 1) Vertical water lines may be supported in accordance with recognized engineering principles with regard to expansion and contraction when first approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Hangers - Horizontal Piping: a. General: All hangers shall be provided with means of vertical adjustment. The following schedule shall be followed to select acceptable hangers for the type of service. 1) Non -Insulated steel Piping: a) Adjustable Split Ring Swivel Hanger b) Adjustable steel Band Hanger c) Clevis Hanger 2) Non-Insulated.Copper Piping: a) Copper Tubing Hanger , b) Copper Tubing Band Hanger c) Copper Tubing Clevis Hanger 3) Insulated Steel Piping: a) Adjustable Steel Band Hangers with Shield b) Clevis hanger with Shield. 4) Insulated Copper Piping: a) Adjustable steel Band Hanger with Shield. b) Clevis hanger with Shield. 5) Insulated pipe inserts shall be provided at hanger, support, anchor, and guide locations on piping requiring insulation. See paragraph "Inserts at Hangers and Supports" in this Section. b. Roller Hangers: Provide roller hangers for all applications where thermal movement causes hanger rods to deviate more than 4 degrees from vertical, or longitudinal movement exceeds 1/2". Provide roller hangers used in conjunction with protection saddles to suit the insulation thickness. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 0020 - 12 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING c. Trapeze Hangers: Where piping is grouped in parallel, provide manufactured strut or trapeze hangers consisting of two steel angles bolted back-to-back, with space between for a hanger rod at each end. Where the length of angles is greater than 24", there shall be three rod supports. Piping shall be able to move independently, and hanger spacing shall be dictated by the smallest pipe. d. Anchors, Guides and Sliding Supports: Shall be as shown on the drawings or, as necessary to prevent/excessive stress in either piping or equipment. C. Hangers for Ductwork: 1. Reference and comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Table 4-1 - Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size, and Table 4-2 - Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct for the following: a. Strap and Rod Sizes b. Hanger Spacing 2. Steel Cables a. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 602 b. Stainless -Steel ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. c. End Connections: Cadmium -plate steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service, with an automatic locking and clamping device. 3. Duct Attachments: Sheet -metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws, compatible with duct materials. 4. Support materials shall match ductwork materials (i.e. provide stainless steel support materials for stainless steel duct, galvanized steel support materials for galvanized steel ducts, and aluminum support materials for aluminum ducts). 5. Hanger and Support Installation: a. Reference Table 4-1 - Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size, and Table 4-2 - Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct. b. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheetmetal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum interval of 16 feet. c. Install upper attachments to structure. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING (NEW WORK) A. Furnish dimensions and locations of openings to other Contractors doing the work. Provide ample time to avoid delays and unnecessary labor. Cutting and patching made necessary to admit work, repair defective material or workmanship, or by neglect to anticipate proper requirements, shall be done by the General Contractor at the expense of the Mechanical Contractor. 3.15 CUTTING.AND PATCHING (EXISTING STRUCTURE) A. All necessary cutting and patching of existing structures necessary for installation of mechanical work shall be done by the Mechanical Contractor as directed by the Owner's representative. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 13 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING B. All surfaces must be patched upon completion of the work to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. Final finish of all patched surfaces shall be done per Architectural finish schedule, by the General Contractor. All excavation necessary for the Mechanical Contractor shall be performed by the MC. Surfaces shall be patched as hereinbefore specified and all backfilling shall be done in accordance with requirements of this section and other related notes in the Contract Documents. If none specified, restore to original condition. 3.16 ACCESSIBILITY A. Locate valves, damper operators, etc., so as to be easily accessible in mechanical spaces or through access panels, specified hereinafter. Otherwise, obtain Owner's representative's approval of location. B. Any equipment requiring maintenance clearances for servicing of filters, motors, compressors, etc., shall be carefully installed to avoid servicing problems. Failure of contractor to comply with this requirement shall be sufficient cause for contractor to make all necessary changes at no cost to the Owner. To avoid problems with interpretation of the NEC, allow 42" for all electrical clearances. 3.17 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Locations of panels shall be carefully selected during construction, so as not to be located behind cabinets, etc. Coordinate closely with the Architectural and Electrical Plans before installing panels. B. In areas such as janitor's room or on painted walls, etc., access panels shall be prime -coated and painted by the General Contractor; install before surrounding surfaces have been painted.. In areas such as toilet rooms, the access panels shall be stainless steel or chrome -plated. In other finished areas such as on ceilings, all access panels shall have the same type of finished surface as that of the surrounding area. C. Verify with the Owner's representative location and finish prior to ordering; failure to get the Owner's representative's approval may result in replacement of access panels at the Mechanical Contractor's expense. Minimum size of access doors is 12" x 12"; actual size depends on the specific circumstance, and panel shall be large enough to accomplish replacement or repair of the item requiring access. The Owner's representative shall have the final say on whether or not the access is of sufficient size. D. E. F. Provide access panels for all concealed valves for all piping. Doors shall have cylinder lock latches, all keyed alike. Provide fire -rated access doors for one-hour or two-hour rated walls and ceilings; units shall be UL labeled. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 14 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.18 MECHANICAL ACCESSES 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING A. Provide suitable access to all mechanical equipment requiring servicing, maintenance, replacement, or repair. In concealed spaces where access has not been provided by the Architect by means of doors, hatchways, walkways or other means, provide wall or ceiling access doors of a type suitable to the Owner's representative, sized to provide easy access to all equipment. Location of such doors shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades, to avoid conflict therewith, and such locations shall be approved by the Owner's representative prior to installation of access panels. B. In addition to building access openings, provide access panels on ducts where required to service fire dampers, damper operators, and other associated equipment. All access doors providing access to mechanically furnished panels, control boxes and filter compartments shall be provided with fully -hinged, easily -opened access doors. Minimum size is 12" x 12", unless access area prevents that size. Consult Owner's representative prior to installing smaller sizes. 3.19 PAINTING, TAGS, ETC. A. Field painting of all mechanical equipment, piping etc., located in and exposed in occupied spaces, shall be by the General Contractor. See Architectural painting specification. B. Identification Tags: Provide identification tags for each main shutoff and control valve throughout the building indicating the system served. Tags shall be black phenolic plastic with white engraved inscription attached with chrome chain. Mechanical Room: Provide valve tag lists under glass, one for the Boiler Room and one for the remaining areas of the building. Coordinate location with Owner's representative. Each major item of Mechanical Equipment shall be provided with the name of the item, i.e., Exhaust Fan No. 2, etc., in labels of black phenolic plastic with white engraved inscription. Minimum size of lettering is 1" with a maximum of 2". Select appropriate sizes for the size of the equipment being labeled. Align labels with edges of equipment and locate labels so as to be visible. For ceiling exhaust fans, provide additional tag on grille. 3.20 Pipe Markers: 1. Piping throughout the building shall be equal to Brady Corporation No. B-946, M.S.I. No. MS -900, meeting or exceeding ANSI A13.10-1981. Pipe markers shall consist of two wraps of arrows in the direction of flow, color, and wording as indicated in the schedule following. Stencils shall be visibly located and spaced on maximum 20'-0" centers for long straight pipe runs. Stencils shall be located on both sides of a wall, within the first 3'. 2. Color Code Schedule: (Service, Color, Stencil) Hot Water Supply Yellow Hot Water Return Yellow Waste and Vent Lines Yellow Gas Piping Yellow BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING H.W.S. H.W.R. D.W.V. GAS 23 00 20 - 15 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 3. Ceiling Tile Access Labels: Where it is necessary to remove ceiling tile(s) to access mechanical equipment, backdraft dampers, motorized dampers, remote control sensors, valves/controllers, combination fire/smoke dampers, filters, valves, volume dampers, etc., provide and install round 1/2" diameter, yellow, self-adhesive labels on the metal ceiling grid, visible near all four corners of each tile requiring removal. 3.21. TEMPORARY HEAT A. Heating equipment may be used as temporary heating units during construction, provided the following conditions are met. 1. Agreed upon by all of the following, Architect, Engineer, and Owner, in writing. 2. Require a system protection plan be submitted to and approved by the Owner's representative. This plan shall include daily inspections of filter material. 3. Contractor shall provide and document daily inspection of all filtering materials to assure filtering material remains in place. 4. Building must be clean of all dust before starting units. 5. General Contractor must provide temporary filter media (80-85% efficient) for all return air, fresh air, exhaust and relief air grilles, registers, and diffusers. 6. System shall run in 100% outside air mode to help prevent construction dust from entering return ductwork. If dirt work or landscaping is still being done, delay startup until all exterior dust creating operations have been completed. 7. Grilles, registers, and diffusers must be covered with filter material when sanding that produces fine dust in the air or concrete grinding is taking place, even if the equipment is not operating. 8. All windows, doors, or other openings in building must be closed off and secured. 9. Systems should not be run when fine sanding is being done in the space -such as sheetrock dusting and wood floor sanding. 10. Contractor shall be responsible for a complete duct cleaning if ductwork is found to be dirty. 11. Upon completion of the job, Mechanical Contractor shall furnish new filters for all equipment, size and type as specified hereinafter. Filters to be installed prior to occupancy or the start of TAB. B. Temporary throw -away filters shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor as required during the construction phase. Mechanical Contractor shall remove and dispose of temporary filters after construction is complete, and install final filters as specified for the completed project, before final acceptance of the project. C. If acceptance is delayed due to construction delays, the General Contractor shall provide replacement filters for those found dirty and arrange for their replacement. Additional filters or a filter contract, as required by the Mechanical specification, shall not be installed or start until the building has been accepted. D. The General Contractor shall be given one warning about failure to follow the dust preventive measures. Upon the issuance of the second warning, all equipment will be secured, and will not be turned on again until the building is complete, all dust producing operations have been completed, and the building vacuumed. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 16 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.22. TEST PLUGS AND GAUGES 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING A. Pressure or temperature test plugs shall be installed on inlet and discharge of all pumps, coils, boilers and other hydronic equipment, even if they are not shown on Plans. B. Pressure or temperature test plugs shall be installed adjacent all temperature and/or pressure sensors, even if they are not shown on Plans. - C. A minimum of six compatible pressure gauges (including pressure gauge adapters) and six compatible temperature gauges shall be provided. D. P & T test plugs included on other devices that serve the same purpose and that provide the same information are acceptable; duplicates are not required. 3.23 EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION A. All exhaust fans, air handling units, heat pumps, and other HVAC equipment shall have all lubrication fittings extended to the equipment exterior. The Mechanical Contractor shall grease ' all equipment prior to startup. 3.24 FIRE INTEGRITY A. All penetrations of fire -rated walls, ceilings, roofs or floors via ductwork, piping and air terminals must be protected by fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, appropriately -rated assemblies, and caulking to maintain integrity of structure. 3.25 CLEANING UP A. Comply with requirements of the General Specifications. - B. Ducts shall be maintained as clean as possible during erection, and shall be'blown clean before the building painting operations are. started. Ducts and apparatus casings shall be thoroughly cleaned before fans and filters are operated. Installed ductwork and equipment openings shall be sealed to prevent contamination of construction dust, debris and moisture. Uninstalled ductwork and equipment shall be securely covered to prevent contamination or the insulation getting wet. Uninstalled ductwork and equipment shall be stored on pallets or dunnage that prevents water reaching the ductwork. If ductwork or equipment is found to be dirty or wet, this contractor shall be responsible for replacing such items. Contaminated or wet duct shall be spray painted with high visibility paint and removed from the site immediately. After equipment has been used for any purpose, such as adjusting, testing, or temporary ventilation, filters shall be replaced and exhaust/return.ducts shall be cleaned. Use temporary filters with 80% to 85% filter efficiency during construction. Cover all openings with temporary filters if startup, test and balance, or commissioning starts prior to all work being completed in the building. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 0020 - 17 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING C. Remove tags, shipping labels, etc., from all ductwork in exposed areas, whether ductwork is painted or not. 3.26 CAULKING A. Caulk all openings and flash around all piping, equipment, and ductwork passing through roof, floor, and walls. All caulking shall be water resistant. See also paragraph "Fire Integrity" for rated walls, ceilings, roofs, or floor penetrations. B. All piping and ductwork penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors shall be caulked. A chrome - plated escutcheon plate shall be installed at each visible piping penetration of walls, ceilings, or floors. All duct penetrations of walls, ceilings or floors shall be flashed with 3" x 3" 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal angle for concealed ducts, and stainless steel angle for exposed ducts. 3.27 OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Contractor is responsible during all periods of balancing and testing. Provide temporary utilities as required. 3.28 TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTION A. Test all work thoroughly and systematically, both during construction and after completion. Notify Owner's representative 48 hours in advance of all tests. Tests shall be maintained until approved. Tests shall be as hereinafter specified. B. The Contractor shall test the completedinstallation as in regular service. Any defects or imperfections that may show up are to be promptly corrected. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire system and all parts thereof for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall repair or replace any part which may show signs of failure during that time, if such failure, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, is due to imperfections in material or to improper workmanship. C. No system, whether prescribed for testing or not, shall be covered or concealed below ground, in walls, in ceiling spaces, or generally from ease of viewing, without first notifying the Owner's representative. Failure to notify the Owner's representative for inspection of concealed systems shall be cause to require this contractor to uncover and recover such systems at no additional cost to Owner. D. A log of all tests shall be kept. The log shall note, dates, time of day test started, system or portion of system tested, length of test, test results, and who witnessed the test (AHJ, Owner's representative, or GC). Contractor shall insert legible name of witnesses. Contractor to submit a copy of the contractor's test log monthly to the Owner's representative. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 18 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING U} } 1 fl j i j J j I, 0 n ti n } 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING E. Review the project to determine when final inspection is appropriate and advise Owner's representative. Mechanical Contractor is required to complete his work before requesting final inspection. F. See specification section of piping used for test methods or procedures used. G. Conduct refrigeration leak test on all DX equipment prior to installation on or in buildings. H. Prior to repair, modification or tying into existing hydronic systems, take test samples from the system to be analyzed for glycol type, concentration, and/or other ingredients. Test report shall be forwarded to the Owner's representative. 3.29 FINAL INSPECTION A. This contractor shall thoroughly review and inspect the project to determine when final inspection is required, and shall so advise the Owner's representative. It shall be understood that the work is to be essentially complete. If such"is not the case and more than one final inspection and one backcheck are necessary, this Contractor may be billed for the additional backchecks at the then governing rate for the personnel involved. The final inspection punchlist shall be legibly signed on a copy of the punch list by a person responsible for the trade involved, and transmitted to the Owner's representative, before a backcheck will be scheduled. 3.30 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. All equipment and material installed by this contractor shall be properly protected from damage during the course of construction. B. In attic or"other spaces where piping such as condensate drains, heating lines, refrigeration lines, etc. have been installed at floor level and interfere with foot traffic, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide covers to protect this piping. Wood or other such material will be acceptable. Where duct plenums or duct runs interfere with normal traffic patterns of maintenance personnel, the sheet metal contractor shall provide a wooden "bridge" over the ducts to prevent damage. C. Protect walking paths in mechanical spaces. Maintain 6'-8" headroom minimum, for all piping and ductwork. If required clearance is not possible, obtain permission from the Owner's representative to violate the above requirement, and comply with protective measures required. 3.31 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Exercise maximum precaution to protect the building and equipment from damage of any kind, and in particular, prevent water and dust seepage into new equipment. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 19 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.32 BALANCING WORK 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING A. Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing as required in this section of the specification. 3.33 INSTRUCTION PERIODS FOR•OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Scope: Following installation of mechanical work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner's representatives. B. General Description of Instruction Periods: Each period shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures, temperature control settings, and available adjustments. C. Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration shall be given to the Owner's representative at least two weeks prior to the instruction periods, and agreement reached as to the date at which the instruction periods are to be performed. Advise Owner's representative two weeks prior todate when ready to conduct instruction and demonstrations; receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangements. D. Schedule an additional instruction period for the off-season. That is, if initial instruction period takes place during the heating season, schedule another during the cooling season, or vice versa. 3.34 ON-SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SAFETY MEASURES A. During its progress, all work shall be subject to observation by the Owner's representative, and of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, State and Local Inspectors. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be totally responsible for conditions of the j obsite, including safety of all personsand property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Owner's representative to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the . adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" in the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the State and/or Federal Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in .doubt as to whether he is or is not in compliance with State and/or Federal regulations. Furthermore, the Contractor distinctly assumes all risk or damage or injury to any persons or property wherever located resulting from any action or operation under this contract or in connection with the work. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 20 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 3.35 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING UTILITIES AND SHUTDOWNS A. General: Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements. B. Shutdowns: While building is in operation, utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for weekends, holidays, or at night, if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings.. The actual time and date is to be coordinated with and approved by the Owner's representative at least 72 hours in advance. C. Costs: The Contractor shall include in his bid proposal, all costs •associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtimework, schedule changes, or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. D. Liquidated Damages: The Contractor shall reconnect utilities at the end of utilities shutdown period. If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work and return the utilities service within the time limits herein specified, or any extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as part of the Contract, to pay the Owner the liquidated damages commensurate to the loss of building usage with the amount as specified in the project Supplementary General Conditions. 3.36 A. DRAFT STOPS It shall be the responsibility of each contractor performing his trade to verify with Architectural Plans and to maintain the integrity of draft stops, whenever his work requires penetration of these areas. Patch as required to maintain integrity of draft stops. 3.37 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative for starting and testing equipment. B. Prepare a manufacturer's startup report, and turn over to the Owner's representative and Commissioning Agent. 3.38 COMMISSIONING A. This Contractor will be required to participate in the commissioning process. See Section 23 08 00 and the Commissioning Section in the Architectural section of the Specification. The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the start-up forms and be available to assist in the commissioning process. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in his bid all cost associated with his portion of the commissioning process. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR 23 00 20 - 21 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building B. 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING As a minimum, the following Mechanical Items shall be commissioned, see Commissioning section. 1. All HVAC equipment. 2. Heating/cooling systems. 3. Exhaust fans. 4. Energy management and control systems. END OF SECTION 23 00 20 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 23002.0-22 Q 0 J 9 0 0 9 0 0 a 0 a 0 D a 0 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers and Arrows. D. Ceiling Tile Access Markers. E. Valve Chart Frame. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. B. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification, including matching size and colored arrows. - B. ChartandSchedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves, on As-Builts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building B. Seton Identification Products C. Marking Services, Inc. D. Approved equal 2.2 NAMEPLATES 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height, Equipment: 1 -1/2". 3. Background Color: Black. 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. B. Tag Lettering: First Line = System Abbreviation; Second Line = Consecutive Valve Numbers, staring at 01. C. Beaded Chain: #6 x 4-1/2" - Nickel Plated. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS & ARROWS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Arrows: Nominal sizes and colors to match pipe markers. 1", 2" and 4". D. Size of pipe markers: 1. 3/4" to 1-1/4" OSD of Covering = 1/2" letters. 2. 1-1/2" to 2" OSD of Covering = 3/4" letters. 3. 2-1/2" to 6" OSD of Covering = 1-1/4" letters. 4. 8" to 10" OSD of Covering = 2-1/2" letters. 5. Over 10" OSD of Covering = 3-1/2" letters. 2.5 CEILING TILE ACCESS MARKERS A. Description: Vinyl or plastic markers, 1/2" diameter minimum with color coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & .Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red. 3. Plumbing Valves: Green. 2.6 VALVE CHART FRAME 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Description: Anodized aluminum frame, letter size, to hold typewritten chart, under clear plastic window. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install plastic nameplates and markers with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion. B. Install tags with nickel plated chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install a circular wrap of arrows at each .end of the pipe marker. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers completearound pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Identify all mechanical equipment; air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices, etc. with plastic nameplates. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify ALL valves with tags. H. Tag automatic controls, instruments, valves and relays. Key to control schematic, show on control As-Builts. Provide tags identical to valve tags. First line = abbreviation [EMCS]. Number consecutively starting at 01. Provide Valve Chart Frames and Control Device Lists on walls in an accessible location, well lighted space, in each Mechanical Space. (Does not include Janitor Rooms). Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, and flow direction. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20' on center for straight runs, including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Provide ceiling tile access markers to locate Mechanical Equipment, Filters, Valves, Dampers, etc., above T -bar type panel ceilings. Locate on the metal ceiling grid near all four corners of the tile requiring removal. K. Install Valve Chart Frames and Valve Lists on wall in an accessible, well -lighted location in each Mechanical Space. (Does not include Janitor Rooms). END OF SECTION 23.05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 -4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. C. - Commissioning activities. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements: Commissioning requirements that apply to all types of work. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC MN -1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council. B. ASHRAE Standard 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and -Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. C. - NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau. D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. E. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 • SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Submit name of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing agency and TAB supervisor within 30 days after award of the Mechanical Contract by the General Contractor. Include a list of the last 12 projects completed with a list of the respective Owner's representatives and a contact phone number for each. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Submit for Review. 2. Submit for forwarding to Owner's Commissioning Authority. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 3. Submit plan twelve weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work, or sooner. 4. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, system capacity, and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, and formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Identification and types of measurementinstruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the ductwork and piping drawings during the process. e. Final test report forms to be used. f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including: 1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type). 2) Diffuser proportioning. 3) Branch/sub-main proportioning. 4) Total flow calculations. 5) Rechecking. 6) Diversity issues. g. Expected problems and solutions, etc. h. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example: 1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. i. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this. j. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. k. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.). 1. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity. . m. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.). n. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. o. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency). p. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency. q. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution: C. Field Logs: Submit at least twice a week to General Contractor, Owner's representative, and Commissioning Authority. Label accordingly. If no field logs are submitted, it will be assumed that no work was being done during this period. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2 n n n n 1 j 0 r - U n I j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING D. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation. E. Progress Reports. Provide preliminary/hand-written balance report no later than one (1) week after completion of work. No progress payments will be authorized if a preliminary balance report has not been submitted. F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Owner's representative and for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance - manuals. 2. Provide reports in,hard cover, 3 -ring binder, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 3. Include actual instrument list with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Use report format recommended by TAB standard. If none of these apply, follow ASHRAE Standard 111. 5. Units of Measure: Report data in I -P (inch -pound) units only. 6. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name of project. e. Project location of project. f. Project Architect. - g. Project Mechanical Engineer. h. Project' General Contractor. i. Project Mechanical Contractor. j. Project Controls Contractor. k. Owner's Commissioning Agent. 1. Report date. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting. 1.5 DALT DUCT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING - ASSISTANCE A. M.C. to provide HVAC equipment mechanics to operate and assist with HVAC equipment and HVAC ductwork mechanics to provide the field required test ports and other modifications needed to perform the DALT. M.C. to ensure that these support personnel are present at the agreed upon times. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center. District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1.6 INSULATION PRIOR TO TAB OR DALT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING A. Do not allow insulating of ductwork or piping prior to TAB and or DALT testing. If project is behind schedule, the Owner's representative may agree to partial insulation prior to completion of testing, if the TAB contractor agrees. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. M.C. to provide conformed construction drawings and specifications to the TAB firm, if available. If not available, issue the same drawings that are being provided to the other Subcontractors, along with any RFIs or Change Orders that may affect their work. The M.C. is responsible to keep the TAB firm up to date with pertinent contract documents and correspondence. C. M.C. to provide approved equipment submittals and project schedule for the use by the TAB subcontractor. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Include a warranty for 24 months after final acceptance by the Owner, during which time the Owner may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, coil or deyice listed in the project test report. TAB contractor to contact other project subcontractors if their technical assistance is required to make any test or adjustments required. Maximum number of rechecks shall not exceed a yearly total of 5% of the entire project. However, if the balance reports are proved to be inaccurate, the Owner may request the entire project be re -balanced during the warranty period. See paragraph Commissioning in this Section for recheck and failure criteria. The above warranty shall be included in the original contract bid proposal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN -1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Standard 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 4 n `1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT —► AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 J Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building j 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. D. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located. E. TAB Team Members: Submit their qualifications along with the Companies qualifications and the TAB Supervisor qualifications. TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract, must be full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel are allowed to do TAB work on this contract. • F. Pre -Qualified TAB Agencies: 1. Hardin & Sons (253) 862-6645. 2. Air Balance Associates (206) 528-4788. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, have HVAC contractor replace or install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Confirm duct system leakage is minimized. Have HVAC contractor coat or recoat joints that may not be up to SMACNA standards prior to testing. 12. Service and balance valves are open. UB. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. C. The testing and balancing work is a part of the overall project, and shall be shown on the project schedule with a reasonable time allotted to accomplish the work. If the Owner, General Contractor and or other Subcontractors have delayed the project and there is no time left for the 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 5 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING testing and balancing to be performed, the following remedies shall be considered by the Owner; 1. The time of completion shall be extended. 2. The Owner's representative and General Contractor shall negotiate overtime for the Test and Balancing Contractor to accelerate the time required to complete his work. 3. The Owner's representative may allow some systems and requirements to be waived or extended to a later time period. 4. Or other remedies as suggested by the Test and Balance Contractor that will allow him to ' complete his work and is agreeable to the Owner's representative and General Contractor. 5. Any changes in the contract terms or specification requirements shall be in writing prior to the testing and balancing work commencing. D. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions, or that a letter allowing revised conditions has been received by the TAB contractor. E. The TAB contractor shall exercise care while performing his work so as to avoid damaging the work of other trades, particularly paint and ceiling tile. If damage is incurred by the Test and Balance Contractor, repairs shall be made at their expense. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Hold Pre -balancing meeting two weeks prior to starting TAB work. • 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced, plus General Contractor, Owner's representative, and Owners Commissioning Agent. 2. Complete Project Examination noted above prior to Pre -balancing meeting, so that any problems found that would prevent balancing can be dealt with at the meeting. B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Owner's representative and Owner's Commissioning Agent to facilitate spot checks during testing. C. Request HVAC contractor provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10% of design for supply, return, and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total airflow to within plus or minus 10% of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10% of design. 3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING , 23 05 93 - 6 n n fl n n n n J n L n n b n j n J n u n n n r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken on the Plans and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order; replace belt guards, close access doors, close doors to electrical switch boxes, and restore thermostats to specified settings. G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner's representative and Owner's Commissioning Agent. 3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. C. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. F. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50% loading of filters. H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. J. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. K. At completion, be sure all test holes in low pressure duct have pressure sealing plugs installed; duct tape is not allowed. Test holes in high pressure duct shall employ threaded and capped duct air fittings. L. The Test and Balance contractor shall include in his bid the cost of one sheave change for each belt driven air moving piece of equipment. If a sheave change is not required, the test and balance contractor shall submit to the Owner a credit for the work that was not required. The total cost of sheave changes shall be listed as a separate line item on the Schedule of Values and submitted to the Owner's representative for approval prior to the first pay application. 3.7 COMMISSIONING A. See Section 23 08 00 for additional requirements. B. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities. C. Re -check final TAB report data as directed by the Owner's Commissioning Agent. 1. Original TAB agency shall execute the re -checks. 2. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work. 3. Failure of more than 10% of the re -checked items of a given system shall result in the rejection of the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TAB report, and repeat random re -checks. 4. For purposes of re -check, failure is defined as follows: a. Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10% of instrument reading. b. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20% of instrument reading; for inlet vane or VFD outside air compensation system using linear proportional control, deviation of more than 30% at intermediate supply flow. c. Temperatures: Deviation of more than one degree F. d. Air Pressures: Deviation of more than 10% of full scale of test instrument reading. 5. For purposes of re -check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccuracies will have little or no impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution system served by one air handler or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller or the condenser water system. In the presence of the Commissioning Authority, verify that: 1. Final settings of all valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices have been permanently marked. 2. The air system is being controlled to the lowest possible static pressure while still meeting design loads, less diversity. This shall include a review of TAB methods and established control setpoints. Physically verify that at least one leg, from fan to diffuser, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 8 n 171 L_. fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING during full cooling, has all balancing dampers for terminal units taking off downstream of the static pressure sensor wide open, with the damper for the terminal unit on the critical leg 90% or more open. No seasonal tests are required. 3.8 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage from nameplate 5. Phase, voltage, amperage from actual, no load conditions. 6. RPM ' 7. Service factor 8. Starter size, rating, heater elements 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore B. Air Cooled Condensers: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Manufacturer 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 8. Number of compressors C. Cooling Coils: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual 10. Water flow, design and actual 11. Water pressure drop, design and actual 12. Entering water temperature, design and actual 13. . Leaving water temperature, design and actual 14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual 15. Air pressure drop, design and actual D. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10. Show filter static pressure, specified and actual 11. Inlet pressure 12. Discharge pressure 13. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 14. Number of Belts/Make/Size 15. Fan RPM 3.9 Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow 8. Return air temperature 9. Outside air temperature 10. Required mixed air temperature 11. Actual mixed air temperature 12. Design outside/return air ratio 13. Actual outside/return air ratio B. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM 3.10 Duct Leak Tests: 1. Description of ductwork under test 2. Duct design operating pressure TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 3. Duct design test static pressure 4. Duct capacity, air flow 5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 6. Test apparatus a. Blower b. Orifice, tube size c. Orifice size d. Calibrated 7. Test static pressure 8. Test orifice differential pressure 9. Leakage B. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test (final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 11 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Glass Fiber Flexible Duct Wrap Insulation B. Glass Fiber Rigid Duct Wrap Insulation C. Jackets for Duct Wrap Insulation D. Duct Liner E. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation F. Laminated Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation for Exterior Use 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ductwork and Casings: 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. D. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material). F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. I. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association. DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION J. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. J.,. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept materials on-site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. Do not store excess material in the building. Provide securedry storage on-site, to store material. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required bymanufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. DUCT INSULATION 230713-2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 2- PRODUCTS 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION INSTALLED INSIDE BUILDINGS Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. n 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Knauf Fiber Glass B. Johns Manville Corporation C. Owens Corning Corp D. CertainTeed Corporation E. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation F. Armacell International G. Approved equal. n 2.3 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE Insulation ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0% by weight. n U B. Usage: HVAC Air Distribution Systems Ductwork - Interior - Medium to Low Temperatures. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: J1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM. E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber -based adhesive. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.. j 0 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building • 2.4 DUCT LINER 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION A. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber, complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board with impregnated surface and edges coated with polyvinyl acetate polymer or acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21. 1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. 3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: a. 1" Thickness: 0.45. B. Usage: Line Duct as detailed in paragraphs below. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire -retardant type, ASTM C916. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with press -on head, per SMACNA standards. 2.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CLOSED -CELL INSULATION Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International 2. Approved equal B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3, in sheet form. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. C. For exterior applications, provide jacketing as specified. 2.6 LAMINATED FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CLOSED -CELL INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR USE A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International (Armaflex) 2. Approved equal Closed -cell insulation with 12 mil embossed laminate surface with self-adhesive backing, UV - resistant. 2.7 JACKETS A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.040" sheet. DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2" laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016" thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8" wide; 0.010" thick stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ductwork pressurization has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and'dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards; have a copy on site for reference. Employ only skilled tradesmen specializing in this kind of work. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air, below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Insulated ductwork conveying airabove ambient temperature: 1. Provide with standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. Duct Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90% coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.3 SCHEDULES Provide thickness of insulation to meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code and or local codes whichever are more stringent. DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION B. Special Requirements - DUCT LINER. 1. Duct liner for this project will be 1" unless noted otherwise in Contract documents. 2. Contractor to show extent of duct lining on shop drawings to avoid confusion, omission and possible rejection. 3. Line ALL of the following ductwork (see exceptions in #4 below); a. Rectangular Supply ductwork b. Rectangular Return ductwork. c. Rectangular Relief ductwork. d. Rectangular Exhaust ductwork, from the fan to the last air terminal, unless such ductwork contains corrosive gases. e. Rectangular Transfer Air ductwork. f. Rectangular Outside Air ductwork. 4. Fiberglass liner shall not be used in the following applications: a. Within 6' of outside air intakes or outside grilles. (Duct wrap shall be used in these locations). b. In ductwork operating at a velocity in excess of the liner's maximum recommended velocity. c. In air duct systems exposed to weather or buried below grade that are not sealed and protected against water incursion. d. Plenums exposed to the outside air, including intake, relief or exhaust plenums. e. In contact with any HVAC equipment wet surface. 5. Additional requirements . may be shown on the plans and are in addition to the requirements specified herein. C. Special Requirements - DUCT, WRAP. 1. Wrap all of the following ductwork: a. Outside air ductwork within 6' of an outside air intake. b. Concealed supply, return, and outside air ductwork and plenums, except within 10' of the floor in Mechanical spaces. (Use blanket insulation wrap.) c. Exposed supply, return and outside air ductwork and plenums, located within 10' of the floor in Mechanical spaces. Provide rigid insulation with vapor barrier jacket. d. Ductwork that is located on the exterior of the building: Wrap with laminated flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. e: Plenums. f. Outside air and relief/exhaust air ductwork from damper to building opening, louver, or hood. Insulation R -value is to match building envelope insulation R - value regardless of location, per the requirements of the Washington State Energy Code. g. Blanket insulation for primary air ductwork (supply duct between AHU and terminal units), regardless of location. 2. Duct wrap shall not be used in the following applications: a. Do not wrap exposed duct in conditioned spaces for, which the duct serves. D. Provide insulation thicknesses per Washington State Energy Code as a minimum. END OF SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation, Rigid and Semi Rigid B. Cellular Glass C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation D. Jackets 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts. 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. D. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal. Insulation. F. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. - G. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. H. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. I. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. J. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. K. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT. AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION L. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. M. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. N. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. O. NFPA 255 Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association. P. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Including All Revisions. Q. All insulation material and installation shall meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code requirements. R. All codes and standards shall be latest version as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept products on-site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 2 n j 1 n i j n 1 j Li TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION B. - Provide thickness of insulation to meet or exceed Washington State Energy Code and/or local codes, whichever is more stringent. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS: A. Knauf Insulation B. Johns Manville Corporation C. Owens Corning Corporation D. CertainTeed Corporation E. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation F. Armacell International G. Nomaco Insulation H. Approved equal. 2.3 GLASS FIBER A. Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. -Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume. B. Semi -Rigid Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume. C. Usage: Domestic Water, Hydronic Piping - Interior - Medium to Low Temperature, bare tanks and uninsulated HVAC equipment. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper, Foil -Scrim -Kraft, '(FSK), with 2" overlapped joints, with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm -inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048" stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12" centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Coating: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -35 or equal.. b. Compatible with insulation.. HVAC PIPING INSULATION - 23 07 19 -.3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building G. Insulating Mastic/Coating: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -10/11 b. Approved equal;. H. Combination Coating and Lagging Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Childers Model CP -50A HV2 b. Approved equal. 2.4 CELLULAR GLASS A. Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1. 1. 'K' value: 0.37 at 100 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F. 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch. 4. Water Absorption: 0.2% by volume, maximum. B Usage: Hydronic Piping - Exterior - High to Low Temperature. C. Flashing Compound and Vapor Seal: 1. Childers Model CP -70 2. Approved equal. 2.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection:. Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. B Usage: Refrigeration Piping - Interior/Exterior. C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. D. Interior pipe installations: No finish is required over concealed insulation indoors. Apply two coats of manufacturer's recommended finish where insulation is exposed indoors. E. Inserts: Provide inserts at all support locations; see Section 23 00 20. F. Exterior pipe installations: 1. Apply one coat of manufacturer's recommended finish 2. Jacket: Provide jacket; seal water tight. a. Stainless steel jacket and fittings. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 4 n j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.6 JACKETS 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION A. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Thickness: 0.016". 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8" wide; 0.010" thick stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. 3.3 Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.4 INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards, have a copy on-site for reference. Employee only skilled tradesmen, specializing in this kind of work. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. j E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: Provided by this Contractor. See Section 23 00 20. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10' above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket and aluminum fitting covers. K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with stainless steel jacket with seams located on side of horizontal piping, lapped so that water cannot enter; make watertight. L. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat maintenance tape. Refer to heat maintenance tape manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping B. Refrigerant C. Moisture and Liquid Indicators D. Valves E. Strainers F. Check Valves G. Pressure Regulators H. Pressure Relief Valves I. Filter -Driers J. Solenoid Valves K. Expansion Valves L. Electronic Expansion Valves M. Receivers N. Flexible Connections • O. Insulation P. Jackets 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 00 20 - Basic Materials and Methods; Inserts B. Section 23 07 16 - HVAC Equipment Insulation C. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation D. Section 23 63 13 - Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers E. Section 23 82 16 - Air Coils REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES F. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls • 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 495 - Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. B. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid -Line Driers; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. C. AHRI 730 - Flow -Capacity Rating and Application of Suction -Line Filters and Filter Driers; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. E. AHRI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. F. ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15). G. ASHRAE Standard 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. H ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. I. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. J. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. K. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. L. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. M. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. N. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; and errata. J f' L O. MSS SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES P. MSS SP -69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. Q. MSS SP -89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. R. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes S. UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical T. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: The following items shall be provided in the system, if they are not provided integral to the equipment, they shall be provided exterior to the equipment on the piping. A. Liquid Indicators: 1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. 2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver. 3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves. B. Valves: 1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.. 2. Use gauge taps at compressor inlet and outlet. 3. Use gauge taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet. 4. Use check valves on compressor discharge. 5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. C. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. D. Strainers: 1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid line strainer. 3. On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line. 4. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer. E. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors. F. Filter -Driers: 1. Use a filter -drier immediately ahead of liquid -line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators. 2. Use a filter -drier on suction line just ahead of compressor. 3. Use sealed filter -driers in lines smaller than 1/2" outside diameters. 4. Use sealed filter -driers in low temperature systems. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 5. Use sealed filter -driers in systems utilizing hermetic compressors. 6. Use replaceable core filter -driers in lines of 1/2" outside diameter or greater. 7. Use replaceable core liquid -line filter -driers in systems utilizing receivers. G. Solenoid Valves: ,1. Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump -out or pump -down compressor control. 2. Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems. 3. Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down. H. Receivers: 1. Use on large systems, sized to accommodate pump down charge. See equipment schedule. 2. Use on systems with long piping runs. I. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. B. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and isolation for servicing. E. Submit certifications of compliance with ASME (BPV IX) for each welder. F. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. J n -11 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this ! �: section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Each shipping unit of aluminum refrigeration tube shall be marked with metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier; with soft straight lengths identified with a tag indicating that the product was manufactured in accordance with ASTM B210 and complies REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 4 J n n LJ j fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES . • with ASME B31.5; and each hard temper straight length identified throughout its length by a marking not less than 3/16" in height and a legend spaced not greater than 3' on center that includes the designation "ACR" and pipe outside diameter. Each hard temper straight length shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM B210 and comply with ASME B31.5. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures shall conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. C. Provide Welder Certification in accordance with ASME (BPV IX). D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection shall be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling. in. place. B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers; seal prior to shipment and keep sealed until connected into system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, H58 hard drawn cleaned, dehydrated and sealed marked ACR on hard tempered straight tubing. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy, with between 5% & 15% silver. B. Seamless Aluminum Tube and Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Tubing: 1) Reflock 2) Approved equal. b. Fittings 1) Reflock 2) Lokring REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT , AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 3) Approved equal. 2. ASTM B210 complying to ASME B31.5 Seamless Aluminum tubing and fittings may be substituted. If Aluminum tubing is substituted for copper, the joints must be made without the use of heat. Any joint fitting must be UL or ETL tested to UL 207 and listed for joining refrigeration tubing using either aluminum or copper tubing. 3. ETL tested to UL 207 and ETL listed copper to copper fittings for connecting copper -to - copper refrigerant piping. 4. ASTM B210 seamless drawn aluminum tubing, cleaned and capped in accordance with ASTM B280, and complying with ASME B31.5 for allowable strength, and wall thickness, with fittings tested to UL 207 and certified by ETL. 5. ETL tested to UL 207 and IETL listed aluminum -to -aluminum or copper -to -aluminum fittings for connection of refrigerant piping. Fittings shall have dielectric coatingto allow connection of dissimilar metals. Fittings shall be certified to a working pressure of 600 psi. C. Pipe Supports and Anchors: 1. Conform to ASME B31.5. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2" to 1-1/2": Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2" and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 8. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded bothends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Zinc plated. 2.2 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: 410a, combination of difluoromethane (HFC -32) and pentafluoroethane (HFC -125) as defined in ASHRAE Standard 34. Verify with equipment manufacturer prior to charging. B. Other refrigerants are not to be used unless prior approval is obtained from the Owner's representative. 2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Sporlan Valve Company 2. Approved equal B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 6 9 n u TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.4 VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Sporlan Valve Company 2. Approved equal 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES B Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating. Maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C. Packed Angle Valves: 1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends. Maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. - D. Ball Valves: 1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals. Maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F. 2.5 STRAINERS A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass. Maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.6 CHECK VALVES Manufacturers: 1. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2. Sporlan Valve Company 3. Approved equal B. Globe Type: 1. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor -bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum temperature of 300 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 425 psi. C. Straight Through Type: 1. Brass body and disc, phosphor -bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat. Maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2. Sporlan Valve Company 3. Approved equal B. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psi range. Maximum working pressure of 450 psi. 2.8 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Sporlan Valve Company 2. Approved equal B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB, selected to ASHRAE Standard 15, with standard setting of 235 psi. 2.9 . FILTER -DRIERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3. Sporlan Valve Company 4. Approved equal B. Cores: 1. Molded or loose -fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant. 2. Activated alumina or activated charcoal 3. Filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns 4. Of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines. 5. Construction: UL listed. 6. Replaceable Core Type: Steel shell with removable cap. 7. Sealed Type: Copper shell. 8. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type. 2.10 SOLENOID VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3. Sporlan Valve Company 4. Approved equal REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23.00 - 8 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES B. Valve: AHRI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case of coil failure), and integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends. Maximum working pressure of 500 psi. C. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector, color coded lead wires, and integral junction box with pilot light. D. Electrical Characteristics: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2.11 EXPANSION VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric 2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3. Sporlan Valve Company 4. Approved equal B. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non -replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well. C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. 2.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2. Sporlan Valve Company 3. Approved equal B. Valve: 1. Brass body with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor drive. C. Evaporation Control System: 1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, preselection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass. D. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, airtemperature alarm (high and low), REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control. 2.13 RECEIVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2. Sporlan Valve Company 3. Approved equal B. Internal Diameter 6" and Smaller: 1. AHRI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psi maximum pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve. C. Internal Diameter Over 6": 1. AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1); 400 psi with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and magnetic liquid level indicator. 2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Circuit Hydraulics, Ltd. 2. Flexicraft Industries 3. Penflex 4. Reflock 5. Approved equal B. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9" long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. C. Double braided stainless steel flexible pipe connections with Reflock end connections. 2.15 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR 1NSULATiON A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. B. Usage: Refrigeration Piping - Interior / Exterior. C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 10 LJ 9 9 u r 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES D. Interior pipe installations: No finish is required over concealed insulation indoors. Apply two coats of manufacturer's recommended finish, where insulation is exposed indoors. E. Inserts: Provide inserts at all support locations; see Section 23 00 20. F. Exterior pipe installations: 1. Apply one coat of manufacturer's recommended finish 2. Jacket a. Stainless steel jacket and fittings; make watertight. 2.16 JACKETS A. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Thickness: 0.016". 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8" wide; 0.010" thick stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing.pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2" space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12" of each horizontal elbow. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 8. Provide vibration isolation hangers for all refrigeration piping. Refrigeration piping shall not be attached to the building structure. G. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. I. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 00. J. Flood copper piping system with nitrogen when brazing. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports,and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. M. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 19. N. Follow ASHRAE Standard 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. O. Provide replaceable cartridge filter -driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass. Use bi- directional units for heat pumps. P. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. Q. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. R. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. S. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. T. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 26 27 17. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 12 r, i j 9 y Lit 0 �.J 9 n u 11 v�y 9 0 fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES U. Contractor may substitute Reflok or Lokring fittings (refer to Part 2 - Products) for brazing of copper tubing. If Reflok or Lokring fittings are used to join tubing (copper or aluminum), brazing and nitrogen purge are eliminated. V. Exterior Insulation Applications: Cover with stainless steel jacket with seams located on side of horizontal piping, lapped so that water cannot enter; make watertight. _ 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen according to manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. Test to no leakage. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00 - 13 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct Materials B. Ductwork Fabrication C. Manufactured Metal Ductwork and Fittings D. Duct Cleaning 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 00 20 - Basic Materials And Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. C. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets. E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. • ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association. F. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association. G. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.; National Fire Protection Association. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology& Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS H. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. I. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. J. SMACNA (FGD) - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. K. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication & Installation Guidelines. L. UL 181 - Standard for Factory -Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. M. All codes and reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission of the Architect and Engineer. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. Meet or exceed SMACNA requirements for all sheet metal systems. B. Leakage Testing (High Velocity): Test the system for leaks in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Maximum permissible leakage shall be 1% of the total system flow. All audible leaks shall be eliminated. Leakage Testing General Requirements: Maximum permissible leakage shall be as noted in the Washington State Energy Code, or as noted in these specifications, whichever is more stringent. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for all materials. fl L B. Shop Drawings: Indicate ducts, fittings, and particulars such as gage, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to starting work on systems. Duct design pressure rating is posted on (� contract drawings, shop drawings shall reflect pressure class as shown. Shop drawings are .to F i clarify duct routing taking into consideration structural members, electrical equipment, and other, mechanical equipment. Contractor to submit shop drawings for review. C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) = HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. . HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, 90B, 96 and SMACNA standards. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install lined duct in wet locations. Contractor to keep ends of lined duct covered at all times. If lined duct becomes wet or dirty, remove from jobsite and replace with new duct. The General Contractor to provide weather protection if his schedule requires the sheet metal subcontractor to working ahead of the building being dried in. B. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. C. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A. Provide duct assemblies as shown on Plans. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653 FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. B. Non -Galvanized Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS, cold -rolled commercial steel. C. Stainless Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.' D. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. E. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Manufacturers: a. Thermaflex Model G -KM b. Approved equal 2. Chlorinated polyethylene core supported by helically wound coated spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; black polyethylene vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 6" wg positive and 1" wg negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F continuous. d. R-4.2, meeting UL 181, & NFPA 90A - 90B fire codes, self -extinguishing. e. GREENGUARD certified for Children and Schools. f. Acoustically rated. g. Warranted for 10 years h. Maximum length 6'. is Install per manufacturer's recommendations. j. Run insulated flexible duct as straight as possible. F. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A 666, Type 304. G. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. H. Type II Hood Exhausts : -2" w.g. pressure class. 1. For exhaust ductwork from hoods for cooking or dishwashing appliances that produce heat, steam or products of combustion and do not produce grease or smoke, such as steamers, kettles, pasta cookers, and dishwashing machines. 2. Construct of 18 gage stainless steel using continuous external welded joints in rectangular sections. Provide neoprene gaskets at flanged connections. 3. Fire dampers in wet air exhaust shall be of stainless steel construction. 4. Construct of galvanized steel, constructed, joined and sealed in an approved manner. 5. Slope ductwork to drain back to hood. Where it is not possible for duct to be self -draining back to the equipment, provide low point drain pocket with copper drain pipe to sanitary system using appropriate air gap fitting. Provide access door in side of duct at drain pockets. I. Outside Air Intake: 1" w.g: pressure class, galvanized steel. J. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and SMACNA High Velocity Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 4 r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. E. T's, bends, and elbows: Construct according to SMACNA (DCS). F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding. 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. H. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. I. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide minimum 12" long plenum same size as the louver, sloped to drain to the exterior. Line plenum with self -adhering rubberized asphalt flashing as shown on Plans; seal plenum to louver frame and duct. Connect duct to plenum with 45 degree divergence fittings. J. Contractor may use the Ductmate connection system at his option. System consists of flanges with integral sealants, corner pieces, clips, bolts, cleats and gaskets. 2.4 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers 1. Metal -Fab, Inc. 2. SEMCO Incorporated 3. United McGill Corporation 4. Local shop fabrication by installing contractor. 5. Approved equal B. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated on drawings. C. Single Wall Round Duct And Fittings: Materials shall be per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Galvanized Sheet Metal. Provide spiral duct: HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. General: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. 4. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 5. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. 6. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 7. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8" and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. 8. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. Cut rods flush with second nut. 9. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. 10. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 6' maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. 11. The sheet metal contractor shall protect the fabric duct to assure that the system is clean on completion of installation and at project acceptance. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Repair any damage caused to duct lining caused by cleaning operation. 1. Duct cleaning required, when contractor fails to protect duct prior to installation and or keep ends covered once duct is installed. 2. On remodeled systems, clean existing ducts prior to connecting new ducts to existing systems. See drawings for extent of systems to be cleaned. B. Remove all labels from exposed ductwork, including ductwork in mechanical spaces. Labels may remain on ducts in concealed locations only. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r t 1 r 1 f TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building END OF SECTION 23 31 00 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 - 7 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ( 0 kl, L.4 ..4 0 0 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION.INCLUDES A. Air Turning Devices/Extractors B. Backdraft Dampers C. Dryer Vent Box - D. Duct Access Doors E. Flexible Duct Connections F. Motorized Dampers G. Remote Access For Volume Control Dampers H. Sleeves For Ducts Through Non -Fire -Rated Walls I. Volume Control Dampers and Splitter. Dampers 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS . Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association. B. NFPA 92A - Standard for Smoke -Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pbressure Differences. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and -Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. F. UL 555S Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. G. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.4 SUBMITTALS 2333 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:. Provide instructions for fire dampers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. , 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide six (6) of each size and type of fusible link used on this project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger 2. Price Industries 3. Ruskin Company 4. Titus 5. Approved equal B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension, steel construction, with individually adjustable blades and mounting straps. C. Multi -blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, with push-pull operator strap. 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company 5. Approved equal 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18" x 18" or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment shall be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. 2.3 DRYER VENT BOX A. Manufacturers 1. In-O-Vate Technologies 2. Construction Solutions 3. Approved equal. B. Aluminized or powder -coated steel box for terminating clothes dryer flex hose. C. Provide box with 1 -hour fire rating at 1 -hour rated walls. D. Locate at exhaust duct from dryer as shown on plans. Coordinate location at rough -in so not to interfere with other trades later on. 2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acudor Products Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company 5. Approved equal B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For .insulated ducts, install minimum 1" thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12" Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18" Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24" x 48": Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Wherever ducts make connection with any air -handling device such as supply fans, exhaust fans, etc., flexible connections shall be provided. AIR DUCT. ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 ounces per square yard. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2" wide. 2.6 MOTORIZED DAMPERS A. See Section 23 09 13 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. B. All motorized dampers shall be installed under this specification unless .specified as a standard integral component of a particular piece of equipment, e.g., packaged kitchen heat recovery unit. Installation shall be under the supervision of the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. C. Dampers shall be full size of duct, be sealed between damper frame and duct, and shall operate _ without binding on duct wall. Provide access panels for motorized dampers, 12" x 12" minimum. D. Where motorized dampers are installed in fiberglass ductwork, provide sheet metal sleeve that also contains the access noted above. E. Belimo operators are the only electronic operators accepted. 2.7 REMOTE ACCESS FOR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS Manufacturers: 1. Ventlock 2. Young Regulator 3. United Enertech 4. Approved equal B. Provide Ventlock Model 666 concealed damper regulator, where required. Provide Remote Power Balance System, damper and control, where shown. 2.8 SLEEVES FOR DUCTS THROUGH NON -FIRE -RATED WALL A. Provide sheet metal sleeves around ducts, penetrating through walls or floors. Pack opening around duct with fiberglass and caulk with resilient acoustical caulk and then install 3" x 3" - 18 gage sheet metal closure angle all around duct, overlapping corners, secure to duct and wall. Caulk and install closure angle on both sides of wall. When insulated on the exterior, butt to closure angles. See .Section 07 84 00 for Fire Caulking requirements, Fire Caulking installation by Section 07 84 00 Subcontractor or General Contractor. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 B 0 n 9 0 0 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.9 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS AND SPLITTER DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation 5. Approved equal 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Volume Control Dampers, shall be installed on all branch duct take -offs to diffusers, grilles and registers. Do not provide or use dampers at the face of the diffuser, grilles or registers for balancing. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24" size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24". 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4" diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw . E. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricated for duct sizes up to 6" x 30" F. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8" x 72". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. G. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12" and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. H. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on .stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30", provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION_ A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service. Center District Administration Building 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide additional backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to the outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 18" x 18" size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent the equipment. F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branchesare taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. H. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to Air Terminal Units. I. Provide balancing/volume dampers on all branch duct take -offs to diffusers, grilles, and registers. These will be used in addition to dampers at the face of the devices. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. A factory -authorized commissioning agent shall fully demonstrate all functions of the fire life safety monitoring and testing system in conjunction with Owner's Commissioning Agent. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 0 3 U' 9 0 0 0 J 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center. District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers. B. -Ceiling Supply Registers/Grilles. C. Ceiling Egg Crate Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles. D. Wall Supply Registers/Grilles. E. Wall Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles. F. Louvers, Mechanical. G. Roof Hoods. H. Goosenecks. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. B. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. C. ASHRAE Standard 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. E. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, throw, drop, terminal velocity and noise level. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70. C. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Grilles/Registers/Diffusers 1. Titus 2. Price Industries 3. Kees 4. Krueger 5. Carnes Company 6. Tuttle & Bailey 7. Approved equal - B. Louvers 1. Ruskin Manufacturing 2. Greenheck 3. Carnes Company 4. Loren Cook 5. Approved equal 2.2 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square, stamped, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Surface mount type. C. Accessories: Provide radial opposed -blade, butterfly, and combination splitter volume control damper; removable core, sectorizing baffle, equalizing grid, operating rod extension, anti - smudging device, and gaskets for surface mounted diffusers with damper adjustable from diffuser face. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 2 J r c 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.3 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, one-way deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4" margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish. 2.4 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" grid core. B. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish. C. Frame: 1-1/4" margin with countersunk screw mounting. D. Frame: Channel lay -in frame for suspended grid ceilings. E. Accessories: 1. Provide integral gang and face operated opposed -blade damper. 2. Provide with filter frame. 2.5 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille. with deflection as listed in the schedule.. B. Frame: 1-1/4" margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish. 2.6 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Steel grille with 3/8" bar spacing and 0°deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4" margin with countersunk screw. mounting. C. Fabrication: 16 gauge steel frames and 14 gauge steel blades, with factory off-white enamel finish. Bars shall be reinforced by perpendicular, steel support bars spaced on 6" maximum centers. L 0 r AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 3 0 ,'! TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.7 WEATHERPROOF LOUVERS 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Louvers shall be furnished for installation in exterior walls as shown on the Plans. Louver blades shall be fabricated from anodized aluminum or galvanized steel sheets, and shall be provided with a frame of galvanized steel or aluminum structural shapes. Sheet metal thickness and fabrication shall conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. Blades shall be accurately fitted and secured to frames. Edges of louver blades shall be folded or beaded for rigidity and baffled to exclude driving rain. Louver shall be provided with. bird screen. Louvers shall bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air performance and water penetration ratings as described in AMCA 500. B. Louver Types 1. 4" deep, extruded aluminum, Equal to Greenheck ESD -403 a. Frame . 1) Downspouts and caulking surfaces provided. 2) Wall Thickness: 0.125" nominal. b. Blades: 1) Drainable blades positioned at 37-1/2° angle and .spaced approximately 53/32" center to center. 2) 6063T5 extruded aluminum. 3) Wall Thickness: 0.125" nominal. c. Screen: 5/8" x .040" expanded, flattened aluminum bird screen in removable frame. Screen adds approximately 1/2" to louver depth. d. Mounting: Furnish with screw holes in jambs. e. Finish: -Architect to select finish from manufacturer's standard finishes. f. Variations 1) Extended sill. 2) Integral flange for face installation. 3) Front or rear security bars. 4) Filter racks. 2.8 ROOF HOODS A. Low silhouette ventilator for relief or intake applications with natural gravity or negative pressure system. 1. Hood and Base: a. Material Type: Aluminum b. Hood Constructed of precision formed, arched panels with interlocking seams c. Birdscreen: Constructed of 1/2"inch aluminum mesh, mounted horizontally across the intake area of the hood. d. Hood Support: Constructed of galvanized steel and fastened so the hood can either be removed completely from the base or hinged open 2. Provide the following Options and Accessories: a. Roof Curbs: 1) Mounted onto roof with hood 2) Material: Aluminum 3) Insulation thickness: 1" AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 4 0 r fl L r 0 rl. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 4) Curb Seal: Rubber seal between fan and the roof curb b. Dampers: 1) Type: Gravity or motorized as shown on Plans. 2) Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes c. Filters: 1) Mounted in open end racks for easy removal 2) Washable 2" aluminum mesh designed to remove contaminants from the air d. Finishes: As selected by Architect from standard finishes. e. Hood Insulation: 1" fiberglass insulation. f. Tie -Down Points: Four aluminum brackets located on hood supports, secures fan in heavy wind applications B. Spun Aluminum Intake or Relief Gravity Ventilator 1. General Description: a. For intake applications with natural gravity or negative pressure system b. Hood: Constructed of aluminum; internal structure is constructed of galvanized steel c. Birdscreen: Constructed of 1/2" Aluminum mesh, mounted horizontally across the intake area of the hood. 2. Housing: a. Curb Cap type: Hinged or Not Hinged b. Constructed of aluminum, including windband and curb cap. Windband to be one piece spun aluminum construction and maintain original material thickness throughout the housing, and to include an integral rolled bead for strength c. Curb cap to have integral deep spun inlet venturi and prepunched mounting holes. 3 Options/Accessories: a. Curb Seal: Rubber seal between fan and the roof curb b. Roof Curbs: 1) Mounted onto roof with fan 2) Material: Aluminum 3) Insulation thickness: 1" c. Dampers: 1) Type: Gravity or motorized as shown on Plans. 2) Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes 3) Finishes: As selected by Architect from standard finishes. d. Flashing Flange: 1) Constructed of aluminum 2) Pre -punched holes for installation without a roof curb 3) Hood Insulation: 1" fiberglass insulation. 4) Tie -Down Points: Four aluminum brackets located on windband e. Reducer/Adapter: 1) Material type: Aluminum C. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. Mount unit on minimum 12" high curb base with insulation between duct and curb. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS E. Install Roof Hoods level. Slope bottom of curb to match roof slope. 2.9 GOOSENECKS Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 12" high curb base. C. Color and finish type to be selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Air Terminals 1. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 2. When installed in T -bar ceilings, provide pans as necessary. 3. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connections. 4. Install insulated diffuser boxes as detailed on the contract drawings. 5. Install grilles and registers to ductwork with air tight connections. Use screws and foil tape only; do not use duct tape. 6. Provide balancing/volume dampers on all branch duct take -offs to diffusers, grilles and registers. 7. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Duct Openings: Where no grille, register, or diffuser is called out at duct openings, provide 1/2" hardware cloth over openings. D. Louvers 1. Louvers shall be installed in exterior walls utilizing framed or masonry openings: The duct or plenum attached to the louver shall have the bottom surface sloped toward the louver and shall be rigidly secured and sealed watertight to the exterior wall, such that any entrained water will drain through the louver. The louver frame shall be sealed watertight to building surface. See details on Plans. 2. If louvers are specified by the Architect and or furnished by others, they shall be installed by the Mechanical Contractor according to the _ directions provided by the Contract Documents. Mechanical Contractor to coordinate installation requirements with the Owner's representative and General Contractor, prior to the louvers being purchased. 3. Install plumb, level, and free of rack and twist. Use only stainless steel fasteners to secure louvers to the building. Fasteners are to be removable from the exterior of the building. 4. Flashings as required by building architectural details are to be provided by G.C. Caulk. and make watertight. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 6 0 1 0 c IIj r C TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 5. Provide 3" continuous galvanized closure angles and closure plates on inside head, inside jambs, and inside sill of exterior wall louvers. Caulk angles and plates prior to installation. 6. Install self -adhering rubberized asphalt flashing (Ice & Water Shield or approved equal) on the interior of plenum as shown on the Mechanical Details. 7. After installation, clean all exposed surfaces per manufacturer's recommendations and protect from damage until completion of project. END OF SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS .23 37 00 - 7 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 7 c 0 C TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured Air -Source Split -System Heating and Cooling Units B. Outdoor Unit - Air Cooled Remote Condensing Unit 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Domestic Water Piping: Indoor coil condensate drain. B. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. B. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. C. AHRI 610 - Performance Rating of Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications; Air Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. D. ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. E. ASHRAE Standard 23 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc. F. ASHRAE Standard 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air -Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. G. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings . Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc., Including All Addenda (ANSI/ASHRAE) H. ASHRAE Standard 90.2 - Energy -Efficient Design of New Low -Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.. SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service. Center District Administration Building 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING I. ASHRAE Standard 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc. J. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. K. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association. L. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association. M. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel -Burning Appliances; National Fire Protection Association. UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. Reference standards shall be the latest revision as accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplatedata, and wiring diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum five (5) years of documented experience. SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 2 n fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center ' District Administration Building 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty on units, covering parts and labor.Compressors shall have a warranty of seven years. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Mitsubishi B. LG. C. Daikin D. Approved equal. 2.2 SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING UNITS A. The Heat Pump system shall be split system with variable speed inverter compressor. The system shall consist of an outdoor unit, and a matched capacity indoor section that shall be equipped with a wired wall -mounted, remote controller. B. Provide refrigerant lines between indoor and outdoor units, factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, sealed, and insulated. Provide insulation inserts as noted in Section 23 00 20. C. Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements. 1. Efficiency: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER/SEER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE Standard 103, Washington State Energy Code, or local jurisdiction energy code, whichever is the most stringent. 2. Air Handling: See schedule. 3. Heating Performance Requirements: See schedule on Plans. 4. Cooling Performance Requirements: See schedule on Plans. D. Electrical Characteristics: See schedule on Plans. E. Basis of design is LG. 2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS - AIR COOLED REMOTE CONDENSING UNIT A. . Outdoor Units: The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory. 1. Comply with AHRI 210. 2. Refrigerant: R -410A. SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING • 3. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 23 and UL listed. B. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet between indoor and outdoor units. System shall operate at up to a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. Contractor to provide any additional required refrigerant for proper operation. .C. The outdoor unit shall be capable of cooling operation down to 0°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls (provide with wind baffle). D. Cabinet 1. Casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating. 2. Provide mounting feet welded to the base of the cabinet, of sufficient size for stability. 3. Provide with removable panel sections for servicing. 4. The fan grill shall be of ABS plastic. E. Fan 1. Units shall be furnished with DC fan motor(s). 2. Fan blade(s) shall be of aerodynamic design, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. 3. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard. F. Coil 1. Condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 2. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of an electronic linear expansion valve (LEV).The LEV shall be controlled by a microprocessor -controlled step motor. 3. All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ARC Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements, individually insulated in twin -tube, flexible, closed -cell, CFC -free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material for the insulation of refrigerant pipes and tubes with thermal conductivity equal to or better than requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, or local jurisdiction energy code, whichever is more stringent. G. Compressor 1. Compressor shall have variable speed inverter drive to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load. 2 To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. No crankcase heater is to be used. 3. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. 4. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 23 81 27 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING District Administration Building AND COOLING H. Electrical 1. Power for the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. --` 2. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. 3. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply. - v I. Mounting Pad: Precast concrete pad, minimum of 4" thick, 4" larger in all directions than unit being mounted. Install level and plumb to the adjacent building, set unit on waffle pads and secure to concrete pad. Provide drainage around unit, do not allow unit to sit in water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION L.J A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location. `r U 3.2 INSTALLATION C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. D. Verify equipment locations on the drawing, and in the field, do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum refrigeration pipe length, including elevation and fitting allowance. MC to coordinate with GC, CC and EC, prior to rough -in. E. Verifyequipment wiring and coordinate with EC, some units have power to one location, with a intertie between units and others have power to both unit locations, with control intertie. A. . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211 E. • Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15. 7 F. Pressurize and test in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 5 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 23 81 27 SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative for starting and testing unit. B. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the entire system. C. Prepare a manufacturer's startup report and turn over to the Owner and Commissioning Agent. END OF SECTION 23 81 27 L 0 tU L1J SMALL SPLIT -SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 23 81 27 - 6 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. , Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide complete electrical connections to equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association, most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. B. NEMA WD 1 — General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1999 (R 2010). C. NEMA WD 6 — Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 2002 (R 2012). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Provide detailed wiring diagrams to interconnect components for complete operation of various electrical systems, including devices and components provided under other Sections of these Documents. EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING D. Provide layouts of equipment and details of mounting method for approval prior to installation to ensure proper execution of the work. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate the work under this Section with the Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Mechanical and the Drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor fieldadjustments to accommodate the work of others. F. All devices, outlets, cabinets, equipment, panels, light fixtures, switches can be field located by Owner's Representative within 20 -feet of the designed locations prior to rough -in work without extra compensation. 1. Coordinate electrical work with mechanical installations. Verify final mechanical equipment locations with mechanical installer prior to commencement of electrical work. Connect power wiring to mechanical equipment through starters, contactors, and disconnects as required. Maintain clearances around mechanical equipment to allow access for maintenance per NEC codes and local codes. 2. Coordinate wiring interconnections for the complete operation of electrical -mechanical equipment to include items provided by other Divisions. Examine equipment connection information with manufacturer's shop drawings and submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for. equipment. 1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multi -conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 29 13. C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 05 01. D. Raceways and Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 33. E. Wire and Cable: As specified in 26 05 19. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring and energization. EQUIPMENT WIRING 262717-2. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 262717 Technology & Maintenance Service Center EQUIPMENT WIRING District Administration Building 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Li A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. `j B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connections in damp, wet or exterior locations. - C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connections with attachment plug. Li E. Provide cord and cap where field supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, . and control devices to complete. equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. -1 I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION 262717 C n r n j EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 - 3 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 262913 Technology & Maintenance Service Center ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS. District Administration Building AND DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE Scope of work under this Section includes all requirements for motor controllers (starters) to be provided and/or installed under this Contract. Motor controls to NEMA standards for each specific purpose. B. The Contractor performing the Division 26 work shall furnish motor controllers for all motors shown unless the controllers are included with the equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications. The contractor performing the Division 26 work shall install all motor controllers including all controllers not factory assembled into equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. All motors and motor controllers shall be complete and fully operational upon completion of the project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: Shall conform to or contain items called for below and unless noted otherwise, shall be full voltage non -reversing for NEMA size 3 and under. No starters smaller than NEMA size 0 and no half size starters are permitted. B. Overload Devices: Shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type. One overload shall be provided for each phase. Provisions shall be made for resetting the overload devices from outside the starter enclosure. Provide ambient compensated overload devices only when the motor is at a constant temperature and the controller is subject to a separate, varying temperature. Automatic reset overload devices are not permitted. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS 26 29 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 262913 Technology & Maintenance Service Center ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS District Administration Building AND DISCONNECTS C. Accessories: Each magnetic motor controller shall include "HAND-OFF-. AUTO" selector switch, 120V coil (unless noted otherwise), red running pilot light, green off pilot light, 100 VA (minimum) control transformer (except for 115V motors) with fused primary and secondary, two spare auxiliary interlock contacts and all other accessories required or noted. D. Enclosures: All motor controllers shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which the controller is mounted. Shall be NEMA 3R when exposed to weather. Other enclosures shall be per code or as noted. E. Combination Motor Controller: Shall be fused switch type (Class RK5), or motor circuit protector type rated for system A.I.C. minimum unless noted otherwise and containing all accessories as listed above. If externally powered control circuits are used, provide an auxiliary switch on the disconnect switch or protector and fuse in lieu of the control transformer. Switch or protector shall be capable of being padlocked in the off position. F. Manual Starters: Shall be Toggle switch type, lockable in the "off' position, with overload relays, pilot light and enclosure per above. 2.2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECTS A. Indoor shall be NEMA -1, outdoors shall be NEMA -3R. B. Refer to plans for types, sizes and ratings. C. For devices connected to existing busways, new devices shall be compatible with existing busway system. 2.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS General Electric, Square D, Cutler -Hammer Gould -ITE, Cutler Hammer. B. For enclosed circuit breaker disconnects connected to existing busways, General Electric compatible Plug -In Devices shall be used. 2.4 NAMEPLATES . Provide nameplates per Section 26 05 53. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING A. Wiring shall conform to applicable sections of these Specifications. Provide wiring from branch circuit over current device to motor controller and from controller to motor terminals, including installation of starter complete. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS 26 29 13 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 262913 Technology & Maintenance Service Center ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS District Administration Building AND DISCONNECTS B. Where motor is factory wired to VFD (variable frequency drive), provide wiring and connections to line side of VFD. C. Provide fuses per 26 05 01. 3.2 SUPPORTS Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame suitable to withstand earthquake forces. Controllers supported only by raceways are not acceptable. END OF SECTION 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS 26 29 13 - 3 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION v A. Project Locations: rl 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 J 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE ,_ A. Provide Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. The AC surge protection shall be integrated into electrical distribution equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, and panelboards to maximize performance and reliability and to obtain the lowest possible let -through voltages. C. Where an SPD is mounted outside of the electrical distribution equipment enclosure, refer to Part 3 of this Specification for enclosure specifications. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSUUL 1449, 3rd Edition: SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, - and tested in accordance with the latest applicable UL standard. 7 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals which shall include the following: 1. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Compliance may be in the form of a file number that can be verified on UL's website or on any other NRTL's website, as long as the website contains the following information at a minimum; model number, SPD Type, system voltage, phases, SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES modes of protection, Voltage Protection Rating (VPR), and Nominal Discharge Current (In). 2. For side mount mounting applications (SPD mounted external to electrical assembly), electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights, installation instruction details, and wiring configuration. 3. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted: a. Descriptive bulletins. b. Productive sheets. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as -built drawings and information for items listed above and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of the equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC. 1. A minimum of 20 -years' experience in the design, manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS systems is required. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world-class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 certified. 1.7 WARRANTY The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date of shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable National or Local code. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of manufacturer's instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each SPD shipped. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 2 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT r? AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 ,_,' Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building n .J LJ n j PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers. 1. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. 2. Square D (Schneider Electric) 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre -approved by the Engineer and Owner. 2.2 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION - GENERAL Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The MCOV shall not be less than 125% of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal -oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. 4. Protection Modes: The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being. utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table. Configuration Protection Modes Line to Neutral Wye X Delta NA Single Split Phase X Line to Ground Line to Neutral to Line Ground X X X X X NA X X X High Leg Delta X X .1 X X 5. Nominal Discharge Current (In): All SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an in less than 20kA shall be rejected. 6. The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) for the device shall not exceed the following: Modes 208Y/120 Volts 480Y/277 Volts Line to Neutral 700 1200 Line to Line 1200 . 2000 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES B. SPD Design: 1. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules shall not be accepted. 3. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 42dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL -STD -220A insertion loss test method. Products unable able to meet this specification shall not be accepted. 4. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. 5. Monitoring Diagnostics: Each SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring options: a. Protection Status Indicators: Each unit shall have a green/red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase. 1) . For wye configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L -N and L -G modes. Wye configured units shall also contain an additional green/red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection elements and circuitry in the N -G mode. 2) For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L -G and L -L modes. 3) The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and protection modes. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be accepted. b. Remote Status Monitor: The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall change state under any fault condition. c. Audible Alarm and Silence Button: The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also be an audible alarm . silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it has been activated. d. Surge Counter: The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 +/- 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short -duration button press. In SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES order to prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the surge count total. 1) The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile memory. If power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the ongoing count indicated on the surge counter's display prior to the interruption shall be stored in non- volatile memory and displayed after power is restored. The surge counter's memory shall not require a backup battery in order to achieve this. functionality. 6. Overcurrent Protection: a. The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These thermally protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. 7. Fully Integrated Component Design: All of the SPD's components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted. 8. Safety Requirements: a. The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall be maintenance free. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. b. SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall have any required conductors be factory installed. c. SPDs shall be factory sealed in order to prevent access to the inside of the unit. Side mount SPDs shall have factory installed phase, neutral, ground and remote status contact conductors factory installed and shall have an 18 -inch pigtail of conductors protruding outside of the enclosure for field installation. 2.3 SYSTEM APPLICATION A. The SPD applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel locations, switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. B. Surge Current Capacity: The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: Category C Application Per Phase Per Mode Service Entrance Locations 250 kA 125 kA (Switchboards, Switchgear, Main Entrance) High Exposure Rooftop Locations 160 kA 80 kA SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 264313 Technology & Maintenance Service Center SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES District Administration Building (Distribution Panelboards) Branch Locations (Panelboards) 120 kA 60 kA C. SPD Type: all SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 SPDs. All SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs. 2.4 LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. The SPD application covered under this section includes lighting and distribution panelboards. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments. • 1. The SPD shall not limit the use of through -feed lugs, sub -feed lugs, and sub -feed breaker options. 2. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. 3 The panelboard shall be capable of re -energizing upon removal of the SPD. 4 The SPD shall be interfaced to the panelboard via a direct bus bar connection. Alternately, an SPD connected to a 30A circuit breaker for disconnecting purposes may be installed using short lengths of conductors as long as the conductors originate integrally to the SPD. The SPD shall be located directly adjacent to the 30A circuit breaker. 5. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the panelboard. 6. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard for new panelboards with integral SPDs. 7. The complete panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed. 8. Mounting Applications Installation (SPD mounted external to electrical assembly): a. Lead length between the breaker and suppressor shall be kept as short as possible to ensure optimum performance. Any excess conductor length shall be trimmed in order to minimize let -through voltage. The installer shall comply with the manufacturer's recommended installation and wiring practices. 9. Switchgear and Switchboard Requirements: a. The SPD application covered under this section is for switchgear, and switchboard locations. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. b. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchgear and/or switchboard. c. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the switchgear and/or switchboard at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer. d. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar. e. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect (60A circuit breaker). The disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building f. g. 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES The SPD shall be integral to switchgear and/or switchboard as a factory standardized design. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 2.5 ENCLOSURES A. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as described below: 1. Interior - NEMA 1: Constructed of a polymer (units integrated within electrical assemblies) or steel (side mount units only), intended for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personal access to hazardous parts and provide a degree of protection: against the ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt). 2. Exterior - NEMA 4X: Constructed of steel for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); that provides an additional level of protection against corrosion; and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL Standards. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Drawings. 3.3 WARRANTY The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date of shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable National or local code. END OF SECTION 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13 - 7 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING . Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology. & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Drivers. E. LEDs. F. Luminaire accessories. 1.3 - REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. C. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. D. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. G. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, . photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires . including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC -rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. H. LED Luminaire Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. I. Track Lighting Systems: Provide track compatible with specified track heads, with all connectors, power feed fittings, dead ends, hangers and canopies as necessary to complete installation. J. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING A Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E. Provide low -voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. F. Self -Diagnostics: Provide units that self -monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status. G. Accessories: 1. Provide compatible accessory mounting brackets where indicated or required to complete installation. 2. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated. 3. Provide compatible accessory wire guards where indicated. r 2.4 EXIT SIGNS r A. Description: Exit signs and similar signs for special purpose applications such as area of refuge/rescue assistance. B. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. C. Self -Powered Exit Signs: 1. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. 2. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. 3. Provide low -voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING n 4 Self -Diagnostics: Provide units that self -monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test 7 and diagnostic status. j j L r I j n J 2.5 DRIVERS A. Dimmable LED Drivers: 1. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide ballasts/drivers produced by a single manufacturer. 2. Where a specific ballast/driver manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. 3. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to one percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker. 4. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. a. Daylighting Controls: See Section 260923. B. General Requirements: 1. Designed for minimum 5 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non -condensing relative humidity. 2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2. 3. Maximum Inrush Current: 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers. 4. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 5.. Comply with IEC 61347-2-13 as applicable. 6. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance. 7. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20. 8. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient. 9. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line voltage input. 10. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent; comply with ANSI C82.11. 11. Drivers to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels. 12. Constant Current Drivers: a. Support from 200 mA to 2.1 A (in 10 mA steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W or 50 W (710 mA to 1.05 A in 10 mA steps). 13. Constant Voltage Drivers: a. Support from 10 V to 40 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W. 14. Configuration tool available to optimize the following for LED fixtures: a. Light level. b. Efficacy. c. Thermal performance. 2.6 LEDs A. All LEDs: INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 265100 Technology & Maintenance Service Center INTERIOR LIGHTING District Administration Building 1. LED luminaires shall have LM79 and LM80 test reports. 2. LED luminaires shall have lighting facts label. 3. LED luminaires shall be energy star or DLC (Design Lights Consortium) rated. 4. LED luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 80. 5. LED luminaires shall have minimum L70 life rating of 80,000 hours. 6. LED luminaires shall have a minimum (5) warranty. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc -plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field -painted as directed. B. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. .Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 6 1 n I j u j n n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure surface -mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing members or to building structure. 4. Secure pendant -mounted luminaires to building structure. 5. Secure lay -in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s), minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to building structure. 7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. F. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. 2. Non -IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing. G. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. 2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. 3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet in length, with no more than 4 feet (1.2 m) between supports. 4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers. H. Wall -Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. K. Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. Exit Signs: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. INTERIOR LIGHTING • 26 51 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING M. Remote Drivers: Install in accessible location as indicated or as required to complete installation, using conductors per manufacturer's recommendations not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire. N. All luminaires shall be provided with factory installed LEDS. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. B. Test self -powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field -Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 3.7 PROTECTION . Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 8 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 271000 Technology & Maintenance Service Center TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, 27 and Division 28. B. Review the Specifications and Drawings for coordination information that apply to work under this Specification. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION 1.3 A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144`h St. Tukwila, WA 98168 SCOPE Division 01, Division 26, Division with additional requirements and . Provide complete and comprehensive cabling and termination for local area networks. 1.4 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes all necessary labor, installation, preparation, materials, equipment, services, and other items required, whether specified or not, to provide a complete and fully operational local area network cabling and jack system conforming to ANSI/TIA 568-D (Parts 1 and 3) and ANSUTIA-568-C.2 Category 6. B. The work requires installation of cabling, station jacks, patch cables, and patch panels, racks, cable tray, wire managers, 110 blocks, J -hooks, innerduct and other associated components. C. The work includes performance of diagnostic tests on all cables, connectors and components. A signed written report of all diagnostic. findings shall be provided to the Owner. Using the results of the diagnostic report, the Contractor is responsible for repairing all cable, connector and component problems. D. The Telecommunications Contractor is to provide network cable to all intercom speakers and call switches as required. Category 6 cable to be provided, installed, terminated, and tested. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT _. All wiring switches, modules, computer equipment, file servers, workstations, network interface cards, and related hardware and software will be provided by the Owner. . No other equipment furnished. 1.6 DRAWINGS AND PLANS A. All indicated data drop locations are to be cabled, including RJ45 jack at workstation end and termination and RJ45 jack at appropriate punch down blocks in head end rack. 1.7 PHYSICAL LAYER COMPONENTS All components shall be new and shall comply with IEEE 802.3ab Standards for 1000 -Base -T Ethernet over twisted pair media and ANSIITIA Standard 568 (use most current revision). All components shall be housed in appropriate equipment racks so as to assure a solid, permanent installation. Bidder shall identify each proposed data system component by manufacturer and part number including data cabling, fiber optic cabling, data and data/phone jacks, UTP and fiber optic station and head end patch cables, patch panels, mounting devices for termination blocks, and equipment racks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT All material, components, and equipment shall be new and of high quality. The components and equipment furnished must have a proven track record, and if required, the Contractor must furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All work to comply with ANSI/TIA Category 6 requirements. Specification is based on products by Superior Essex/Ortronics. B. All telecom outlet back boxes shall be 5 square 2-7/8 inch deep. Provide T&B Steel City 82181T-1-114 or equal. 2.2 WARRANTY Installer shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the Ortroinics CIP or CIP-ESP, nCompassTM Limited Lifetime static, Dynamic and applications warranty to the end user. The end user must also receive a Limited Lifetime product warranty. Refer to www.ncompass- systems.com or www.legrand.us foradditional information on the nCompass warranty. Contractor shall provide electronic media for all above listed information. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 2 LJ n. I' 0 i` 0 ' 710 n LJ r „.„ �J u 0 v 0 J j 1 LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.3 TELECOM OUTLETS 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM ANSI/TIA 568-C Category 6 modular jacks. Provide inserts for number of data outlets shown on Drawings. Plate and outlets fog white color. Provide Ortronics OR -40300664 single gang faceplate and OR -S21600 or OR -S22600 Category 6 insert, provide yellow color icon for data and blue for voice, and label. Provide fog white blanks in unused outlets. B. Phone and data are same on this project. C. Floor box outlets shall be the same as above. D. T568B Type terminations. E. Bend radius limitations must be adhered to inside the telecom outlet box. Service loops of 1-3' should be worked into the ceiling for future use. 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLE . ANSUTIA 568-C, Category 6, 4 -pair 23 -gauge. Superior Essex DataGain white, plenum rated. Part Number: 66-240-4B 2.5 RACKS A. Floor Rack: Provide 19", 2 -post floor rack, 7' high. Provide shelves per details. Ortronics OR MM6E710. B. Power Strip Ortronics No. 60400681 provide one per rack. C. Ortronics cable runway (black). D. Horizontal Wire management Ortronics OR -808044855 for copper and OR -808044915 for fiber. E. Vertical Wire Management Ortronics OR-MM6VML704. 2.6 PATCH PANEL A ANSUTIA 568-C Category 6, ports as shown on Drawings, 110 on back, RJ45 on front. Ortronics #0R-PHD66U48. B. Patch Panels for voice backbone cabling. Ortronics #OR-PHD5E6U48. C. T568B Type terminations. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT • AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.7 PATCH CABLE 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM Data: Ortronics #OR-MC6, ANSI/TIA Category 6, 4 -pair, 23 -gauge, lengths and colors as follows: Data -White Telephone -Black 3' 10 10 5' 10 10 7' 5 5 9' 5 5 2.8 TELEPHONE BACKBONE CABLE A. Pair counts as shown on Drawings. Pair count as needed for phones. 2.9 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL & CABLE A. Fiber Optic Backbone Cable Laser Optimized 12 -Strand Multi -Mode: Superior Essex # 44012NG01. B. Indoor/outdoor 6 -Strand Multi -Mode fiber optic cable: Superior Essex # W4006NGYY. C. Fiber Optic Patch Cord:. LC on both ends. Provide (48) 1 meter, (48) 2 meter, and (24) 3 meter patch cords. Ortronics P1DF series. D. Fiber Optic Patch Panel: Provide rack mounted interconnection unit with space for fibers. Provide panel adapters. All terminations in patch panels . LC Type. Ortronics OR-FCO2U-P with OR-OFP-LCD12LC adapter panels. E. Innerduct: All fiber optic cables in plastic innerduct of size required for work or as noted on Drawings. F. Fiber Optic Connectors; LC style connectors shall be reusable. The LC style connectors must be prepolished with low insertion loss. Ortronics # 205KNT9GA-50T 2.10 WRAPS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide J -hooks, B-Line#BCH64, 4" with BCHR4 retainer clip or Cablofil #CJ64. J -Hooks and cable tray are only acceptable cable supports. B. Tie wraps shall not be used. Provide Ortronics OR -7070084-00 Series Velcro wraps. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 4 fl u 0 0 1 Li 0 j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM A. All equipment shall be suitable mounted on fire rated terminal backboards, in equipment racks, or otherwise suitably solidly supported. Equipment suspended by its cable or connector is unacceptable. Placing of equipment shall be done to insure that it is readily accessible 3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION A Cable run layouts indicated on the Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Exact routing of conduit and wiring shall be governed by the location of obstructions and building structural conditions. Cable runs shall be in cable trays, raceways, and above ceiling spaces as shown on Drawings. B. All fiber cable runs shallhave a minimum 20 times the outside diameter bending radius during installation and 10 times the outside diameter post installation. C All four pair copper cabling shall have a minimum bend radius of 4 times the outside diameter of the cabling. D. Service loops are to be determined by the site manager or the associated drawings. All copper service loops shall be in a figure 8 configuration. 3.3 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Cable shall be in raceway, either surface raceway, conduit, or cable tray or supported at 5' O.C. by J -hooks where open above ceilings. Wrap cable to perform a neat and professional installation. Cable wraps shall be loose to provide no strain on cables. 3.4 CABLE LABELS A. All cables shall be permanently labeled at workstation jack, termination block and host module port to identify terminal location and on both ends of cable. Label designation shall be a continuation of the existing labeling scheme. Example: 1-1-6 = MDF -Patch Panel One -Port 6. Example: 2-1-6 = IDF-Patch Panel One- Port 6. Consult Owner for number sequence prior to submitting shop drawings. 3.5 DATA CABLE ROUTING A. All shall be routed to prevent interference with any systems such as access boxed, ventilation mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch panels, fire alarm equipment, lighting fixtures, etc. The routing must not interfere with any other service or system, operation or maintenance. Raceway shall not be placed in close contact with other devices, electrical or otherwise, that TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building. 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM will interfere with its proper operation as a transmitter of data signal. The Contractor will be responsible for rerouting any raceway that is not acceptable to the Architect at no cost. Where surface raceways are used, care shall be taken to route around existing obstacles. Ceilings, wall trim shall be neatly cut to allow installation of surface raceways only as required at permission of the Owner. Cable fill rates must not exceed 75% of the maximum allowable fill to allow for future Moves, Adds and Changes. Bend radius entering and exiting the cable tray and J Hooks must be controlled to not exceed ANSI/TIA recommendations. 3.6 DATA STATION DROPS A. All drop cables shall be installed at locations as indicated on Drawings. Exact outlet location within each room will be as indicated on the Drawings and will deviate from the drawing only by minimal shifting the outlet laterally along the indicated wall. The drop cabling shall be installed without splices from the outlets to the appropriate terminal block. B. All copper and fiber cabling must be installed and terminated using the latest version of ANSUTIA-568, ANSI/TIA-607-C, ANSI/TIA-569-D and BICSI TDMM Revision 13. 3.7 TESTING The Contractor shall test all installed unshielded twisted pair cables, termination to termination to meet ANSI/TIA Category 6 Standards and Ortonics warranty requirements including wire map, length, attenuation, return loss, near end cross talk (NEXT), delay skew, Propagation Delay, PowerSum Near End Cross Talk (PSNEXT) , Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT)and Power Sum equal level far end cross talk (PSELFEXT). The end user shall receive the test results via a memory stick. Test results must be delivered in original tester format and pdf with all tests resulting in a PASS. Tests resulting in a marginal pass (*PASS) or Fail will not be acceptable. The end user can also request a printed report for their records. 3.8 COMPANY QUALIFICATIONS A. The bidder shall be regularly engaged in the type of work specified herein. Award will be made only to a bidder who furnished satisfactory evidence that he has the technical ability, experience, equipment, personnel, and financial resources to enable him to successfully and promptly fulfill the requirements and conditions of these specifications. B. Bidder must have an installation base of at least 150 workstation drops using proposed products. C. The following Contractors are approved by K.S.D. to install the Telecommunications System: 1. Cleanline Communications. Marysville, Washington. 2. PowerCom. Bothell, Washington 3. Teknon. Seattle, Washington. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 6 fl n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.9 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM A. Terminations: All strands shall be terminated and tested.. Backboard, terminals, and patch panels shall be professionally configured, including but not limited to, cable cleats, wire harnesses, support rings, etc., and should be dressed and installed to provide a planned layout of the installation. B. Cable: Install in inner duct and rack. Install in the Figure -8 method off the reel prior to pulling. No other practice is permitted. The maximum recommended bending radius shall not be exceeded. The maximum recommended permanent bend after installation shall not be exceeded. - C. Pulling locations must utilize a dynamometer. Maximum tensile load shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Install no LB's on Fiber Optic conduit runs. 3.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLING TESTING A. Test all cable and connections for continuity and repair all defects. Testing must be completed with an Optical Loss Test Set capable of testing 0M3 fiber to the application required by the school district. Total loss budget for any fiber channel shall not exceed 2.6dB. Testing requirements must meet ANSUTIA-526-14-C. B. O.T.D.R. tests after the LC connectors are installed will be included for all strands and fiber optic power metering testing is required while on reel. Submit all test results to Architect. C. Test per Ortronics .and ANSI/TIA-568.D-3 testing requirements. The nCompass warranty requires bi-directional testing using both wavelengths. All testers must show a calibration within the 12 months prior to ensure accuracy. No Fail test results are allowed. The contractor must request a warranty from Ortonics shall be within 30 days of the project completion. Ortronics will issue a Limited Lifetime Static, Dynamic and Application Assurance channel warranty to the end user thru the contractor. END OF SECTION 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM . 27 10 00 - 7 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK r`► 0 C 0 0 0 c 0 a a 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2: District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide a complete bidder design addressable fire alarm system complete with a fire alarm control panel, remote annunciator, smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, duct detectors, audio/visual notification devices, sprinkler devices, fire/smoke dampers, door closers, door holders, pre -action systems, and all wiring. B. Refer to Site Plan Drawings for Sequencing of cabling installations. C. Program existing digital alarm communication transmitter (UDACT) for connection of the new fire alarm control panel to a UL listed fire alarm monitoring services central station per zone table refer to detail sheet or provide by point. D. Submit fire alarm design documents and shop drawings to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for plan review. Obtain fire alarm system installation permits. E. Install, program and test system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and all code enforcement authority. F. Provide fiber module and connection from the new fire alarm control panel to the campus fiber optic data network system and the Owner's UL listed fire alarm monitoring services central station. G. Contractor will provide all fire watch if the fire alarm will be out of service during replacement. H. Contractor to provide Knox Box per Fire Dept Code for each building. Provide monitoring point module and connection to Knox Box. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM - 28 31 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 26 Section "Common Work for Electrical". B. Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Cables (600 V And Less)". C. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes". 1.5 PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK — Refer to System Plans. A ADMINISTRRATION OFFICE 1. The existing EST -2 fire alarm panel is obsolete and is not supported by manufacturer. 2. Replace existing Bosch fire/security panel/dialer & EST -2 with new EST I0-1000 Fire Alarm / Dialer Panel. All existing fire alarm devices to remain. Provide programming and a complete fire alarm system test to generate an event log report with central station monitoring of all fire alarm addressable points alarm, supervisory, and troubles. 3. Provide fire alarm pariels backup batteries. 4. Existing EST G1-HDVM horn/strobes can be sync with new fire alarm panel. Program setting of the sync module to match manufacturer horn/strobes. Complete final testing of all horn/strobe circuits on normal power and backup battery. All circuit shall be tested at the end of line resistor (EOL) to document the voltage drop. 5. Fire Alarm contractor to submit drawings for Fire Alarm Permit by Tukwila Building Department. 6. Provide new as -built AutoCAD drawings by the field verification of all existing fire alarm system. Download existing program data of the existing fire alarm system. Match the existing data with new as -built drawing. Plot out 11 by 17 drawings to be provided for the final test of the existing fire alarm system. 7. Provide 1 year of central station monitoring in the base bid with an option to renew the next year. This is to maintain the warranty of the fire alarm installation. Provide a written monitoring agreement for fire alarm system for the next year to the owner. 8. Provide annual inspections of the fire alarm system after 1 year from final Fire Marshal inspection. Provide a written service agreement for annual inspections and services of the fire alarm system for the next year to the owner. 9. Provide a complete fire alarm system per specification below. TECHNOLOGY & MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTER 1. Provide new fire alarm system for building. Provide EST I0-1000 Fire Alarm /Dialer. Panel and all fire alarm devices. Utilize existing fire alarm device locations and wiring shown on fire alarm floor plan. Provide programming and a complete fire alarm system test per specification below. 2. Provide 1 year of central station monitoring in the base bid with an option to renew the next year. This is to maintain the warranty of the fire alarm installation. Provide a written monitoring agreement for fire alarm system for the next year to the owner. 3 Provide annual inspections of the fire alarm system after 1 year from final Fire Marshal inspection. Provide a written service agreement for annual inspections and services of the fire alarm system for the next year to the owner. 4. Provide a complete fire alarm system per specification below. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 2 0 t 0 Lr 0 0 L 0 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS AND LABOR (for each building separate) Provide extra materials, outlet boxes, installation, wiring, testing and programming in the quantities listed below. Install devices in locations as directed by the Owner's representative. Provide 100' of conduit and wiring for each device. Uninstalled equipment shall be turned over to the Owner's representative at the end of the project. Unused labor shall not be credited. Horn/Strobe Units: 20 % of the number of units indicated on the Plans, but not less than one. C. Smoke Detectors, Sensors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: 20 % of the number of units of each type indicated on the Plans but not less than one of each type. D. Detector & Sensor Bases: 2 % of the number of units of each indicated on the Plans but not less than one of each type. E. Monitor Modules: 2 % of the number of units indicated on the Plans but not less than one. F. Control relays: 2 % of the number of units indicated on the Plans but not less than one. G. Connection to combination smoke fire dampers: 1 percent of the number of units indicated on the plans, but not less than 1. 1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the latest issue of the following codes and standards, unless specifically directed otherwise in this specification in order to allow designs in excess of the code requirement. 1 International Building Code a. International Mechanical Code _ b. International Fire Code c. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code d. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code e. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code f. NEC - National Electric Code (NFPA 70) g. NFC - National Fire Code h. American Disabilities Act i. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards: 50, 268, 864, 268A, 521, 228 j. 464, 38, 346, 1481, 1076, 1971 k. Local and State Building Codes 1. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) m. Local rules and interpretations required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.8 FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. General: The entire Fire Alarm System shall be installed by skilled electricians and technicians certified by the equipment manufacturer, all who are properly trained and qualified for this work. As a minimum, conform to all codes and manufacture's recommendations. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM B. The Contractor shall have one person with NICET III or higher on staff to oversee project and sign off on fire alarm design plans. The NICET person shall be on site a minimum of two times during construction, Pre-test, and Final Test. C. The Contractor shall have installed at least five systems of similar size and configuration. D. Supervise, program and commission the system and provide warranty service. E. Provide any replacement part on site within 48 -hours. F. Provide a fully equipped, qualified repair technician at the job site within four -hours of a request for emergency service. This service shall be available 24-hours/day during the term of the warranty. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit shop drawings and catalog cut sheets for approval within the time period as stated in the General Conditions. Drawings shall first be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Upon receipt of this approval, drawings and catalog cut sheets shall then be submitted as stated in the General Conditions. Contractor shall not start any construction or order any materials prior to acceptance and approval of all submittals. Partial submittals are unacceptable. Submittals, as a minimum, shall include the following: 1. Floor plans drawn with same size and scale as the Contract Drawings. Drawings shall indicate device locations, raceway/wire routing, riser diagrams, conduit and wire size, wire identification numbers, room and floor identification numbers. 2. Point to point wiring diagrams of the control panels, remote annunciator panel(s), and terminal cabinets showing all installed wiring (not factory wiring harnesses) and connection of all field wiring to the units. 3. Detailed mounting installation diagrams of the control panel(s) and remote annunciator(s). 4. Battery calculations. 5. Riser diagrams with circuit identification labels, terminal wire identification, conduit and wire size, and device locations (with room names and numbers). 6. Operational description of the system, or a schematic ladder type logic diagram. 7. Front view of the control panel(s) and all annunciator panels. 8. Half size floor plan with zoning and addressable point graphic map plans. (no wire shown) 9. Nameplates and messages on the control panel(s) and annunciators shall be provided in actual size. 10: Wiring diagrams for all connections to interposing relays, control panels, HVAC equipment, elevator recall and other systems. 11. List of site personal that are qualified factory and state certificated. 12. The Contractor shall provide NICET III or higher cert. 13. The Contractor shall submit a written acceptance test procedure for approval by the Owner's representative. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS A. While the system installation is in progress, one set of shop drawings will be kept at the job site. This set will be designated as the construction drawings and will be updated each working day to reflect current as -built information. One set of construction drawings can be replaced with a fresh FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 4 U 0 f '71 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM updated set of drawings but there shall never be more than one active set of construction drawings. The Owner's representative shall be given access to this set of construction drawings at all times so that progress may be reviewed -and copies may be made. At the end of the project these marked -up construction drawings shall be submitted as part of the as -built drawings. 1.11 FIRE ALARM WIRING SYSTEM A. Wiring shall be in accordance with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code and Local Electrical Codes. j 1.12 PERMITS rl A. This Contractor shall be responsible to obtain required fire alarm system construction permits, Shop Drawing approvals and final approvals from Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). This Contractor shall furnish and install all required fire alarm system equipment imposed by AHJ at the Shop Drawing review and final system acceptance test period. �f 1.13 FIRE ALARM MONITORING "? A Provide connection to Owner designated central monitoring service. Communicator shall report separately each alarm point to the monitoring service. LJ 1.14 WARRANTY A. The entire fire alarm installation shall be warranted for one-year against defective equipment, materials, and workmanship. Emergency warranty service shall be available within four -hours of a request 24 -hours a day. The warranty period is to begin on the date the owner accepts the system. 1.15 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Equipment and Materials Shall Include: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panel or Panels (FACP). 2. Remote Annunciator. 3. Alarm Initiating Devices. 4. Alarm Notification Devices. 5. Auxiliary devices and equipment connected thereto as specified herein. 6. Wire, cable and raceways for interconnecting the above and connecting the system to an Owner approved monitoring agency. B. System shall be hard wired, non -coded, positive, successive, non -interfering, and electrically supervised. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 1.16 POWER REQUIREMENTS 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM A. The control panel shall receive 120V AC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit. B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120V AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 -hours with 10 -minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. C. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24V DC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. 1.17 ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK A. Communication with devices: The system must provide communication withall initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point: 1. Alarm. 2. Trouble. 3. Open. 4. Short. 5. Ground. 6. Device Fail/or Incorrect Device. B. All devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually. C. Format: 1. The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow T -tapping of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol (i.e. that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be acceptable since they are considered unreliable and prone to errors. D. Identification of Addressable Devices: 1. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new. Previously used equipment or discontinued models shall not be acceptable unless specifically identified elsewhere in this specification. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.2 MANUFACTURER 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM The fire alarm control equipment shall consist of a system assembled as an approved unit of regularly manufactured components, by a single manufacturer for the purposes described elsewhere in this specification. Interconnecting equipment that has not been listed for interconnection or the creation of components or system into a non-standard unit that is not normally available from the manufacturer is not acceptable. B. All equipment shall be listed, cross listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or approved by Factory Mutual. C. Providing they meet all specifications, control panels and related equipment shall be manufactured by EST is basis of design. 1. EST #IO1000. 2. Or other reviewed and approved Manufacturers. 2.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED INSTALLERS A. Convergint Technologies, Renton, Wa. —1-847-620-5000 B. Pacific Fire & Security, Seattle, Wa. —1-877-850-1280 C. Performance Systems Integration, Bothell, Wa. — 1-425-368-4201 D. Only pre -approved installers shall be considered acceptable prior to final bid. Provide substitution request complying with Division 01. Substitution requests must be submitted at least 10 -days prior to Bid. 2.4 LOCKS A. Locks for cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed. 2.5 EXCEPTIONS A. Exceptions or substitutions may not be made to any specified or named product unless "or approved equal" is included in the specification. See spec section 01. 2.6 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP) to match EST I01000. A. FACP shall incorporate power supplies, and all controls for the system except as described elsewhere within the specification. All components shall be mounted within a steel enclosure with locked door(s). Door(s) shall incorporate a transparent window for viewing indicator lights, and other pertinent components. Provisions shall be made in or near the FACP for storing connection and schematic wiring diagrams, and emergency operating plans. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM B. Fire Alarm System, including FACP, shall be wired for "Class B" operation on and signaling (Evacuation) circuits. C. All controls shall be labeled; all zone locations shall be clearly identified. Submit wording for approval as a part of the contractor's submittal package documents. D. Power Supplies: 1. The emergency or standby 24V DC power supply shall contain standby batteries and automatic charger with the following requirements: a. Sealed gelled cell type batteries. b 24-hour system backup capability plus 5 -minutes of full alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour period. c. Charger shall be able to restore batteries to full charge within 24 -hours after a complete discharge. d. Battery and charging system shall be supervised, including trouble annunciation of high/low voltage, shorted cell and open circuits. 2.7 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR(S) A. Annunciator shall consist of an 80 Character, backlit, alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). Information shall be presented in clear, descriptive English language and includes: point status (alarm trouble), etc.); alarm type (smoke detector, manual station, etc.); number of system alarms, supervisory conditions, and trouble conditions; and a custom location label. 2.8 NAC BOOSTER POWER EXTENDER PANEL(S) A. The NAC Booster Power Extender panelshall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering a minimum of (4) notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class -B Style -Y rated at 3 amps each. Panel shall provide total capability of minimum of 10 amps. B. Provide synchronization for each notification appliance circuits. C. Provide 20% spare future capability for each notification appliance circuits and battery backup. D. The internal power supply and battery charger shall be capable of charging up 12.7Ah batteries internally mounted or 18Ah batteries mounted in an external cabinet. E. The NAC extender panel may be mounted close to the host control panel or can be remotely located. The NAC extender panel when connected to an addressable panel shall connect to the host panel via an addressable signal module. F. When connected to a conventional (non -addressable panel) (1) or (2) standard notification appliance circuits from the main control panel may be used to activate all the circuits on the NAC power, extender panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 8 n r? n n T 7 n 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM G. Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to activate.. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and shall report trouble conditions to the host panel. H. Provide a separate 120VAC power from main fire alarm system. 2.9 ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICES (Match Existing EST) A. Audio Notification Appliance: 1. Shall be manufactured by except for the devices see below. a. Horn: Piezoelectric type horn shall be listed to UL 464. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. The hom shall mount directly to a standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapter or trim rings. b. Visual indicating appliances shall be white color. B. Visual Flashing Lamps (Strobe): 1. Visual indicating appliances shall be comprised of a Xenon flashtube and be entirely solid state. These devices shall be listed under UL Standard 1971 and be capable of either ceiling or wall mounting. The Lexan lens shall be pyramidal in shape to allow better visibility. Visual units shall be of the stand-alone typeor be incorporated as part of the (Speaker, Horn, Bell) unit, and shall meet current ADA requirements. 2. Visual indicating appliances shall be white color. C. Aud io/Visual Alarm Notification Appliance: 1. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. 2. Horn/Strobe as Equal. 3. Audio/Visual units shall be white color. 4. Notification Appliance Circuit provides synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1Hz and operates horns with a Temporal Code Pattern operation. The circuit shall provide the capability to silence the audible signals, while the strobes continue to flash, over a single pair of wires. The capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided. 5. Weather-proof Combination Audible/Visible: a. Hermetically sealed for moisture proof or dust proof installations. This device is provided with a special weather-proof back box with '/2" conduit threads for attachment of conduit. For indoor or outdoor use when watertight seal is required, use weather-proof boxes. b. UL listed For NEMA -4X c. Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building ' 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. d. Provide water tight conduit, wiring, and connections as required for weather-proof area. e. Weather-proof horn/strobe or equal. 6. The Accessories: The -contractor shall furnish any necessary accessories. 7. Audio/Visual units shall be red color. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE DEVICE TYPES (Match Existing EST) A. General: 1. The system control panel, over its two wire multi -drop channel, must be capable of communicating with the types of addressable devices specified below. Addressable Spot Type Smoke Detectors: 1. The Photoelectric type detector shall be a plug-in unit, which mounts to a twist lock base, and shall be UL listed. 2. The detectors shall be of the solid-state photoelectric type and shall contain no radioactive material. They will use a pulsed infrared LED light source and be sealed against rear airflow entry. 3. The detector shall fit into a base that is common with both the heat detector and ionization type detector and shall be compatible with other addressable detectors, addressable manual stations, and addressable Monitor Modules on the same circuit. The detector shall also fit into a non -addressable base that is capable of being monitored by an addressable Zone Adapter Module. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors or Monitor Modules, which may be activated, or "in alarm" simultaneously. C. Addressable Heat Detectors: 1. Thermal detector heads must be UL listed. They shall be rate compensated type, and available in 135degrees F and 190 degrees F temperature rating. D. Addressable Pull Stations: 1. Addressable pull stations will contain electronics that communicate the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires, which also provide power to the pull station. The address will be set on each station. The stations will be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering will be raised and painted white. The station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be double action. 2. The front of the station is to be hinged to a back -plate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control panels. Stations, which use alien wrenches or special tools to reset, will not be accepted. The station shall consist of high impact Lexan, red in color. 3. The addressable manual station shall be capable of field programming of its "address" location on an addressable signaling line circuit. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors, or Monitor Modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. 5. The addressable manual station shall be Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. listed. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 10 n n J n i J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 6. Provide pull stations with protective shield and NEMA -3R on special locations (Gymnasiums, outdoor area). Protective shield shall be equipped with horn and battery suitable for surface -mounted. E. Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detector: 1. The detector shall be non -polarized, 4 -wire, 24V DC analog addressable type, which is compatible with the Fire Alarm Panel and obtains its operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. Auxiliary power shall be supervised by means of UL approved end of line relay. 2. Detectors shall be of the solid-state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point. No radioactive material shall be used. 3. The detector head shall be directly interchangeable with an ionization detector type. The 24V DC detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. 4. Detector construction shall have a mounting base with a twist lock detecting head that is lockable. The locking feature must be field removable when not required. Contact between the base and head shall be of the bifurcated type utilizing spring type, self -wiping contacts. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory current of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel. Detector design shall provide compatibility with other normally open fire alarm detection loop devices (heat detectors, pull stations, etc.). 5. It shall be possible to alarm the duct housing by using a test switch. 6. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover. 7. To minimize false alarms, voltage and radio frequency (RF) suppression techniques shall be employed as well as a smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen. 8. Auxiliary single pole double throw (SPDT) relays. 9. Provide an accessible below ceiling or wall mounted remote LED alarm indicators and key operated test stations shall be installed for all duct detectors above ceiling, hard to access spaces, or as required by codes and AHJ. F. Projection Beam Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector coverage range shall be 30 to .350'. The UL listed spacing for smooth ceilings is 60'. 2. Internal pointability adjustment range shall be +/- 10 degrees vertical and +/- 90 degrees horizontal. 3. Detector shall be provided with 6 sensitivity settings. 4. Detector shall be equipped with form "A" and form "C" alarm contacts, and form "B" tamper/trouble contacts. J 5. Additional features are to include: Built in power supervision, automatic signal synchronization, automatic environmental compensation and bore sight alignment. 6. Detectors are to be UL, ULC, FM and CSFM approved. 7. Remote test/display panels shall allow remote testing and resetting. Panels are to indicate normal, trouble and alarm. G. Addressable Sensor: 1. The addressable smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric or ionization type and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 2. The addressable temperature sensors shall sense within a temperature range of 32° F. to 158° F. The control panel will be capable of sensing either a set point of 135° F., or a rate -of -rise of 15° F. per minute for fire sensing. For utility sensing, a set point may be chosen within the stated range and the control panel programming will be capable of using that information to determine specific response such as warning of failure of local temperature controls. 3. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications. 4. Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors that do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. 5. Sensor bases shall be provided with a relay driver output that is to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel. 6. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. 7. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed. • 8. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. H. Monitor Module: 1. Monitor Modules on plate shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper, non -addressable detectors, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems. 2. An addressable monitor module shall be provided for interfacing normally open direct contact devices to an addressable signaling line circuit. 3. Monitor Modules shall be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Monitor Modules shall receive their 24V DC power from a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply. 4. Use mini monitor modules only behind the local device. Module Functions: 1. For conventional 2 -wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Style -B or Style -D (NFPA 72 initiating device circuit) wiring supervision. 2. This type of addressable device module will provide power to, and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 2 -wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices. The supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be Style -B. These modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel. 3. For conventional 4 -wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Style -B or Style -D (NFPA 72 initiating device circuit) wiring supervision. 4. This type of addressable device module will provide power to and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 4 -wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices. The supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be Style -B and/or Style -D as also identified in the Schedule on the Plans. The module will provide detector reset capability and a 2A fuse to provide over current power protection for the 4 -wire detector. These modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel. n d n E r' n n FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 12 L '-1 J LJ J n n J 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 5. For alarm notification appliances, and other device control with Style -Y or Style -Z wiring supervision. 6. This type of addressable device will provide double pole double throw relay switching that can be used to connect through easily replaceable 2A fuses: A circuit of alarm notification appliances to a power source; or activate a variety of controlled devices. The module will be available in either a Style -Y or Style -Z supervision version. In the Style -Y version, an end of line device will supervise the wiring. In the Style -Z version, the wiring will be looped back and connected to the module to allow continual operation of the controlled devices even if the wiring sustains a single break. These modules will communicate the supervised wiring status (normal, trouble) to the fire alarm control panel and will receive a command to transfer the relay from the fire alarm control panel. 7. For non -supervised control. 8. This type of addressable device will provide double pole double throw relay switching for loads up to 120V AC. It will contain easily replaceable 2A fuse, one on each common leg of the relay. 9. The module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel for processing according to the program instructions. Should the module become non -operational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble signal, unique to the device, shall be transmitted to, and annunciated at, the control panel. 10. The module shall be capable of being programmed for its "address" location on the addressable device signaling line circuit. The module shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable detectors on the same addressable circuit. J. Conventional All Weatherproof Rate Compensation Heat Detector: 1. Hermetically sealed for moisture proof or dust proof installations. Requires no special back box. 'Has plastic hexagonal grip bushing with '/2" conduit threads for attachment to threaded hub cover, or any outlet box. For indoor or outdoor use when watertight seal is required, use weatherproof box. 2. Provide weatherproof deep j -box with cover for all exterior devices. 3. Provide addressable mini point module inside weatherproof j -box. K. All devices will be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel will be capable of indicating the type of trouble condition (open, short, device_ missing/failed). Should a device fail, it will not hinder the operation of other system devices. Should a problem occur on a particular wire run, it will not affect other wire runs. 2.11 SPRINKLER A. Provide all addressable modules and connections and interface.requirements for fire alarm system supervision and alarm of fire sprinkler system. 2.12 COMBINATION SMOKE FIRE DAMPERS A. Provide connections to operate all combination smoke fire dampers, existing and new. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 13 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2.13 SPARES 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM A. In addition to spare capacities and equipment listed in other portions of this specification, the following spare components shall be provided and installed in the FACP cabinet. 1. Smoke Detector Head — Two. 2. Addressable Heat Detector Head — Two. 3. Addressable Input Point Module - Two. 4. Addressable Relay Module - One. 2.14 GRAPHIC MAP A. Graphic map shall be metal framed and mounted adjacent to the Annunciator. Map shall consist of a 1/16" = 1' scale floor plan graphic rendering of the building with rooms identified by names or number. B. Haft size graphic map of each floor with zones and addressable point devices. (-No wire). 2.15 FIRE ALARM DOCUMENTS STORAGE CABINET A Provide fire alarm documents storage cabinet adjacent to main fire alarm panel per NFPA-72 2007 code. B. Coordinate location with Architect or Owner prior to installation. C. Download program data and point list onto the 4GB flash drive built-in to cabinet per NFPA-72 2007 code. D. Manufacturers: 1. Space Age Electronic Part Number SSU00685 or equal. 2.16 PRIMARY 120VAC POWER PROTECTION DEVICE A. Provide primary 120VAC power circuit lockout kit per NFPA 2013 code. B. Manufacturers: 1. Space Age Electronic Part Number ELOCK_FA or equal. 2.17 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Marking Services, Inc. (MSI): http://www.markserv.com. 2. Double 0 Laser Services, Inc. http://www.doubleolaser.com. 3. Or approved equal. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 14 0 9 0 a 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM B. Fire Alarm Main Control Panel, Fire Alarm Subpanels, and Duct detectors Nameplates: Engraved plastic, high contrast for maximum visibility. 1/16" engraving plastic with mounting adhesive backing. 1. Fire Alarm Panels: White letters on Red. Description: Example: Panel Name: MAIN FIRE ALARM Node 10 AC Panel 2X2A Breaker #34 Node #: AC PANEL: BREAKER #: 2. Duct Detector Locations: White letters on Red 1"x3" plate with 1/2" letters. Description: Example: Device Name: DUCT SLC 1-S26 C. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use for identification of all fire alarm input and output control devices. Description: Example: Device Name: N1OSLC1-S26 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPROVAL A. No equipment shall be provided at the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. An approved shop drawing set shall be continuously available at the job site during construction. 3.2 MOUNTING POSITION A. Evacuation horns and strobes shall be mounted in accordance with UL Standard 1971 and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements. B. Fire Alarm Duct Detector shall be mounted in accordance with UL Standard 268A, NFPA90, NFPA 92A&B, NFPA72, and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements. 1. Fire alarm duct detectors are require for all HVAC unit 2000CFM or above per code and AHJ. Fire alarm duct detectors are typically supervisory alarm mode, but some local AHJ want alarm mode. Coordinate what mode the AHJ wants for this site prior to final programming and inspection. 2. If possible in large HVAC units mount duct detector inside the HVAC unit. 3. Location of the fire alarm duct detector shall be mounted minimum of 3 -feet in or on air ducts shall be downstream from any duct openings, deflection plats, sharp bends or branch connections. 4. This detail shows the shutdown of HVAC unit upon fire alarm duct detector alarm or supervisory mode as required to be controlled by code. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 15 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 5. Fire alarm contractor to provide duct detector to mechanical contractor to be install and electrical contractor wire all connections to the HVAC units and duct detectors. 6. Mount duct detectors per code and in accessible space. Provide remote test/led annunciator for any duct detector that is above drop ceiling and has hard access. 7. Provide nameplate per spec 28 31 00 para 3.4 on access point and next to drop ceiling tile. 8. Provide a written detail description of each duct detector location to direct a person to that -location in the closeout documents. 3.3 MOUNTING METHODS A. Conduit, panels, devices and boxes shall be secured by means of expansion shields in concrete, machine screws on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood construction. Attachment with devices driven in by power charge or nail type nylon anchors are not acceptable in lieu of machine screws. 3.4 WIRING A. Provide plenum -rated cable for all cabling. 1. The manufacturer's recommendations shall only be used as a minimum requirement. 2. Exception to plenum -rated cable is underground -rated cable when fire alarm cabling leaves the building. Provide protect per manufacture requirements. B. General Wiring System: 1. All wire shall be new, UL approved and marked, and brought to the job site in original packages. 2. Wire insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC. All wires shall be sized per the NEC for the load serviced. Field wiring for initiation, supervision and signal circuits shall be solid conductor. All wire shall be rated at 105 degrees C and be approved for fire alarm installations. 3. Twisted wire shall twists per foot rate in accordance with- equipment manufacturer's requirements. 4. Aluminum wire is prohibited. 5. Wire pulls by powered mechanical means will not be permitted. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material just prior to pulling the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be compounds specifically prepared for cable pulling and shall not contain petroleum or other products,which will affect cable insulation. 6. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges, or crushed insulation shall not be used and shall be removed. 7. Low voltage energy limited wiring shall not be run in the same wireways with or closely parallel to high voltage and/or switched power wiring. 8. Interposing relays shall be used for all switched power loads and shall be located such that the switched power conductors do not run in the same wireway as the interposing relay coil power or any other energy limited low voltage conductors. 9. No wire run or circuit shall be longer than 80 % of the maximum allowable length and power consumption for the wire size and application. No alarm input/output circuit shall exceed 80 % of the maximum load capacity specified by the manufacturer. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 16 �1 n LJ n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 10. Splicing shall be minimized and shall be accomplished only in accessible outlets, junction, or cabinet boxes, which are clearly indicated on the as-builts. 11. All wiring for each floor shall be terminated in a terminal cabinet prior to running the wires to the fire alarm panel. Provide at least one terminal cabinet for each floor in each building. 12. All solid wire terminations shall be made bare to screw terminals specifically designed for bare wire connection. All stranded wire terminations shall be made with T&B "Sta-Kon" (or equivalent) self -insulated, spade lugs where connected to screw type terminals. 13. Wiring in all cabinets and terminal boxes shall be neatly arranged and bundled with tyraps or equivalent. 14. Wires shall be numbered at each connection, termination, and junction box. 15. All conductors shall be tagged, labeled, and color coded. Color coding shall be by wire insulation, not taping or banding. The numbering and color -coding shall be continuous for each circuit wire. Tag numbers shall agree with wire numbers assigned on manufacturer's wiring diagrams and the installation wiring diagrams and drawings. 3.5 AUXILIARY CONTROL WIRING A. Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices, including spare device requirements as hereinbefore specified. 3.6 AUXILIARY CONTROLS A. Provide all raceways, conductors and auxiliary relays to control the following: 1. HVAC units shunt down. 2. Smoke fire dampers. 3. Door holders. 4. Elevator recalls. 5. Access control unlocks or release. 3.7 VISUAL ALARM APPLIANCES A. Provide visual alarm appliances with sync and light output intensity to comply with room size in accordance with NFPA 72, Table. 3.8 AUDIO ALARM APPLIANCES A. • Provide audio alarm appliances with temporal and to be 15db above ambient sound level of the room accordance with NFPA 72, Table. 3.9 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Locations of smoke detectors indicated on Drawings are approximate. Install detectors with spacing in accordance with NFPA 72 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Adjust locations to coordinate with other equipment, sprinkler, light fixtures, air diffusers. Locate smoke detectors 36" FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 17 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology &.Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM away from air handling diffusers and 24 " from light fixtures. Distance between detectors shall not exceed their listed spacing. Detectors indicated on sloped ceilings shall be located within 3' horizontally of the highest point of the slope. 3.10 PROGRAMMING A. Program system to for complete operation to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Program all addressable devices to correspond with final room identification/numbering. Verify room identification with the Owner's representative. B. Factory default install code will not be changed. C Program owner code to 1111 D. Program the options to access date & time, smoke status, event log, and add devices. 3.11 DOCUMENTS A. As a condition for the project fmal acceptance, the Contractor shall, prior to final testing, submit the following documents to the Owner's representative for approval. If as a result of final testing there is a change to the system design, then the Contractor shall correct the as -built drawings. B Record Drawings: 1. Provide as built record drawings indicating the completed installation. Drawings shall be prepared on approved shop drawings with changes marked in red pencil, in a legible and neat manner. Drawings shall indicate locations of: fire alarm devices, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, sensors and controlled equipment (motor starters, fans, pumps, valves, dampers, etc.). Drawings shall indicate: Riser diagrams, sources of power, raceway sizes and routing, type and number of conductors. 2. As -built panel schematic, connection and interconnection wiring diagrams showing all system components. Trunk type wiring diagrams are not acceptable. 3. Component connection diagrams shall show schematic point-to-point identification. 4. Central station monitoring pre-test report of all new addressable points. C. Provide the AHJ at final acceptance the following documents: 1. As -built drawings shall be full construction set with redline markups that contain the following (all zoning, device point numbers, new device conduit or wiring pathways, and exact location of devices and panels.) 2. Haft size graphic map of each floor with zones and addressable point devices. (No wire ) 3. Central station monitoring pre-test report of all new zones. 4. Fire alarm panel alarm, supervisory, and trouble event log report of all devices. 5. Addressable points list for both bldgs. 6. Completed NFPA 72 Record of. Completion current forms to owner and AHJ. 7. Provide digital copy of all above on one following (cd-rom, dvd, or finger drive). 8. Provide all the above documents in O&M manuals binder. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 18 n 7 fl n 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 1. Manuals shall contain cut sheets of all equipment and devices installed, wiring diagrams, operational and maintenance instructions. All device options shall be clearly identified. Refer to Division 01 for more information. 2 Manual shall contain all documents in Section 283100 Para 3.11c 3 Contractor to provide O&M Manual binder at each fire alarm panel locations. E. Functional Description for Auxiliary Controls: 1. When an interface exists between the FA -system and other control systems or controlled devices, the contractor shall provide a complete narrative describing operational relationships to the FA system. 3.12 TESTING A. The completed system shall be subjected to two required tests. The initial test shall be a preliminary test, which will be witnessed by the Owner's representative. This test shall be completed after the system has been on line for a minimum of seven -days. Should the results not be satisfactory to the Owner's representative's representatives, then corrections will be made and a re -test will be required at the Contractor's expense. A Contractor's representative and Contractor supplied fire alarm technician shall be present for all testing. The fire alarm technician shall conduct the tests. B. After satisfactory completion of the preliminary testing, the Contractor shall arrange for the Authority Having Jurisdiction to witness a final acceptance test of the system. The Authority Having Jurisdiction will grant final acceptance. Approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be evidenced in writing and a copy forwarded to the Owner's representative. C. The following items and procedures will be required as a minimum for the preliminary testing of the system: 1. Bypass and control switches shall be operated to indicate proper supervision of the switch. 2. Valve and sprinlder supervision switches shall be operated to verify proper response. 3. Valve and sprinkler supervision switches shall have one wire removed to verify proper supervision. 4. Each alarm output, detection or supervision zone may be tested for proper response to ground conditions. 5. AC power shall be interrupted to see if the system will operate on batteries. Audible devices shall operate for 30 -minutes on battery power. 6. All critical fuses shall be removed to check for proper supervision. 7. Detectors shall be tested for alarm. operation. 8. Flashing light units will be tested for wiring supervision by removing a wire from the device. The device will also be tested for proper alarm operation. 9. Alarm sounding devices will be tested for proper operation. 10. Audibility tests will be conducted by the Contractor to determine compliance with the dBA requirements. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 19 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.13 TRAINING 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM A. The Contractor shall, after two -weeks (minimum) written notification to the Owner's representative and conduct two training sessions of not less than four -hours length in each session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner's representative. A manufacturdr's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the installed system shall conduct the session. 3.14 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Project completion and payment will be based on completion of the following: 1. Completion and approval of acceptance tests. 2. Completion of punch list items. 3. Delivery and acceptance of the as -built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide cd-rom, dvd, or fmger drive of program data in fire alarm panel as required by NFPA-72 codes. 5. Clean-up of installation site to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. END OF SECTION 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 20 L n n j n r1 n 7 n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 = GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2 District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 WORK INCLUDES. Provide supervision, labor, . materials, tools, equipment/machinery, temporary power and lighting and other services necessary to complete the work for complete operations described herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The provisions and intent of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work as if specified in this section and other sections of the Specifications. Provide the electrical work as indicated or as specified in other sections of the Specifications and Drawings of the Contract Documents. 7 C. Provide installation means and methods of all equipment, devices, light fixtures, raceways, wires/cabling, junction boxes and the like per industry standard practice and code requirements as necessary for proper configuration and operation as if herein specified or shown. n T j 'l �I Li D. Provide and install all equipment included in the Contract in harmony with 'other trades to provide completed systems with neat, finished appearance, using approved methods of the trade. Only good workmanship will be accepted. If, in the judgment of the Owner's Representative, any portion of the work not installed in a workmanlike manner or left in a rough, unfinished condition, remove the equipment, reinstall same, patch and paint surrounding surfaces satisfactory to the Owner's Representative, with no additional cost to the Owner. E. Mounting details- of equipment, devices, light fixtures, raceways, junction boxes and the like are not usually shown or specified. Provide per industry standard practice and code requirements as necessary for proper installation and operation the same as if herein specified or shown. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL F. All installations shall comply with ADA guidelines and requirements. Coordinate all installations with Architect to ensure this requirement is satisfied. 1.4 PERMITS & FEES . Purchase permits, licenses, and approvals required for execution of work and include purchase price in the bid. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Execute electrical work in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, NFPA, IBC, IFC, WA State NREC Energy Code, and governing local ordinances, codes, and regulations. Assure the strict conformity of Electrical equipment, materials, construction methods, tests, and definitions with the established standards of the following in their latest adopted revision: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 1.6 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS These Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover a completed installation of systems. The omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such labor and materials. Refer to the Drawings and Shop Drawings or other trades for additional details, which affect the proper installation of this work. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to Division 01. B. The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Architect of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the Specifications or Plans. C. The word "provide" as used in these Specifications and on the Drawings shall mean, "furnish, install and complete connection per factory instructions". D. The term Mechanical Contractor (M.C.) and Electrical Contractor (E.C.) as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refer to those subcontractors working under the direction of the General Contractor (G.C.). E. The term "Engineer" shall refer to the licensed professional electrical engineer who is responsible for the preparation of the electrical documents. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. Conform to NEC 110.12 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 260500-2 4-1 7 7 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL B. Conform to latest edition of NECA standard for good workmanship in electrical' construction manual. C. Provide all equipment included and as necessary and in harmony with other trades to provide completed systems with neat, finished appearance, using approved methods of the trade. Only good workmanship will be accepted. If, in the judgment of the Owner's Representative, any portion of work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner or left in a rough, unfinished condition, remove the equipment, reinstall same, patch and paint surrounding surfaces satisfactory to the Owner's Representative, with no increase in cost to the Owner. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: These Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover a completed installation of systems. The omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such labor and materials. Refer to Drawings and shop drawings or other trades for additional details, which affect the proper installation of this work. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). C. Conform to latest edition of NECA standard for good workmanship in electrical construction manual. D. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the location and purpose intended. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate the work under this Division with Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Mechanical, and the drawings of other: trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. F. Field verify all existing conditions, equipment, panelboards, raceway/conductor paths and coordinate demolition and new work with existing conditions. Provide all required core drilling, sealing and patching as required for new work routed through existing walls, floors and roof. Coordinate all work with Architect, Owner and other Trades prior to commencing work: 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conform to Division 01 "Substitutions". B. The naming of a certain brand or make or manufacturer in the Specifications is to establish a quality standard for the article desired. The Contractor is not restricted to the use of the specific brand of the manufacturer named unless so indicated in the Specifications or notified during COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL bidding. However, substitution request is required and permitted only with the written approval of the Engineer. No substitute material or equipment shall be purchased, ordered, fabricated shipped or processed in any manner prior to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for additional expenses as required in any way to meet changes from the original material or equipment specified. If notice of substitution is not furnished to the Engineer within 30 -days after the General Contract is awarded, then equipment and materials named in the Specifications are to be used. C. The equipment specification may also show on the Drawings the type, appearance, rating, and basic quality/functionality desired. D. The Contractor shall assume full financial responsibility for any and all additional expenses arising from the use of a substitute product. 1.11 PRIOR APPROVALS A. All substitutions approved prior to bidding shall be listed in the addendums. B. Specifications have been written around equipment and materials selected for this project based on quality, size capacity and performance required to meet building design criteria. All equipment and materials used in this project which have not been specified must have prior approval from Engineer. C. Request for Approval must be submitted in original, typed letter form to Engineer ten (10) working days (holidays excluded) prior to bid date. This letter shall be accompanied with full data, system operation, and application information, size of equipment regarding items to be substituted. If supplierwants reply to request for approval, please send self addressed, stamped envelope with request. Prior approval requests communicated via a facsimile machine (FAX) will not be accepted. D. Supplier and/or Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that substituted material or equipment is of same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. Any changes and costs required during construction due to Contractors/supplier neglect to properly select substituted equipment shall be paid by the Contractor/supplier. Prior approval to bid does not mean final approval of material or equipment by Engineer. Final approval will be given after final submitted data has been presented to Engineer complete with full information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to sections 01 33 00, 01 60 00. B. Provide only complete submittals. Submittals shall be organized and identified by specification section number and name. Submit either by entire section(s) or for the entire project. Incomplete submittals will be returned immediately. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260500 Technology & Maintenance Service Center COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL District Administration Building C. Where product data and shop drawings are specified for the work, submit both at the same time. Failure to do so will be considered an incomplete submittal. n JD. Provide original quality, hard copies of all submittals. Inferior quality copies, fax, or emails will not be reviewed. E. Each submitted product data, selection, and options must be clearly identified. Improper identification or lack thereof of materials will result in rejected submittals. 7 F. Where specified, shop drawings shall be 24"x36" size similar to contract :drawings. Drawings i shall be produced in AutoCAD and shall include, but not be limited to, symbol legend, all devices, wiring diagrams, controls, transformers, relays etc., one -line diagrams, details and other pertinent installation instructions and manufacturer recommendations. 1.13 CONTRACTOR'S COST BREAKDOWN A. Conform to Division 01. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide a cost breakdown schedule of values. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide a list of work excluded from his bid to the GC at time of bid. D. Cost breakdown schedule ofvalues shall be organized by specification sections and shall provide detail breakout for both labor and materials of the costs per the following: .-� 1. Rough -in. 2. Trim -out. 3. Testing. 4. Commissioning. E. Provide additional line item cost breakdown per the above requirements for work specified on the drawings which may not be reflected within the specifications. These items shall be broken out by building area, or room as approved by Architect. 1.14 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Conform to section 01 77 00. B. As -Built Drawings: This Contractor shall maintain a set of Contract Plans at the site on which current changes and the actual location of conduits, devices, equipment, etc., as installed, shall be marked in red pencil in a legible, neat manner. This set of Plans shall show actual J dimensions, including depth of underground conduits and feeders from construction lines so they can be readily found after covering. This set of Plans will be reviewed monthly by Architect and Engineer prior to approvals of pay request. Submit a set of Electrical Drawings marked in red to indicate the routing of conduit runs to the Engineer for review at the completion of conduit rough -in and prior to cover. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit the as -built information on a set of reproducible sepias made from the original Contract Document tracings and presented to the Architect and Engineer for approvals. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL C. Documents: Bind three (3) complete sets of the following documents in a hard -backed three- ring binder and present to the Architect prior to final acceptance of the project: 1. Letter from the Electrical Sub -Contractor stating the electrical portion of the project is complete and that all punch list items have been completed. 2. Guarantee letter. 3. Electrical Inspection Certificate. 4. Copies of all permits. 5. Operating and Maintenance Manuals, operating instructions. 6. Guarantees (other than one year). D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Conform to sections 01 78 23 and 01 78 39. J E. Warranties: 1. Warranty workmanship and all components of the work for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the installation. Remedy any defects in workmanship and repair or replace any faulty equipment which fails within the warranty period without additional cost to the Owner. Assure cleanliness of light fixtures, lamps and replacement of defective units at the time of final acceptance. 2. Submit one year warrantee on all materials under the contract work (excluding lamps). 3. Submit all subcontractor warranties. 4. Submit all manufacture warranties. 1.15 SCHEDULING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Schedule all materials, equipment and light fixture deliveries and make all arrangements as necessary to complete all work in accordance with the project construction schedules. Provide schedules of work to Architect as directed during construction. B. Schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent traffic congestion, blocking of access, and interference with work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at site. Provide for continuity of supply to avoid change of supplier or change in brand of materials during any phase of work. C. Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. Do not open containers until approximate time for use. Store materials at locations that will not interfere with progress of work. Arrange locations of storage areas in approximately order of intended use. D. Store materials in a manner that will prevent damage to materials or structure, and that will prevent injury to persons. Store cementitious materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces. Store ferrous materials to prevent contact with ground and to avoid rusting and damage from weather. E. Provide documents to Architect for any claim of material, equipment and light fixture deliveries not able to meet construction schedules. 1.16 SITE EXAMINATION COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 6 L fl U TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL A. Before submitting bid, Contractor is strongly encouraged to visit the site and examine all adjoining existing buildings, temporary power and communication service, equipment and space conditions on which his/her work is in any way dependent for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of the Specifications and Drawings. He/she shall report to the Architect any condition which might prevent him/her from installing equipment in the manner intended. B. • Identify existing conditions and requirements for cutting, patching, excavation, core drilling, etc. C. Include all costs to provide the electrical installation associated with the existing conditions for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of the Specifications and Drawings. D. Report to Owner's Representative any condition that might prevent the installation of equipment in the manner intended. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Naming of manufacturers indicates the manufacturer's brand name is acceptable only if their product is in compliance with each and every provision of the Specifications. Failure to comply will result in disapproval. B. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that materials or equipment are of same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. The Contractor shall pay any changes and costs required during construction due to the Contractor's neglect to properly select equipment. C. Notify the Owner's Representative for an on-site visit to inspect material and equipment prior to installation. D. Materials and equipment shall be new, undamaged, and shall be UL listed for its intended location and use. E. Defects and damages of material shall be replaced. Furnish new material as necessary and install the equipment for a completed system at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Furnish material and equipment samples when requested by the Owner's Representative, within 21 -days of request. G. Non -approved material and equipment must be removed from the jobsite. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Conform to section 01 73 00. 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL B. All device or equipment mounting heights given herein the Specifications, Contract Drawing, and/or documents are intended to provide general guidelines pursuant to industry standards. Such guidelines may not be exact or accurate and may or may not conflict with other trade's installation without verification. The Contractor will require in his bid, to provide field coordination and verification with other contractors, trades, or any shop drawings, and to insure that such mounting heights if indeed are practical and feasible as not to conflict with other installation and construction. If conflicts are discovered at any time during the construction, report to Engineer or Architect immediately for resolution. Before any installation, all devices or equipment can be directed or located by Engineer or Architect within 20 feet of the e designed contract location without any extra cost. C. If the Contractor fails to provide such coordination and field verification and results of erroneous installation, the Contractor shall remedy such installations per Architect's direction, at Contractor's cost. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Conform to Division 01. 2. Perform core drilling, cutting, patching, and restoration work as may be necessary for .the proper installation of the electrical work. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS Apply, install, connect, and erect manufactured items or materials according to the recommendations, wiring diagrams, instructions of the manufacturer when such recommendations are not illustrated or in conflict with the Contract Documents. B. Furnish to the Architect, on request, copies of manufacturer's recommendations. Secure approval of recommendations before proceeding with work. C. Keep at the site not less than one copy, in good condition, of manufacturer's recommendations, wiring diagrams, instructions, or directions, pertaining to work at the site. Inform involved personnel of requirements and availability of manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 PREPARATORY WORK Inspection: Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of all other trades and verify the completeness of all such work to the point where this work may properly commence. B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed with the work in the event of a discrepancy until resolved by the Architect. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 8 f TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260500 L; Technology & Maintenance Service Center COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL. District Administration Building C. Change Orders: Where changes of work require additional cost, prepare complete cost/credit breakdown herein specified and comply with change order requirements as specified in Division 01, Contract Documents. No cost will be allowed for as -built drawings on any change order unless otherwise instructed. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the specified work under this contract with work of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. B. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment. These drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. The Electrical Contractor (� shall coordinate the work under this section with the architectural, structure, plumbing, heating and air conditioning, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. This Contractor shall cooperate with all other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. C. The Contractor is to coordinatehis work with the General Contractor (Ceiling Contractor) so that all above -ceiling work is completed, inspected and accepted by the Owner prior to ceiling installation. Final adjustments can be made later. D. Coordinate all electrical work with mechanical installations. Verify with Mechanical Contractor for final mechanical equipment locations prior to work. Connect all power wiring to mechanical equipment through starters, contactors as required. Maintain clearances around mechanical equipment to allow access for maintenance per NEC codes and local codes. E. Refer to Architectural specifications for project construction schedules. Schedule each specific area so that the delivery of materials and equipment are such as to cause no delay in construction schedule. Include the premium cost of delivery of equipment and overtime work in order to comply with the construction schedules if necessary. F. Electrical Contractor to coordinate and verify exact locations of all wiring devices, light fixtures, fire alarm and communication devices and equipment with Architects in field prior to beginning of rough -in. G. If directed by the Architects, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, verify with local inspectors or authorities having jurisdiction and make reasonable modifications in the layout as .-� needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. H. If directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, provide layouts of equipment and details of mounting method for Engineer's approval prior to installation to ensure proper execution of the work. J I. All devices, outlets, cabinets, equipment, panels, light fixtures, switches can be field located by —� Architect within 20 feet of the designed locations prior to rough -in work without extra compensation. J. During its progress, all work shall be subject to observation by the Architect, Engineer, and/or their representatives, and of the State and Local Electrical Inspectors. The Engineer has not LJ COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 9 j TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be totally responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Architect and Engineer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractors' safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. K. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" in the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the State or Federal Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether he is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. Furthermore, the Contractor distinctly assumes all risk of damages or injury to any persons or property wherever located, resulting from any action or operation under this contract or in connection with the work. 3.5 RACEWAYS A. All one -lines, risers, and conduit routing are schematic and are not showing exact physical arrangement of equipment. Where indicated on Drawings, all junction boxes and pull boxes are minimum requirements. Electrical Contractor to provide all other fittings and pull boxes of adequate size in the raceway system wherever necessary or required by National Electrical Code. Allow a maximum of four quarter bends between pull boxes in each run of conduits. B. Provide expansion joint fittings for conduits passing through new or existing expansion joints installed between buildings. Verify exact locations and details of expansion joints prior to work. C. Coordinate all conduit routing, pull box and equipment locations with other trades to avoid conflicts of equipment installations. D. All empty conduits shall have pull wires. E. Provide unistrut mounting channels, hanger rods, anchor bolts and all fittings to support conduits and pull boxes. F. All work shall comply with National Electrical Code requirements. G. Electrical Contractor shall anchor and brace all conduits (2" in diameter and larger) per Building Codes. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS A. Support all conduits and equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code, International Building Code, and other applicable codes. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 10 fl n LJ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL B. Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching as may be necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work. Grout around all raceway penetrations and fill all anchor bolt holes or spalled areas. Core drill new penetrations through existing structural walls, ceilings and floor slabs. C. Cleanup: The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish, and debris at all times. Surplus material, tools, and equipment must not be stored at the building. At the completion of the job, all equipment fixtures shall be left clean and in proper condition for their intended use. Nameplates: Provide nameplates for all electrical equipment. A partial list includes, but is not limited to the .following: All controls, wall switch for fans, disconnect switches, switchboard devices, transformers, lighting control devices, all panelboards, and all cabinets. E. Remove all temporary markings, etc., from devices when installing nameplates. Nameplates shall be engraved phenolic, white letters on black background, letter height 1/4" unless a lack of space requires smaller nameplate. Minimum overall height 1/2", length as required. Install with screws or pop rivets; glue is NOT approved. F. Demolition: Shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on Plans and pursuant to Section 26 05 05, Division 01 and Division 02. G. Installation Details: Prepare and submit to the Owner's Representative detail sketches indicating equipment installation information with locations, dimensions and weights. H. Tests: Test all wiring and all electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Provide all instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 3.7 DRAFT STOPS, FIRE STOPS AND ENCLOSURES A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to verify with Architects and other trades to maintain the fire -resistance rating of the walls, partitions, floors or ceiling tops whenever his work requires penetration and opening for equipment installation of these areas. Provide and use approved methods and fire seal material and fitting to maintain the fire resistance rating. All flush -mounted panels where installed on fire rated walls, the Electrical Contractor to provide approved fire rated enclosures of double gypsum wall board for the electrical panels to maintain the wall fire resistance rating. Where panels are semi -flush mounted, provide painted oak wood trim. B. Verify with Architectural Plans and maintain the integrity of the draft stops, fire stops and fire enclosures whenever work requires penetration through or installation within these areas. Patch as required to comply with codes and to provide integrity of stops. C. Locate devices horizontally a minimum of 2' apart on opposing sides of a fire separation wall to maintain fire rating of wall. COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 3.8 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING AND UTILITY SERVICES AND SHUTDOWNS A. Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements: B. Shutdowns: Utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for week -ends, holidays, or at night if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings. The actual time and date will be coordinated with, and approved by the Owner at least 72 hours in advance. C. Costs: Pay all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes, or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. 3.9 INSTRUCTION PERIODS FOR OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Scope: Following installation of work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner's representatives. B. General Description Of Instruction Periods: Each period shall include preliminary discussion, and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to Drawings; followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, and equipment cleaning procedures, control settings and available adjustments. C. Scheduling Of Instruction Periods: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration shall be given to Owner's Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the instruction periods, and agreement reached as to the date at which the instruction periods are to be performed. Advise Owner's Representative two (2) weeks prior to date when ready to conduct instructions and demonstrations; receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangements. END OF SECTION 260500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 12 7 n 0 n n i 0 n i J T r G TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 . 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Devices, material, equipment, enclosures, and assemblies shall be new, UL listed, approved, and suitable for its environment where used. B. Unless noted otherwise, wiring systems shall be installed in a complete raceway system. C. Determine the exact electrical requirements of equipment from the equipment suppliers prior to rough in. Refer any discrepancy between the Drawings and equipment requirements to the Architect for resolution prior to installation. D. All installations shall comply with ADA guidelines and requirements. E. . Construction Observation: Advise the Architect at least two (2) full working days prior to the J covering of concealed electrical work. 1.4 EQUIPMENT FINISH . A. Electrical equipment, control panels, and cabinets, shall be furnished factory.. painted in the manufacturer's standard colors unless otherwise specified. B. Unfinished materials and equipment except conduit, shall be cleaned, primed and painted by the Electrical Contractor as .directed by the Owner's Representative in accordance with the Painting Section of the Specifications. C. The colors of exposed electrical material and apparatus shall be as selected by the Owner's Representative. v BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 1 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each type of material required for the Work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot dipped galvanized. Fittings shall be steel compression type only. Screw type fittings are not acceptable. B. Flexible Steel Conduit: Interlocking single strip, hot -dipped galvanized or sherardized, liquid -tight when used in wet or damp locations. Fittings shall be screw wedge type or liquid -tight type depending on conduit type used. Provide grounding fittings for ground wire installation outside conduit. C Pull Cords: Provide a pull cord in all empty raceways and raceways for communications, sound, computer and telephone systems. Pull cords shall have easy to read distance markings in 1 -foot increments and have a 140 -ib minimum tensile strength. Cords shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE A. Branch circuit wiring shall be #12 AWG copper minimum unless indicated otherwise. Conductors shall be stranded copper with Code grade insulation and a minimum temperature rating of 75° C. C. Branch circuit ground wire, equipment grounding conductor and grounding electrode conductors shall be insulated the same as the circuit or feeder conductors. Conductors #8 and larger shall be connected to, equipment by means of compression type terminal lugs. Compression lugs shall be applied via hydraulic compression, only. Manual/ Mechanical compression methods are not acceptable. Provide two -hole lugs of Al/Cu type only. Single hole lugs are not acceptable. D. Marking: Wire must be marked at 2' intervals with gauge, insulation type, and manufacturer. Label feeders at each end of phase designation. E. Low voltage wiring and cables specified herein by Divisions 26, 27, or 28 shall be installed either in complete raceway system or shall be plenum rated. 2.3 BOXES BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 2 D 0 a 0 0 c 0 0 0 0 a TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT _ AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL A. Manufacturers: Bower, Raco, Steel City. Boxes exposed to weather shall be Crouse Hinds or equal cast aluminum type. B. Electrical boxes shall conform to UL -50 "Standard for Electrical Enclosures" and UL 514 "Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings". C. Provide electrical boxes of the material, finish, type and size indicated .and required for the location, kind of service, number of wires, and function. D. Electrical boxes that are shown in the Drawings with no indication of size shall be provided in accordance with the NEC. E. Junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes shall be pressed steel with knockouts and matching cover as required with size, depth and shape best suited to the location and intended service. Cover on finish area shall be provided with specification grade quantity type to match finish surface. Include plaster or tile rings as required. F. Provide neoprene gaskets 1/8 -inch thick with all boxes subjected to weather. G. Grounding: Provide each box with a grounding terminal. 1. Grounding Terminal: Either a green -colored washer -in -head machine screw not smaller than 10-32 in a drilled and tapped hole in the back of the box, or a grounding bushing with green -colored machine screw terminal attached to one of the conduits. 2. Install grounding jumpers per NEC and as specified in 26 05 26. 2.4 WIRING DEVICES A. General: Wiring devices shall be ivory colored for general use and other colors as specified. B. Devices shall be spec grade 20 -amp rated, manufactured by Leviton, as specified below, unless otherwise approved. Approved substitute receptacles are Pass & Seymour #PT5362-I; requires nie-tail connectors. DEVICES CATALOG NUMBER Switch Leviton # 1221 -SI 3 -way Switch Leviton # 1223 -SI 4 -way Switch Leviton # 1224 -SI Keyed Switch Leviton # 1221-21L — NO Duplex Receptacle Leviton # 5362 -SI Duplex Receptacle in magnetic Leviton # MRI20-I Duplex Receptacle (Emergency) Leviton # 5362 -SR Duplex Receptacle w/ USB Chargers Leviton # T5832-HGI GFCI Duplex Receptacle - Leviton # 7899-HGI GFCI Duplex Receptacle (Emergency) Leviton # 7899-HGR BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL C. Switches and Receptacles: 1. Standard Wall Switches: Shall be single -pole, three-way, four-way, or locking as shown on the Drawings. Install switch with ON terminal up. 2. Duplex Receptacles: Shall be 20 -amp, 125V, NEMA 5-20 configuration installed with ground terminal up. 3. Finish Plates: Provide brushed -satin stainless steel 0.032" type 302 stainless steel with matching hardware. Provide Pass& Seymour SS series unless otherwise approved. Provide each plate with Etched and filled identification at specified in 3.07 below. Emergency device coverplates shall be inscribed with "EMERGENCY". 4. Blank coverplates: Shall be manufactured of similar materials and finish as those specified above. Blank plates shall be brushed #302 stainless steel with radius contour design, countersunk fastener holes, and shall be provided with matching stainless steel hardware. For custom fabricated coverplates, submit sample to engineer for approval prior to final production. 5. Countertop pedestals: Shall be single -gang, double gang, single face or double face as required for the devices indicated. Where two devices are indicated, provide one pedestal. Do not intermix types of devices or multiple circuits in pedestals. Provide WaterSaver #E300WS-PB, E400WS-PB, E500WS-PB, E600WS-PB. As required to suit installation of devices shown. 2.5 EQUIPMENT DISCONNECTS A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty fusible type, NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor, NEMA 3R for exterior and/or wet locations. B. Approved Manufacturers: Square -D, General Electric, Siemens. 2.6 FUSES Unless indicated otherwise, fuses shall be dual element, time -delay type as manufactured by Bussman of McGraw Edison Company. Fuses for circuits shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. Labels indicating the size and type of replacement fuses shall be glued to inside of door on fusible switches and panelboards. 1. Fuses shall be of the current voltage and short circuit rating as required or indicated. 2. Fuses for motors, motor driven equipment, motor operated HVAC mechanical equipment, and motor circuits shall be the Fusetron dual element fuses. 3. Fuses for switchboard, feeders, panelboards, and equipment shall be the low peak current limiting dual element fuses. 4. Spare duplicate sets (3 fuses per set) of fuses of each type and rating shall be provided at the completion of the project. Provide spare fuses in a lockable NEMA -1 fuse cabinet and install at a location directed by the Owner. 5. In the event the Electrical Contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a written request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study, shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for evaluation at least ten (10) working days prior to bid date. If the Owner's Representative's evaluation indicates acceptance, an addendum will be issued listing the other acceptable manufacturer. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center . BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL 2.7 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide molded case circuit breakers of the quick -make and quick -break variety equipped with wiping type contacts and with interrupting rating and trip rating indicated on the Drawings. Provide arc chutes and individual trip mechanisms on each pole. Equipment multiple -pole breakers with both a common trip and trip free feature. Trip indication to be independent of breaker On or Off positions. Breaker is to be fully operable in an ambient temperature of 40°C. 2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide dedicated blocking and support method to ensure secure installation of all device boxes such that the installation is capable of withstanding a minimum 50 -pound pulling force without moving. B. Support raceway by straps, suitable clamps, or hangers to provide a rigid installation. Perforated strap hangers and twisted wire attachments will not be acceptable. Do not support or fasten raceways to other systems or pipes, or in a manner to prevent the ready removal of other pipes. 2.9 GROUNDING A. Conform to NEC Article 250. B. Ground Wire: Color coded green, copper conductor, with insulation same as circuit or feeder conductors. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor or circuit grounding conductor per NEC 250 in raceway systems. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same as circuit conductors. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. One -line diagrams, risers, and conduit routing are schematic and do not show exact arrangement of equipment. B. Where indicated on Drawings, junction boxes and pull boxes are minimum requirements. Provide other fittings and pull boxes of adequate size in the raceway system wherever necessary or required by NEC. Allow a maximum of four 90 -degree bends between pull boxes in each run of conduit. C. For roof -top conduit installation, provide expansion joint fittings and Firestone rubber blocking (to match existing) and assemblies. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 5 TUKWILA• SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL D. Provide expansion joint fittings for conduits passing through new or existing expansion joints. Refer to existing record drawings for location of expansion joint near grid line S-19810. Verify exact locations and details of expansion joints prior to work. E. Coordinate conduit routing, pull box and equipment locations with other trades to avoid conflicts of equipment installations. Empty conduits shall have pull cords. F. Conceal all raceways except as permitted by Architect. G. Where permitted, exposed raceway shall be run parallel or perpendicular to building. Run raceways as high as possible unless noted otherwise. H. Carefully form bends to avoid injuring or flattening raceway. Raceways 1 -inch trade size and larger shall utilize factory formed fittings where bends are 45 -degrees or larger. Minor offsets are permitted to be field bent. All bends in conduits serving low -voltage systems shall not have a bend radii less than 10 -times the nominal conduit size. I. Support raceways with heavy duty, one hole, pressed steel straps on interior surfaces. Support pendant mounted raceways on 1/4" rod with pear shaped hanger (up to 2" pipe size) or trapeze type hanger with 3/8" rod, 1-5/8" square preformed channel. Conduit support system shall be dedicated and isolated from other systems and ceiling supports or tees. Conduit installations shall not use ceiling type wire and clips as support system. J. Anchor all electrical work securely to structure using fasteners approved by a Washington State Licensed Structural Engineer for the types of structure encountered. K. Anchor to frame structure by means of sheetmetal screws. Fasten to structural walls with lead anchors or steel expansion shells and threaded bolts or screws with slotted heads. Fasten to architectural or masonry walls with toggle bolts or molley screws. Deviation from these methods must be approved prior to installation. L. Furnish anchor bolts and anchorage items as required, and field check to insure proper alignment and location. Provide templates, layout drawings, and supervision at the job site to ensure correct placing of anchorage items in concrete. Check embedded items for correctness of location and detail before concrete is installed. M. Control erection tolerance requirements to not impair the strength, safety, serviceability, or appearance of installations, as approved by the Engineer. Determine exact location of conduit. Route all conduit parallel to building lines. N. Hot -dip galvanize all exterior support hardware after fabrication. O. Install individual conductors in conduits, raceways, ducts, and trenches to complete the wiring systems. P. Install switches and cover plates complete in a neat manner in accordance with the NEC and local codes. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 6 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL 3.2 RACEWAY TYPES A. EMT: Interior areas and exterior areas with approved weatherproof fittings. B. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit located in wet locations, mechanical room, kitchen areas, shall be liquid tight type. A maximum of 72" of flexible metal conduit shall be used for the connection to motors 'and vibrating equipment, final connection to lay in light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be continuous grounding type and provide with grounding lug per spec. No flexible conduit allowed for any concealed installation. C. Minimum Sizes: Conduit sizes are not specified on the floor plans. Provide minimum 1/2" conduit for single pole dedicated branch circuits, 3/4" conduit for multi -pole, or combined circuits. Refer to other specification sections for other minimum sizes. Contractor shall provide sizing of conduits as required to meet code where the above specified minimum sizes are too small to afford 40% fill. Conduit sizes shall be sized for conductor types and sizes per NEC. D. Conduit termination shall have code sized junction box for flush or surface installation. Conduit stubs shall have nylon insulated type bushing. E. Pull Cords:. Provide pull cords in empty raceways. Cords shall be continuous in each raceway run and extend a minimum distance of 12" from the junction box or terminal at the end of the raceway. 3.3 WIRE AND CABLE A. Branch Circuit Installation: Branch circuit wiring size #10 and smaller shall have continuous color code identification per standard listed below. Tin all stripped ends of wiring #10 and smaller prior to termination under set screws. B. Use no mechanical means for pulling wires, and no lubricant except powdered soapstone or approved substitute. C. Branch circuit splices may be made with 3M Scotch Lok Electrical Spring type connectors up to #8 AWG size, except motor connections. D. Utilize crimp type pressure connectors insulated with tape or prefabricated covers on motor connections and splices of wiring #6 AWG and larger. E. Make no splices in home runs. F. Do not inter -mix wiring from separate raceway systems unless specifically permitted by the Engineer. G. Each single pole branch circuit shall contain a dedicated neutral conductor and equipment grounding conductor of the same size as the hot conductors. Shared neutral conductors and/or multi -pole breakers used on single pole loads are not permitted. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL H. All wiring shall be identified with permanent wire labels, using alphanumeric designations. All terminations and splices shall be identically labeled for the same wire (i.e. common conductors terminated in multiple locations). Wire labels shall agree with the circuit designations on the as -built drawings. Provide Thomas and Betts, Brady, or equal, printed plastic adhesive tapes to show circuit numbers. Wrap tapes at least two turns around conductor. I. Color Coding Standards: 1. 321, 4 Wire System: 208Y/120V 480Y/277V Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green with (1) yellow stripe 2. Control wiring shall be grey or black with identifying wire numbers at each termination. 3. Color -coded Tape may be used in lieu of color -coded insulation for conductors #4 AWG and larger. However, when color coded tape is used, the conductor insulation shall be black only and shall be tape -identified with colorscheme shown above at splices, terminations and junction boxes. J. Identify conductors in outlets, pull boxes and similar locations where conductors are accessible. K. Conductors in panels, cabinets, enclosures: . Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with T&B Ty -Rap, or equal, nylon wire ties. Provide adhesive back nylon Ty - Rap 4 -way bases (#TC200X200AX or equal) to group conductorsin neat and orderly manner. L. Low voltage wiring and cables specified herein by Divisions 26, 27, or 28 shall be installed either in complete raceway system or shall be plenum rated. • 3.4 BOXES A. Support boxes securely and independently. B. Mount boxes on building surfaces or support with trapeze hanger. C. Do not use junction boxes unless the number of bends, pulling length or circuit requirement necessitates their installation. D. Junction or pull box openings must be accessible. E. Do not use extension rings to provide Code size space within a new junction box. Provide larger junction boxes as required in lieu of extension rings. F. Do not intermix raceways and wiring at common junction boxes except at terminal equipment connections. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 8 • 0 0 a 9 C a a 0 a C 9 D 0 0 0 a TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building FOR ELECTRICAL 3.5 WIRING DEVICES Installation: Install two or more wiring devices shown in one location under a common plate. Install plates with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces. Do not install more than one device in single gang position. Device Locations: Device or equipment mounting height given herein the Specifications, Contract Drawing, and/or documents are intended to provide general guidelines. Provide pre rough -in coordination and verification with other divisions. Verify that the intended mounting heights are appropriate for the intended device use, and the device location is not in conflict with other components. C. Prior to rough -in, devices and equipment locations . may be revised by the Owner's Representative within 20' of the designed contract location, at no cost. Prior to rough -in, confirm locations with Owner for devices they may wish to have relocated from the location indicated on the contract drawings. D. If the contractor fails to provide such coordination and field verification and results of erroneous installation, the contractor shall remedy such installation per Owner's Representative's direction, at contractors cost. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles requiring GFCI protection per NEC. F. Mount wiring devices above finished floor to centerline of device as follows, unless otherwise noted or as directed by Owner's Representative. Coordinate with Owner's Representative for possible interference with decorative features, art displays, etc. Switches 43" (ADA conditions: 32 — 36") Receptacles, Telecom 18" Receptacles Above Counter 8" to CL. Above backsplash or as directed Receptacles (In Classified Areas) 24" (above finished floor and below ceiling) Fire Alarm Pull Station, Wall Phones 43" Fire Alarm Audio Visual Device 80" (or 6" below ceiling), whichever is lower Panelboard 72" to top 3.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. General: Provide disconnects at all motors and other equipment items unless the equipment has a self-contained, Code approved disconnecting method. B. Mounting: Coordinate mounting location with the Equipment Installer. In general, mounting height shall be 6'-6" maximum to top of switch. Provide weatherproof enclosures for all exterior locations. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260501 Technology & Maintenance Service Center.. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS District Administration Building. FOR ELECTRICAL 3.7 GROUNDING A. General: Provide system and equipment grounding in accordance with the applicable codes and ordinances and as further amplified on the Plans. B. Ground service equipment, separately derived systems, conduits, devices and equipment in accordance with NEC, article 250. C. Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in conduits containing wiring systems above 50 volts. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same for circuit or feeder conductors. Size conductors in accordance with NEC article 250. D. Bonding: Conduit systems shall be effectively grounded and bonded together by approved bonding means in accordance with the NEC. Verify ground continuity between conduits, boxes, receptacles, and equipment: 3.8 NAMEPLATES/LABELS/PROGRAMMING A Equipment Identification: Provide nameplates for electrical equipment identification. A partial list includes, but is not limited to the following: All controls, wall switch for fans, disconnect switches, switchboard devices, transformers, lighting control center (LCC), all panel boards, and all cabinets. Remove temporary markings, and the like from devices when installing nameplates. Nameplates shall be engraved phenolic, white letters on black background, letter height 1/4" unless a lack of space requires smaller nameplate. Minimum overall height 1/2", length as required. Install with screws or rivets; adhesive is NOT approved. B. Nameplates/Labels/Programming: All work required in this contract that includes a room number or similar identification system must utilize the Owner's room numbering as specified by the Architect. C. Provide nameplates as specified in on all major equipment with name of equipment, serving panel, circuit number, full load ampere rating, horse power rating, starter size, disconnect size, and fuse size as applicable or otherwise approved by engineer. D. Provide Etched and filled stainless cover plates for all branch circuit wiring devices and lighting controls. Indicate branch panel and circuit. Example: (Pn12LA-12) Lettering shall be no less than 1/8" high and be color as specified. All labeling shall be done after the final load balancing work is complete to provide as -built numbering. Submit sample of finished product to Engineer prior to final fabrication. Color shall be black filled lettering except optional standby circuits shall be red. E. J -boxes shall be labeled with permanent marker. F. Outlets and switches shall be labeled with panel and circuit number(s); Brady 3/4 -inch clear polyester tape with black letters; product #110901, B-430. END OF SECTION 260501 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 - 10 n n I U TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Cascade View Elementary School Renovations New Transportation Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES . Electrical Demolition. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER Contractor shall provide temporary power in the form of portable generators, connection to Owner's existing electrical distribution, or temporary connection to the serving power utility system. Coordinate with Owner and serving electrical utility company. B. Contractor shall submit temporary power sequencing and schedule plans for review and approval during Submittals. When required, generators shall be portable and be contained on an integral trailer, and shall be enclosed in a weatherproof, sound -attenuated enclosure. Coordinate with Architect for locations where portable generators can be located. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260502 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Cascade View Elementary School Renovations New Transportation Building 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation. D. Report discrepancies to Owner's Representative and Owner before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER A. Temporary Electrical Power shall comply with Division 01 "Temporary Facilities and Controls". B. Continuity of Service: Provide temporary service to existing systems as required to maintain continuous operation without reducing equipment efficiency. Coordinate the extent of temporary services with the Architect and Owner. C. Power Outages: Outages shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall only be allowed during connection/disconnection of temporary power. Any essential outages required in the course of construction, whether for temporary services, cutovers, or testing, shall be closely coordinated with the Architect and Owner and shall only occur at pre -scheduled times approved by the Owner. Outages shall be scheduled for weekends, holidays, or after hours if the outages will affect the use of occupied buildings or surrounding buildings. The actual time and dates shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner at least 1 -week in advance. D. Contractor shall provide temporary power throughout Construction Sequences such that no building is without power during occupied periods of time. Coordinate sequences and scheduling with Architect and Owner. E. Contractor shall provide (1) 500 KVA 208Y/120V 3-Phase/4-wire temporary transformer to supply Building's K1 and K4 until permanent electrical service has been installed in Sequence 1C and permanent power is supplied to Buildings K1 and K4. Contractor shall also provide MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260502 - 2 I.. Li I 0 0 J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Cascade View Elementary School Renovations New Transportation Building 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION temporary distribution cabinet and temporary construction power panelboard as shown in Drawings. F Refer to Sequencing and Staging Diagrams contained in the Drawings. Contractor shall provide temporary generators if required to supply facility power when transformers are unable to provide power supply. Contractor shall submit temporary power sequencing and schedule plans for review and approval during Submittals. When required, generators shall be portable and be contained on an integral trailer, and shall be enclosed in a weatherproof, sound -attenuated enclosure. Coordinate with Architect for locations where portable generators shall be located. G. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the Owner's facilities are operational during construction sequences. Coordinate all temporary outages at least 1 -week in advance with Owner and Architect. H. Costs: Pay all costs associated with temporary power and utility shutdowns. No additional payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes, or failure to complete temporary connections and/or permanent service connections within authorized shutdown periods. 3.4 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Identify circuit source of supply to outlets and equipment effected by demolition. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. F. Maintain continuity to existing outlets and equipment scheduled to remain. Provide additional raceway, boxes and wire required to restore existing circuitry. G. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. H. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. I. Disconnect and removeabandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Restore finishes to same quality before demolition work commenced. MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260502 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Cascade View Elementary School Renovations New Transportation Building 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION K. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. L. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused; END OF SECTION 260502 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260502 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT 2 AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building CONDUCTORS AND CABLES v PART 1 - GENERAL .--1 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2 .2 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide electrical power conductors and cables for systems 600 -volts and less. This Section includes single conductor building wire, wire and cables for 600 -volts and less, and wiring connectors and terminations. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 3 — Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (R2007). B. ASTM B 8 — Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft; 2004. C. ASTM 787/B 787M — Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (R2009). NECA 1 — Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractor's Association; 2006. E. NEMA WC 70 — Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009. (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S- 95-658). F. NETA STD ATS — Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building . . CONDUCTORS AND CABLES G. NFPA 70 — National Fire Protection Agency; National Electrical Code (NEC); Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including all Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 44 — Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. I UL 83 — Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. J. UL 486A -486B — Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. K. UL 486C — Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. L. UL 486D — Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. M. UL 854 — Service -Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. N. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 1.5 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring systems 50V and greater shall be installed in a complete raceway system. B. Wiring systems less than 50V: Unless noted otherwise in other sections of these documents, may be installed as open wiring concealed above accessible suspended ceilings and other accessible spaces, subject to the following conditions: 1. Install wiring in conduit where routed in walls, exposed, above non -accessible ceilings, in non -accessible spaces, and outdoors. 2. Open wiring shall be plenum -rated. 3. Provide conduit sleeves where wires penetrate walls. 4. Provide outlet boxes for low -voltage wiring devices and splices. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete submittal information. Approved documents shall include, but not be limited to, factory shop drawings, details, and wiring diagrams. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire and Cable: 1. Southwire. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Okonite Company. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4. Or approved equal. B. Splice Connectors: 1. Burndy. 2. • Ilsco. 3. 3-M. 4. Thomas & Betts. 5. Or approved equal. C. Terminal Lugs: 1. Burndy. 2. Ilsco. 3. Thomas & Betts. 4. Or approved equal. I • 2.2 WIRING REQUIREMENTS A. Branch Circuits: 1. Provide separate grounded conductor (neutral) for each branch circuit. Shared neutral not permitted for multiwire branch circuits. 2. Provide separate equipment grounding conductor for each branch circuit. Shared `7 equipment grounding conductor not permitted for multiple branch circuits. B. Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN-THWN insulation in raceway. C. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN (THWN-2) insulation in listed exterior use raceway. D. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type THWN (THWN-2) insulation in listed underground use raceway. f 2.3 CONDCUTORS AND CABLES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation. D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. E. Comply with NECA WC 70. F. Thermoplastic -Insulated Conductors: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. G. Thermoset -Insulated Conductors: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 3 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building CONDUCTORS AND CABLES H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this Project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper conductors: Soft drawn, annealed, 98 -percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B 3, ASTM B 8, or ASTM B 787/B 787M, unless otherwise indicated. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1: Color code conductors as indicated or otherwise required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout the Project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code: Refer to Section 26 05 01 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical". 2.4 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeder and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. 2. Control Circuits: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 Volts. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below: a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. c. Service Entrance Conductors: Type XHHW-2. E. Conductor Material: Copper. F. Additional Requirements: 1. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN-2, 90 -degrees C. 2. Minimum size conductor: #12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 3. Minimum size conductor: #16 AWG for control circuits. 4. 120 V branch circuits longer than 75 -feet: #10 AWG conductors for 20 -ampere circuits.,_ 5. 277 V branch circuits longer than 200 -feet: #10 AWG conductors for 20 -ampere circuits. 2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A -486B or UL 486C as applicable. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building CONDUCTORS AND CABLES B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size #8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist -on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size #6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. C. Twist -On Insulated Spring Connectors: 1. Standard Applications: Rated 600 V, 221 -degrees F. 2. High Temperature Applications: Rated 600 V, 302 -degrees F. 3. Pre -filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 4. Do not use push -in wire connectors as a substitute for twist -on insulated spring connectors. D. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set -screw type. E. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage wires and cables has been completed. B. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION. A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building . CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. D. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the AHJ. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. F. Install conductors with a minimum of 6 -inches of slack at each outlet. G. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. H. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors: 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. I. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced, conductors. J. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. K. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 01. Identify each conductor with the panelboard and circuit number or other designation indicated. L. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods required per Codes. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 6 n 1 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260519 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER District Administration Building CONDUCTORS AND CABLES O. Open cables shall be installed in a neat and workmanship like manner, parallel or perpendicular to building lines and supported at intervals not greater than 5'. P. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. Use wiring methods required and pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Q. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger. R. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. S. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. T. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. U. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. V. Use Vinyl Mastic Pads and Rolls for splices in wet locations. W. Branch Circuit Installation: 1 Continuous color code insulation throughout. 2. Make no splices in wiring from distribution equipment to first outlet. 3. Do not inter mix wiring from separate electrical systems unless specifically indicated. X. Feeder Installation: 1. Size feeders as shown on Drawings. 2. Identify according to color code standards. 3. Make no splices unless shown on the Drawings or specifically approved by the Owner's representative.. 4. Splices shall be compression sleeve type. 3.4 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure conformity to Code, authorities having jurisdiction, and contract documents. Field tests shall be performed in conformance with the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Standards. Tests shall be performed by an authorized testing agency that is independent from the installing electrical contractor. B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all wiring installed by or altered by the contractor including insulation resistance of all equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall not be responsible for defective insulation in equipment that is existing or has been supplied by other divisions of the specifications, unless such damage is due to negligence or incorrect handling or installation workmanship of this Contractor. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground shall be measured. For circuits rated less than 600 volts, the resistance shall not be less than one megohm. 2 Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000 -volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated 240 volts and below shall be tested with a 500 -volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall be applied for thirty (30) seconds. C. The Contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test reports in the record operation and maintenance manuals for SPU records. Any equipment or cable to fail the above tests shall be repaired or replaced as required to pass the above testing criteria. END OF SECTION 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 8 1 L� n j 0 u f 1 0 0 1 1 j 0 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INNFORMATION Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide a complete grounding system that complies with the current edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and all applicable regulatory codes. B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal frame of buildings. 2. Rode electrodes. 3. Ground Bars. 4. Additional grounding and bonding components required. C. Performance Requirements: Maximum 25 -ohms grounding system resistance. 1.4 REFERENCES NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association, most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Grounding Equipment & Connectors: 1. Cooper Power Systems. 2. Storm Copper Components Co. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building _3. Or approved equal. 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2.2 GROUND RODS A. Minimum size: 3/4 -inch diameter by 10 -feet long, solid copper rods. 2.3 GROUND BARS A. Copper bar with pre -punched holes. B. UL recognized standoff insulators for wall -mounting. C. Stainless steel mounting brackets, stainless steel assembly bolts and lock washers. D. Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations. E. Size as required. 2.4 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be soft drawn, bare, stranded copper unless otherwise noted. Size conductors per Drawings and NEC, Article 250. 1. Grounding Electrode Conductors for AC Systems: a. See NEC table 250.66. 2. Equipment Grounding Conductors: a. See NEC table 250.122. b. Equipment grounding conductors may beinsulated; provide green insulation and/or approved permanent identification for conductors larger than #6 AWG. 2.5 GROUND ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS A. Connectors for grounding electrode conductor to ground rods shall be of the thermal fusion type; conductor -to -conductor connections may be either thermal fusion or approved hydraulically applied compression type. 2.6 GROUNDING BUSHINGS Grounding bushings shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor and shall have approved set -screw type grounding lug connectors. 2.7 GROUNDING CONNECTORS A. Shall meet the requirements of ground bushings, cast, set -screw or bolted type. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 2 7 n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING B. Clamps shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor. Provide approved racewayhub where grounding conductor is shown protected by conduit or armored cable. Clamps shall be U -bolt type for connection to water pipes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving ground rods. C. Prior to making mechanical or thermal connections, all conductors shall be clean, dry and bright with the bonding surface thoroughly cleaned of any oxides, mill, scale or other foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide system and equipment grounding in accordance with the applicable codes and ordinances and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Ground service equipment, separately derived systems, conduits, devices and equipment in accordance with NEC, Article 250. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in conduits containing wiring systems above 50 V. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same as circuit or feeder conductors. Size conductors in accordance with NEC, Article 250. D. Inspection: Place no backfill around made electrode earth grounding systems until the installation is inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative and the Electrical Inspector. Bonding: Conduit systems shall be effectively grounded and bonded together by approved bonding means in accordance with the NEC. Verify ground continuity between conduits, boxes, receptacles, cable trays and equipment. F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated on Drawings or required by the NEC: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, top of electrode shall be 6 -inches below finished surface. 2. Bury electrode conductors below finished surface. G. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together. H. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Section 1 of this Specification. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 3.3 GROUND CONTINUITY A. Maintain ground continuity throughout the entire electrical system. B. Permanently connect the electrical system neutral to the water service. The system shall be grounded only at transformer secondaries and at the main switchboard. Branch panelboard neutrals must be isolated from additional points of grounding. C. Provide approved bushings or locknuts on all conduits terminating in panelboards, pullboxes, or other enclosures to ensure continuity of conduit grounding connections. D Securely ground lighting fixtures via the conduit system or by a separate suitable grounding conductor where flexible conduit is used. E. Provide a separate grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits and in all flexible metallic conduit runs. Connect to the grounding system in an approved manner and so as to comply with codes. F. Cable trays used as equipment grounding conductors shall be specifically approved for that purpose. Special bolted mechanical connectors and/or bonding jumpers shall be utilized to ensure system ground continuity. G. All plug-in receptacles shall be bonded to the box and raceway ground system unless specific isolated ground connections are shown on the Drawings. 3.4 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. All grounding connections shall be carefully made to ensure low system impedance. Locate grounding connections to allow future servicing and expansion. 3.5 PROTECTION Ground conductors shall be protected from mechanical injury during construction. Provide protective coverings or rigid non-ferrous conduit. 3.6 GROUND BODS A. Ground rods shall be driven into undisturbed soil to full depth. Provide additional rods, ionic salt solutions and the like where special low -resistant grounds are specified or to comply with maximum system resistance requirements. 3.7 THROUGH -SLAB GROUND PENETRATIONS A. Ground conductors extending through the slab shall be protected by a rigid conduit sleeve. The void portion of the sleeve shall be packed with non -hardening type duct seal. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 4 n L TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.8 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE GROUNDING 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Metallic shielding components, such as tapes, wires or braids, and their associated conducting or semi -conducting components shall be grounded per NEC, Article 250. Ground terminations shall be made according to the manufacturer's written specifications. 3.9 TESTING A. Shall conform to Section 26 08 00 "Commissioning of Electrical". END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 5 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK n j n n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division L 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology &. Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide conduit and equipment supports, anchors, and fasteners. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NECA 1 — Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Contractors Association; 2006. B. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association; most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. C. ICC — International Code Council. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All concrete fasteners shall be ICC listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts Corporation.-, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 2. Threaded Rod Company. 3. Kildorf. 4. Or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized or stainless steel. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, or welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Owner's Representative before drilling or cutting structural members. 3. Install in accordance with ICC report from manufacturer. - B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four (4) anchors: D. In wet and damp locations, use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 -inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. F. Surface mounted conduit and boxes are allowed only where CMU or Concrete walls are present. All other areas of building are to have conduit and boxes recessed in walls. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building END OF SECTION 260529 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 3 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 • GENERAL 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide outlets and pull boxes as required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors and for wire splices and branches. All outlets shall be code sized junction boxes with matching cover plate for each system used. B. Provide conduit, tubing, wireways, outlets and pull boxes as required to permit pulling conductors and for wire splices and branches. All outlets shall be code sized junction boxes with matching cover plate for each system used. C. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. D. Connections to equipment using flexible conduit and wire connections. E. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. F. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. G. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or surface metallic raceway. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. RACEWAYS AND BOXES V 26 05 33 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES H. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall provide interface between power, communication and A/V cabling in a concrete floor, and at the workstations where power, communications and A/V device outlets are required. The boxes shall provide recessed device outlets that will .not obstruct the floor area. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 (American National Standards Institute) — Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 (American National Standards Institute) — Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.6 (American National Standards Institute) — Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit. D. NEMA FB 1.(National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. E. NEMA OS 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. F. NEMA OS 3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes. NEMA WD 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — General Purpose Wiring Devices. H. NEMA WD 6 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements. I. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). J UL 1 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Flexible Metal Conduit. K. UL 6 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. L. UL 360 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. M. UL 514A (Underwriters Laboratories) — Metallic Outlet Boxes. N. UL 514B (Underwriters Laboratories) — Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings. O. UL 514C (Underwriters Laboratories) — Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush -Device Boxes, and Covers. n fl I LJ f? v n LJ P. UL 797 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Metallic Tubing — Steel. 1 cJ Q. UL 870 (Underwriters Laboratories) - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33. - 2 .71 1 n j n n •J �II 1 J i J L n fl TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES R. UL 1242 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Connections to equipment using flexible conduit and wire connections. C. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. D. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. E. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigidsteel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or surface metallic raceway. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. F. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch, 3/4 -inch for homeruns, unless otherwise specified. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts for all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. B. Product Data: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Raceway fittings. 4. Conduit bodies. 5. Wireway. 6. Pull and junction boxes. 7. Electrical floor boxes. 8. Poke-thru devices. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits of 1-1/2 inch trade size and larger. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 3. Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. 4. Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of floor boxes and poke-thru devices. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 -- Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical floor boxes, poke-thru devices, and fittings of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Provide electrical floor boxes, poke-thru devices, and fittings produced by a manufacturer listed in this Section or in the Drawings. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of floor box or poke-thru device through one (1) source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Boxes and Fittings: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, NEC, UL, ETL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to boxes and fittings. D. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall be approved by local codes. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall be UL listed to their Standards UL 514A and UL 514C. Floor boxes and poke- thru devices shall conform to the standards set in the National Electrical Code. Floor boxes shall also have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. B. Deliver floor boxes and poke-thru devices in factory labeled packages. C. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. D. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under other Sections. B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. C. Coordinate floor boxes and poke-thru devices with existing conditions and new space layouts. D. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other Sections. E. Determine connection locations and requirements. F. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES G. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR WIRING A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable. Large pull boxes shall be fabricated sheet steel; zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover. B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same manufacturer and to match raceway. Boxes to accommodate standard devices and device plates. C Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be the type specifically designed for that purpose. D. General Purpose Electrical Outlet: Provide, as required for work and installation, 4" square flush junction box, 2-1/8" deep, with finished cover plates to match device type used or as noted. Provide additional depth box or extension rings and/or mud rings as required to provide a flush installation. E. Telecommunications Outlet: Provide RANDL 5 series #T-55017 box for telecommunications and voice outlets. Provide mudrings as specified. 2.2 EXTERIOR WIRING A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast of corrosion resistant alloy compatible with raceway to which it is connected. Pull boxes shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized. All boxes shall have gasketed covers. 2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242, zinc -coated steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; threaded, all steel fittings. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: UL 1, interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: UL 360, interlocked steel or aluminum construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B, cadmium- or zinc -plated. 2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3 and UL 797; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB. 1. 1. Steel. 2. Compression Type. 3. Insulated throat. 4. Listed as rainproof. 2.7 METALLIC CONDUIT BODIES A. Product Description: UL 5 f4B. 2.8 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Square D. 3. Or approved equal. B. Product Description: UL 870; General purpose type wireway. 1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Size: Per codes. 4. Cover: Screw cover. 5. Fittings: Lay -in type with removable top, bottom, and sides; captive screws. 6. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. 2.9 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 -inch male fixture studs where required. B. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in 26 05 01. C. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 6 r T fl 0 L r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260533 Technology & Maintenance Service Center RACEWAYS AND BOXES District Administration Building n —1 2.10 VOICE AND DATA OUTLET BOXES 7 A. Minimum Size: 5 -inches square, 2-7/8 inches deep. Depth does not include plaster or extension J rings. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. J C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. n �j 2.11 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2.12 FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Legrand/Wiremold, Models RFB11-OG and RFB9-OG. 2. Or approved equal. 2.13 POKE-THRU DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Legrand/Wiremold, Model 8ATCP-BK. 2. Or approved equal. B. Project Specific, each poke-thru shall contain the following: 1. (2) 20 -amp duplex power receptacles. 2. (4) dedicated power circuits, (1) for each outlet. C. Materials: 1 8AT Poke-Thru Assembly: shall consist of an_insert and activation cover. Overall poke- thru assembly shall be 16-3/4" in length. 2. Insert: the insert body shall recess the devices a minimum of 2-3/4" and have a polyester based backing enamel finished interior (black). There shall be necessary channels to provide complete separation of services. The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material .will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain fire J rating of the unit and the floor slab. The insert shall have retaining feature that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners. The poke-thru insert shall also consist of a 3/4" trade size conduit stub that is connected ,J to the insert body and a 24.5 cu. in. [402m1] stamped steel junction box for wire splices and connections. The stamped steel junction box shall also contain the necessary means to electrically ground the poke-thru device to the system ground. 3. Activation Cover: the activation covers shall be manufactured of die-cast aluminum alloy and be available in powder -coated gray, black, or plated in brass, nickel or bronze finish. Two gaskets (one for carpet and one for tile) are provided to go under the trim flange. to �j RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 7 _i TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES maintain scrub water tightness. The activation cover shall be 9-1/4" in diameter. The activation covers shall be available in carpet and tile versions. The carpet covers shall be surface mounted and the tile covers shall be flush with the finished floor covering. The cover shall have spring loaded slides to allow cables to egress out of the unit and maintain as small an egress opening as possible. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. B. Verify outlet locations, routing, and termination locations of raceway prior to rough -in. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source. C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed. D. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections above accessible ceiling finishes. E. Disconnect abandoned equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed. F. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods as specified. G. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. Mark and protect all raceway not designated for modification or demolition. Replace any raceway not designated for modification or demolition that becomes damaged during the project. H. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods specified. Where none are specified, match existing equipment size/type being extended. I. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install raceway and boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533-8 J n fl J n J J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES B. Equipment Connections: 1. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. 2. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. 3. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. 4. Install cord and cap for field -supplied attachment plug. 5. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. 6. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. 7. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. 8. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. C. Penetrate firewalls and fire -rated floors with rigid galvanized steel conduit. Extend a minimum of six inches beyond the firewall. Provide firestopping ground and bond raceway and boxes. D. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes. E. Identify raceway and boxes per Section 26 05 01. F. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 3.4 INSTALLATION — RACEWAY J n 1 J r J n L r A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack attached to structure. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Install IMC and EMT for general wiring. Flexible conduit may be used only for installation within existing walls. H. Install flexible conduit for connection to motors, transformers and vibrating equipment, with enough length to provide at least a ninety degree bend in the flexible conduit. Use liquid -tight metallic conduit in wet, damp or exterior locations. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 9 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES I. Construct wireway supports from steel channel. J. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. - K. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between conduit bodies and boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one- shot bender to fabricate or install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit 2 inch trade size and larger. R. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. S. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. T. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. U. Close ends and unused openings in wireway. 3.5 INSTALLATION — BOXES A. Install boxes used for equipment and luminaire attachment directly to structure or to supports provided under Section 260501 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical Systems". Do not use supports for non -electrical equipment or systems for electrical system attachment. - B. Install wallmounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. Use 4 -inch square boxes for receptacles. C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough -in to accommodate intended purpose. D. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. E. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. F. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 10 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260533 Technology & Maintenance Service Center RACEWAYS AND BOXES District Administration Building n G. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. n 1 J n J 9 9 9 H. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation in non -acoustical rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. L. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. N. Support boxes independently of conduit. O. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. P. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Q. Install a minimum of one 1 inch conduit for every four data and voice outlets. 3.6 INSTALLATION — FLOOR BOXES The minimum concrete pour depth shall be 4-1/8" (RFB9) or 6-1/8" (RFB11). The floor box shall contain four leveling legs to provide full pre -concrete pour adjustment. B. The box shall ship with a disposable cover to prevent the entry of debris during the construction phase. Alternate disposable covers to provide terrazzo pour stops is to be available from the manufacturer. 3.7 INSTALLATION — POKE-THRU DEVICES A. Unit shall permit all wiring to be completed at floor level. The 8AT units shall mount in an 8 - inch cored hole, actual 8-1/16 inch core hole. Use is defined by the UL Fire Resistance Directory as a minimum spacing of 2 -feet on center and not more than one device per 65 square -feet of floor area in each span. B. Installation shall be completed by pushing unit down into the cored hole. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout and/or approved drawings. Installer shall comply with detailed manufacturer's instruction sheet included with each device. The unit shall contain a retainer for securing the device in the slab, as well as the necessary intumescent material to seal the cored hole under fire conditions. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 11 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.8 INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 260501 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical Systems". B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.9 ANCHORING A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are operated. 3.10 FLUSH MOUNTING A. Unless approved by Architect, all electrical outlet boxes installed in finished areas shall be flush mounted. Provide cutting and patching as required. B. Except for approved surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling. C All materials, installations, and work within the ceiling shall comply with Code with regard to plenum space requirements. D. Flush mounted boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be mounted back-to-back. Provide 6" minimum horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes. Provide 24" minimum horizontal separation between outlet boxes on fire rated walls. 3.11 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A. General: Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings, door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceiling and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment. B. Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features such as between a doorjamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets, which are located off center. C. Vertical And Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically. Relocate all such outlets which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 12 n r- l TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES D. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material, locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in same panel position. 3.12 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. In ceilings of Acoustical Material: Locate in accordance with approved ceiling layout plans and so that fixtures replace full size ceiling tiles where possible. 3.13 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide complete connection to equipment in operable conditions. Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment. Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation rating different from circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination, and connection per codes. 3.14 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank covers or device cover plates on all boxes. 3.15 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed only.at locations approved by the Engineer. B. In suspended ceiling spaces shall be supported from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. C. The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. The Contractor shall add and provide all boxes as required per code. 3.16 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. C. Coordinate with equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 13 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 3.17 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other foreign materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore final finish. C. Repeat above process as satisfactory to Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 260533 cJ RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 14 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL . Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION Project Locations: 1. Cascade View Elementary School 13601 32°d Ave S Tukwila, WA 98168 2. New Transportation Building 3807 South 128th Street Tukwila WA 98168 3. Stadium Support Services 4414 S 144th Street Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal—clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground—line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLOR STANDARD A. Color for Printed Legend: 1. 208/120 Volt Power: White letters on a black field. 2. 240/120 Volt Power: White letters on a black field. 3. 480/277 Volt Power - White letters on blue 4. 208/120 Volt emergency Power: White letters on a dark orange field 5. 240/120 Volt emergency Power: White letters on a dark orange field 6. 480/277 Volt Power - White letters on darker orange field 7. Fire Alarm: White on red. 8. Security/Access: White on yellow 9. Data: White on blue 10. AV: White on purple 11. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 2.2 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self—Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, laminated hard label with a clear, weather— and chemical— resistant coating. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS - C. Snap—Around Labels for conduit: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color—coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap—Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid—colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Self—Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant', 2 inches wide;', compounded for outdoor use. 2.3 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL—CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color—Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self—adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl—cloth, self—adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014—inch— thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with - tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self—locking nylon tie fastener. E. Write—On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion—resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.4 UNDERGROUND—LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright—colored, continuous—printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct—burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self—Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label, multicolor, pressure—sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum size = 1/4". - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS C. Baked -Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4 -inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal -Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose - acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -inch galvanized -steel backing;I, and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4 -inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source W a r n i n g : "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with letters per above. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Color shall be as follow: 1. 208/120 Normal - Black with white letters 2. 240/120 Normal Black with white letters 3. .480/277 Normal - Blue with white letters 4. 208/120 Emergency - Dark Orange/Red with white letters 5. 240/120 Emergency - Dark Orange/Red with white letters 6. 480/277 Emergency - Dark Orange/Red with black letters C. Receptacle and Switch Labels: All receptacles and switches shall be labeled inside the box with pen with panel and circuit number. In addition provide a ''A" clear plastic dymo label on the front of the plate indicating panel and circuit number. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus -inert, self -extinguishing, 1 -piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 501b, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color -coding. B. Junction Boxes: All junction boxes shall be painted per the following color code. In addition hand write the circuit or types of circuits inside each junction box. 1. 480/277 Volt Normal: Brown 2. 208/120 Volt Normal: Light Black so marker can be read. 3. 240/120 Volt Normal: Light Black so marker can be read. 4. 480/277 Volt emergency: Darkest Orange or Red as allowed by code authority 5. 208/120 Volt Normal: Dark Orange or Red as allowed by code authority 6. 240/120 Volt Normal: Dark Orange or Red as allowed by code authority IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4,. TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS 7. Fire Alarm: Red 8. Intercom/Clock: Gray 9. Data/Phone: Blue 10. AV: Purple 11. Security: Yellow C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self—tapping, stainless—steel screws or stainless—steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.8 PANEL DIRECTORIES A. Directory: Provide typewritten circuit directory on the inside of each panel door under plastic cover, identifying the type and location of every load. At lighting and receptacle circuits, indicate room numbers and names. All room numbers shall be as furnished by the owner. B. Identification: Spare circuits will be identified as such in pencil. Permanent room numbers, as furnished by owner, shall be used for location identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Accessible Raceways and Metal—Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and' Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self—adhesive vinyl label or snap— around label or self—adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color—coded, self—adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands or snap—around, color— coding bands: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Fire—Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. 4. Security System: Blue and yellow. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 7. Control Wiring: Green and red. C. Power—Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 4 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color— coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. D. Branch—Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three vi branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use aluminum wraparound marker labels. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number. J IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 5 r" u TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field—installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory—installed connections. 3. Coordinate .identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground—line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground— line warning tape for both direct—buried cables and cables in raceway. H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self—adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8—inch— high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer and load shedding. J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Panel Directories: Provide panel directories numbered odd numbers on left and even on right. Multiple section panels shall have numbers continued. Provide circuit description and field room number for every circuit. For example "Receptacles Rooms 100,104" Spare and space to be noted in pencil. 2. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2—inch— high letters on 1-1/2—inch- high label, where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Stenciled legend 4 inches high. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • 26 05 53 - 6 lJ v9 n TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to. those appropriate for viewing from the floor. ' 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Receptacles and switches where directed by owner d. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. e. Transformers. f. Electrical substations. g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. h. Motor—control centers. i. Disconnect switches. j. Enclosed circuit breakers. k. Motor starters. 1. Push—button stations. m. Power transfer equipment. n. Contactors. o. Remote—controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. P. Data q. Master clock and program equipment. r. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. s. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. t. Fire—alarm control panel and annunciators. u. Security and intrusion—detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and racks. v. Monitoring and control equipment. w. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. x. Terminals, "racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. y. Junction boxes: System, voltage and circuit with black pen. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finishwork. D. Self—Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach non -adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two—color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05.53 - 7 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260553 Technology & Maintenance Service Center IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL District Administration Building SYSTEMS at 50—foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25—foot maximum intervals in congested areas. Color—Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120—V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White 3. Colors for 240/120—V Circuits: e. Phase A: Black. f. Phase B: Red. g. Phase C: Blue. h. Neutral: White 4 Colors for 480/277—V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray 5. Field—Applied, Color—Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half—lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. - Underground—Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground—line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 8 J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building PART 1 - GENERAL 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary. Conditions and Division 1. 7 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION I .J A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center J 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144`h St. �—� Tukwila, WA 98168 j 1.3 SCOPE A. Test the entire electrical installation to assure compliance with code and proper system operation. B. Electrical systems commissioning consists of static checks of component and system installations and actual testing of equipment conditions and functions. C. The Commissioning Authority shall review and approve, prior to use, all test procedures and forms used and shall witness a varying fraction of the checks and testing performed by the Contractor. The Commissioning Authority shall review the completed check and test documentation of the Contractor for all checks and tests. 1.4 CIRCUIT TESTS A. Conform to commissioning requirements. B. Test wiring and electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Upon request, demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 1.5 LOAD BALANCE A. Checks shall be made for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL B. Record all circuit changes on as -built drawings. C. Do not fabricate nameplates, or cover plate device labeling prior to load balance test and adjustments. 1.6 GROUNDING TEST Measure the OHMIC value of the Existing Electric Service Entrance metallic "Electrical System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod" method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained, notify the Architect in writing. B. Provide paper copy of the test results in the record O&M manuals. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Thirty (30) days before any testing is conducted, submit an overall testing plan and schedule for electrical systems that lists the equipment, modes to be tested, dates of testing and parties conducting the tests. Put these tests into the master construction schedule. Keep this plan and schedule updated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A A Certified Testing Company shall perform the work of this Section and shall be qualified to test electrical equipment and is a NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) certified testing agency. The Certified Testing Company shall not be associated with the manufacturer(s) of the equipment or systems under test. B. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the checks and testing requirements. Test equipment shall have been calibrated within one (1) year of its use on this Project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. - All shall be provided by and remain the property of the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Division 01. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 260800-2 n 1 j j fl J n U j n j s Li u TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 3.2 CHECKS AND TESTS 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL A. Checks are intended to begin upon completion of a component or equipment installation. Testing generally occurs later when systems are energized or nearing that point. Beginning system testing before full completion, does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system as soon as possible, including all construction checklists and may require retesting portions of the system once all components are fully functioning. The check and test procedures and record forms shall contain the following: 1. The Subcontractor(s) executing checks or tests. 2. A list of the integral components being inspected and tested, equipment tag numbers, manufacturer, model number, pertinent performance information / rating data. 3. Test equipment used. 4. Construction checklists associated with the components, if any. 5. Any special required conditions of the check or test for each procedure. 6. Items, conditions or functions to be inspected, verified or tested, the checks and testing method given and a place provided with results recorded. 7. Acceptance criteria (or reference by specific table where the acceptance criteria is found). 8. For each procedure, list the technician performing check or test and company, witnesses of the tests and dates of tests. 9. Sampling strategies used. C. The test procedures for dynamic equipment like lighting controls, emergency generator or fire alarm shall contain more step-by-step procedures. The test procedures and forms for more static components like panelboards, switchgear, circuit breakers, transformers, etc., can be more checklist -like in format. For each piece of equipment, checks and test procedures and their documentation record forms may be different documents or combined in the same document, but checks and tests should be grouped. D. At the Commissioning Authority's discretion, if large numbers or repeated deficiencies are encountered, the Contractor shall test and troubleshoot all remaining systems at issue on their own before commissioning with the Commissioning Authority will resume. E. Sampling for Identical Units. When there are a number of identical units, at the Commissioning Authority's discretion, some or all procedures of a test for a piece of equipment or assembly may be omitted when these same tests on other pieces of identical equipment or assemblies were conducted without deficiency. 3.3 LOAD BALANCE Checks shall be made for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. B. Record all circuit changes on as -built drawings. C. Do not fabricate nameplates, or cover plate device labeling prior to load balance test and adjustments. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 3.4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Conform to commissioning requirements. B. Test wiring and electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Upon request, demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 3.5 GROUNDING TEST A. Measure the OHMIC value of the Existing Electric Service Entrance metallic "Electrical System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod" method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance .cannot be obtained, notify the Architect in writing. B. Provide paper copy of the test results in the record O&M manuals. 3.6 EQUIPMENT -SPECIFIC TESTING A. The following paragraphs define the testing requirements for each type of system or feature that is a part of the project. The Commissioning Authority shall use this information to develop specific testing procedures for each of the systems to be commissioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for support, execution and coordination of these tests as described in the project specifications including intersystem tests and interlocks with systems in other Divisions. B. Common Testing Requirements: 1. The following requirements apply to all electrical systems and features that are to be commissioned when referenced below. Tests shall. a. Verify functionality and compliance with the design intent for each individual sequence module in the sequences of operation. Verify proper operation of all control strategies, energy efficiency and self -diagnostics features by stepping through each sequence and documenting equipment and system performance. Test every step in every written sequence and other significant modes, sequences and operational features not mentioned in written sequences; including startup, normal operation, shutdown, scheduled on and off, unoccupied and manual modes, safeties, alarms, over=rides, lockouts and power failure. b. Verify all alarm and high and low limit functions and messages generated on all points with alarm settings. c. Verify integrated performance of all components and control system components, including all .interlocks and interactions with other equipment and systems. d. Verify shut down and restart capabilities both for scheduled and unscheduled events (e.g. power failure recovery and normal scheduled start/stop). e. When applicable, demonstrate a full•cycle from off to on and no load to full load and then to no load and off. f. Verify time of day schedules and setpoints. g. Verify all energy saving control strategies. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00 - 4 f, n r TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL h. Verify that monitoring system graphics are representative of the systems and that all points and control elements are in the same location on the graphic as they are in the field. i. Verify operator control of all commandable control system points including proper security level access. j. When testing procedures for commissioned equipment are listed in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems the NETA test procedures shall be part of the testing requirements of this specification. Additional testing procedures may be listed in this specification. C. Common Acceptance Criteria: 1. The following common acceptance criteria apply to all equipment, assemblies. and features: a. For the conditions, sequences and modes tested, the equipment, integral components and related equipment shall respond to varying loads and changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, according to the sequences of operation, as specified, according to acceptable operating practice and the manufacturer's performance specifications. Verify that equipment operates within tolerances specifiedin: governing codes, acceptance criteria contained in the construction documents, manufacturer's literature and according to good operating practice. b. Systems shall accomplish their intended function and performance. c. All safety trips shall require a manual reset to allow a system restart. d. Resetting a manual safety shall result in a stable, safe, and predictable return to normal operation by the system. e. Safety circuits and permissive control circuits shall function in all possible combinations of selector switch positions (hand, auto, inverter, bypass, etc.). f. Other acceptance criteria is given in the equipment testing requirements articles or referenced standards. g. Additional acceptance criteria will be developed by the Commissioning Authority when detailed test procedures are developed. h. When testing procedures for commissioned equipment are listed in NETA Acceptance Testing. Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems the NETA performance criteria shall apply. D. Equipment -Specific Testing Requirements: 1. Scheduled Lighting Controls: a. Test Methods: Utilize active testing, and trending when available. If able to trend, trend all zones over a week period. b. Sampling Strategy: Manually test all of the zones. 2. Occupancy Sensor/Daylighting Controls: a. Test all unit functions, including sensor sensitivity and time -to -OFF functions and ensure that sensor location is proper and won't be tripped inadvertently by other occupants and movements outdoors, etc. b. Test Methods: Utilize active test methods. c. Sampling Strategy: Manually test all of the sensors. d. Additional Acceptance Criteria: Reasonable sensitivity, no inadvertent trips, lights go off or dim within 5 seconds of design. 3. Fire Alarm System: COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 Technology & Maintenance Service Center District Administration Building 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL a. Test the fire alarm and smoke detection systems according to NFPA 110 (current edition adopted by AHJ), and Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm". END OF SECTION 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00 - 6. r-� 2 LJ J .J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260923 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Technology & Maintenance Service Center 4060 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 2. District Administration 4640 South 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting control design requirements. B. Lighting control design requirements. C. Installation and commissioning. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete submittal information. Approved documents shall include factory shop drawings, details, and wiring diagrams. A. Submit the manufacture's installation manual & equipment specific startup documents as part of the initial equipment submittal. B. Submit the manufacture's operation and maintenance manual as part of the initial equipment submittal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 - 260923 `1 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES C. Manufacture shall certify that products will meet product specifications and local energy codes. D. Manufacture shall provide final review of sensor type, layout and placement- drawing submittals and pre -installation site visit. If any additional devices are required to meet coverage patterns and local energy codes, provide additional equipment at no additional cost to the owner. 1.6 LIGHTING CONTROL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS General Lighting. 1. Occupancy sensors (wall or ceiling) are to provide manual on and automatic off in all Classrooms, Offices, Conference rooms, Work rooms, Custodial Rooms, Storage rooms and Staff Restrooms. Classrooms shall include minimum of (2) occupancy sensors in opposite corners of the room to provide complete coverage even while no students are present. Layout shall include one sensor in nearest the corner of the primary teacher's desk. 2. Occupancy sensors (wall or ceiling) are to provide automatic on and automatic off in corridors, common areas and public restrooms. Common areas include Gym, multi-purpose rooms, cafeteria and similar spaces. 3. All occupancy sensors shall be dual technology and shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts for interface with building energy management system. 4. Typical classroom lighting shall be controlled via an on/off station with one button provided for each lighting zone. Switch will be located at entry to the classroom. 5. Where indicated on drawings, provide exterior occupancy sensor at each point of entry to control building mounted entry light at that entry only. 6. Corridor lighting shall be controlled via occupancy sensors located within each corridor. A lower case letter is indicated by each sensor on the drawings indicating which zone the sensor shall control. 7 Common area lighting shall be controlled via switches and occupancy sensors located within each area. A lower case letter is indicated by each switch and sensor on the drawings indicating which zone the device shall control. 8. Mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, kitchens and similar spaces where safety would be compromised by automatic lighting controls shall not be equipped with occupancy sensors and shall be provided with a two button switch at main entry to space. Each button will control 50 percent of the lights in the space to be code compliant. 9. All time of day sweep control is to be provided from the building's energy management system, for exterior lighting only. 10. Photocells shall provide automatic dimming control for each code required daylight zone. 11. Photocells shall be provided integral to the fixture when indicated on the drawings. B. Emergency egress lighting. 1. Emergency egress lighting levels are to comply with code required minimum 1 foot-candle in all required paths of egress. 2. Emergency egress lighting shall be switched with general lighting pattern and include an emergency battery pack. Upon power failure, egress lighting shall be driven to 100 percent light level independent of photocell dimming control. C. Ceiling and wall mount occupancy/vacancy sensor time delay settings. 1. Classrooms — Shall be adjusted to 15 minutes. 2. Public/Student Restroom — Shall be adjusted to 15 minutes. LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 2 1 n J fl E L c. ri J r LJ n 7 1 j J TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260923 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES 3. Corridors - Shall be adjusted to 30 minutes. 4. Offices/Conference Rooms - Shall be adjusted to 15 minutes. 5. Gym - Shall be adjusted to 15 minutes. 6. Work/Storage/Custodial Spaces - Shall be adjusted to 5 minutes. D. Interior daylight sensor light level settings. 1. General classrooms and extended learning areas of corridors 45 foot-candles. 2. Corridors — 25 foot-candles. 3. Offices and conference rooms — 40 foot-candles. 4. Gym and commons — 30 foot-candles. 5. Specialty classrooms — 60 foot-candles. 6. Library - 60 foot-candles. 7. Music classrooms — 45 foot-candles. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Occupancy sensors shall be dual type combining passive infrared and microphonic technology. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially turn lights on from an off and secondary relay for HVAC control. 1. Occupancy Sensor Ceiling Mount Standard Devices: Acuity Controls CM 10 R, CM PDT 10 R, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. High Bay O.S. for commons: CM 6 R or equal. 2. Occupancy Sensor Ceiling Mount Digital Devices: Acuity Controls nCM PDT 9 AR, nCM PDT 10 AR, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 3. Occupancy Sensor Wall Mount Standard Devices: Acuity Controls WV PDT 16 R, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 4. Occupancy Sensor Wall Mount Digital Devices: Acuity Controls nWV PDT 16 (nAR40 for HVAC integration); equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches shall control area as indicated on drawings. 1. Wall Switch Standard Devices: Acuity Controls WSX PDT XX, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 2. Wall Switch Digital Devices: Acuity Controls nWSX PDT XX, nPODM, nPODM DX, nPODM 2P, nPODM 2P DX, nPODM 4S, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 3. Wall switches where installed in rooms with controlled receptacles shall have one button programmed for a two hour receptacle override when time clock has controlled receptacles in off mode. This button may also control the lighting. 2.3 POWER PACKS A. Provide power packs as required to control space as indicated. on drawings. 1. Power Pack Standard Devices: Acuity Controls PP20, equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260923 Technology & Maintenance Service Center . LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES 2. Power Pack Digital Devices: Acuity Controls nPP 16, nPP 16 DS; equal by Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 3. Power Pack Receptacle Control: Acuity Control nPP2OPLBP, equal Hubbell or Watt Stopper. 2.4 DAYLIGHT SENSORS Sensors shall control 0 to 10V DC electronic dimming ballasts and automatically raise and lower lighting based on ambient light levels. Control range shall be adjustable from 20' to 60' candles with adjustable rate of change speeds and will control up to 50 standard dimming ballasts. 1. Photocell daylight sensor: Acuity Controls nCM ADCX, nCM ADC DZ or equal by Watt Stopper. 2.5 EXTERIOR PHOTOCELL A. Exterior photocells shall be provided by the controls contractor except where indicated as integral to a fixture. 2.6 MASTER CONTROL MODULE FOR CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES A. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time -based control of downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet network. 1. Devices shall have a user interface that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage, and have a touch screen. 2. Control device shall have multiple RJ -45 ports for connection to the graphic touch screen, other backbone devices like the nBRG8), or directly to receptacle control devices (up to 128 per port). 3. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it. 4. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock. 5. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 1500 devices to the management software. 6. Network device shall be able to communicate natively via BACnet IP and BACnet MSTP for BAS integration. B. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following nLight model Series: nECY 24 BAC 2.7 COMMUNICATION BRIDGE A. Device shall have the following features: 1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4" x 4" square junction box. 2. Device shall have 8 RJ -45 ports. 3. Device shall. be capable of aggregating communication from multiple receptacle control zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Master Control Module. 4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply or delivered via a CAT -5 cabled connection. LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 4 n n n n • 1 E_ TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260923 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES 5. Device shall be capable of redistributing power from its local supply and connect receptacle control zones with excess power to receptacle control zones with insufficient local. power. This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network receptacle control system. B. Communication Bridge devices shall be the following nLight model numbers: nBRG 8 (8 Ports) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Relay Power Packs: Provide supplemental relay power packs as required to control circuits indicated. Interconnect power packs and sensors to facilitate concurrent control of lighting fixtures as indicated in drawings. Install in accessible ceiling spaces when possible. Provide actual location of power packs on record drawings. C. System setup/calibration and startup commissioning shall be done by factory -certified field service representative during site visits to ensure proper system installation and operation. System setup should only occur after final finishes and furniture are installed. Provide documentation of setup/calibration procedures. Following installation completion and basic system setup, contractor shall provide a qualified, fully trained, system programmer to field program system functionality. Programmer shall meet with Owner's representative and Architect/Engineer to determine desired sequence of operation. Programming will include 1. Setting preset lighting levels for all areas. 2. Setting time of day Time Clock events by controls contractor. 3. Setting Astronomic Time Clock events by controls contractor. 4. All other items required for full system functionality per design intent. D. Contractor shall provide, as part of this contract, minimum of 4 -hours of system operation training for Owner. Training shall be at time to be stipulated by Owner and shall include system capabilities, operation, maintenance, programming and troubleshooting. Training and programming shall be completed prior to job closeout. 3.2 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURE'S AND CONTRACTOR'S PARTICIPATION IN PROJECT COMMISSIONING A. Assist in developing the final functional test procedures as specified in section 260800 and related sections. B. Provide authorized startup technician to perform functional performance testing as specified in section 260800 and related sections. C. Provide building commissioning support as specified in section 260800 and related sections. LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT AUXILIARY PROJECT PACKAGE #2 260923 Technology & Maintenance Service Center LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE District Administration Building CONTROL DEVICES 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust occupancy sensors programming & daylight sensors in each room space in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacture and owner's representative. B. Occupancy sensor adjustment shall accurately detect occupancy within 1 -foot of entering room and throughout space. C. Occupancy sensors shall be located so that HVAC noise and air flow does not affect the sensors. HVAC system must be operational prior to adjustments. D. Time delays shall be set per the owner's direction as indicated in this specification section. END OF SECTION 260923 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 6 Rachelle Ripley From: Norita Deckard Sent: Friday, April 27, 2018 3:19 PM To: Rachelle Ripley Subject: FW: Address Change PIN 1523049013 Importance: High From: Don Tomaso Sent: Friday, April 13, 2018 11:21 AM To: Don Tomaso <Don.Tomaso@TukwilaWA.gov>; 'dylanbailey@waterdistrict125.com' <dylanbailey@waterdistrict125.com>; Fessenden, Janise <Janise.Fessenden@kingcounty.gov>; Janine Springer (Janine.M.Springer@usps.gov) <Janine.M.Springer@usps.gov>; Jeremy DelMar <jdelmar@highlinewater.org>; Joanna Fortenberry <Joanna.Fortenberry@TukwilaWA.gov>; Norita Deckard <Norita.Deckard@TukwilaWA.gov>; PSE Addressing - PSE (ServiceAddressCorrec@pse.com) <ServiceAddressCorrec@pse.com>; Richard Takechi <Richard.Takechi@TukwilaWA.gov>; Roman Linsao <Roman.Linsao@TukwilaWA.gov>; Scott (scottco@valleycom.org) <scottco@valleycom.org>; Shane Young<shaneyoung@waterdistrict125.com>; Tami Eberle -Harris <Tami.Harris@TukwilaWA.gov>; 'Tina.c.Fisher@usps.gov' <Tina.c.Fisher@usps.gov>; Valley View Sewer District (valvue@valleyviewsewer.org) <valvue@valleyviewsewer.org> Subject: Address Change PIN 1523049013 Importance: High FYI, The address for PIN 1523049013 has been changed from 4060 S. 144th to "4160 S. 144th" this new address accurately reflects the buildings location on S. 144th This is the former King County Library building and Tukwila School District has taken possession of the property Don Don Tomaso Battalion Chief Fire Marshal City of Tukwila don.tomasoAtukwilawa.gov Direct Line 206-971-8723 Office Line 206-575-4407 "You can't live a perfect day without doing something for someone who will never be able to repay you." John Wooden 1 The city ofopportunity, the community of choice. NOTICE: All emails, and attachments, sent to and from Tukwila Fire Department are public records and may be subject to disclosure pursuant to the Public Records Act (RCW 42.56) 2 e o•• e + B93-0136 0'394-0416 ti$C17-0025 D17-0227 0'EL07-178 EL09-0767 `0EL17-0498 {jEL18-0039 EL18-0040 'EL18 0066 4L18-0111 EL18-0299 ;SEL18-0377 '' {3M18-0019 • M95-0152 • akP93-0043 • r 4P93-0154 • PW17-0077 'PW93-0084 PW93-0085 '. {'1"'PW95-0101 • '4,PW95-0102 • 31N95-0103 0 0 0 0 e 4 PW95-0104 ;013W95-0105 f'PWF17-0090 4'PWF18-0021 PWF18-0048 .4'RPR16-0143 501-101 4PS95-093 O SN11-035 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 /523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 1523049013 Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN Assessor PIN '7W DEVELOPMENT DEVELOPMENT CONCURRENCY DEVELOPMENT ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL OTC ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL OTC ELECTRICAL OTC ELECTRICAL OTC ELECTRICAL OTC ELECTRICAL OTC MECHANICAL MECHANICAL PROJECT PROJECT PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC WORKS FRANCHISE FRANCHISE FRANCHISE REQUEST PUBLIC RECORD SIGN SIGN NON -CONFORMING SIGN 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144TH ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 4060 S 144 ST 1/2/2018 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development ALEXANDER CLARK AIA 105 SOUTH MAIN ST #323 SEATTLE, WA 98116 RE: Permit Application No. D17-0227 TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER 4060 S 144 ST Dear ALEXANDER CLARK AIA, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current application files, it appears that your permit applied for on 8/23/2017, has not been issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or National Electrical Code every permit application not issued within 180 days from the date of application shall expire and become null and void. Currently your application has a status of APPROVED and is due to expire on 2/23/2018. If you still plan to pursue your project, you are hereby advised to do one of the following: 1) If the plan review is complete for the project and your application is approved, you may pick up the application before the date of expiration. At the time of permit issuance the expiration date will automatically be extended 180 days. -or- 2) If the plan review is not completed submit a written request for application extension (7) seven days in advance of the expiration date. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your application. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 90 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event that we do not receive your written request for extension or request is denied, your permit application will expire and your project will require a new permit application, plans and specifications, and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, '&1U Ro,,t Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No: D17-0227 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 Tukwila School District Technology & Maintenance S ce Center Page 1 Memorandum To: 0 Date: October 2, 2017 Bill Rambo From Alexander Clark, AIA Permit Technician Principal City of Tukwila Rolluda Architects, Inc Project: Tukwila School District Technology & Maintenance Service Center Project #: 331-16-01 Re: Applicant Response to Development Permit Application # D17-0227 Correction Letter #1 Dear Mr. Rambo, The following are our responses to your Correction Letter#1 dated September 18, 2017. BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. The configuration of open office room 112 in affect creates a condition like that of a dead-end corridor. Since this is indicated as a non-sprinklered building, "where more than one exit or exit access doorway is required, the exit access shall be arranged such that there are no dead ends in corridors more than 20 feet in length." Rearrange that portion to reduce the travel distance out of that space 112. (IBC 1020.4) RAI Response: See revised Sheet BG1.01 for rearranged workstations & removal of `dead-end corridor' condition. See associated revised sheets BA2.01, BA2.02, BA5.01. 2. All documents submitted by a design professional and engineer shall have original stamp, signature, and date of signature. Provide Permit -Project -Manual volumes 1 & 2 with stamp and signatures on each front sheet by the architect. RAI Response: See revised front sheet of Permit -Project -Manual volumes 1 & 2 with stamp and signatures. 3. Sheet BA5.01 elevation reference marker opposite of office 112 specifies 2.3 of sheet BA8.01. The detail 2.3 is not on that sheet. Please clarify. Also, it would be helpful to show dimensions for the wall specified in the elevation detail to show clarification or consistency of wall partition types specified. RAI Response: See revised Sheet BA5.01 for added interior elevation bug to clarify references to details 2 & 3 on Sheet BA8.01. See Sheet BA8.01 & Detail 4/BA9.01 for clarification of dimensions at wall partition types. 4. The Code Data Information sheet BG1.010 specifies 2015 International Plumbing code. Revise to specify 2015 Uniform Plumbing Code. Also 2014 Electrical codes. RAI Response: See revised Sheet BG1.01 for code data information. CORRECTION LTR# 0 7 CITY OFUKKWILA OCT 02 2017 PERMIT CENTER Tukwila School District Technology & Maintenance Se„vice Center Page 2 PW DEPARTMENT: Joanna Spencer • Applicant shall fill out the attached Traffic Concurrency Test Application form and submit it to Public Works. RAI Response: See attached completed Traffic Concurrency Test Application form. Please let us know if you have any questions or further comments. Thank y Alexande : Clark, AIA Principal Rolluda rchitects, Inc. Encl. Revised Architectural Drawings Revised Front Cover of Permit Project Manual Volumes 1 & 2 Public Works — Traffic Concurrency Test Application form City of Tukwila Department of Community Development September 18, 2017 ALEXANDER CLARK AIA 105 SOUTH MAIN ST #323 SEATTLE, WA 98116 RE: Correction Letter # 1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D17-0227 TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER - 4060 S 144 ST Dear ALEXANDER CLARK AIA, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size. New revised plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) (If applicable) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the date of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient. (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020) (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. The configuration of open office room 112 in affect creates a condition like that of a dead-end corridor. Since this is indicated as a non-sprinklered building, "where more than one exit or exit access doorway is required, the exit access shall be arranged such that there are no dead ends in corridors more than 20 feet in length." Rearrange that portion to reduce the travel distance out of that space 112. (IBC 1020.4) 2. All documents submitted by a design professional and engineer shall have original stamp, signature, and date of signature. Provide Permit -Project -Manual volumes 1 & 2 with stamp and signatures on each front sheet by the architect. 3. Sheet BA5.01 elevation reference marker opposite of office 112 specifies 2.3 of sheet BA8.01. The detail 2.3 is not on that sheet. Please clarify. Also, it would be helpful to show dimensions for the wall specified in the elevation detail to show clarification or consistency of wall partition types specified. 4. The Code Data Information sheet BG1.010 specifies 2015 International Plumbing code. Revise to specify 2015 Uniform Plumbing Code. Also 2014 Electrical codes. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 c� o PW DEPARTMENT: Joanna Spencer at 206-431-2440 if you have questions regarding these comments. • Applicant shall fill out the attached Traffic Concurrency Test Application form and submit it to Public Works. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at 206-431-3655. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. D17-0227 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 HERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D17-0227 DATE: 11/20/17 PROJECT NAME:TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICTYTECHNOLOGY CENTER SITE ADDRESS: 4060 S 144TH ST Original Plan Submittal X Revision # 1 before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Pt Mi 01\91 Building Division D? _ro Public Works Ire Prevention Structural M fg2.. Itop Planning Divisi n��;� ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 11/21/17 Structural Review Required REVIEWERc6 INITIALS: DATE: 111 APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 12/19/17 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWERc6 INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 °PERM9T COORD COPY. PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D17-0227 DATE: 10/02/17 PROJECT NAME: TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER SITE ADDRESS: 4060 S 144 ST Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # Revision # before Permit Issued after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Mb \ Building Division N, "1 Public Works Fire Prevention Structural n Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator 1 PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 10/03/17 Not Applicable n Structural Review Required ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 10/31/17 Approved Corrections Required nApproved with Conditions ❑ Denied n (corrections entered in Reviews)004)(C.) Notation: (ie: Zoning Issues) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED. Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 PERMIT COORD COPY.. Q PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D17-0227 DATE: 08/23/17 PROJECT NAME: TSD - TECHNOLOGY CENTER \SITE ADDRESS: 4060 S 144 ST X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Cowl. 'L30-1-1 Building Division um JAS �ovr� (4-5( Public Works AA AUC 11'0-'47 Fire Prevention Structural Av0Mp; Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable C (no approval/review required) DATE: 08/24/17 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 09/21/17 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions C Corrections Required ,1i Denied (corrections entered in Reviews (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only (,� CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: 6144 [J� Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire 0 Ping 0 PW' Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 PROJECT NAME: J 9D/1Dnd�vi SITE ADDRESS: o(00 �? , 71 PERMIT NO: P11 (VQ ---71 ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: DEFERRED SUBMITTAL LOG SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS I 1111\11 Summary of Revision: Received by: Summary of Revision: e\M(�,(N r& e. -e reit (S D .>' .1'b '1 / tu'l) deo W GU A 0A AU/ 111 (MOW- { Received by: (please print) SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) SUBMITTAL NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) Date: 11/16/17 O City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: htto://www.TukwilaWA.Rov Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Plan Check/Permit Number: D17-0227 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 17 2017 PERMIT CENTER Project Name: Tukwila School District - Technology & Maintenance Service Center Project Address: 4160 South 144th Street, Tukwila, WA 98168 Contact Person: Alexander Clark Phone Number: (206) 624-4222 Summary of Revision: Revisions include owner requested changes to Offices 109. 110. 111 and Open Office 112 layout. All associated revisions are labeled Delta 2 & clouded on Sheets BG1.01, BA1.01, BAD1.01, BA2.01, BA2.02, BA4.01, BA5.01, BA8.01, BA8.02, BA9.01 Sheet Number(s): BG1.01, BA1.01, BAD1.01, BA2.01, BA2.02, BA4.01, BA5.01, BA8.01, BA8.02, BA9.01 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includin date re 'sjon Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: / 1 Q A—V/1V\ ❑ Entered in TRAKiT on W:\Permit Center \Templates\Forms\Revision Submittal Form.doc Revised: August 2015 0 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci,tuliwila.wa.us Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: /o4//?- ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Plan Check/Permit Number: D17-0227 • Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: TSD — Technology Center Project. Address: 4060 S 144 st Contact Personf�tyyir9$i''&- � Phone Number: 149 • t 21./-61-2- Summary 1./-g22Summary of Revision: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 012017 PERMIT CENTER - f-ePifs_ fif?-s /I4 PV / I S Riket Sheet Number(s): b1- ® 2.6/ AA -2,02 s3 c. 0/ "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includii Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: [entered in TRAKiT on 10,-) - v1 04M -7,e0/ \applications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: 4 JB CONST CONSULTING INC Home Espanol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance Washington State Department of 411/ Labor & Industries 0 Search L&I Page 1 of 2 A ZIndex Help My Leri Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing JB CONST CONSULTING INC Owner or tradesperson Principals BLISS, JILL E, PRESIDENT Doing business as JB CONST CONSULTING INC WA UBI No. 602 938 924 12535 15TH AVE NE, Suite 100 SEATTLE, WA 98125 206-715-7835 KING County Business type Corporation License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor Active. Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no, JBCONCC918QP Effective — expiration 11/17/2009-11/17/2019 Bond DEVELOPERS SURETY & INDEM CO Bond account no. 365805C Received by L&I 11/17/2009 Insurance ............................. Colony Ins Co Policy no. GL0007068-06 Received by L&I 11/07/2017 $12,000.00 Effective date 11/12/2009 Expiration date Until Canceled $1,000,000.00 Effective date 11/07/2017 Expiration date 11/07/2018 Insurance history Savings ......_..._ ... No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. Lawsuits against the bond or savings No lawsuits against the bond or savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. L&I Tax debts No L&I tax debts are recorded for this contractor license during the previous 6 year period, but some debts may be recorded by other agencies. License Violations ................................ No license violations during the previous 6 year period. 14,4 Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=602938924&LIC=JBCONCC918QP&SAW= 1/2/2018 JB CONST CONSULTING INC Workers' comp Do you know if the business has employees? If so, verify the business is up-to-date on workers' comp premiums. L&I Account ID Account is current. 198,166-00 ................................. Doing business as JB CONSTRUCTION CONSULTING,. IN Estimated workers reported Quarter 3 of Year 2017 "1 to 3 Workers" L&I account contact TO / KARLA BOWMAN (360)902-5535 - Email: BOWK235@lni.wa.gov Public Works Strikes and Debarments Verify the contractor is eligible to perform work on public works projects. Contractor Strikes ....................................................... No strikes have been issued against this contractor. Contractors not allowed to bid .................................................................._..._.................. No debarments have been issued against this contractor. Workplace safety and health No inspections during the previous 6 year period. Page 2 of 2 © Washington State Dept. of Labor & Industries, Use of this site is subject to the laws of the state of Washington. Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=602938924&LIC=JBCONCC918QP&SAW= 1/2/2018 TUKWILA PU TCN ABBREVIATIONS LIC SCHOOLS AXILIARY� 'ROJE OLOGY & AINTENA CSERVI AFF APPROX ARCH BLDG. BLKG BO CJ CL CLR COL CONC CONT D DEMO DTL DIA DIM DN DS DWG E (E), EXIST EJ EL ELEC EQ EQUIP FCIO FIN FO FOIC FT GA GALV GWB GYP BD H HORIZ HR HT HVAC ID INSUL L ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR APPROXIMATE ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING BLOCKING BOTTOM OF CONTROL JOINT CENTERLINE CLEAR COLUMN CONCRETE CONTINUOUS, CONTINUE DEEP, DEPTH DEMOLISH, DEMOLITION DETAIL DIAMETER DIMENSION DOWN DOWNSPOUT DRAWING EAST EXISTING EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL EQUAL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR/ INSTALLED BY OWNER FINISH, FINISHED FACE OF FURNISHED BY OWNER/ INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR FOOT, FEET GAGE, GAUGE GALVANIZED GYPSUM WALL BOARD GYPSUM BOARD HIGH HORIZONTAL HOUR HEIGHT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING INSIDE DIAMETER INSULATE, INSULATION LONG REFERENCE SYMBOLS BUILDING SECTION INDICATOR SECTION INDICATOR xx Axxx SECTION DETAIL INDICATOR 1 1 ENLARGED DETAIL INDICATOR COLUMN GRIDLINE INDICATOR X.X FLAGNOTE DRAWING REVISION INDICATOR MAX MECH MEZZ MFR MIN MISC MTL N NIC NO NTS OC OH OD OPNG OPP ORD PERP PLYWD PL PR PT RD REINF REQD REV RM RO S SHT SHTHG SIM SPEC SQ SS STL STOR STRUCT SUSP T&G TO TYP UON VERT W/ W/0 WD MAXIMUM MECHANICAL MEZZANINE MANUFACTURE, MANUFACTURE MINIMUM, MINUTE MISCELLANEOUS METAL NORTH NOT IN CONTRACT NUMBER NOT TO SCALE ON CENTER OVERHEAD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPENING OPPOSITE OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN PERPENDICULAR PLYWOOD PROPERTY LINE PAIR PAINT, POINT, PRESSURE TREATED RADIUS, RISER ROOF DRAIN, ROAD REINFORCED, REINFORCING REQUIRED REVISED, REVISION ROOM ROUGH OPENING SOUTH SHEET SHEATHING SIMILAR SPECIFICATION SQUARE STAINLESS STEEL STEEL STORAGE STRUCTURAL SUSPENDED TONGUE AND GROOVE TOP OF TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VERTICAL WEST, WIDE WITH WITHOUT WOOD XX' -XX', XX)000(X ELEVATION INDICATOR MATCH LINE SEE SHEET AX.XX MATCHLINE INDICATOR GENERAL NOTES S PACKAGE #2 CENTER 1. NOTHING IN THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO PERMIT AN INSTALLATION IN VIOLATION OF APPLICABLE CODES. ALL WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE IN FULL ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST RULES, REGULATIONS, RESTRICTIONS, REQUIREMENTS, AND CODES OF THE GOVERNING JURISDICTIONS. 2. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO DESCRIBE THE OVERALL SCOPE OF WORK. CONTRACTORS SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS ON THE PROJECT AND ALERT THE ARCHITECT TO ANY CONFLICTS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. 3. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL FIELD MEASUREMENTS. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES WITH DRAWINGS. CONDITIONS AND INCLUDE ALL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SCOPE OF THE PROJECT IN THE CONTRACT SUM. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENTS WILL BE MADE FOR FAILURE TO OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION AND MAKE KNOWN ANY INACCURACIES. 22. THROUGHOUT THE DRAWINGS ARE ABBREVIATIONS THAT ARE IN COMMON USE. THE LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS PROVIDED IS NOT INTENDED TO BE COMPLETE OR REPRESENTATIVE OF CONDITIONS OR MATERIALS USED ON THIS PROJECT. THE ARCHITECT WILL DEFINE THE INTENT OF ANY IN QUESTION. 23. INTERIOR PARTITION TYPES ARE GENERALLY KEYED ON ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS. SEE PARTITION TYPE FOR DESCRIPTIONS. THE FINISH SCHEDULE AUGMENTS THE PARTITION TYPE DESCRIPTION WITH INFORMATION REGARDING MATERIALS AND FINISHES. 4. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS, PROPERTY LINES, 24. MEASUREMENTS AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS TO BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. 5. TYPICAL WALL SECTIONS, FINISHES, AND DETAILS ARE NOT INDICATED EVERYWHERE THEY OCCUR ON PLANS, ELEVATIONS, AND SECTIONS. REFER TO DETAILED DRAWINGS. 6. DETAILED AND/OR LARGER SCALE DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER GENERAL AND SMALLER SCALE DRAWINGS. 7. GENERALLY PLAN DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO FINISH OPENING, FACE OF CONCRETE, FACE OF STUD AND FINISH FACE OF WALL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL ANGLES TO BE RIGHT ANGLES, ALL LINES WHICH APPEAR PARALLEL ARE TO BE PARALLEL, AND ALL ITEMS WHICH APPEAR CENTERED ARE TO BE CENTERED. CONTRACTOR TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING ALL LINES TRUE, LEVEL, PLUMB, AND SQUARE. 9. CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY WITH CIVIL, LANDSCAPE, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL NOTES. GENERALLY, THE EXISTING ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN WITH LIGHT SCREENED LINES, WHILE NEW OR DEMOLISHED ELEMENTS REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT ARE SHOWN WITH DARK LINES. 25. ALL DOOR NUMBERS APPEAR ON THE PLANS EXCEPT WHERE ENLARGED PLANS ARE INDICATED. INDEPENDENT RELITES ARE SHOWN ON INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAIL KEYS ARE INDICATED THERE. 26. MATERIAL FINISH CODES WHICH IDENTIFY MATERIAL AND FINISHES THROUGHOUT THE DRAWINGS ARE LISTED ON THE FINISH SCHEDULES. THE SPECIFICATIONS SECTIONS WHICH DEFINE THE MATERIALS ARE REFERENCED. FINISH SCHEDULE INDICATES THE VARIOUS FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES IN THE INDIVIDUAL ROOMS INDICATED. REFER TO THE FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES FOR GENERAL FINISH INFORMATION AND WORK. 27. DEFINITIONS OF FINISH CEILINGS ARE SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN. MATERIAL, DIMENSIONS OF ELEMENTS WITHIN CEILING, AND SPOT ELEVATIONS OF VARIOUS CEILING PLANES ARE SHOWN. LAYOUTS OF LIGHT FIXTURES, MECHANICAL DIFFUSERS, ETC. IN ROOMS WITHOUT CEILINGS ARE SHOWN FOR DESIGN CLARITY ON REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR RESPECTIVE LAYOUTS, COORDINATE AS REQUIRED. 10. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL OBTAIN ALL 28. REQUIRED PERMITS. 11. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL ROUGH -IN DIMENSIONS FOR THE EQUIPMENT. 12. ALL ATTACHMENTS, CONNECTIONS, AND FASTENINGS OF ANY NATURE ARE TO BE PROPERLY AND PERMANENTLY SECURED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE BEST PRACTICES OF THE BUILDING INDUSTRY. DRAWINGS SHOW ONLY SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS TO ASSIST THE CONTRACTOR AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY DETAIL. 13. CAULKING AND SEALANTS. USE PRIMERS AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER. BACKING RODS OR TAPE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER AND PER SPECIFICATIONS. 14. VAPOR BARRIERS. CONTINUOUS AND APPROVED VAPOR BARRIERS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE HEATED SIDE OF ALL THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLED AS INDICATED. SEAL ALL EDGES. 15. CONTRACTOR AT BEGINNING OF WORK TO FLUSH ALL ROOF DRAINS TO CONFIRM IN WORKING ORDER. AT CONCLUSION OF WORK CONTRACTOR TO TEST ALL ROOF DRAINS TO CONFIRM IN WORKING ORDER AND TIGHT LINES THROUGHOUT BUILDING AND PROVIDE CONFIRMATION REPORT TO OWNER. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES AND PROTECT AS REQUIRED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 17. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL OPERATIONS WITH OWNER, INCLUDING: SITE ACCESS, MATERIALS STORAGE, AND STAGING, INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SERVICES AND TIMING OF NOISY AND DISRUPTIVE OPERATIONS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SEQUENCE OF WORK WITH OWNER. 18. CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT EXISTING FURNISHINGS, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND LANDSCAPING FROM DAMAGE. CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE IN KIND ANY SUCH ITEMS DAMAGED. 19. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ALL ROOF OPENINGS FROM WATER PENETRATION DURING CONSTRUCTION. 20. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN CURRENT RECORD DRAWINGS FOR ARCHITECT'S PERIODIC REVIEW. 21. AS BUILT DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON RECORD DRAWINGS AND MAY BE INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE AS TO THE SCOPE OF WORK ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BID, EXAMINE EXISTING ROOFING TYPES ARE INDICATED ON THE ROOF LEVEL PLAN AT WHICH THEY OCCUR. THE MATERIAL FINISH CODE (RT) DESIGNATES ROOF TYPE DESCRIPTION. PROVIDE THERMAL ROOF INSULATION AS INDICATED BY ROOFING CODES. LOCATION MAP SCALE: N.T.S. CD PROJECT DATA INFORMATION PROJECT DESCRIPTION: COMMERCIAL TENANT IMPROVEMENTS TO EXISTING TECHNOLOGY & MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTER BUILDING. ALTERATIONS INCLUDE INTERIOR WALL PARTITIONS AT EXISTING SPACES. SITE ADDRESS: 4060 S 144TH ST, TUKWILA, WA 98168 ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NO: 1523049013 LEGAL DESCRIPTION: POR S 294.50 FT OF SE QTR OF SW QTR STR 15-23-04 LY ELY OF PLAT OF CHERRY LANE ADDITION LESS N 65 FT OF E 120 FT THOF; & LESS E 30 FT THOR & S 20 FT FOR ROADS; & LESS PORTION OF REMAINDER DEEDED TO KING CO FOR ROAD UNDER REC NO 7503240296 & LESS POR FOR RD PER DEED REC# 20151209001191 JURIDICTION: CITY OF TUKWILA APPLICABLE CODES: 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2015 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE 2015 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE 2015 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE AND ALL RELATED STANDARDS AND STATE AMENDMENTS 2015 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE ZONING DESIGNATION: LDR CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V -B OCCUPANCY TYPE: B, OFFICE (NO CHANGE) TOTAL AREA: 5,451SF (NO CHANGE) PROJECT TEAM OWNER TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT 4640 S 144TH STREET TUKWILA, WA 98168 CONTACT: JEFF FEENEY, PROJECT MANAGER TEL: (206) 979 - 9370 ARCHITECT ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS 105 S MAIN ST, SUITE 323 SEATTLE WA, 98104 CONTACT: ALEXANDER CLARK, AIA ALEX.CLARK@ROLLUDAARCHITECTS.COM TEL: (206) 624-4222 FAX: (206) 624-4226 STRUCTURAL REID MIDDLETON 728 134TH ST SW, SUITE 200, EVERETT, WA 98204 CONTACT: PAUL CROCKER PCROCKER@REIDMIDDLETON.COM TEL: (425) 741.3800 FAX: (425) 741.3900 MECHANICAL TRESWEST ENGINEERS 2702 S 42ND ST #301, TACOMA, WA 98409 CONTACT: REID HERRON RSH@TRESWEST.COM TEL: (253) 472-3300 FAX: (253) 363-9402 ELECTRICAL TRESWEST ENGINEERS 2702 S 42ND ST #301, TACOMA, WA 98409 CONTACT: FRED RENO SKF@TRESWEST.COM TEL: (253) 472-3300 FAX: (253) 363-9402 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC O 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION D I N G INDEX - DISTRICT ADMINISTRATION GENERAL BG0.01 COVER SHEET BG1.01 CODE ANALYSIS ARCHITECTURAL BA1.01 BAD 1.01 BA2.01 BA2.02 BA4.01 BA5.01 BA6.01 BA6.02 BA8.01 BA8.02 BA9.01 SITE PLAN & EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS DEMOLITION PLANS FLOOR PLAN & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FURNITURE & FINISH PLANS BUILDING SECTIONS ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS FINISH SCHEDULES DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULES INTERIOR ELEVATIONS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS DETAILS MECHANICAL BM0.01 BM0.02 BMD1.01 BM1.01 BMCF.01 MECHANICAL LEGEND MECHANICAL SCHEDULES HVAC DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN HVAC FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMCF.02 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMCF.03 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) ELECTRICAL 13E0.01 13E0.02 BED1.01 13E2.01 13E3.01 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES WSEC FORM DEMO PLANS ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN POWER/LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN SYSTEMS AND MECHANICAL 13E3.02 FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM 13E5.01 BE8.01 BE8.02 POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES FIRE ALARM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FILE COPY Permit No114V '1 Plan review approval is subject to errors and omissions. Approval of construction documents does not authorize the viols i * of any adoptedd�o or ordinance. Receipt of approved Field Copy an dilWeile acknowledged: By: Lt City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION ,I. .... - 1 �Jr 4,change sh ill 6 rind fo ttl v coOe of work without'prior iapprovalint ,y Tukwila Building Division. NOTE: Revisions will requirea new plan submittal and may include additional plan review, fees SE_C:ARAI L: PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: Ef Mechanical ef Electrical tf Plumbing G.(Czs Piping Ci:-/ of Tukwila Bltll4n'^G DIVISION REVIEWED ' OR DE CO "°'LIANCE PPS:.VED 0 7 2017 City of Tukwil BUILDING DIVISIO PERM RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMIT CENTER 2.2:7 T SET Duda arcitects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 REGI A TATE 0 WASHINGTON w z 0 REVISION DATE Design: AC Drawn: MM, JL Checked: AC Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title COVER SHEET Drawing Number BGO.Oi G0.01 TM COVER.DWG 8/23/2017 10:37 AM COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROI,LUgA ARCHITECTS INC 1 w 0 0) w CV 9 u7 • w_ °? CV w ti • 65'-7 1/2" (E) 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) LECTRICA TRAVEL DISTANCE: 100'-2" MAX ALLOWABLE: 200'-0"� I I I I I 1 1 ' '1 I [ JI 1 J , J r_ _ J OFFIC TRAINING ECEIVING STORAGE WORK ROOM HALLWAY CONFERENCE OFFICE USTODIA ENTRY LOBBY 15 x TRAINING ROOM WOMEN TRAINING RM / / 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) CODE PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 's> LEGEND USE AREA w CV N T. CV rn ADMIN. 2,180 8\_ 100 22 CODE DATA INFORMATION APPLICABLE CODES: JURISDICTION ZONING CODE BUILDING CODE OTHER REGULATIONS ZONING: MAX. BUILDING HEIGHT: LOT AREA: LOT COVERAGE: PARKING: LANDSCAPE: BUILDING AREA: BUILDING HEIGHT: CONSTRUCTION TYPE : OCCUPANCY TYPE: CITY OF TUKWILA TUKWILA MUNCIPAL CODE (TMC) CHAPTER 18 - ZONING TUKWILA MUNICIPAL CODE CHAPTER 16.04 - BUILDINGS AND CONSTRUCTION WASHINGTON ADMINISTRATIVE CODE 51-50 2015 INTERNATIONAL EXISTING BUILDING CODE (IEBC) CHAPTER 8 - ALTERATIONS LEVEL 2 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) 2015 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE 2015 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE 2015 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE 2014 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE LOW DENSITY RESIDENTIAL (LDR) 30'-0" 52,481 SF (1.20 ACRES) (NO CHANGE) (NO CHANGE) (NO CHANGE) 5,451 SF (GROSS FLOOR AREA - NO CHANGE) 1 STORY, 20'-4 1/4" (NO CHANGE) V -B , NON -RATED, NON-SPRINKLERED B, OFFICE (NO CHANGE ) COMPUTATION OF OCCUPANCY LOAD: OFFICE CONFERENCE TRAINING ROOM 3,888 100 528 15 423 15 NET FLOOR AREA 5,006 SF NO. OF OCC. 39 36 29 COMPUTATION OF EXIT REQUIREMENTS: USE NAME OCC. LOAD NO. OF EXITS EXIT WIDTH REQUIRED OFFICE &CONFERENCE 75 2 REQUIRED 75 x 0.2 = 15" > MIN 34" TRAINING ROOM 29 1 REQUIRED 36 x 0.2 = 7.6" > MIN 34" OCC. TYPE B' B B EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED (1) - 46" W. DOOR = OK (1) - 34" W. DOOR = OK (1)-34"W. DOOR=OK FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM: NON-SPRINKLERED PROVIDE A CLASS 2A FIRE EXTINGUISHER FOR EVERY 3,000 SF OF LIGHT HAZARD OCCUPANCY. VERIFY THAT ALL PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING ARE WITHIN 75 FEET TRAVEL OF A FIRE EXTINGUISHER. EMERGENCY ILLUMINATION FOR BUILDINGS AND DURATION OF ILLUMINATION (1008.3.2--1008.3.5) In the event of power supply failure in Rooms and spaces, an emergency electrical system shall automatically illuminate all of the following areas: 1. Electrical equipment rooms, 2. Fire command centers, 3. Fire pump rooms, 4. Generator rooms, 5. Public restrooms with an area greater than 300 square feet. The emergency power system shall provide power for :a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or an on-site generator. Illumination level under emergency power, the lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is not less than an average of .1 footcandle and a minimum at any point of 0.1 footcandle measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 06 footcandle average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 footcandle at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. OCCUPANCY GROUP OCCUPANT LOAD OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR (PER IBC TABLE 1004.1.2) OCCUPANCY GROUP / USE BOUNDARY EGRESS DIRECTION & OCCUPANT LOAD EXISTING EXIT SIGNAGE TO REMAIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER N EMERGENCY ILLUMINATION FOR BUILDINGS AND DURATION OF ILLUMINATION (1008.3.2--1008.3.5) In the event of power supply failure in Rooms and spaces, an emergency electrical system shall automatically illuminate all of the following areas: 1. Electrical equipment rooms, 2. Fire command centers, 3. Fire pump rooms, 4. Generator rooms, 5. Public restrooms with an area greater than 300 square feet. The emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or an on-site generator. Illumination level under emergency power, the lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is not Tess than an average of 1 footcandle and a minimum al any point of 0.1 footcandle measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 footcandle average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 footcandle at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC OS 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION NEVISION N0._ RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 17 2017 PERMIT CENTER rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 0 ti M rn rn rn 0 N_ J w H REVISION DATE A PERMIT REVISION #1 11/14/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title CODE ANALYSIS Drawing Number BG1.01 00 0 ti d' COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC I I 1 4 4' • 4 NORTH ELEVATION (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 1 I 4 4 EAST ELEVATION (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) SCALE : 1/8" = SURFACE MOUNTED BUILDING SIGN TO INDICATE NEW BUILDING NAME. REMOVE (E) SIGN, PATCH & REPAIR WALL FINISH REMOVE (E) MTL DROP BOX, - SEE DTL 15/BA9.01 SOUTH ELEVATION (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 9 -r I I I . I I WEST ELEVATION (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) SCALE : 1/8" = t1 EXISTING BUILDING INTERIOR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS ONLY BA1.01 EXISTING PARKING BUS ADA TOTAL 31 2 33 SITE PLAN (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) 11 0 In SCALE : 1/16" = (E) MONUMENT SIGN W/ NEW BUILDING NAME & ADDRESS, SEE DTL 19/BA9.01 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 17 2617 PERMIT CENTER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC OS -2017 City of Tukwila DL9ILDIP'1G DIVISION rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 S, ATE OF ASHINGTON N W W OU z HLi m r -t » Z W Ow C>.OU� Oo _� UB °0) gn5"<"--10wiwCt51 111 U REVISION !, PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title SITE PLAN EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Drawing Number BA1.01 Al.01 TM SITEPLAN.DWG N 0 LO COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC 65'-7 1 /2" (E) 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) w 0 C) NN ELECT -RIC /2\ WORK ROOM w CV 3-) w 9 Li) AIN DE•K OFFICE STORAGE • w 0 CN • DROP BOX TO BE ---� REMOVED INFILL TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINSH SIGNAGE TO BE REPLACED C ENTRY LOBBY STORAGE TRAINING ROOM DEN'S TOILE WOMEN'S TOILET / 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. THE REMOVAL INDICATED ON DEMOLITION DRAWINGS INDICATES SPECIFIC DEMOLITION WORK TO BE DONE ON OR WITHIN THE EXISTING BUILDING TO BE REMODELED. IT DOES NOT INDICATE EVERY ITEM WHICH IS REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE ALL EXISTING ITEMS AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMPLISH THE WORK INDICATED ELSEWHERE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 3. SEE STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND CIVIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4. ALL EXISTING FLOORING, WALLS, BEAMS, COLUMNS AND CEILING ELEMENTS WHICH ARE TO REMAIN, BUT ARE DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE PATCHED OR REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 5. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING BUILDING COMPONENTS IS NOT SHOWN. -REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR "CUTTING AND PATCHING" FOR DESCRIPTION OF WORK. w 0 0) 9 9 w CV • • t 65'-7 1/2" (E) 17'-8" (E) STUDY 103 COATS 104 / 47'-11 3/8" (E) • igq LECTRIC Lik Ansi imiLA1111 Ei1PAP6i ,tee moilmeddi rturimpo Aim irdniudd 11111111 11011 ling 1 1.1 1 11111 1111 ra 1 1111 pm 141 106 1 1 N STORA 109 17'-8" (E) ENTRY LOBBY 100 STORAGE 111 WOMEN'S TOILET 113 1 1 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" DEMOLITION WALL & CEILING NOTES D� REMOVE EXISTING WALL D2 REMOVE EXISTING CASEWORK D REMOVE EXISTING LIBRARY SHELVING STACKS & PATCH CARPET, SEE BA2.02 DF REMOVE EXISTING SHEET VINYL FLOORING, SEE BA2.02 D� REMOVE EXISTING CEILING & RELOCATE FIXTURES SEE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR DEMOLITION/PROPOSED LIGHTING & MECHANICAL. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING FIXTURES/UNITS, LEGEND EXISTING WALL EXISTING WALL TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING ACT CEILING & FIXTURE TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING GWB CEILING TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING ACT /FIXTURE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 00. 2017 CCity of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION N CEIVED crry OF TUKWILA NB 1 7 2017 PERMIT CENTER EXISTING SHEET VINYL FLOORI TO BE DEMOLISHED \\\ .227 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 W w OU z JUQ OQ� UU <�W\ CO Z DEL.OWE >.OUI Qf-�Wt O JQZU3 3: -5- � >< o D D W W S I—<CI—Cl) Ft) CC 4640 S 144TH ST. REVISION DATE A PERMIT REVISION #1 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title DEMO FLOOR & REFLECTED CEILING PLANS Drawing Number BAD1.01 AD1.01 TM DEMOPLANS.DWG COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC 0 0 • 0 w 9 W 00 CV • r • 65'-7 1/2" (E) 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) 1 ELEC. 114 KITCHNT 116 C MAINT/ST ___ 11 11 BREAIQIRM 1161 r II I 1 I J 113 D 118�1i WORK ROOM 119 OFFICE 120 RECEIVING 117 USTODIA 121 i OFFICE 109 OPEN OFFICE 112 OFFICE I OFFICE 110 2 111 HALLWAY 105 BA4.01 1 0 TRAINING 107 STORAGE 108 ENTRY LOBBY 100 CONFERENCE 106 AREA OF WORK 17'-8" (E) 103A (101 A) (102A MEN 101 WOMEN 102 STORAGE 104 104A TRAINING ROOM 103 BA4.01 L/ (103B� 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1 /2" (E) FLOOR PLAN SCALE : 1/8" =11-0" cc; q\DI • 0 FLOOR & CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES 1. SEE INTERIOR WALL TYPES DTL 4/BA9.01 2. SEE MATERIALS/FINISH CODES ON SHEET BA6.01 3. SEE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR DEMO/PROPOSED LIGHTING & MECHANICAL. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING FIXTURES/UNITS. 4. VERIFY IN FIELD ALL DIMENSIONS. 5. SEE DTL 17/BA9.01 FOR TYPICAL BRACING @ NEW ACT. O 0 • 9 0) w 9 0 Lf) w 00 CV • 65'-7 1/2" (E) 17'-8" (E) / 47'-11 3/8" (E) OFFICE 109 OFFICE OFFICE PENDANT FIXTURES, SEE ELEC. BA4.01 BA4.01 1 4(AFE)VARIESF OPEN OFFIC thk(E)15'-6" AFF 0 di,(E)13'-0" AFF E 12'-0" AFF O HALLWAY BA4.01 ENTRY LOBBY (E) TRACK LIGHT TO REMAIN WOMEN ININ ROOM 10 ,(E) 2'-O' AFF 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = FLOOR AND CEILING PLAN FLAG NOTES EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN NEW ACT CEILING LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL EXISTING CEILING PANEL/ FIXTURE NEW CEILING PANEL/ FIXTURE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0q 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA i'ahl 17 2017 PERMIT CENTER XAMTSXMAIMUMAIRMIIIMIVROMMIMICHIMAT rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 6250 U O V Q F - REVISION /L` PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FLOOR PLAN & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Drawing Number BA2.01 A2.01_TM_FLOORPLANS_RCP.DWG CO CO ti COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC- w N CV rn w 0 N w N 9 0 w 0 CV / 65'-7 1/2" (E) 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) ELEC. 114 KITCHNT 116 MAIN BREAK RM\ ; � I ' / MDF WORK ROOM 1- 119 113 • ' 109/l, L J 11/ OFF C -L;',;. r FFFICE- 1 10%_1 ;x'11 i ';111' OPEN OFFICE 112 \ 71 // ;7 1/ RECEIVING 117 OFFICE 120 USTODIAN 121 / 17'-8" (E) HALLWAY 105 TRAININ P 'S'fOIAGE1, 108 r; • i MEN 101 ENTRY LOBBY 100 CONFERENCE 106 WOMEN 102 STORAG 104 TRAINING ROOM 103 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) FINISH PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" cc) 0 TIC w w N 9 1) w CV 65'-71 /2" (E) 17'-8" (E) 47'-11 3/8" (E) ELEC. 114 ITCHNT - BREA 116 MAIN IRM J OFFICE 120 CUSTODIA 121 01 I OFFICE I I 109 OFFICE 111 113 N OFF ECEIVING 117 L L LJ HALLWAY 105 17'-8" (E) 1 1 I 1 F--1 I--1 —1 L-1 H- 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 1 1 LJ L L L_J TRAINING 107 STORAGE 108 ENTRY LOBBY 100 CONFERENCE 106 MEN 101 WOMEN 102 STORAGE 104 TRAINING ROOM 103 FURNITURE NIC, SEE GENERAL NOTES 47'-11 3/8" (E) 65'-7 1/2" (E) FURNITURE PLAN SCALE : 1/8" = LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CARPET TO BE PATCHED/REPAIRED NEW SHEET VINYL FLOORING SV -1 FURNITURE/FINISH PLAN GENERAL NOTES 3 IREVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED / DEC O%2017 c City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION S.k.Y •' TUKWILA NOV 17 2017 PERMIT CENTER 1. PATCH/ REPAIR FINISH FLOORING AT DEMO WALLS & WHERE INDICATED 2. SEE MATERIALS/FINISH CODES ON SHEET BA6.01 3. FURNISHINGS BY OWNER, TYP. It) (1 0117 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 6250 xE.I ATE OF W SHINGTON TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT 4640 S 144TH ST. REVISION PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FURNITURE & FINISH PLANS Drawing Number BA2.02 A2.02 TM FURN-FINISH PLANS.DWG COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC +20'-0" -C6(E) TOP OF ROOF • 0,-0" Y(E) FIN. FLOOR O C D TYP. BUILDING SECTION SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" NEW ACT CEILING, SEE 17/BA9.01 FOR BRACING NEW INTERIOR PARTITION WALL, TYP PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURES @ 9'-0" AFF, TYP. SEE ELEC. BUILDING SECTION SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" NEW INTERIOR PARTITION WALL, TYP REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0e 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 1 7 2017 PERMIT CENTER bre'?I; 227 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 U co cr) 2 rn rn a`3) co go o 1 -mw o -cr REVISION A PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title BUILDING SECTIONS Drawing Number BA4.01 A4.01 TM BUILDING SECTIONS.DWG 2 N 1) N LC) COPYRIGHT 0 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC OFFICE ELEC.-ROOM STORAGE 10'-11" FV OPEN OFFICE KITCHENETTE BREAK RIVI OPP. SIM. 31'-0" FV OPP. SIM. 27'-10" FV WORK ROOM RECEIVING TRAINING STORAGE 2'-11" FV HALLWAY CONFERENCE OFFICE CUSTODIAN 26'-8 1 /4" REVIEWED FOR ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC O t 2017 ENTRY LOBBY ENLARGED PLAN SCALE : 1/4" =11-0" LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OV 17 2017 PERMIT CENTER t311 0221 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 'Alex Ro ATE OF ASHINGTON U c 0 —1 00 0 O C° o co co cp ✓ _ < ti -1 0 E._i c0 D W 1— REVISION /L\ PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title ENLARGED PLANS Drawing Number BA5.01 A5.01 TM ENLARGED PLAN.DWG COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC .MATERIAL / FINISH CODES CODE SECTION MATERIAL / FINISH DIV. 3 CONCRETE C-1 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PL -1 PL -2 PL -3 PL -4 DIV. 6 & 12 WOOD / PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 064116, 123623 PLASTIC LAMINATE, NEVAMAR AM6001T, ALUMINITE.,TEXTURED 064116, 123623 PLASTIC LAMINATE, NEVARMAR S6020T, GUNMETAL, TEXTURED 064116, 123623 PLASTIC LAMINATE, NEVAMAR S6024T, CORDIAL GRAY, TEXTURED 064116, 123623 PLASTIC LAMINATE, NEVAMAR PDG002T, PAINTED WOODLANDS, TEXTURED WDT-1 064600 WOOD TRIM, MAPLE, CLEAR FINISH WDT-2 064600 WOOD TRIM, PAINTED WP -1 WP -2 DIV. 7 075419 075419 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING INSUL-1 072100 GLASS FIBER BATT INSULATION, R-21 INSUL-2 072100 MINERAL WOOL DIV. 8 OPENINGS GL -1 088000 GLASS, TEMPERED, CLEAR DIV.9 FINISHES CP -1 092400 CEMENT PLASTER(STUCCO), MATCH EXISTING GWB-1 092900 GYPSUM BOARD, 5/8" TYPE 'X' ACT -1 095113 ACOUSTICAL CEILING, LAY -IN, 24"x48", MATCH EXISTING RB -1 096513 RESILIENT BASE, MATCH EXISTING SV -1 096520 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING, ARMSTRONG #B6361 SAND DUNE RUN, SMOOTH WEARING FINISH CPT -1 096813 CARPET, MATCH EXISTING EP -1 099113 EXTERIOR PAINT, MATCH EXISTING IP -1 099123 INTERIOR PAINT, LATEX FLAT IP -2 099123 INTERIOR PAINT, LATEX EGGSHELL IP -3 099123 INTERIOR PAINT, SATIN IP -4 099123 INTERIOR PAINT, LATEX SEMI -GLOSS IP -5 099123 INTERIOR PAINT, LATEX GLOSS IP -6 099123 INTERIOR PIANT, ALKYD SEMI -GLOSS IP -7 099123 INTERIOR PIANT, MATCH EXISTING DIV. 12 FURNISHINGS WB -1 122113 WINDOW BLINDS, HORIZONTAL BLINDS PAINT COLORS PT -1 MATCH EXISTING COLOR OF BUILDING COMPONENT PT -2 MATCH WINDOW COLOR, COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT INTERIOR FINISH NOTES: THESE NOTES ARE GENERAL IN NATURE EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFIC ROOMS ARE INDICATED. THEY HAVE NOT BEEN REFERENCED IN THE SCHEDULE. 1. PAINT ALL EXPOSED GWB SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE FINISH SCHEDULE INDICATES THE TYPE OF PAINT WHERE SCHEDULED. IF NOT INDICATED, PAINT IP -7. COORDINATE COLOR WITH ARCHITECT. 2. PAINT ALL EXPOSED MISCELLANEOUS STEEL, IP -7 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. COORDINATE COLOR WITH ARCHITECT. 3. PAINT ALL COLUMNS ENCLOSURES WITHIN ROOMS THE SAME AS THE ROOM WALL FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE A BASE AT COLUMN ENCLOSURE WITHIN A ROOM, THE SAME AS THE BASE SCHEDULED FOR THE ROOM. 5. DEFAULT PAINT COLORS ARE AS INDICATED ABOVE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE FINISH SCHEDULE OR ON DRAWINGS. UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE THE DEFAULT PAINT COLOR IS PT -1 WHERE EXISTING WORK IS INTERFACED. 6. INTERIOR OFFICE RELITES TO HAVE HORIZONTAL BLINDS MOUNTED AT INTERIOR OF OFFICE 7. PAINT MECHANICAL LOUVERS TO MATCH EXTERIOR DOOR AND FRAMES, TYPICAL. 8. SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN FOR LAYOUT AND PATTERNS. 9. PAINT EXISTING WALLS AS REQUIRED TO MATCH EXISTING EXCEPT WHERE NOTED. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT. 10. PAINT AT INTERIOR WORK OF PATCHING. SHALL EXTEND THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF PLANE TO CHANGE OF SURFACE PLANE. ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE TECH MAIN SERVICE CENTER ROOM NO. ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS N WALLS E WALLS S WALLS W CLNG NOTES NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 6 7 8 1 mat (E) TILE (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB - (E) FINISHES 2 100 ENTRY fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 3 LOBBY col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 mat (E) VINYL (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB - (E) FINISHES 5 101 MEN fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 6 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7 mat (E) VINYL (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB - (E) FINISHES 8 102 WOMEN fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 9 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10 mat (E) CPT (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) FINISHES 11 103 TRAINING fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 12 ROOM col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13 mat (E) VCT- (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) ACT (E) FINISHES 14 104 STORAGE fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 15 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 16 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB GWB-1 - (E) GWB GWB-1 - (E) ACT - 17 105 HALLWAY fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - - - IP -7 - - - IP -7 - (E) GWB - 18 col - - - - - - PT -1 - - - PT -1 - - - - 19 mat (E) CPT - (E) - GWB-1 - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) ACT - 20 106 CONF. fin - - RB -1 - IP -7 -- - - - GWB-1 - - - - 21 col - - - - PT -1 - - - - - IP -7 PT -1 - - - 22 mat (E) CPT - RB -1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - ACT -1 - - 23 107 TRAINING fin CPT -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 24 col - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 25 mat (E) CPT - RB -1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - ACT -1 - - 26 108 STORAGE fin CPT -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 27 col - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 28 mat (E) CPT- RB -1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - ACT -1 - - 29 109 OFFICE fin CPT -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 30 col - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 31 mat (E) CPT - RB -1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - ACT -1 - - 32 110 OFFICE fin CPT -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 33 col - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 34 mat (E) CPT- RB -1 - GWB-1 - (E) GWB GWB-1 GWB-1 - (E) ACT - - 35 111 OFFICE fin CPT -1 - - - IP -7 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 36 - - - - PT -1 - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 37 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB GWB-1 - GWB-1 - (E) ACT - - 38 112 OPEN fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - - - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 39 OFFICE col - - - - - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 40 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB GWB-1 - GWB-1 - (E) GWB (E) ACT - - 41 113 MAIN./ fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - - - 42 STORAGE col - - - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - - - 43 mat (E) CONC (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) (E) FINISHES 44 114 ELECTRICAL fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 45 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 46 mat SV -1 - (E) - (E) GWB- (E) GWB GWB-1 - (E) GWB ACT -1 - (E) FINISHES 47 115 BREAK RM fin - - RB -1 - - - - - IP -7 - - - - - TO REMAIN 48 col - - - - - - - - PT -1 - - - - - - 49 mat (E) SV - (E) - (E) GWB- (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) ACT - (E) FINISHES 50 116 KTCHNTTE fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 51 col - 52 mat (E) CPT- (E) - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - (E) GWB (E) ACT - - 53 117 RECEIVING fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - GWB-1 - - - - 54 col - - - - PT -1 - PT -1 - PT -1 - IP -7 PT -1 - - - 55 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB GWB-1 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - (E) ACT - - 56 118 MDF fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - - - IP -7 - IP -7 - IP -7 - - - - 57 col - - - - - - PT -1 = PT -1 - PT -1 - - - - 58 mat (E) CPT- (E) - GWB-1 - (E) GWB (E) GWB GWB-1 - (E) ACT - - 59 119 WORK RM fin CPT -1 - RB -1 - IP -7 - GWB-1 - GWB-1 - IP -7 - - - - 60 col - - - - PT -1 - IP -7 PT -1 IP -7 PT -1 PT -1 - - - - 61 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) ACT - (E) FINISHES 62 120 OFFICE fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 63 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64 mat (E) CPT- (E) - (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) GWB (E) ACT - (E) FINISHES 65 121 CUSTODIAN fin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TO REMAIN 66 col - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11.7 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC Ott 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION EVIEVVED COP COMP : NCE ED AP OCT '7 117 a City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMIT CENTER rF9luda architects architecture piannmg interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 w z 0 E - cc cnH 0 O U a 4640 S 144TH ST. w 0 1 J c) th N w 1— REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FINISH SCHEDULE Drawing Number BA6.01 A6.01 TM_SCHEDULES.DWG ti N CO N m COPYRIGHT© 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A DOOR SCHEDULE NTS B FRAME TYPES NTS C (EXISTING) D (EXISTING) A I\ DOOR TYPES NTS B C \ • D (EXISTING) E (EXISTING) 1 V F (EXISTING) G (EXISTING) HM FRAME 1/2" dr/ DOOR PER SCHEDULE 1/2" CV 2" /\,/ 2" X / / VARIES co DIM PT. INT. DOOR HEAD, JAMB S I M SCALE : 3" = 1'-0" TILE/SV DOOR SHEET VINYL CARPET/ SV J L s r TILE DOOR SV J L ''''711111J1J11[ 11 III/CARPET 1111111111111 INTERIOR DOOR THRESHOLDS 3" = 1'=0" INT. INTERIOR SILL BELOW EXT. NEW INTERIOR WALL FUR WALL TO GLASS FOR FULL HEIGHT OF WINDOW EXISTING WINDOW EXTERIOR SILL BELOW 3/4" x WIDTH OF WALL EPDM SPACER & GASKET W/ADHESIVE BOTH SIDES INTERIOR WALL DETAIL - WALL TO (E) GLAZING, TYP SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" INT. GWB-1 . • EXT. 3/4" x WIDTH OF WALL EPDM SPACER & GASKET W/ ADHESIVE BOTH SIDES, TYP. EXISTING WINDOW EXTERIOR SILL BELOW ELEV DETAIL @ (E)GLAZING, TYP SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOTES: 1. SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAIL OUTLINE OF DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS. 2. SEE SHEET BA6.01 FOR MATERIAL/FINISH CODES. 3. SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAIL OUTLINE OF DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS. REMARKS KEY 1. SELF CLOSING 2. SMOKE GASKET 3. THRESHOLD 4. LEVER HANDLE 5. VISITOR OBSERVATION PORT 6. PRIVACY LATCH 7. WEATHERSTRIPING 8. ADA THRESHOLD 9. DOOR BOTTOM 10. BI -PASS SLIDER 11. PERFORATED SLAT ROLL -UP DOOR W/ METER 12. 1/2" UNDERCUT 13. SAFETY GLASS 14. EXIT DEVICE 15. DOOR ON MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN H (EXISTING) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC Ot 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R IEWED FO CODE ► * MPLI CE PP's D OCT 7 ity of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 232017 PERMIT CENTER EXISTING CARPET TO REMAIN CONTINUOUS VINYL EDGING ALONG EXISTING CARPET EDGE NEW CARPET INFILL 111111111111111111111111111111 ::❖:❖.:❖:❖:•:+:•:❖:❖:❖:❖:❖:•::•:•:•:•:.11111111I111IIIIII1111III111IIIII1111II b 1 1 223 NOTEL: 1. PREPARE AND FINISH EXPOSED CONCRETE SUBSTRATE TO MATCH ADJACENT SUBFLOOR ELEVATION. CARPET INFILL 3" = 1'=0" rliuda rchitects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 c W 0 W z v< O '< t -N LU Lia. I 07) - F-- U `� Q I cc i O F- CO CC>' Z w 0.>-Ovr <CC5W� QO U� _5 it DWW8 < CO Q W z 0 4640 S 144TH ST. co -J 1- REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title DOOR & WNDW SCHEDULES Drawing Number BA6.02 1 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A6.01_TM_SCHEDULES.DWG DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE REF # DOOR # FIRE RESISITIVE RATING DOOR OPENING SIZE DOOR FRAME REMARKS TYPE MAT'L THICKNESS FINISH COLOR UNDERCUT ACOUSTIC U -VALUE TYPE MATERIAL COLOR ELECTRICAL REQ'S HARDWARE GROUP HEAD DETAIL JAMB DETAIL THRESHOLD DETAIL COLUM 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 1 100A - 36x84 F ALUM (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) ALUM (E) - (E) -- - EXISTING 2 100B - 36x84 F ALUM (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) ALUM (E) - (E) - - - EXISTING 3 101A - 36x84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) - - - EXISTING 4 102A - 36x84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) - - - EXISTING 5 103A - 36x84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) -- - EXISTING 6 103B - 36x84 G HM (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) - - - EXISTING 7 104A - 36x84 E WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) D HM (E) - (E) - - - EXISTING 8 106A - 36x84 C WD 1 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 9 107A - 36x84 C WD 1 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 10 108A - 36x84 A WD 13/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 11 109A - 36X84 C WD 1 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 12 110A - 36X84 C WD 2 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 13 111A - 36X84 C WD 1 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - A HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 14 113A - 40X84 G HM (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) EXISTING 15 114A - 36X84 H WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C (E) (E) - (E) EXISTING 16 115A - 48X84 G HM (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C (E) (E) - (E) EXISTING 17 116A - 36X84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) EXISTING 18 117A - 36X84 B WD 1 3/4 STAIN - 1/8" - - B HM IP -7 - - 4/BA6.02 4/BA6.02 5/BA6.02 - 19 120A - 36x84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) EXISTING 20 121A - 42x84 D WD (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) C HM (E) - (E) EXISTING DOOR SCHEDULE NTS B FRAME TYPES NTS C (EXISTING) D (EXISTING) A I\ DOOR TYPES NTS B C \ • D (EXISTING) E (EXISTING) 1 V F (EXISTING) G (EXISTING) HM FRAME 1/2" dr/ DOOR PER SCHEDULE 1/2" CV 2" /\,/ 2" X / / VARIES co DIM PT. INT. DOOR HEAD, JAMB S I M SCALE : 3" = 1'-0" TILE/SV DOOR SHEET VINYL CARPET/ SV J L s r TILE DOOR SV J L ''''711111J1J11[ 11 III/CARPET 1111111111111 INTERIOR DOOR THRESHOLDS 3" = 1'=0" INT. INTERIOR SILL BELOW EXT. NEW INTERIOR WALL FUR WALL TO GLASS FOR FULL HEIGHT OF WINDOW EXISTING WINDOW EXTERIOR SILL BELOW 3/4" x WIDTH OF WALL EPDM SPACER & GASKET W/ADHESIVE BOTH SIDES INTERIOR WALL DETAIL - WALL TO (E) GLAZING, TYP SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" INT. GWB-1 . • EXT. 3/4" x WIDTH OF WALL EPDM SPACER & GASKET W/ ADHESIVE BOTH SIDES, TYP. EXISTING WINDOW EXTERIOR SILL BELOW ELEV DETAIL @ (E)GLAZING, TYP SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOTES: 1. SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAIL OUTLINE OF DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS. 2. SEE SHEET BA6.01 FOR MATERIAL/FINISH CODES. 3. SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DETAIL OUTLINE OF DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS. REMARKS KEY 1. SELF CLOSING 2. SMOKE GASKET 3. THRESHOLD 4. LEVER HANDLE 5. VISITOR OBSERVATION PORT 6. PRIVACY LATCH 7. WEATHERSTRIPING 8. ADA THRESHOLD 9. DOOR BOTTOM 10. BI -PASS SLIDER 11. PERFORATED SLAT ROLL -UP DOOR W/ METER 12. 1/2" UNDERCUT 13. SAFETY GLASS 14. EXIT DEVICE 15. DOOR ON MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN H (EXISTING) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC Ot 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R IEWED FO CODE ► * MPLI CE PP's D OCT 7 ity of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 232017 PERMIT CENTER EXISTING CARPET TO REMAIN CONTINUOUS VINYL EDGING ALONG EXISTING CARPET EDGE NEW CARPET INFILL 111111111111111111111111111111 ::❖:❖.:❖:❖:•:+:•:❖:❖:❖:❖:❖:•::•:•:•:•:.11111111I111IIIIII1111III111IIIII1111II b 1 1 223 NOTEL: 1. PREPARE AND FINISH EXPOSED CONCRETE SUBSTRATE TO MATCH ADJACENT SUBFLOOR ELEVATION. CARPET INFILL 3" = 1'=0" rliuda rchitects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 c W 0 W z v< O '< t -N LU Lia. I 07) - F-- U `� Q I cc i O F- CO CC>' Z w 0.>-Ovr <CC5W� QO U� _5 it DWW8 < CO Q W z 0 4640 S 144TH ST. co -J 1- REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title DOOR & WNDW SCHEDULES Drawing Number BA6.02 1 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A6.01_TM_SCHEDULES.DWG (E) ACCENT FINISH TO REMAIN, TYP. .............................. ................ (E) GWB GWB-1 (BEYOND) (E) GWB (E) GWB NORTH (OPP. SIM.) 1 HALLWAY 105 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ROOM SIGNAGE SOUTH SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" (E) CASEWORK TO REMAIN INFILL WALL (E) CASEWORK TO REMAIN NORTH RB -1 @ NEW WALL (E) GWB SOUTH WORK ROOM 119 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" =11-0" / (E) GWB NORTH 2 \ \ / / \9PEN// \ / \/ /\ /\ / \ / \ / / \ (E) GWB RB -1, TYP. \ / GWB-1 \ \ /> / (E) GWB RB, TYP. \ \ / / 1 / \PPEN// \ / \/ /\ /\ / \ / \ \ / \ \— / / < \ // \\ / \/ \ \\ // , /(E) > / , NORTH RB -1 @ NEW WALL (E) GWB SOUTH WORK ROOM 119 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" =11-0" / (E) GWB NORTH 2 EAST SOUTH BREAK ROOM 115 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" INFILL WALL WEST (E) GWB FULL HT WALL BEYOND (E) GWB BEYOND EAST OPEN OFFICE 112 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" T (E) GWB u T T T T T T T T (E) GWB GWB-1 L_ T T T T T T 7 BA9.01 / FULL HT WALL — PARTIAL HT WALL / 6 BA9.01 NORTH @ PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (OPP. SIDE SIM.) (E) ACCENT FINISH TO REMAIN, TYP. GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. OPEN OFFICE 112 - INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" T / / T� GWB-1 T� / NORTH MODIFY (E) COUNTERTOP & BRACKET SUPPORT, SEE BAD1.01 PEN \ RELOCATED EXIT DEVICE, SEE ELEC. SIDEWALL RETURN GRILLE, SEE MECH. GWB-1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OV 7 217 PERMIT CENTER 1 0211 WEST (E) RB ROOM SIGNAGE rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 6250 0 S ATE OF ASHINGTON REVISION A PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM, JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Drawing Number BA8.01 A8.01 TM INT-ELEVS.DWG a 0 CV COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC (E) GWB RB -1, TYP. \ / \ / / \ \ /> / EAST SOUTH BREAK ROOM 115 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" INFILL WALL WEST (E) GWB FULL HT WALL BEYOND (E) GWB BEYOND EAST OPEN OFFICE 112 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" T (E) GWB u T T T T T T T T (E) GWB GWB-1 L_ T T T T T T 7 BA9.01 / FULL HT WALL — PARTIAL HT WALL / 6 BA9.01 NORTH @ PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (OPP. SIDE SIM.) (E) ACCENT FINISH TO REMAIN, TYP. GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. OPEN OFFICE 112 - INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" T / / T� GWB-1 T� / NORTH MODIFY (E) COUNTERTOP & BRACKET SUPPORT, SEE BAD1.01 PEN \ RELOCATED EXIT DEVICE, SEE ELEC. SIDEWALL RETURN GRILLE, SEE MECH. GWB-1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OV 7 217 PERMIT CENTER 1 0211 WEST (E) RB ROOM SIGNAGE rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 6250 0 S ATE OF ASHINGTON REVISION A PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM, JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Drawing Number BA8.01 A8.01 TM INT-ELEVS.DWG a 0 CV COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC / / / / (E) GWB NORTH RB -1, TYP. OPEN OFFICE 112 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. EAST OFFICE 110 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 RB -t TYP. NORTH EAST TRAINING 107 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = GWB-1 / / / / / SOUTH GWB-1 SOUTH NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. CONFERENCE 106 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 WEST / GWB-1 \ GWB-1 \/ \ / / / / / _ EAST TRAINING 107 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = GWB-1 / / / / / SOUTH GWB-1 SOUTH NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. CONFERENCE 106 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 WEST WEST / / (E) GWB EAST 0 / (E) GWB NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. WEST OFFICE 109 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = / / / GWB-1 \/ WEST / / (E) GWB EAST 0 / (E) GWB NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. WEST OFFICE 109 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. EAST OFFICE 111 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. NORTH (E) GWB EAST STORAGE 108 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" SOUTH GWB-1 GWB-1 / / / / SOUTH GWB-1 EAST GWB-1 WEST GWB-1 SOUTH (E) GWB GWB-1 SOUTH WEST GWB-1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC O9 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION (E) GWB ECFi er, CITY OF TUKWILA C•:UV 1 7 2017 GWB-1 PERMIT CENTER MAX OCCUPANCY SIGNAGE WEST bo 0)1a7 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 N W W 00 z < J QZ O r W co 0 Z0 I— Cn W cg U WZ W D 0- O w CL t7) QZUT SJ=>� DWWg SC I- CO .7 1— V cn 0(r)0SO) c -meg 0 I-- ' t f -- REVISION PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM, JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Drawing Number BA8.02 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A8.01 TM !NT ELEVS.DWG (E) GWB NORTH GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. EAST OFFICE 111 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" GWB-1 RB -1, TYP. NORTH (E) GWB EAST STORAGE 108 - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" SOUTH GWB-1 GWB-1 / / / / SOUTH GWB-1 EAST GWB-1 WEST GWB-1 SOUTH (E) GWB GWB-1 SOUTH WEST GWB-1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC O9 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION (E) GWB ECFi er, CITY OF TUKWILA C•:UV 1 7 2017 GWB-1 PERMIT CENTER MAX OCCUPANCY SIGNAGE WEST bo 0)1a7 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 N W W 00 z < J QZ O r W co 0 Z0 I— Cn W cg U WZ W D 0- O w CL t7) QZUT SJ=>� DWWg SC I- CO .7 1— V cn 0(r)0SO) c -meg 0 I-- ' t f -- REVISION PERMIT REVISION #1 DATE 11/15/2017 Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. AC MM, JL AC 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Drawing Number BA8.02 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A8.01 TM !NT ELEVS.DWG COPYRIGHT @ 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A9.01 TM DETAILS.DWG WINDOW 4 3/4" rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 ADJUSTABLE NETI 4 . . , ' • . . . AlI1• • • ill00.1 11111.4141.1 ,,,,, , . • . • • -zr ' TYP. BRACING • 0 @ SUSPENDED IIIPPP..EXISTING • . • _ • •• - . • . • . . • • , , • • ' . • ... . 1.. CEILING MOVEMENT TI NDARCJGUuHOSTONTTRAA:v \ ANCHOR TIGHTEN SECURELY WIRE CEILING • , - . . • - PROVIDE 4 AND COMPRESSION APPROXIMATELY NNGOGTHWTvHEI 1B pLBI :EC RR:S,CEILINGc,COMPRESSIONAA12LBGAUGEO AT EACH END OF GRID WAY DIAGONAL BRACING STRUT EVERY 12'-0" EACH WAY EXISTING FRAMING EXISTING GWB 0iig I w 1 1 # 8 @ 12"0C, PROVIDE „A -.••••iti-C BLOCKING AS REQ'D VERTITRACK VT W/ #8 SCREW EA. STUD, EA. SIDE 11111I ..Alleli. biglill INTERIOR EXIS SILL BELOW TING MULLION 6250 40 REG, ED R , f s ', TE OF ASHINGTON - WALL CONN. 9 INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN @ (E) SOFFIT VERTITRACK VT W/ #8 SCREW EA. STUD, EA. SIDE INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN INT. WALL TO EXT. WALL 1 SCALE : 1/8" = I-0" SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1-0" NOTE: ATTACH DBL TOP,—CONTINUOUS TRACK TO PERP. WALL AT EA. END W/ 16 GA CLIP & (4) #8 SCREWS MIN. NESTED DBL 16 GA TOP TRACK W/ 1 1/4" FLANGES, FASTEN TOGETHER W/ #8 INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN RB -1 (E) CARPET (E) SUBFLOOR EA STUD W/(4) #12 STIFFCLIP CL362/400-118 SCREWS TO STUD CL "H" PLATE W/1/2" 0 TITEN HD SCREW, INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN RB -1 EA SIDE (E) CARPET (E) CONC. SLAB 1/2" 1 1 @ 12"0C EA. SIDE CV It UJ 0 ( 1-1-1 ) 44C ...., Z CO 0 < r-N—I < Z V ri u j 2 es) WI I INTERIOR 20GA PARTITION MTL STUDS WITH 5/8" TYPE WALL- @ 16 O.C. "X" GWB EACH ACT CEILING \ ACT MTL RUNNER 4 3/4" SIDE. TOP OF WALL NEW INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN - ACT )0"1-- o'ci. EMBED 3 1/2" ii- 10 WALL CONN. @ (E) FLOOR PRHT. WALL CONN. ® @ (E) FLOOR LLI 1111 W2 ._J 0 ..---.,---„,----.,..--.„----.„---.,----.p.---./--, 14 SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" SCALE : 1 1/2" =10' SCALE : 1 1/2" =10' GWB-1 ) coc>•-zff -2 \i D a- 0 Lu co .; Q. >. Q 0 'in- 0 0104 Imola ellimN4 '....1/1111 Ow* 0"0 0 INTERIOR 31/2" SIDE PARTITION 22GA WITH 5/8" TYPE & INSUL-2. WALL - MTL STUDS @ 16" O.C. "X" GWB EACH 7'-0" FV / / ' . PAINT ALL SIDES OF EQ EQ . )72\ REMOVE DROP BOX ) .....1 <COW1:1: Cl. 0 I- °3 CY) .416.1 STUD EACH SIDE & (2) #8 ..6.n. VERTITRACK VV/#8 SCREW TO (E) MONUMENT & WD.TRIM TO MATCH ) 5/8" GWB OVER VAPOR (E) EXT. BUILDING \ ) I- BARRIER OVER MTL FRAMING TO MATCH di PER INTERIOR WALL wassimammaimainew Y PARTITION TYPE INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN , , ' . - ' ' , • ' „ ., . , ' . , • , • . : ' .: , , . , COLOR ) EXISTING W/R-19 BATT ;:.1-\ INSULATION W 01111 ,.... 4 3/4" BOT CHORD. PRE -DRILL HOLES ) DDLLILL1g 0,..•• g PIN MTD. ALUM. PANEL W/ PTD. ,,,, GRAPHIC LOGO BOTH SIDES ,,, , . . CENTERED IN BOTTOM CHORD - F-wc4. P-c4P-V2 ) WALL CONN. THAT ARE 70% OF SCREW 0, TYP. (E) OPEN -WEB WOOD TRUSS 1/2" DEFLECTION ALLOWANCE INTERIOR PARTITION WALL PER PLAN @ (E) STRUCTURE ) REVISION DATE . • 71\ NOTE: TUKWILA SCHOOL' DISTRICT > '1-* u- ) & PERMIT REVISION #1 11/15/2017 REMOVE (E) SIGNAGE .;- -6 PATCH & REPAIR SERVICE CENTER cf:\ .` l' .----_ ..------ ) ) PIN MTD. ALUM. 2-i___ 1 • 1/2" ) INDIVIDUAL LETTER -h*-4160 5 144TH STREET .:_;NI, / ) /1//////I/ i W3 SIGNAGE BOTH SIDES, TYP. CONC. • _r • PATCH TO MATCH ) ) 7'-0" HIGH PARTITION WALL - TOP OF PRHT WALL TYP. (E) EXTERIOR ADJACENT ) EXTERIOR MONUMENT SIGN 4 STUCCO FINISH INFILL @ DROP BOX ) ) Design: AC ) Drawn: MM Checked: AC )DEC Project No. 331-16-01 ) ) ) 31/2" 1 :GAFIM WITH 5 t, 1 r) -€1 a COINIELY.,i'MPUEMSG APPROVED 0 2011 b • . SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" 19SIDE SCALE : 1/2" = 1-0" I SCALE : 1/4" = 11-0" SCALE : 3" = 11-0" ' City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION EMBOSSED LETTERING REMOVE (E) GWB THIS SIDE FOR INSTALLATION OF WALL 14'-0" (E) TO REMAIN (DASHED) (E) STUCCO SURFACE / (E) CASEWORK TO REMAIN 4 3/4" RECEIVED crrY OF TUKWILA NOV 1 7 2017 VERTICLIP SLD W/3" SLOTS @ 48" OC, FASTEN TO (E) WOOD FRAMING & TOP Issuance PERMIT SET J ) Date: 8/10/2017 ) ,51o" zfr, EQ. INTERIOR TRACK W/ #8 SCREWS (E) GWB —/ ><>< 1/2" PERMIT CENTER PARTITION WALL -// PER PLAN \)\ .4 • 1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT SERVICE CENTER, I W4 ) Drawin Title g )) DETAILS ) ) ) ) (E) FRAMING ACT CEILING 1 —4 4'-0" HIGH PARTITION WALL- 5 1/2" 22GA MTL STUDS @ 16" 0.C. WITH 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB EACH SIDE (E) CONC. BASE TO REMAIN RB — \ PANEL INTERIOR PARTITION WALL WALL MTD. ALUMINUM W/ PTD. GRAPHIC & LETTERING VERT. WALL MTD. SUPPORTS PER SIGN MFR. FRONT SIDEV PER PLAN \---- -1 (E) FINISH FLOOR ) Drawing Number ) ) BA9.01 ) ) INT WALL PARTITION TYPES - PRHT WALL BASE @ RECEIVING EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGN WALL CONN. @ (E) SOFFIT SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" (.2o, \......." SCALE : 1/2" = 11-0" SCALE : 1 1/2" = 11-0" FILENAME COPYRIGHT @ 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC A9.01 TM DETAILS.DWG MECHANICAL LEGEND REFERENCE SYMBOLS NEW MECHANICAL WORK ENLARGED PLAN BORDER DETAIL OR DRAWING IDENTIFIER POINT OF CONNECTION PLUMBING SL LL c G DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER HOT WATER RECIRC VENT PIPING HVAC PIPING REFRIGERATION PIPING - SUCTION REFRIGERATION PIPING - LIQUID CONDENSATE DRAIN GAS FIRE PROTECTION FM FIRE SPRINKLER MAIN PIPING ELEMENTS D4 BALL VALVE DIRECTION OF FLOW UNION HOSE BIBB PIPE CONTINUES PIPE CAP o PIPE RISING UP PIPE DROPPING DOWN DUCTWORK 1 P MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER gm MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER RECTANGULAR DUCT UP I RECTANGULAR DUCT DOWN Av ROUND DUCT UP ROUND DUCT DOWN GRD SYMBOLS SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN OR RELIEF GRILLE EXHAUST GRILLE CONTROLS ®O - CONTROL WIRING ROOM THERMOSTAT/SENSOR FIRE SPRINKLER GENERAL NOTES 1. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ISA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANT SYSTEM DESIGN/INSTALL. 2. DIAGRAMMATIC ROUTING OF CONCEALED OR EXPOSED SPRINKLER PIPING IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE OFFSETS AND COVERAGE AS REQUIRED. PIPING AND HEAD LOCATIONS SHALL NOT OBSTRUCT ACCESS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ABOVE CEILINGS. 3. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION FOR ALL AREAS OF THE BUILDING INCLUDING VOID, CEILING AND ATTIC SPACES IN COMPLIANCE WITH NFPA 13 REQUIREMENTS. 4. SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND SYSTEM DESIGN SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA CHAPTER 13 AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ), CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHALL. 5. THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION BETWEEN ALL APPLICABLE TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. HVAC WORK SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE. SPRINKLER PIPING INSTALLED WITHOUT PROPER COORDINATION IS SUBJECT TO REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. 6. ALL EXPOSED SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THERE SHALL BE NO EXPOSED PIPING IN OCCUPIED FINISHED SPACES UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. SPRINKLER PIPING INSTALLED WITHOUT PROPER COORDINATION IS SUBJECT TO REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. 7. THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO SUBMITTING TO THE JURISDICTION HAVING APPROVAL. 8. PROVIDE SEISMIC FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS TO HEADS IN CEILINGS. 9. MAINTAIN FIRE AND SMOKE RATINGS OF WALLS. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: GENERAL: 1. COORDINATE MECHANICAL WORK WITH ELECTRICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, CIVIL AND LANDSCAPE WORK. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OFFSETS FOR COORDINATED INSTALLATION WHERE REQUIRED. 2. COORDINATE HVAC, AND PLUMBING WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT ACCESS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER PIPING FOR AVAILABLE SPACE. 3. WHERE USED, THE TERM "PROVIDE" SHALL MEAN "FURNISH AND INSTALL". 4. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 6'-8" CLEARANCE TO UNDERSIDE OF DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUITS, SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT, ETC., IN MECHANICAL ROOM ACCESS SPACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS WITH MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFIED DRAWINGS. COORDINATE AND PROVIDE DUCT AND PIPING TRANSITIONS REQUIRED FOR FINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE DUCT AND PIPING DIMENSIONS BEFORE FABRICATION. 6. PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS STEEL REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 7. LOCATE DAMPERS, CONTROLS AND SIMILAR COMPONENTS SO THAT THEY ARE ACCESSIBLE. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED BEHIND WALLS, ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS AND BELOW FLOORS. COORDINATE ACCESS DOOR LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. 8. COORDINATE ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE TO VERIFY THAT ATTACHMENT POINTS ON EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE CAN ACCEPT SEISMIC, WEIGHT, AND OTHER LOADS IMPOSED. 9. MAINTAIN INDICATED FIRE AND SMOKE RATING OF WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS, AND FLOORS AT MECHANICAL PENETRATIONS. SEAL PENETRATIONS WITH FIRESTOP MATERIAL. PROVIDE MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 814 AND UL 1479 3M OR APPROVED. 10. LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF OPENINGS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES INVOLVED. INCLUDE IN THE COST OF MECHANICAL WORK, CUTTING, CORING, PATCHING AND PAINTING OF EXISTING WALLS, CEILINGS, FLOORS AND ROOFS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE WORK AS INDICATED IN THE MECHANICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 11. PROVIDE ELASTOMERIC FOAM MATERIAL ON MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT THAT PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD. PAINT FOAM MATERIAL WHITE. 12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAFEKEEPING OF HIS OWN PROPERTY ON THE JOB SITE. OWNER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROTECTION OF PROPERTIES AGAINST FIRE, THEFT AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS. 13. CLEAN THE JOB SITE DAILY AND REMOVE FROM THE PREMISES ANY DIRT AND DEBRIS CAUSE BY THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT. BEFORE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, CLEAN EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, EXPOSED DUCTS, PIPING AND SIMILAR ITEMS. 14. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT THAT FITS INTO THE SPACE ALLOTTED AND ALLOWS ADEQUATE ACCEPTABLE CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION, REPLACEMENT, ENTRY, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE NO CONFLICT WITH REQUIRED CLEARANCES. 15. BUILDING SPACE IS LIMITED. STRONG ATTENTION TO DETAIL AND CARE MUST BETAKEN WHEN DEVELOPING SHOP DRAWING SO ROUTING IS COORDINATED WITH OTHER DISCIPLINES. ALL EXPOSED SYSTEMS ROUTING REQUIRES APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT. 16. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, PACKAGED UNITS, CONTROL PANELS, MOTOR STARTER, MOTOR CONTROLLERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SHALL CARRY A SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR) EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT DELIVERED FROM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. INCLUDE VISIBLE FACTORY NAMEPLATE FOR SUCH EQUIPMENT INDICATING SCCR OF EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 AND UL 5D8A. 17. STANDARD CURRENT TRADE PRACTICES & METHODS APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. ALL WORK IS TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF ALL CURRENT CODE & LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND AMENDMENTS. THESE CODES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE, INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE, NFPA, INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE, & LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. COMPLY WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR ANY VARIANCES. 18. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY & NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL DETAILS OF THE WORK. VERIFY LOCATION & MEASUREMENTS OF ALL ITEMS ON THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL OFFSETS & ADDITIONAL DUCTWORK & PIPING AS NECESSARY TO AVOID STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS ON THE PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRODUCE SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. THERE SHALL BE NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER FOR THIS COORDINATION OR FOR EXTRA MATERIAL REQUIRED IN ORDER TO ACCOMPLISH THIS TASK. 19. PROVIDE COMPLETE & FULLY -OPERATING SYSTEMS. 20. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL EQUIPMENT & APPURTENANCES WITH OTHER TRADES. 21. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REGULARLY CATALOGED ITEMS OF THE MANUFACTURER & SHALL BE SUPPLIED AS A COMPLETE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. ANY OPTIONAL ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION SHALL BE INCLUDED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 22. ANY CUTTING, PATCHING & PAINTING OF BUILDING ELEMENTS & FINISHED SURFACES IS TO BE DONE BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 23. ALL APPLIANCES DESIGNED TO BE FIXED IN POSITION SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED IN PLACE. 24. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED PER PLANS & THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. 25. RATING OF ACCESS DOORS AND/OR ACCESS PANELS THROUGH FIRE -RATED WALLS, SHAFTS, CEILINGS, ETC. MUST EQUAL THE FIRE RATING OF THE MATERIAL PENETRATED. 26. CAULK & FLASH ALL PENETRATIONS PER CODE. 27. ADJUSTING & BALANCING: ADJUST EACH PART OF SYSTEM TO ENSURE PROPER FUNCTIONING OF ALL CONTROLS & SPECIFIED AIR DISTRIBUTION. LEAVE ENTIRE SYSTEM IN OPERATING CONDITION. HVAC/SHEET METAL: 51. PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPERS AT ALL GRILLES, REGISTERS, & DIFFUSERS. 52. MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE CLASS 1 AND HAVE A MAXIMUM LEAKAGE RATE OF 4 CFM/SQUARE FOOT AT 1.0" W.G. 53. REFERENCE BUILDING HVAC LOAD CALCULATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES. NO HUMIDIFICATION PROVIDED. NO SIMULTANEOUS HEATING/COOLING ALLOWED 54. CONTROLS SHALL CLOSE ALL OSA DAMPERS WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT RUNNING IN COMPLIANCE WITH C403.2.4.3 28. PROVIDE OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&MS), RECORD DRAWINGS, & OWNER TRAINING PER WSEC. 29. PROVIDE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ANY ELECTRICAL PANEL, INCLUDING PANELS ON EQUIPMENT. RE-ROUTE OR OFFSET PIPING AND/OR DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED. 30. HEAT -TRACED SYSTEMS SHALL MEET THE INSULATION THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS OF THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. UNTRACED PIPING WITHIN A HEAT -TRACED SYSTEM SHALL BE INSULATED WITH NOT LESS THAN 1" OF INSULATION. 31. SERVICE WATER PIPING INSULATION CONDUCTIVITY IS NOT TO EXCEED 0.27 BTU PER INCH. INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE PER TABLE C403.2.9. 32. PROTECT PIPING INSULATION PER REQUIREMENTS OF WSEC C403.2.9.1 33. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING OF THE HVAC SYSTEM. INCLUDE FUNCTIONAL TESTING SEQUENCE OF OPERATION & TEST PROCEDURES PER WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS. ITEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ARE: CONTROL SYSTEMS, AIR HANDLERS, HEAT PUMPS, EXHAUST FANS, PUMPS, AND WATER HEATERS. AIR SYSTEMS SHALL BE BALANCED SO AS TO FIRST MINIMIZE THROTTLING LOSSES, THEN ADJUSTED TO MEET DESIGN FLOW CONDITIONS. PROVIDE PRELIMINARY AND FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORTS. SUBMIT FIGURE C408.1.2.1 COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST FROM WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE TO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION UPON COMPLETION OF PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING REPORT. PROVIDE CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS IN COMPLIANCE WITH C103.6 34. PROVIDE AIR SYSTEM BALANCING DEVICES, INCLUDING VOLUME DAMPERS, AND ZONE DAMPERS ON TERMINALS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. EXISTING MECHANICAL: 1. DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, ARE INTERNAL CLEAR DIMENSIONS AND DUCT SIZE SHALL BE INCREASED TO COMPENSATE FOR DUCT LINING THICKNESS. 2. PROVIDE TEMPORARY COVERS OVER OPEN ENDS OF EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK DURING CONSTRUCTION. 3. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER FOR EACH DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLE. 4. PROVIDE DUCT ACCESS DOORS AT DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS, BACKDRAFT DAMPERS, MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS, FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS, COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, DUCT MOUNTED COILS, DUCT AIRFLOW STATIONS AND LOUVER PLENUMS. 5. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM BRANCH DUCT SIZE TO DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES, UNLESS NOTED TO USE LARGER SIZE ON DRAWINGS: 6"0: 100 CFM TO": 200 CFM 100: 300 CFM 12"0: 450 CFM 14"0: 600 CFM 16"0: 750 CFM ENERGY CODE: (WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE) 1. PIPING AND DUCT INSULATION: TYPES LISTED IN THE WSEC. COMPLY WITH THICKNESS AND 2. DUCT SEALING: SEAL DUCT TRANSVERSE JOINTS AND LONGITUDINAL SEAMS PER THE WSEC. 3. RECORD DRAWINGS:. PROVIDE PER WSEC. 4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: PROVIDE PER WSEC. 5. SYSTEM BALANCING: PROVIDE PER WSEC. 35. CEILING FANS, EQUIPMENT, DIFFUSERS, & GRILLES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH PLACEMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES. 36. VENTILATION SHALL BE PROVIDED PER IMC CHAPTER 4. MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SYSTEMS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF REDUCING THE OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY TO THE MINIMUM REQUIRED BY CHAPTER 4 OF THE IMC. 37. OUTSIDE AIR ECONOMIZERS SHALL INCLUDE AUTOMATICALLY MODULATING OUTSIDE & RETURN/RELIEF AIR DAMPERS ARRANGED TO PROVIDE 100% OF THE DESIGN SUPPLY AIR FLOW, & SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE CONTROLS FOR ECONOMIZER OPERATION. 38. AIR ECONOMIZERS ON SYSTEMS GREATER THAN 65,000 BTUH SHALL PROVIDE PARTIAL COOLING WHEN MECHANICAL COOLING IS REQUIRED TO MEET THE REMAINDER OF THE COOLING LOAD. 39. PROVIDE COMBINATION FIRE & SMOKE DAMPERS (CFSD) AND/OR FIRE DAMPERS WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. 40. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SHALL BE MINIMUM OF 7 -DAY PROGRAMMABLE TYPE PROVIDING SETPOINT TEMPERATURES, NIGHT SETBACK, MANUAL OVERRIDE, & MINIMUM 5 -DEGREE DEADBAND. CONTROLS SHALL ALLOW FOR OPTIMUM START. 41. HEAT PUMPS WITH AUXILIARY ELECTRIC HEAT SHALL HAVE CONTROLS COMPLYING WITH WSEC C403.2. 42. SEAL & TEST ALL DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED PER IMC, WSEC C403.2.8.3 LEAKAGE REQUIREMENTS, & IBC VAPOR RETARDER REQUIREMENTS. DUCTWORK DESIGN PRESSURE IS 2". 43. ALL SHEET METAL DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. CONCEALED DUCTWORK LOCATED WITHIN THE CONDITIONED SPACE SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-3.3. DUCTWORK LOCATED IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-6. WHERE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF THE BUILDING, DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-8. 44. SOUND -LINE ALL SUPPLY, RETURN, OR EXHAUST DUCT WITHIN 10' OF FANS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 45. ALL SHEET METAL PRODUCTS SHALL COMPLY WITH SMACNA DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, CURRENT EDITION. 46. ALL RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK SIZES SHOWN ARE GALVANIZED SHEET METAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ROUND DUCT SHALL BE SHEET METAL. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL ROUND 2 -PIECE AND RECTANGULAR 90 DEGREE ELBOWS. 1. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A CLEAN AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER. CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED TO MINIMIZE ANY INCONVENIENCE OR DISTURBANCE TO OTHER AREAS OF THE BUILDING WHICH ARE TO REMAIN IN OPERATION. ISOLATE WORK AREAS BY MEANS OF TEMPORARY PARTITIONS AND/OR TARPS TO KEEP DUST AND DIRT WITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. 2. EXISTING MATERIALS THAT ARE REMOVED SHALL NOT BE REUSED IN NEW SYSTEMS, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED AS BEING RELOCATED. 3 WHERE INDICATED, DUCTWORK AND PIPING OR PORTIONS OF DUCTWORK AND PIPING SHALL BE REUSED. REFER TO DRAWING PLANS FOR POINTS OF CONNECTIONS. 4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS WHERE REQUIRED BY DEMOLITION OR ALTERATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND HANGERS TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY, SAFETY AND PROPER OPERATION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS FOR THE DURATION OF THE WORK. DEMOLITION: 1. TAKE CAUTION IN DEMOLITION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO FACILITATE NEW WORK INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED INSULATION, HANGERS, VALVES, PLENUM WALLS, DAMPERS, WIREMOLD, WIRING, CONTROLS, AND APPURTENANCES ASSOCIATED WITH EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT. 47. ALL DUCT SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. 48. WHERE FLEXIBLE DUCT IS SHOWN AT GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS, PROVIDE 6' MAXIMUM LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE DUCT. 49. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AT DUCT CONNECTIONS TO ALL AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT. 50. SUPPORT FOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT SHALL INCLUDE APPURTENANCES AS NOTED IN ASHRAE AND REQUIRED IN CODE FOR SEISMIC/SWAY BRACING. 3. WHERE EXISTING ITEMS PENETRATE A WALL OR ROOF, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INFILL AT (E) PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALUROOF WITH LIKE MATERIALS. PATCH & REPAIR TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACES INCLUDING PAINT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WHERE REQUIRED BY DEMOLITION OR ALTERATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH GC AND PROVIDE NECESSARY SUPPORTS AND HANGERS TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY, SAFETY AND PROPER OPERATION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. MECHANICAL SHEET LIST: BM0.01 MECHANICAL LEGEND, GENERAL NOTES AND SHEET LIST BM0.02 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES BMCF.01 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE -• NREC) BMCF.02 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMCF.03 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMD1.01 DEMOLITION HVAC FLOOR PLAN BM1.01 HVAC FLOOR PLAN kEVIEVVED OR DE COMP IANCE REVIEWED FOR APPROVED DEC O?l 2017 PPR + ED 2017 City of .Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1.).7 City of Tukwila t I G DiVJSON RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMI rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222. f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N W W DU VJ co Lu 0 0 0 F" U <C C. OC O VIII 0- CO� ( > Z W a. O w Q e -N-1 WF >i ;:t.))DDWW W (11.7 ILA, WA 98168 F- (206) 979-9370 W H REVISION :DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. RSH MAM RSH 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL LEGEND Drawing Number M0.01 BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG N M COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS 0 DIAMETER, PHASE L LENGTH A AIR LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE AAV AUTOMATIC AIR VENT LB POUND ABV ABOVE LL REFRIGERANT LIQUID LINE AD AREA DRAIN, ACCESS DOOR LVR LOUVER ADA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR MAT MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION MAX MAXIMUM AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT MBH THOUSANDS OF BTUH APPROX APPROXIMATE MECH MECHANICAL ARCH ARCHITECT MED MEDIUM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIG. MERV MINIMUM EFFICIENCY REPORTING VALUE ASHRAE AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. MIN MINIMUM B BOILER MISC MISCELLANEOUS BDD BACKDRAFT DAMPER MPG MEDIUM PRESSURE GAS BF BELOW FLOOR MU MAKEUP WATER BFF BELOW FINISHED FLOOR (N) NEW BLDG BUILDING NA NOT APPLICABLE BLW BELOW NEG NEGATIVE BOD BOTTOM OF DUCT NO NORMALLY OPEN BOP BOTTOM OF PIPE NO. NUMBER BOT BOTTOM NP NON -POTABLE C CONDENSATE PIPING NTS NOT TO SCALE CAP CAPACITY OA OUTSIDE AIR CBV CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE OAT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE CD CEILING DIFFUSER OCC OCCUPIED CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE OSA OUTSIDE AIR CL CENTER LINE PD PRESSURE DROP CLG CEILING PERF PERFORATED CO CLEANOUT PH PHASE COND CONDENSATE PIV POST INDICATOR VALVE CONN CONNECTION POC POINT OF CONNECTION CU CONDENSING UNIT, CUBIC PRESS PRESSURE CV CHECK VALVE, CONSTANT VOLUME PRV PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE CW DOMESTIC COLD WATER PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH DB DRY BULB PU PUMP DEPT DEPARTMENT QTY QUANTITY R REFRIGERANT PIPING DF DFU DRINKING FOUNTAIN DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNIT RA RETURN AIR DIFF DIFFERENTIAL RAF RETURN/RELIEF AIR FAN DIM DIMENSION RAG RETURN AIR GRILLE DN DOWN RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DX DIRECT EXPANSION RD ROOF DRAIN DWG DRAWING REF REFERENCE, RETURN/EXHAUST FAN (E) EXISTING REL RELIEF EA EACH, EXHAUST AIR RET RETURN EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE RG RETURN GRILLE ECG EGGCRATE GRILLE RH ROOF HOOD EF EXHAUST FAN RM ROOM EFF EFFICIENCY ROD ROOF OVERFLOW DRAIN EG EXHAUST GRILLE RPBA REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY ELEC ELECTRIC RPBP REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ELEV ELEVATION RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE EMCS ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM RTU ROOFTOP UNIT ENT ENTERING SA SUPPLY AIR ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE SAD SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE SCH SCHEDULE EX EXHAUST S/D SMOKE DAMPER EXT EXTERIOR, EXTERNAL SF SUPPLY FAN, SQUARE FOOT °F DEGREES FAHRENHEIT SG SUPPLY GRILLE FC FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR SL REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINE FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT SMACNA SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING FD FLOOR DRAIN CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. F/D FIRE DAMPER SP STATIC PRESSURE FLA FULL LOAD AMPS SPEC SPECIFICATION FLR FLOOR SQ SQUARE FLEX FLEXIBLE SUP SUPPLY FPM FEET PER MINUTE TAB TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FS FLOOR SINK TEMP TEMPERATURE F/S/D COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPER TG TRANSFER GRILLE FOIC FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED TPRV TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE BY CONTRACTOR TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE FV FACE VELOCITY T'STAT THERMOSTAT G GAS TYP TYPICAL GAL GALLON UNOCC UNOCCUPIED GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR V VENT, VOLTS GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNIT GR GRILLE VD VOLUME DAMPER GRD GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS VEL VELOCITY GWH GAS WATER HEATER VENT VENTILATION, VENTILATOR HB HOSE BIBB VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE HC HEATING COIL VTR VENT THRU ROOF HD HEAD W WASTE, WATT, WIDTH HOR HORIZONTAL WCO WALL CLEANOUT HP HEAT PUMP, HORSEPOWER W/O WITHOUT HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING WPD WATER PRESSURE DROP HW DOMESTIC HOT WATER WSEC WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE HWC DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING WSFU WATER SUPPLY FIXTURE UNIT I.E. INVERT ELEVATION WT WEIGHT KW KILOWATT WTD WATER TEMPERATURE DROP MECHANICAL LEGEND REFERENCE SYMBOLS NEW MECHANICAL WORK ENLARGED PLAN BORDER DETAIL OR DRAWING IDENTIFIER POINT OF CONNECTION PLUMBING SL LL c G DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER HOT WATER RECIRC VENT PIPING HVAC PIPING REFRIGERATION PIPING - SUCTION REFRIGERATION PIPING - LIQUID CONDENSATE DRAIN GAS FIRE PROTECTION FM FIRE SPRINKLER MAIN PIPING ELEMENTS D4 BALL VALVE DIRECTION OF FLOW UNION HOSE BIBB PIPE CONTINUES PIPE CAP o PIPE RISING UP PIPE DROPPING DOWN DUCTWORK 1 P MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER gm MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER RECTANGULAR DUCT UP I RECTANGULAR DUCT DOWN Av ROUND DUCT UP ROUND DUCT DOWN GRD SYMBOLS SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN OR RELIEF GRILLE EXHAUST GRILLE CONTROLS ®O - CONTROL WIRING ROOM THERMOSTAT/SENSOR FIRE SPRINKLER GENERAL NOTES 1. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ISA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANT SYSTEM DESIGN/INSTALL. 2. DIAGRAMMATIC ROUTING OF CONCEALED OR EXPOSED SPRINKLER PIPING IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE OFFSETS AND COVERAGE AS REQUIRED. PIPING AND HEAD LOCATIONS SHALL NOT OBSTRUCT ACCESS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ABOVE CEILINGS. 3. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION FOR ALL AREAS OF THE BUILDING INCLUDING VOID, CEILING AND ATTIC SPACES IN COMPLIANCE WITH NFPA 13 REQUIREMENTS. 4. SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND SYSTEM DESIGN SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA CHAPTER 13 AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ), CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHALL. 5. THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION BETWEEN ALL APPLICABLE TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. HVAC WORK SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE. SPRINKLER PIPING INSTALLED WITHOUT PROPER COORDINATION IS SUBJECT TO REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. 6. ALL EXPOSED SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THERE SHALL BE NO EXPOSED PIPING IN OCCUPIED FINISHED SPACES UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. SPRINKLER PIPING INSTALLED WITHOUT PROPER COORDINATION IS SUBJECT TO REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. 7. THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO SUBMITTING TO THE JURISDICTION HAVING APPROVAL. 8. PROVIDE SEISMIC FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS TO HEADS IN CEILINGS. 9. MAINTAIN FIRE AND SMOKE RATINGS OF WALLS. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: GENERAL: 1. COORDINATE MECHANICAL WORK WITH ELECTRICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, CIVIL AND LANDSCAPE WORK. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OFFSETS FOR COORDINATED INSTALLATION WHERE REQUIRED. 2. COORDINATE HVAC, AND PLUMBING WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT ACCESS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER PIPING FOR AVAILABLE SPACE. 3. WHERE USED, THE TERM "PROVIDE" SHALL MEAN "FURNISH AND INSTALL". 4. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 6'-8" CLEARANCE TO UNDERSIDE OF DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUITS, SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT, ETC., IN MECHANICAL ROOM ACCESS SPACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS WITH MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFIED DRAWINGS. COORDINATE AND PROVIDE DUCT AND PIPING TRANSITIONS REQUIRED FOR FINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE DUCT AND PIPING DIMENSIONS BEFORE FABRICATION. 6. PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS STEEL REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 7. LOCATE DAMPERS, CONTROLS AND SIMILAR COMPONENTS SO THAT THEY ARE ACCESSIBLE. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED BEHIND WALLS, ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS AND BELOW FLOORS. COORDINATE ACCESS DOOR LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. 8. COORDINATE ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE TO VERIFY THAT ATTACHMENT POINTS ON EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE CAN ACCEPT SEISMIC, WEIGHT, AND OTHER LOADS IMPOSED. 9. MAINTAIN INDICATED FIRE AND SMOKE RATING OF WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS, AND FLOORS AT MECHANICAL PENETRATIONS. SEAL PENETRATIONS WITH FIRESTOP MATERIAL. PROVIDE MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 814 AND UL 1479 3M OR APPROVED. 10. LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF OPENINGS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES INVOLVED. INCLUDE IN THE COST OF MECHANICAL WORK, CUTTING, CORING, PATCHING AND PAINTING OF EXISTING WALLS, CEILINGS, FLOORS AND ROOFS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE WORK AS INDICATED IN THE MECHANICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 11. PROVIDE ELASTOMERIC FOAM MATERIAL ON MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT THAT PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD. PAINT FOAM MATERIAL WHITE. 12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAFEKEEPING OF HIS OWN PROPERTY ON THE JOB SITE. OWNER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROTECTION OF PROPERTIES AGAINST FIRE, THEFT AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS. 13. CLEAN THE JOB SITE DAILY AND REMOVE FROM THE PREMISES ANY DIRT AND DEBRIS CAUSE BY THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT. BEFORE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, CLEAN EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, EXPOSED DUCTS, PIPING AND SIMILAR ITEMS. 14. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT THAT FITS INTO THE SPACE ALLOTTED AND ALLOWS ADEQUATE ACCEPTABLE CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION, REPLACEMENT, ENTRY, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE NO CONFLICT WITH REQUIRED CLEARANCES. 15. BUILDING SPACE IS LIMITED. STRONG ATTENTION TO DETAIL AND CARE MUST BETAKEN WHEN DEVELOPING SHOP DRAWING SO ROUTING IS COORDINATED WITH OTHER DISCIPLINES. ALL EXPOSED SYSTEMS ROUTING REQUIRES APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT. 16. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, PACKAGED UNITS, CONTROL PANELS, MOTOR STARTER, MOTOR CONTROLLERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SHALL CARRY A SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR) EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT DELIVERED FROM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. INCLUDE VISIBLE FACTORY NAMEPLATE FOR SUCH EQUIPMENT INDICATING SCCR OF EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 AND UL 5D8A. 17. STANDARD CURRENT TRADE PRACTICES & METHODS APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. ALL WORK IS TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF ALL CURRENT CODE & LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND AMENDMENTS. THESE CODES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE, INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE, NFPA, INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE, & LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. COMPLY WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR ANY VARIANCES. 18. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY & NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL DETAILS OF THE WORK. VERIFY LOCATION & MEASUREMENTS OF ALL ITEMS ON THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL OFFSETS & ADDITIONAL DUCTWORK & PIPING AS NECESSARY TO AVOID STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS ON THE PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRODUCE SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. THERE SHALL BE NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER FOR THIS COORDINATION OR FOR EXTRA MATERIAL REQUIRED IN ORDER TO ACCOMPLISH THIS TASK. 19. PROVIDE COMPLETE & FULLY -OPERATING SYSTEMS. 20. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL EQUIPMENT & APPURTENANCES WITH OTHER TRADES. 21. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REGULARLY CATALOGED ITEMS OF THE MANUFACTURER & SHALL BE SUPPLIED AS A COMPLETE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. ANY OPTIONAL ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION SHALL BE INCLUDED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 22. ANY CUTTING, PATCHING & PAINTING OF BUILDING ELEMENTS & FINISHED SURFACES IS TO BE DONE BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 23. ALL APPLIANCES DESIGNED TO BE FIXED IN POSITION SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED IN PLACE. 24. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED PER PLANS & THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. 25. RATING OF ACCESS DOORS AND/OR ACCESS PANELS THROUGH FIRE -RATED WALLS, SHAFTS, CEILINGS, ETC. MUST EQUAL THE FIRE RATING OF THE MATERIAL PENETRATED. 26. CAULK & FLASH ALL PENETRATIONS PER CODE. 27. ADJUSTING & BALANCING: ADJUST EACH PART OF SYSTEM TO ENSURE PROPER FUNCTIONING OF ALL CONTROLS & SPECIFIED AIR DISTRIBUTION. LEAVE ENTIRE SYSTEM IN OPERATING CONDITION. HVAC/SHEET METAL: 51. PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPERS AT ALL GRILLES, REGISTERS, & DIFFUSERS. 52. MOTORIZED DAMPERS SHALL BE CLASS 1 AND HAVE A MAXIMUM LEAKAGE RATE OF 4 CFM/SQUARE FOOT AT 1.0" W.G. 53. REFERENCE BUILDING HVAC LOAD CALCULATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES. NO HUMIDIFICATION PROVIDED. NO SIMULTANEOUS HEATING/COOLING ALLOWED 54. CONTROLS SHALL CLOSE ALL OSA DAMPERS WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT RUNNING IN COMPLIANCE WITH C403.2.4.3 28. PROVIDE OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&MS), RECORD DRAWINGS, & OWNER TRAINING PER WSEC. 29. PROVIDE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ANY ELECTRICAL PANEL, INCLUDING PANELS ON EQUIPMENT. RE-ROUTE OR OFFSET PIPING AND/OR DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED. 30. HEAT -TRACED SYSTEMS SHALL MEET THE INSULATION THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS OF THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. UNTRACED PIPING WITHIN A HEAT -TRACED SYSTEM SHALL BE INSULATED WITH NOT LESS THAN 1" OF INSULATION. 31. SERVICE WATER PIPING INSULATION CONDUCTIVITY IS NOT TO EXCEED 0.27 BTU PER INCH. INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE PER TABLE C403.2.9. 32. PROTECT PIPING INSULATION PER REQUIREMENTS OF WSEC C403.2.9.1 33. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING OF THE HVAC SYSTEM. INCLUDE FUNCTIONAL TESTING SEQUENCE OF OPERATION & TEST PROCEDURES PER WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS. ITEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ARE: CONTROL SYSTEMS, AIR HANDLERS, HEAT PUMPS, EXHAUST FANS, PUMPS, AND WATER HEATERS. AIR SYSTEMS SHALL BE BALANCED SO AS TO FIRST MINIMIZE THROTTLING LOSSES, THEN ADJUSTED TO MEET DESIGN FLOW CONDITIONS. PROVIDE PRELIMINARY AND FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORTS. SUBMIT FIGURE C408.1.2.1 COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST FROM WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE TO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION UPON COMPLETION OF PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING REPORT. PROVIDE CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS IN COMPLIANCE WITH C103.6 34. PROVIDE AIR SYSTEM BALANCING DEVICES, INCLUDING VOLUME DAMPERS, AND ZONE DAMPERS ON TERMINALS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. EXISTING MECHANICAL: 1. DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, ARE INTERNAL CLEAR DIMENSIONS AND DUCT SIZE SHALL BE INCREASED TO COMPENSATE FOR DUCT LINING THICKNESS. 2. PROVIDE TEMPORARY COVERS OVER OPEN ENDS OF EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK DURING CONSTRUCTION. 3. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER FOR EACH DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLE. 4. PROVIDE DUCT ACCESS DOORS AT DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS, BACKDRAFT DAMPERS, MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS, FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS, COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, DUCT MOUNTED COILS, DUCT AIRFLOW STATIONS AND LOUVER PLENUMS. 5. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM BRANCH DUCT SIZE TO DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES, UNLESS NOTED TO USE LARGER SIZE ON DRAWINGS: 6"0: 100 CFM TO": 200 CFM 100: 300 CFM 12"0: 450 CFM 14"0: 600 CFM 16"0: 750 CFM ENERGY CODE: (WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE) 1. PIPING AND DUCT INSULATION: TYPES LISTED IN THE WSEC. COMPLY WITH THICKNESS AND 2. DUCT SEALING: SEAL DUCT TRANSVERSE JOINTS AND LONGITUDINAL SEAMS PER THE WSEC. 3. RECORD DRAWINGS:. PROVIDE PER WSEC. 4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: PROVIDE PER WSEC. 5. SYSTEM BALANCING: PROVIDE PER WSEC. 35. CEILING FANS, EQUIPMENT, DIFFUSERS, & GRILLES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH PLACEMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES. 36. VENTILATION SHALL BE PROVIDED PER IMC CHAPTER 4. MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SYSTEMS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF REDUCING THE OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY TO THE MINIMUM REQUIRED BY CHAPTER 4 OF THE IMC. 37. OUTSIDE AIR ECONOMIZERS SHALL INCLUDE AUTOMATICALLY MODULATING OUTSIDE & RETURN/RELIEF AIR DAMPERS ARRANGED TO PROVIDE 100% OF THE DESIGN SUPPLY AIR FLOW, & SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE CONTROLS FOR ECONOMIZER OPERATION. 38. AIR ECONOMIZERS ON SYSTEMS GREATER THAN 65,000 BTUH SHALL PROVIDE PARTIAL COOLING WHEN MECHANICAL COOLING IS REQUIRED TO MEET THE REMAINDER OF THE COOLING LOAD. 39. PROVIDE COMBINATION FIRE & SMOKE DAMPERS (CFSD) AND/OR FIRE DAMPERS WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. 40. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SHALL BE MINIMUM OF 7 -DAY PROGRAMMABLE TYPE PROVIDING SETPOINT TEMPERATURES, NIGHT SETBACK, MANUAL OVERRIDE, & MINIMUM 5 -DEGREE DEADBAND. CONTROLS SHALL ALLOW FOR OPTIMUM START. 41. HEAT PUMPS WITH AUXILIARY ELECTRIC HEAT SHALL HAVE CONTROLS COMPLYING WITH WSEC C403.2. 42. SEAL & TEST ALL DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED PER IMC, WSEC C403.2.8.3 LEAKAGE REQUIREMENTS, & IBC VAPOR RETARDER REQUIREMENTS. DUCTWORK DESIGN PRESSURE IS 2". 43. ALL SHEET METAL DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. CONCEALED DUCTWORK LOCATED WITHIN THE CONDITIONED SPACE SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-3.3. DUCTWORK LOCATED IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-6. WHERE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF THE BUILDING, DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF R-8. 44. SOUND -LINE ALL SUPPLY, RETURN, OR EXHAUST DUCT WITHIN 10' OF FANS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 45. ALL SHEET METAL PRODUCTS SHALL COMPLY WITH SMACNA DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, CURRENT EDITION. 46. ALL RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK SIZES SHOWN ARE GALVANIZED SHEET METAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ROUND DUCT SHALL BE SHEET METAL. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL ROUND 2 -PIECE AND RECTANGULAR 90 DEGREE ELBOWS. 1. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A CLEAN AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER. CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED TO MINIMIZE ANY INCONVENIENCE OR DISTURBANCE TO OTHER AREAS OF THE BUILDING WHICH ARE TO REMAIN IN OPERATION. ISOLATE WORK AREAS BY MEANS OF TEMPORARY PARTITIONS AND/OR TARPS TO KEEP DUST AND DIRT WITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. 2. EXISTING MATERIALS THAT ARE REMOVED SHALL NOT BE REUSED IN NEW SYSTEMS, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED AS BEING RELOCATED. 3 WHERE INDICATED, DUCTWORK AND PIPING OR PORTIONS OF DUCTWORK AND PIPING SHALL BE REUSED. REFER TO DRAWING PLANS FOR POINTS OF CONNECTIONS. 4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS WHERE REQUIRED BY DEMOLITION OR ALTERATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND HANGERS TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY, SAFETY AND PROPER OPERATION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS FOR THE DURATION OF THE WORK. DEMOLITION: 1. TAKE CAUTION IN DEMOLITION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO FACILITATE NEW WORK INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED INSULATION, HANGERS, VALVES, PLENUM WALLS, DAMPERS, WIREMOLD, WIRING, CONTROLS, AND APPURTENANCES ASSOCIATED WITH EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT. 47. ALL DUCT SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. 48. WHERE FLEXIBLE DUCT IS SHOWN AT GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS, PROVIDE 6' MAXIMUM LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE DUCT. 49. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AT DUCT CONNECTIONS TO ALL AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT. 50. SUPPORT FOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT SHALL INCLUDE APPURTENANCES AS NOTED IN ASHRAE AND REQUIRED IN CODE FOR SEISMIC/SWAY BRACING. 3. WHERE EXISTING ITEMS PENETRATE A WALL OR ROOF, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INFILL AT (E) PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALUROOF WITH LIKE MATERIALS. PATCH & REPAIR TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACES INCLUDING PAINT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WHERE REQUIRED BY DEMOLITION OR ALTERATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH GC AND PROVIDE NECESSARY SUPPORTS AND HANGERS TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY, SAFETY AND PROPER OPERATION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. MECHANICAL SHEET LIST: BM0.01 MECHANICAL LEGEND, GENERAL NOTES AND SHEET LIST BM0.02 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES BMCF.01 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE -• NREC) BMCF.02 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMCF.03 MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS (WA STATE - NREC) BMD1.01 DEMOLITION HVAC FLOOR PLAN BM1.01 HVAC FLOOR PLAN kEVIEVVED OR DE COMP IANCE REVIEWED FOR APPROVED DEC O?l 2017 PPR + ED 2017 City of .Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1.).7 City of Tukwila t I G DiVJSON RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMI rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222. f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N W W DU VJ co Lu 0 0 0 F" U <C C. OC O VIII 0- CO� ( > Z W a. O w Q e -N-1 WF >i ;:t.))DDWW W (11.7 ILA, WA 98168 F- (206) 979-9370 W H REVISION :DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. RSH MAM RSH 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL LEGEND Drawing Number M0.01 BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG N M COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC ENERGY EFFICIENT ELECTRIC MOTORS MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL -LOAD EFFICIENCY SCHEDULE DUCT LOCATION MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL -LOAD EFFICIENCIES (%) MOTOR HP OPEN MOTORS ENCLOSED MOTORS DUCT MATERIAL NUMBER POLES 2 4 6 2 4 6 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED (RPM) 3600 1800 1200 3600 1800 1200 1.0 77.0 85.5 82.5 77.0 85.5 82.5 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 87.5 2.0 85.5 86.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 3.0 85.5 89.5 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 5.0 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.0 NOTES: BE ESTABLISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEMA STANDARD MGI. ELECTRIC MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) DESIGN CLASS SMALL AND MEDIUM AC SQUIRREL -CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS. 1. NOMINAL EFFICIENCIES SHALL DESIGNS A AND B ARE NATIONAL DESIGNATIONS FOR FIXED FREQUENCY DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DUCT LOCATION DUCT TYPE DUCT SERVICE PRESSURE CLASS (IN) MIN SMACNA SEAL CLASS DUCT MATERIAL NOTES UNCONDITIONED SUPPLY CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS 2 B GA ELASTOMERIC RETURN AIR HANDLING UNITS 2 B GA FIBERGLASS EXHAUST EXHAUST FANS 2 C GA NOTE 1 CONDITIONED SUPPLY CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS 2 C GA OF PIPE INSULATION BY 1/2 INCH WHERE PIPING IS LOCATED OUTDOORS OR OTHERWISE EXPOSED TO AMBIENT AIR. TUBING. JACKET. WEATHERABLE JACKET OR MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDED COATING. RETURN AIR HANDLING UNITS 2 C GA BLADE EXHAUST EXHAUST FANS 2 B GA NOTES: 1. SEE DRAWINGS FOR FACE SIZE (48x24, 24x24 OR 12x12). PROVIDE 24x24 FOR LAY IN CEILINGS. 2. FACE SIZE DETERMINED FROM DUCT INLET SIZE. 3. SEE AIR DEVICE TAG FOR DUCT INLET SIZE. 4.. COORDINATE BORDER TYPE (SURFACE MOUNT, SNAP IN, LAY -IN, SPLINE, DROPPED FACE, AND BEVELED DROP FACE) WITH ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLANS. NOTES: PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE TYPE OF PIPE INSTALLATION LOCATION INSULATION (TYPE) PIPE SIZE (INCHES) INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES) NOTES COLD PLUMBING PIPING INSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE FIBERGLASS ALL SIZES 1" THICK NOTE 2 OUTSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE AND BURIED ELASTOMERIC ALL SIZES MULTIPLE LAYERS FOR 1-1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS NOTES 1, 4 HOT PLUMBING PIPING INSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE FIBERGLASS 1-1/4 INCH AND SMALLER 1" THICK RECTANGULAR - EXPOSED 1-1/2 INCH AND LARGER 1-1/2" THICK NOTE 1 OUTSIDE BUILDING ENVELOPE AND BURIED ELASTOMERIC ALL SIZES MULTIPLE LAYERS FOR 2" TOTAL THICKNESS NOTES 1, 4 NOTES: OF PIPE INSULATION BY 1/2 INCH WHERE PIPING IS LOCATED OUTDOORS OR OTHERWISE EXPOSED TO AMBIENT AIR. TUBING. JACKET. WEATHERABLE JACKET OR MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDED COATING. 1. INCREASE THICKNESS 2. INCLUDE POLYETHYLENE 3. INCLUDE MULTI -PLY LAMINATE 4. INCLUDE FACTORY APPLIED DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE LOCATION OF DUCT DUCT SYSTEM TYPE DUCT CONFIGURATION INSULATION TYPE MINIMUM R -VALUE, INSULATION THICKNESS NOTES DUCT NOT WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE SUPPLY, RETURN, EXHAUST MIXED, OUTSIDE, AND TRANSFER AIR DUCTS RECTANGULAR - EXPOSED RIGID BOARD R-7, 1 LAYER, 2 INCH THICK A RECTANGULAR - CONCEALED DUCT WRAP R-7, 1 LAYER, 3 INCH THICK WHITE ROUND AND OVAL DUCT WRAP R-7, 1 LAYER, 3 INCH THICK NOTE 4 DUCT WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE SUPPLY, RETURN, EXHAUST GENERATOR EXHAUST, RELIEF AND TRANSFER AIR DUCTS RECTANGULAR - EXPOSED RIGID BOARD R-3.3, 1 INCH THICK ALUMINUM RECTANGULAR - CONCEALED DUCT WRAP R-3.3, 1 LAYER, 1-1/2 INCH THICK NOTE 3 ROUND AND OVAL DUCT WRAP R-3.3, 1 LAYER, 1-1/2 INCH THICK C NOTES: AND RELIEF AIR DUCTS FROM BUILDING ENVELOPE TO BACKDRAFT/MOTORIZED DAMPER WITH R -VALUE EQUAL TO BUILDING ENVELOPE THICKNESS. 1. INSULATE OUTSIDE, EXHAUST, SHUTOFF DAMPERS OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY, EXHAUST OPENINGS, RELIEF OUTLETS, STAIRWAY AND SHAFT VENTS AND RETURN OPENINGS USED FOR AIRSIDE ECONOMIZER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH CLASS I MOTORIZED DAMPERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE C403.2.4.3. CLASS I DAMPERS SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM LEAKAGE RATE OF 4 CFM/SQ.FT. @ 1.0" W.C. SEE DRAWINGS FOR DAMPER LOCATIONS. OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE OPENING LOCATION 1. INTAKE OPENINGS SHALL BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF 20 FEET FROM LOT LINES OR BUILDING ON THE SAME LOT. WHERE OPENINGS FRONT ON A STREET OR PUBLIC WAY, THE DISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED TO THE CENTERLINE OF THE STREET OR PUBLIC WAY. 2. MECHANICAL AND GRAVITY OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE OPENINGS SHALL BE LOCATED NOT LESS THAN 10 FEET HORIZONTALLY FROM ANY HAZARDOUS OR NOXIOUS CONTAMINANT SOURCE. EXCEPT AS NOTED IN ITEM 3. 3. INTAKE OPENINGS SHALL BE LOCATED NOT LESS THAN 3 FEET BELOW CONTAMINANT SOURCES WHERE SUCH OPENINGS ARE LOCATED WITHIN 10 FEET OF THE OPENING. 4. INTAKE OPENINGS ON STRUCTURES IN FLOOD HAZARD AREAS SHALL BE AT OR ABOVE DESIGN FLOOD LEVEL. 5. ENVIRONMENTAL AIR (RELIEF AIR) SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3 FT FROM OPERABLE OPENINGS INTO BUILDING FOR ALL OCCUPANCIES OTHER THAN GROUP U AND 10 FEET FROM MECHANICAL AIR INTAKES. DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLE SCHEDULE TAG MANUFACTURER / MODEL TYPE MATERIAL FINISH FACE STYLE FACE SIZE DUCT INLET MOUNTING PATTERN REMARKS A TITUS TMSA-AA SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER ALUMINUM WHITE - NOTE 1 NOTE 3 NOTE 4 ADJUSTABLE SEE NOTES B TITUS 50F EGGCRATE GRILLE ALUMINUM WHITE - NOTE 2 NOTE 3 NOTE 4 - RETURN, RELIEF AND OR EXHAUST, SEE NOTES. C TITUS 56FL SIDEWALL RETURN GRILLE ALUMINUM WHITE BLADE NOTE 1 NOTE 3 NOTE 4 ADJUSTABLE SINGLE BLADE, 3/4" SPACING, 0° DEFLECTION, SEE NOTES., NOTES: 1. SEE DRAWINGS FOR FACE SIZE (48x24, 24x24 OR 12x12). PROVIDE 24x24 FOR LAY IN CEILINGS. 2. FACE SIZE DETERMINED FROM DUCT INLET SIZE. 3. SEE AIR DEVICE TAG FOR DUCT INLET SIZE. 4.. COORDINATE BORDER TYPE (SURFACE MOUNT, SNAP IN, LAY -IN, SPLINE, DROPPED FACE, AND BEVELED DROP FACE) WITH ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLANS. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONER SCHEDULE TAG AREA MANUFACTURER/. INDOOR FAN PERFORMANCE ELECTRICAL OUTDOOR UNIT DIMENSIONS WEIGHT NOTES SERVED MODEL FLOW VOLTAGE/ TOTAL SENSIBLE SEER COMP FAN MCA MAX VOLTAGE/ INDOOR/ INDOOR/ PHASE CAPACITY CAPACITY /EER FUSE PHASE OUTDOOR OUTDOOR (CFM) (V/0) (HTG/CLG) (HTG/CLG) (AMPS) (AMPS) (AMPS) (AMPS) V/0 (LxWxHT) (LBS) AC-01/CU-01 MDF LG LS180HSV4 399 208/1 38.9/29.5 22.0/18.2 20.5/12.6 14.6 0.25 19 25 208/1 41x10x13/ 34x13x32 40/145 1, 2 & 3 NOTES: 1) PROVIDE WITH WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER, INVERTER COMPRESSOR AND LOW AMBIENT COOLING KIT FOR OPERATION DOWN TO 0°F. 2) PROVIDE CONTROL/POWER WIRES AND REFRIGERANT PIPING FROM OUTDOOR UNIT TO INDOOR UNIT PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 3) UNIT/ASSEMBLY COMPLIES WITH WSEC, SECTION C403.3, ECONOMIZER EXCEPTION 10, OPTION A - 15% HIGHER EFFICIENCY THAN BASELINE. LINED SHEET METAL CAN; INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSION SAME AS DIFFUSER NECK, SEALED TIGHT FINISHED CEILING FINISHED CEILING COLLAR FLEXIBLE DUCT CEILING DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE NOTE: ONLY USE THIS TYPE OF CONNECTION IN CONSTRICTED CEILING SPACES FLEXIBLE DUCT CEILING DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE NOTE: USE THIS TYPE OF CONNECTION WHERE THERE IS ENOUGH CEILING SPACE TO KEEP KINKS OUT OF FLEXIBLE DUCT SUPPLY/RETURN AIR CONNECTION SCALE: NONE PIPE INSULATION AND METAL JACKET BIRD SCREEN r CLAMP SIZED TO GO AROUND RIGID INSERT /PIPING; SIZE AND QUANTITY AS NOTED ON PLANS RECTANGULAR TRUNK DUCT CONICAL TAP ROUND TRUNK DUCT CONICAL TAP CONICAL ENTRY TAP SLOPE RIGID INSULATION INSERT PER SPECIFICATIONS PIPE SUPPORT ROUND BRANCH DUCT VOLUME DAMPER MAIN SUPPLY DUCT 45° ENTRY TAP MAIN SUPPLY DUCT VOLUME DAMPER 45° ENTRY TAP NOTES: 1. FOLLOW SMACNA DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. 2. ALL BRANCH DUCTS ARE TO HAVE VOLUME DAMPERS. BRANCH CONNECTION SCALE: NONE SIZE TO PROVIDE 1/2" CLEARANCE ALL AROUND SHEET METAL CAN PACK WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION (E)WOOD CURB (E)FLASHING (E)FLASHING MEMBRANE PLATE AND SCREW SEAM CAULK -� 1111111111111 EXISTING ROOF FRAMING ROOF CAP - INSULATED PIPING SCALE: NONE bl'1 ry REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 052017 City of Tukwila BI UILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FO ODE COMPLI..CE APPRO D 17 2017 City of Tu ILDMG RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMIT CENTER ,�f� gEPP � p,NO rolluda architects arch Lecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 V� TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7115 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.coni REVISION 'DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. • RSH MAM RSH 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL SCHEDULES Drawing Number M0.02 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITEC' INC BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG O cp f717 , 4/74194 i /fi44 /7I/7fi/ 4/74 XX 0 � X. "14, f .4A • ZOI 0 /1h1f2i/i� 1/2/17 -i// / /i�/7/7/7L/74 I1 LJ 1r1;40)°,44 i 17' DEMOLITION PLAN - HVAC SCALE : 1/8" =11-0" GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTE: 1. ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS AND OR WIRING SHOWN IS A REPRESENTATION OF THE ACTUAL SYSTEMS AND IS NOT TO BE CONSIDERED AN AS -BUILT. ALL DIMENSIONS, LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION. DEMOLITION PLAN NOTES: 0 0 0 0 0 CROSSHATCH PATTERN INDICATES EXISTING DUCTWORK, AIR DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED AIR SYSTEM ACCESSORIES TO BE REMOVED. EXISTING DUCT MAIN BEYOND TO REMAIN AS IS. EXISTING BRANCH DUCTWORK BEYOND TO REMAIN AS IS. EXISTING AIR DEVICE TO BE REUSED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE BRANCH SUPPLY OR RETURN DUCTWORK. EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN AS IS. EXISTING THERMOSTAT AND ASSOCIATED WIRING SHALL BE REMOVED AND SALVAGED FOR RE -USE. SEE SHEET TM1.01 FOR NEW LOCATION OF THERMOSTAT. D ti REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0t 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FO E COMP ' N+ E PR D 2017 City of Tukwi BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 2 3 2017 PERMIT CENTER pPCt� ?p�wPO rolluda arctirtects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 - VV— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 1- 0 1 N 0I - 11.1W 001— I 0 — z0 Nd. � w o I- d' co cD CD r 5 0 M 9 CID 0 N J W 1 REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: RSH MAM DMM Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title HVAC DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN Drawing Number MD1.01 COPYRIGHT @ 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC BMD1.01 - DEMO PLAN MECHANICAL.DWG 2 M 0 CNJti 0 00 EA) MAINT/STOR, 117 OPEN OFFICE 102 1 8"x1 3" 18"x16" DN RSL/RLL UP TO CU -01 ON ROOF. 104 OFFICE 105 10"x10" 20"x1 8" i 20"x1 8" 20"x18'1 18"x14" PLAN STORAGE 106 ENTRY LOBBY 100 MEN'S TOILET 110 CONFERENCE 111 WOMEN'S TOILET 109 TRAINING ROOM 107 VOLUME DAMPER, TYPICAL. 10"x10" LINED TRANSFER DUCT, TYPICAL. 10"x10" LINED TRANSFER DUCT, TYPICAL. FLOOR PLAN - HVAC / SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE LOCATION OF ALL GRILLES, REGISTERS AND OR DIFFUSERS WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION AND INTERIOR DRAWINGS. PLAN NOTES: 0 EXISTING DUCTWORK MAIN LOCATED ABOVE CEILING TO REMAIN AS IS BEYOND THIS POINT. 02 CONNECT 20"x 16" RETURN AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 20"x 16" RETURN AIR MAIN ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 2290 CFM. OTRANSITION AND CONNECT 20"x 16" SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 16"x 20" SUPPLY AIR MAIN ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 2290 CFM. OCONNECT 20"x 18" RETURN AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 20"x 18" RETURN AIR MAIN ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 2265 CFM. OCONNECT 20"x 18" SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 20"x 18" SUPPLY AIR MAIN ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 2265 CFM. OCONNECT 10"x 10" SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 20"x 18" SUPPLY AIR MAIN ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 375 CFM. BALANCE TO 390 CFM. CONNECT 12"x 14" SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO EXISTING 12"x 14" SUPPLY AIR DUCT ABOVE CEILING IN THIS AREA. BALANCE TO 890 CFM. CONNECT DUCT, SIZE AS NOTED, TO EXISTING AIR DEVICE TO REMAIN. BALANCE TO CFM INDICATED. RELOCATED THERMOSTAT PREVIOUSLY SALVAGED UNDER DEMOLITION PHASE. MOUNT AT 4'-6" A.F.F. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF EXTERIOR MOUNTED CONDENSING UNIT AT ROOFTOP MECHANICAL ENCLOSURE. MOUNT UNIT ON SLEEPERS, COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL FOR SERVICE AND DISCONNECT LOCATION. ELECTRICAL 118 10x10 TG -1 (TYP. OF 6) o OFFICE 112 113 10x10 TG -1 (TYP. OF 4) ENTRY LOBBY CEILING PLAN HVAC SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 1'7 117 0,& REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0f).. 2017 City of Tukwila BUIL' c DIVISION REVIEWED FOR C s DE COMPLI PPRO OC ;+ 7 2017 City of Tukwi UILDING DIVIS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 232017 PERMIT CENTER Sapp P0001 'NIA. �1© PP a�ARS° rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 itx TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N W LtJ o z "Lii) U <( Otw O f - U (-mw[ ©C Cn L1J g Jc s O H W D z S2 W Lelej 001- O Q Z —J _> _ XU ° W W < 1- 0) '4 REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. RSH MAM DMM 331-16-01 • Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title HVAC FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS Drawing Number M1 .01 BM1.01- FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL.DWG N O COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC . REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0% 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEli D FO TY C / r OMPLI t I tf G PROV OCT . 2Q1? City of T;I ku, ilia UILDiNC7 ON RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWiLA AUG. 23 2017 PERMIT CE stip��' Pa - p1';°11 Pei*v0 r()Illoida architects arch tecture planning g interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com ILA, WA 98168 REVISION ;DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: RSH MAM RSH Project No, 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS Drawing Number MCF.01 BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG a 0 ti 0 M COPYRIGHT 0 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC MechanlcaLS 2015 Washington ,. f,. - ,, Summary State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all » ,» f , r ,.- MECH }%, . R1 , ti SUM _ _, ialand R3over andall R1 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 3 stories , ... Mechanical : 2 MECH-SUM M h Summary, pg a .. _ � , � . ,�� , , „n ,; " j„ Prrojectf sum ��' M' 2015 WSEC Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, & R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Jun 2016 General Info Project Title.8 Schools &Maintenance Tukwila Public Sch/ Date / 201 7 This PROJ-SUM Project Street Address. 4060 South 144th Street For Building Department Use u ng ep 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017' 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 form shall be provided as a cover Project City, County, Zip: Tukwila, King, 98168 Project Information Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Service Water Heating Sy stems Equipment Type (s) gtank(s) Instantaneous ❑ Hot water heating ❑Dedicated boiler ❑Heat exchange from space heat boiler or central hot water/steam Distribution Type (s) ❑ Circulation System ❑ On -demand No service waters stems y sheet for all compliance form p Project Owner or Rep: Tukwila School District Applicant Information. Provide contact information for individual who can respond fo inquiries about compliance form information provided. For Building Dept. Use 9 P submittals. Project Title Jurisdiction: Tukwila School District Company Name: Tukwila School District matches project plans title block. Company Address: 4640 S 144th Street Tukwila, WA 98168 Project Description Select al! that apply to the scope of project. Select Addition + Existing or Alteration + Existing if the existing building will be combined with the addition or alteration to demonstrate compliance per Section C502.1 or C503.1. New Construction and Additions ❑ New Building ❑ Building Addition Existing Building Retrofit ❑ Alteration ❑ Alteration + Existing El Change of Occupancy ❑ Historic Building Building Elements Scope - Select all that apply ❑ All ❑ Building Envelope 0 Service Hot Water Systems ❑ Lighting Systems ❑ J ❑ Addition + Existing Change in Space Conditioning Mechanical Systems Electrical Systems Applicant Name: Tres West Engineers, Applicant Phone: 253-472-3300 Commissioning Commissioning Exceptions is required for: r Mechanical systems per C408.2 If required, commissioning shall be e q ' gperformed for to commissioning requirements: ❑ Total output capacity of all mechanical space conditioning cooling or 300,000 Btu/h heating. Mechanical systems ■ Capacity of largest service water heating system systems commissioning not required. ■ all in Service water heating systems per C408A applicable systems regardless of individual equipment capacity, systems in the building do not exceed 240,000 Btu/h commissioning not required. building does not exceed 200,000 Btu/h. Service water heating Project Bnefl the text ■ This provisions MECH-SUM, Energy Description describe mechanical s stems in y y box provided Total Bldg Performance (TBP) path includes all mandatory per C401.2 Option 2. MECH-CNK, and C407 Analysis forms required, ■ Adding ductwork New Building ❑ Building Addition a Split System Air -Conditioner, Replacing with new. Replacing existing diffusers El Tenant Improvement existing Transfer with new. ■ Grilles System Retrofit ❑ No System Changes with new. Replacing existing Design Load Calculations s Load calculation summary ❑ MECH-LOAD-CALC Form Provide design load calculations for all mechanical systems and equipment serving the building heating, cooling or ventilating needs. If a load calculation summary is provided with the permit documents that includes all applicable compliance information then the MECH-LOAD-CALC form is not required. Low Energy and Semi -Heated Spaces (Note 6 and 7) Space' Type- location in`Plan(s) ' Spaces) Served; ' Area Served, ; square feet Capacity, Btu/h (Note 4). `Cooling " Capacity Btu/h " " (Note 5) " " Peak Space Conditioning ":Capacity, : `'' Btu/h-sf' " Compliance" Check" :. Notes Occupancy Type P Y yP Group R R2, R3, & R4Heating Q All Commercial Q 0 over 3 stories and all R1 Mixed Use - Building is greater than three stories above grade and it has both Commercial and Group R occupancies. Mixed Occupancy- Building is three stories or less above grade and it has both Commerical and Group R2, R3 or R4 occupancies. Select All Commercial to document compliance for the commercial areas of the building. The residential spaces shall comply with the WSEC Residential Provisions, Mechanical Schedules ■ Mechanical Plans 0 MECH-EQ Forms (TBD) Indicate location of equipment compliance information. If provided on plans then MECH-EQ forms are not required, however, include on plans all applicable compliance information listed in MECH-EQ tables. - Dedicated Outdoor .Air System Requirements and y q High Efficiency VAV .Alternate ■ All not ❑ ❑ DOAS occupied, require ■ ■ DOAS DOAS IN ❑ is required per C403,6 effective July 1, 2017 (office, retail, education, library and fire station occupancies) conditioned areas shall be served by a DOAS that delivers required ventilation air in a manner that does space conditioning fan operation. Space conditioning fans cycled off when no heating or cooling is required Ventilation provided via natural ventilation per 2015 IMC in lieu of DORS C403.6 Exception 1 p P ( P ) Ventilation and space conditioning provided by a HEVAV system per C403.7 in lieu of DOAS (C403.6, Exception 2) . included in project, although not required (occupancy not office; retail, education, library or fire station) related allowances included in project: Prescriptive vertical fenestration maximum area allowance increased to 40% per C402,4,1,4 with 100% of conditioned floor area in building served by DOAS. Exception to air economizer per 0403:3 Exception 1, include MECH-ECONO form. Note 4 - Provide total installed heating output capacity of systems serving Low Energy or Semi -Heated space(s) in btuh. Note 5 - Provide total installed' cooling capacity of system serving Low Energy space(s) in Btulh. Not allowed for semi -heated spaces. Enter 0 if no cooling: Note 6 - Refer to Section C402.1.1 Low Energy, Building. lntalled peak space conditioning capacity, heating or cooling, may not exceed 3.4 Btulh'sf. Note 7 - Refer to Section 0402.1.1.1 and Semi -Heated Space definition in Chapter 2. Total heating output capacity may not exceed 8Btu/h*sf. Only systems without electric resistance heating and no cooling are eligible for the wall insulation exception under semi -heated. • Space Conditioning Select ❑ all That apply to the scope of protect Fully Conditioned ❑Semi heatedz ❑ Walk-in Cod Warehouse, Walk-in Cooler/Freezer, P Low Energy Space Category3 Refrigerated Display Casefri t � Categories Eligible Low Energy Spaces ❑ Unconditioned ❑ Low energy heating/cooling capacity ❑ Wireless service ❑ Greenhouse❑ Equipment building equipment Shelter Fan Power is Project includes HVAC air distribution systems that provide heating andfor cooling If yes, provide a MECH-FANSYS -SUM form. ❑For one or more systems, the total fan motor nameplate hp of all fans in HVAC system exceeds 5hp. If yes, provide a seperate MECH-FANSYS form for each HVAC system exceeding the 5 horsepower threshold. Refer to Section C403.2.11 and MECH-FANSYS-DOC for requirements and exceptions, Floor Area and Floors Above Grade Building Gross Conditioned Floor Area Project Gross Conditioned Floor Area Stories 1 5,315 5315.0 HVAC Hydronic Systems ❑ Hydronic chilled water ❑ Water -loop heat pump .1 ■ Hydronic heating water ❑ Geothermal No hydronic systems General Compliance Path Q Prescriptive 0 Total Building Performance Prescriptive - Projects complying prescriptively shall demonstrate compliance with all applicable mandatory and prescriptve requirements of this code. Refer to C401.2, Item 1 for more information. Compliance forms to include with a Prescriptive submittal: All applicable ENV, LTG, MECH and C406. Total Building Performance - Projects complying via total building performance (TBP) shall include a summary of results from a whole building energy model per Section C407 and shall demonstrate compliance with all applicable mandatory provisions in this Code. Refer to Section C401.2, Item 2 for more information. Compliance forms to include with a TPB submital: PROJ-SUM, C406 -SUM & C406 -DETAIL, ENV -CHK, LTG- EXT, LTG -CHK, and all MECH forms (except MECH-ECONO). C406 Additional EfficiencyOptions - MechanicalRequires ❑ C406.2 More efficient HVAC equipment and fan systems Requires 90% of heating and cooling capacity to be equipment listed in tables C403.2.3(1)-(9) or air -to -water heat pumps and heat recovery chillers. All equipment listed in tables C403.2,3(1)-(7) must be 15% more efficient than minimum requirements. All stand alone supply, return, and exhaust fans over 1hp must have FEQ a 71 and must be selected within 10% of maximum total or static pressure. III C406.6 Dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) 90% of conditioned floor area to be served by a DOAS per C403.6 that delivers required ventilation air in a manner that does not require space conditioning fan operation. . ❑ C406.7 Reduced energy in service water heating Requires 90% of floor area be in occupancy types listed in C406.7.1 and that 60% of annual hot water energy use be provided by heat pump, waste heat recovery or solar water -heating systems. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 1 of 7 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 2 of 7 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 3 of 7 MechanMechanical PermlfPlans Checklist MECH-CHK S,e! � heGJ, kllsECH f „HKsF echonteal PermY Plans Mechanical Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist ,;:.. MECH C K .... 2015 Washington State Ener Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 9 9Y P 9 9 ry 2015 Washington State Ener Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 9 9Y P 9 9 ry • Revised Janus 2017 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stones and all R1 January Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 The following Information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes NA C403.2.4.10 C403.2.4.11 Group R2 / R3 dwelling units GroupR2 sleeping P 9 units For primary space conditioning system, indicate 5-2 programmable thermostats capable of two setback periodsper da for all thermostats indicate purpose (heatingonly, cooling only, or P y' PrP e. 9 e, both),required temperature range and at minimum a 10°F deadband; or exception taken 4 P 9P NA C403.2.4.3 Stairway and shaft vent dampers Indicate location of stairway and shaft vent dampers on plans; verify dampers ars Class 1 motorized; refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements Equipment -Sizing, Performance and Type NA C403.1 Exemptprocess equipment P Identify equipment to be used in manufacturing, industrial or commercial processes that do not s ace conditioning;identifyprovisions applicable to this equipment C403.1 provideP PPper exception NA 0403.2.4.4 Zone isolation dampers For systems serving areas 25,000 sf or spanning more than one floor, that include areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously; identify isolation zone areas on plans and locations of associated isolation dampers in HVAC distribution system; refer to MlAC System Controls for additionalrequirementsIf Indicate method of ventilation air delivery (natural or mechanical) for each zone BM1.01 Yes C403.2.1 Load calculations Provide load calculations performed per ASHRAE Std 183 or equivalent, using design parameters per C302 and Appendix C; include load adjustments to account for energy recoveryYes See Attached C403.2.6 0403:2:11.4 Ventilation systems outdconfiguredair toeach provide not moreC,than AE but at least the minimum required volume of outdoor air to zone per IMC, ASHRAE of, mechanically delivered, indicate volume 62.1 or other applicable code (WAC, OSHA, etc); or exception taken BM0.02 NA C403.2,3.4 Humidification For coolingsystems with humidification equipment that are also required to have air Yq economizer, indicate humidifier is adiabatic (direct evaporative or fog atomization), or exception taken Yes 0403.2.2 Equipment and system sizing Indicate that output capacities of heating and cooling equipment and systems are no greater than the smallest available equipment size that exceeds the calculated loads; note exceptions taken BM0.02 If delivered via natural ventilation, identify required elements per IMC including minimum openable area to the outdoors or qualifying adjoining spaces Additional Must comply Efficiency Package with all 3 Option, More Efficient provisions to be eligible HVAC Equipment & Fan Performance - 0403.2.6.2 Demand controlled ventilation Identify spaces > 500 sf with occupant load > 25 people/1,000 sf per IMC; for each space indicate whether it is served b an HVAC system with total design OSA > 3,000 cfm, and / or Y y g the system has airside economizer or automatic modulating OSA damper; indicate OSA controls are configured to provide demand controlled ventilation or provide supporting documentation for applied exception Yes 0403.2.3 C403.2.3.2 0403:2:13:1 HVAC equipment performance requirements (efficiency) Provide equipment schedules on plans or complete MECH-EQ forms indicating type, capacity, rated and WSEC minimum efficiencies for all heating and cooling equipment; include supply and OSA cfms and operating hours for all air systems; identify heating and cooling equipment that does not have a corresponding WSEC minimum efficiency (manufacturer rated) BM0.02 NA C406.2.1 0403.2.3 HVAC system selection y To comply with additional efficiency package option, calculate the percentage of heating and coolingequipment in the project based on output capacity) that do not have a correspondingNA Yc P 1 ( P Pp Y Y) WSEC listed efficiency; shall be less than 10% to com I NA 0406.2.2 0403.2:3 Minimum equipment efficiency To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate that all listed heating and cooling equipment have a rated efficiency that exceeds WSEC listed efficiency by at least 15% NA 0403.2.6.3 Occupancy sensors For ms, classrooms, auditoriums and conference rooms > 500 sf; indicate occupancy -based 9y OSA control when space Is unoccupied and method (closes OSA damper or shuts -off or alternate means provided to automatically reduce OSA when space is partially equipment); y p p y occupied Yes 0405.8 Electric motor efficiency List all motors >_ 1/12 hp (that are not integral to a rated piece of.equipment) rn the mechanical 9 P or electrical equipment schedules on plans; indicate hp, rpm, number of poles and rated efficiency, or exception applied BM0.02 NA C406.2.3 0403.2:11.3 Minimum fan efficiency To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate rated FEG of stand alone fans is 2 71; indicate these fans are sized so the fan efficiency at design conditions is within 10% of the maximum total or static efficiencyFor 0403,2,14 For fractional hp motors (1/12 -1 hp), indicate whether they are an electronically commutated motor, have rated efficiency of at least 70%, or exception taken NA C403.2.6.4 0403.2.6.4,1 Enclosed loading dock ventilation enclosed loading docks, indicate ventilation / exhaust system method of activation (gas detection system for CO and NO2, or occupancy sensors), and control method (staged or modulating) For all HVAC fan systems that provide heating and / or cooling, provide system total nameplate hp in MECH-FANSYS-SUM form See Attached HVAC System Controls Indicate locations of thermostatic and humidity control devices and the zones they serve on plans, including perimeter system zones BM1.01 NA C403.2.6.4 C403.2.6.4.2 Enclosed parking garage ventilation For enclosed parking garages, indicate ventilation / exhaust system activated by gas detection system for CO and NO2, and control method (staged or modulating); or exception taken Yes C403.2.11.1 Fan ower limitation P For all applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor h > 5h vert fans stem motor h or PP Y P p' verify y P bhp complies with fan power limits per equations in Table 0403.2.11.1(1), provide MECH- FANSYS form for each system Yes C403.2.4:1 Thermostatic controls (thermostats and humidistats) Where adjacent (neighboring) zones are controlled by separate thermostats (including perimeter systems used to offset heat gain or loss), and are connected by permanent openings > 10% of either zone sf area, indicate controls configured to prevent adjacent from operating in conflicting modes (one in heat, other in cool); applies to adjacent perimeter zones, adjacent nonperimeter zones, and adjacent perimeter and nonperimeter zones NA C403.2.7.1 Kitchen exhaust hoods Provide calculations that show a balanced accounting of total kitchen exhaust (include all hoods) with % of; supply air, transfer air from adjacent spaces, and make-up air, if applicable, indicate that direct make-up air to each hood does not exceed 10% of hood exhaust NA 0403.2,11.2 Motor nameplate hpPP P For all applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor hp> 5h y p, indicate fan motors specked are the smallest available motor hp size greater than fan bhp, note exceptions taken NA 0403:2.11.3 Fan efficiency For all applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor hp > 5hp, identify in equipment schedule all fans required to comply with fan efficiency grade and indicate rated FEG is Z 67, or exception taken; indicate these fans are sized so total efficiency is within 15% of the fan maximum total efficiency For kitchens with total hood exhaust exceeding 2,000 cfm, indicate exhaust air rate per Table. C403.2,7,1 and compliance method (DCV, energy recovery, or transfer air that would otherwise be exhausted) -- ------------------------------------"------" If applying Exception 2 to nonperimeter zones adjacent to perimeter zones, indicate that setpoints and deadband settings in these zones are coordinated so cooling in a nonperimeter zone does not occur until the temperature in that zone is 5°F higher than the adjacent perimeter zone temperature in heating -------- --"- NA C403.2,7.2 Laboratory exhaust systems Refer to Systems Requiring Energy Recovery for requirements NA 0403.2.11.4 Group R occupancy exhaust fan efficacy For all exhaust fans < 400 cfm in Group R occupancies, Indicate in equipment schedule the fan flow rate and efficacy (cfm/watt), or exception taken; refer to Table 0403.2.11.4 (CE -57) NA 0403.2.4.1.1 Heat pump supplementary heat Indicate staged heating operation with compression as the first stage of heating and supplemental heating controlled with outdoor lock-ouftemperature set to 40°F or less NA C403.2.13 Variable flow capacity P ty HVAC system fans Y. For HVAC fan motors a 7.5 hp,indicate method of variable flow control (VSD, or equivalent q control method that reduces design air volume b 50% at 1/3 static design pressure); note g y 9 P )' exception taken P NA 0403.2.13 Variable flow capacity - fans For fan motors e 7,5 h (V q ) ' p, indicate method of variable flow control SD or equivalent method m equipment schedule, or exception taken; for equivalent method for an HVAC system refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements Yes 0403,2.4.1.2 Deadband Indicate zone thermostatic controls configured with 5°F minimum deadband for systems that control both heating and cooling BM0.01 NA C403.3.1 , DX air handler variable cooling control 9 Under Integrated ( 9 Economizer) For DX air handlers with economizer and cooling capacity a 65,000 Btu/h, indicate number of cooling stages provided and method (multiple compressors and / or variable speed compressors); indicate minimum displacement (capacity reduction) as % of full load Indicate control method (cooling capacity controlled in response to space temperature, space temperature controlled by modulating supply airflow, or both) NA 0403,2,4.1.3 Setpoint overlap restriction If separate heating and cooling systems with separate thermostatic control devices are used to serve a zone, indicate locations of both thermostatic control devices and the zone they serve on plans NA 0403.2.3 Maximum air cooled chiller capacity For chilled water plants and buildings with> 800 tons of cooling capacity, indicate air-cooled or exception taken chiller capacity Is 5 100 tons, P NA 0403.4 Large capacity cooling systems For buildings with a 300 tons of cooling capacity, indicate method of multi -stage or variable o capacity control (VSD, multiple staged compressors, or max capacity of any single unit < 66 /o of the total) (thermostats) thermostats Indicate a limit switch, mechanical stopor DDC control with programming to prevent p g g P simultaneous heating and cooling For DX air handling units with cooling capacity Z 65,000 Btu/h and evaporative and chilled water air handlingunits with fan z 0,25 h p, indicate whether system is single zone or multiple zone and related control method (cooling capacity controlled in response to space ( 9 P tY P p temperature, space temperature is controlled by modulating supply airflow, or both) 0403.2.4.2 0403.2.4.2.1 C403.2.4.2.2 Automatic setback and shutdown Indicate zone thermostatic controls configured with required automatic setback and manual override functions, setback temperatures, and control method (automatic time clock or programmable controls); note exceptions taken BM0.01 NA C403.2.3.1 Non-standard water-cooled centrifugal chillers For water-cooled centrifugal chillers not designed for operation at standard conditions, provide g g p P •Yes calculations documenting maximum full load and part load rated equipment performance requirements Yes C403.2.4.2.3 Automatic (optimum) start indicate system controls that adjust equipment start time required to bring each area served up to design temperature just prior to scheduled occupancy BM0.01 NA 0403.2.11.5 Fan airflow control For mechanical cooling systems (includes DX and chilled water coils) that control cooling capacity in response to space temperature - Provide a minimum of two stages of fan control; indicate minimum fan speed is 5 66% of full speed drawing 5 40% of full speed fan power during periods of low cooling or ventilation only NA C403.2:13.1 4 :.3 2 C 03 4 Centrifugal fan open -circuit coolingtowers For open -circuit centrifugal fan cooling towers witha 1,100 gpm capacity, indicate cooling towers comply with efficlenc requirements for axial fan open circuit cooling towers P Y Y NA 0403.2.4.3 Outdoor supply air dampers pp Y P Indicate automatic controls configured to close OSA damper during unoccupied equipment operation; not including economizer cooling, night flush or IMC required OSA / exhaust For single boilers with > 500,000 Btu/h capacity, indicate multi -stage or modulating burner NA 0403.4.2 0403.4.2.5 Large capacity boiler systems For boiler system (single or muttiple) with > 1,000,000 Btu/h capacity, indicate turndown ratio per Table 0403.4.2.5 and method (multiple single input boilers, modulating boilers, or combination) NA 0403.2.4.3 Stairway and shaft vent dampers Indicate method of activation of stairway and shaft vent dampers (fire alarm or interruption of power) For other mechanical cooling systems (includes DX and chilled water coils) that control space temperature by modulating airflow (in lieu of, or in addition to, controlling capacity in response to space temperature) - Provide fan controls for modulating supply airflow; indicate minimum speed is 5 50% of full speed drawing 5 30% of full speed fan power during periods of low cooling or ventilation only; or exception taken NA C403.2.4.4 Zone isolation controls For systems serving areas > 25,000 sf or spanning more than one floor, that include areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously; indicate controls that allow for independent space conditioning of isolation zones; or exception taken NA C403.2.13 Variable flow capacityfan pumps For pump motors z 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD or equivalent method) in equipment schedule, or exception taken; for equivalent method for hydronic system refer to Hydronic System Controls for additional requirements NA C403.2.12 Heating outside a building Indicate occupancy sensing or timer switch controls configured to automatically shut off heating system when area served is unoccupied NA 0403.2.4,12 system Provide central and zone level DDC controls as required based on system application, q Y PP capacity or size thresholds and other qualification per Table 0403.2.4,12.1 NA C403.2.3 Gas and oil -fired forced air furnace and unit heaters9 For forced air furnaces with capacity a 225,000 Btu/h and all unit heaters, indicate in equipment schedule intermittent ignition or IID, flue or draft damper, and rated jacket loss NA 0403:2.4.5 Snow melt systems Indicate automatic controls configured to shut off system when pavement temperature exceeds 50°F and no precipitation is falling, and when outdoor air temperature exceeds 40°F DDC capabilities Identify all DDC system input / output control points; indicate capability for trending and fY Y P P P P ty 9 graphical display NA C403.2.4.8 Combustion heating equipment For combustion heating equipment with output capacity> 225,000 Btu/h, indicate. modulating or staged combustion control Ducting Systems Yes 0403.2.3.3 Packaged electric heating / cooling equipment Verify all packaged electric equipment with> 6,000 Btu/h cooling capacity and any amount of heating is a heat pump; Include in equipment schedules BM0.02 NA 0403:2.4.6 Freeze protection system controls indicate automatic controls to shut off system when outdoor temperature exceeds 40°F, or conditions protect fluid from freezing 0403.2:8.1 Indicate on plans that all ductwork is constructed and sealed. per IMC BM0.01 NA 0403.2.12 Heating outside a building. Indicate systems providing heating in non -enclosed outdoor occupied spaces are radiant systems; refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements. NA C403.2.4.9 GroupR1 hotel /motel guest rooms For hotels and motels with over 50 guest rooms, indicate automatic controls serving guest rooms that are capable of setback (heating) and set-up (cooling) of temperature Setpoint by at least 5°F; indicate control method - activated by room entry or occupancy sensor Yes 0403.2.8.3 Duct construction For OSA ductwork, also indicate onplans that ductwork meets air leakage requirements per 9 q C402.5 and vapor retarder requirements per the IBC NA 0403.2,7.1 Kitchen exhaust hoods Indicate on plans the type, duty and exhaust air rate of each kitchen hood, refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements Yes C403.2.8.3 Duct pressure classifications Identify location of low, medium and high pressureductwork on plans BM0.01 NA 0403.2.4.3 Outdoor supply air, exhaust and relief dampers Indicate locations of OSA intake, and exhaust and relief outlet dampers on plans; indicate whether dampers are Class 1 motorized, or gravity and exception taken (include leakage rating, cfm/sf); refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements for OSA dampers NA C403.2.8.3.3 High pressure duct leakage test Indicate high pressure duct leakage testing requirements on plans; provide test results to jurisdiction when completed i "i:' 1 . NA 0403.2,4.3 Return air dampers Indicate locations of return air dampers that are integral to economizer operation; verify dampers are motorized; indicate whether dampers are Class 1, or within packaged equipment eligible for leakage rating exception (include leakage rating, cfm/sf) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0% 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEli D FO TY C / r OMPLI t I tf G PROV OCT . 2Q1? City of T;I ku, ilia UILDiNC7 ON RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWiLA AUG. 23 2017 PERMIT CE stip��' Pa - p1';°11 Pei*v0 r()Illoida architects arch tecture planning g interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com ILA, WA 98168 REVISION ;DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: RSH MAM RSH Project No, 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS Drawing Number MCF.01 BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG a 0 ti 0 M COPYRIGHT 0 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 4 of 7 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 5 of 7 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 6 of 7 chan(cal Permit Plans Checklist MECH-C HK Mechanical } Mechanical al Permit , Plans �,. CH CHK echa, n)cal PermiPlanst Ceck�stMECH-CHK Mechanical 2015 Washington ton State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 9 rgY P 9 9 ry Buildingslncludin R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1Revised January 2017 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliancefomts for Comm rg ry iCommercial 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017. Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section • Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes NA C402.4.1.4 C403.6 Increased prescriptive maximum vertical fenestration area with DOAS Indicate that all occupied, conditioned spaces are served by a DOAS per C403.6 NA C403.5.3 Energy recovery - cooler / freezer condensers For buildings with food service, meat or deli departments that have a 500,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate condenser ER and use of captured energy (service water heating, space heating, or dehumidification reheating) For buildings with 2 40,000 sf conditioned floor area and with z 1,000,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate condenser ER and use of captured energy for service water heating and also for space heating, or dehumidification reheating For supply and return ductwork located in unconditioned space or outdoors, indicate R -value of insulation on ductwork on plans; identify climate zone; note exceptions taken BM0.01 Yes 0403.2.8.1 C403.2.8.2 Duct insulation For supply ductwork located in conditioned space, identify if design supply temperature is < 55°F or> 105°F and Indicate R -value of insulation on this ductwork on p P plans; note exception taken For OSA ductwork, shafts and plenums, indicate R -value of insulation on these elements on plans per Table C402.1.3 for steel -framed walls; note exception taken BM0.01 Additional ddltlo Effi Hcy Package Efficiency Opti on, Dedicated Outside Air Systems (DOAS) NA C406.6 Building provided with DOAS To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate that 90% or more of all occupied, conditioned spaces are served by a DOAS per C403.6 Piping Systems Multiple Zone p Air Systems Y NA 0403.5.4 Energy recovery - condenser systems For buildings with 24-hour operation and with > 1,500,000 Btu/h of heat rejection capacity and design service hot water load > 250,000 Btu/h, indicate condenser ER to pre -heat service water; or exception taken. Provide calculations showing the amount of recovered heat that Is utilized (60% of peak heat rejection load or pre -heat service water to 85°F), Yes C403.2.9 Piping insulation p g Indicate design temperature range of fluid conveyed in piping and thickness of insulation (in inches) on hydronic piping plans; or exception taken BM0.02 NA 0403.4.4 Air systems serving multiple Identify supply air systems serving multiple zones and the zones they serve on plans; indicate whether system is VAV and method of primary air control; or provide supporting documentation for applied exception to VAV 0403.2.9.1 Piping insulation exposed to weather Indicate method of protection of pipe Insulation from damage / degradation on hydronic pipingzones plans Provide equipment schedules on plans or MECH-EQ form that list all VAV air terminals and types Hydronic System Controls Economizers NAexception C403.2.13 C403.4.2.7 Variable flow control - hydronic For hydronic system pump motors a 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD' or ° ° equivalent method that requires 2 30% design wattage at 50% design fluid flow); note taken NA C403.4.4 VAV systems serving multiple zones For each air terminal include: maximum airflow rates for primary supply air during zone peak heating and zone peak cooling; maximum airflow during reheating, recooling or mixing; minimum airflow rate to maintain required ventilation, and the basis for these values; if IMC or ASHRAE 62.1 multiple zone equation is basis for minimum flow rates, provide calculation on plans Identify in. equipment schedules on plans or in MECH-EQ forms all cooling systems requiring air economizer controls Yes C403.3 Air economizer required Provide MECH-ECONO form indicating systems utilizing air economizer exceptions, including those with water -side economizer in lieu of air economizer, indicate on plans eligible exception(s) taken and measures to comply with exception(s)control BM0.02 system pumps Identify whether hydronic coils have DDC controls and associated manner of pump speed (differential pressure, zone hydronic demand, etc) For boilers that provide building heating, indicate controls that provide heating water temperature setback based on outdoor temperature NA 0403.4.4.1 Single duct VAV terminal units Indicate single duct terminal units are configured to reduce primary supply air before reheating or recooling NA C403.3,1 Integrated economizer operation - air and water Indicate air and water -side economizers are configured for partial cooling operation even where additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the load NA C403.2.5 C403.4.2.4 Hydronic system setback and part load controls For heating and chilled water systems Z 300,000 Btu/h, indicate systems are configured t0 automatically reset supply water temperature based upon demand; or exception taken. If system pump motor hp a 3 hp, also indicate controls automatically reduce flow by a 50%.units - For chilled water systems (a 300,000 Btu/h, pump motor hp a 3 hp) that serve water-cooled unitary air conditioners, indicate VSD or staged pumps in chilled water system and heat rejection loop that reduce pump flow so that one control valve is nearly wide open, or to maintain a minimum differential pressure; or exception taken NA 0403.4.4.2 Dual duct systems - terminal For systems with separate warm air and cool air ducts, indicate terminal units are configured to reduce the flow from one duct to minimum before mixing with air from the other duct NAC403.3.2 Economizer heating system impact - air and water Verify control method of HVAC systems with economizers does not increase building heating energy usage during normal operation NA C403.3.3.1 Air economizer capacity Indicate modulating OSA and return air dampers are configured to provide up to 100% OSA for cooling NA 0403.4.1.1 C403.4.1.2 VAV system static pressure sensors - sensors and DDC set points Indicate locations of duct static pressure sensors on plans; include at least one sensor per major duct branch; verify controller setpoint pressure at each sensor is s 1.2 inch w. j....-.__._._...-._._...._..._.................__._....._....._....._.__._...._............._...._._._.__._.._...._.__._..._._._.._..............._...........:9r......._............._.-..........__.._....._...__......_..__._....._....._...._- Fors stems with zone level DDC, indicate controls are configured to monitor zone damper y P ositions and reset static pressure setpoint based on the zone requiring most pressure; include P P p 4 9 control logic that automatically detects and generates an alarm if any zone excessively drives reset logic, and allows building operators to exclude zones from reset logic NA 0403.3.1 Integrated air economizer Verifymechanical coolingcontrols are interlocked with air economizer controls so. the outside I airdamper remains in 100% open position. when mechanical cooling is also required to meet the cooling load, until the leaving airtemperature:ls <45°F NA 0403.4.2 Boiler sequencing Indicate automatic controls that sequence operation of multiple boilers 0403.3.3.2 For systems with cooling capacity z 65,000 Btu/h, verify that control of economizer dampers is not based only on mixed air temperature; or exception takenyP NA C403.4.6 Hot gas bypass limitation For coolingequipment with hotgas bypass,provide either multiple stepunloadingror P continuous capacity modulation; indicate bypass capacity per Table C403.4.6 NA 0403.3.3.3 Air economizer high limit controls Indicate high limit shut-off control. method and required high limit per Table C403.3..3.3 NA 0403.4.2.2 Two -pipe than changeover 9 systems Y Indicate changeover deadband min 15°F heating 1 cooling mode scheduling and changeover 9 ( ). 9 9 g temperature range(limit 30°F P 9 30°F) NA 0403.4.4.3 Multiple -zone VAV system ventilation optimization controls For systems with zone level DDC controls, indicate controls are configured to automatically reduce outdoor airflow in response to changes in system ventilation efficiency; or exception taken NA 0403,3.4.1 Water economizer capacity For eligible systems where water -side economizer may be provided in lieu of air economizer, indicate system is capable 01100% design cooling capacity at 50°F db / 45°F wb OSA temperatures NA C403.4:2.6 Chiller / boiler plant pump isolation Indicate controls are configured to automatically reduce overall plant flow and shut-off flow through individual chillers and boilers when not in use NA 0403.4.4.4 VAV system supply air reset Indicate controls automatically reset supply air temperature in response to building loads or outdoor air temperature; or exception taken NA 0403.2.13.1.1 C403.4.3.1.1 0403.4.3.1:2 Heat rejection equipment - flow control For cooling with fan motors a 7.5 hp, Indicate VSD and method to adjust fan n (adjusted based on leaving fluid temperature or condenser temperature /pressure of heat rejection device) - _._..___..........................................................................._..................._._...._..............................................................._................................... For multiple -cell heat rejection equipment with VSD, indicate controls that ramp all fans in unison _. -"" - - NA0403.3,4.2 Water economizer maximum pressure drop Indicate pressure drop across precooling coils andheat exchangers in water economizer' system do not exceed pressure drop limit Multiple Zone HVAC Systems, High Efficiency VAV - Required for systems utilizing C403,6 DOAS Exception 2, must comply with all 16 provisions NA 0403.3.1 e DX fairro handling equipmentvariable control economizer and coolingcapacity a 65 000 Btu/h,refer to HVAC For DX av handlers vnth_. System Controls for requirements NA 0403.7, Item 1 Air economizer Indicates tem is configured for 100% air economizer operation and complies with all related 9 e P economizer requirements per 0403.3 (without economizer exceptions) NA C403.2.4.7 DX equipment economizer fault detection and diagnostics For DX air handlers with economizer and cooling capacity a 54,000 Btu/h, provide a fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) system to monitor economizer system operation and report faults NA 0403.7, Item 2 Direct digital controls (DDC) Provide DDC controls for all components of system; identify all DDC system input / output control points; indicate capability for trending and graphical display NA 0403.4.3.3 Heat rejection equipment - cooling tower flow tumdown Indicate open -circuit cooling towers with multiple pumps or VSD control are designed so all cells can be tun in parallel NA Item 3 Outdoor airflow measurement and reduction For systems with minimum OSA > 2,500 cfm, indicate outdoor airflow monitoring station that measures OSA intake under all load conditions; indicate control sequence that increases or reduces system OSA cfm based on VAV terminal feedback of ventilation efficiency (per 0403.4.4.3 without exceptions) or DCV (per 0403.2.6.2) Systems Requiring Energy Recovery0403.7, NA 0403.4.2.3.1 Water loop heat pump - deadband Indicate capability of central equipment to provide minimum 20°F water supply temperature deadband between heat rejection and heat addition modes; or exception taken For systems with design OSA> 5,000 cfm, or design supply air cfm and % OSA exceeding the values in Tables C403.5.1(1) or(2), indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting calculations NA 0403.4.2.3.2.1 Water loop heat pump - heat rejection equipment, Zone 4 Indicate type of cooling tower (open- or closed-circuit) in equipment schedule; indicate method used to limit heat loss when heat rejection is not needed system NA C403.7, Item 4 Supply airflow measurement For systems with minimum OSA > 2,500 cfm, indicate supply airflow monitoring station capable of measuring supply air delivered to VAV terminals under all load conditions NA 0403.5.1 Energy recovery (ER) - ventilation %exhaust systems For rooms served by multiple systems with aggregate design OSA > 5,000 cfm, or aggregate design supply air cfm and % OSA exceeding the values in Tables C403.5.1(1) or (2), indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting calculations C403.7, Item 5 Zone isolation and maximum area served Verify maximum area served by a single HEVAV system is 5 50,000 sf, or one entire floor, whichever is greater, in addition if a system serves > 25,000 sf, that includes areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously, lndicate zone isolation controls per C403.2.4.4 NA C403.4.2.3.2.2 Water loop heat pump - heat rejection equipment, j Zone 5 For open- or closed-circuit cooling towers, provide a heat exchanger that separates the cooling tower and heat pumploopNA ° Indicate ER rated effectiveness that Increases OSA enthalpy by a 50% based on delta between OSA and return air enthalpies at design conditions NA C403.4.2.3.3 Water loop heat pump - isolation valves For hydronic heat pump systems with total system power > 10 hp, indicate 2 -way isolation valves on each heat pump and variable flow system control NA 0403,2.7.2 Laboratory exhaust systems (energy recovery) For buildings with total tab exhaust > 5,000 cfm, indicate method of energy recovery used to u air; effectiveness mi 25° ., ralter ate method per pre -condition laboratory make-up at, ER(min F), 0 n N m p exception (VAV exhaust, semi -conditioned makeup, or CERM calculation) NA C403.7, Item 6 Interior/ exterior Zone i air design supply temperature Verify that VAV terminals serving interior cooling driven loads are sized per design supply air temperature that is 5°F higher than VAV terminals serving exterior zones Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems( ) • p through 6/30/16, Prescriptive 7/1/2016 DOAS O tional NA C403.6 C403.6.3 Dedicated outdoor air systems For buildings with office, retail, education, library and fire station spaces, identify these spaces on plans; Indicate that ventilation air in each occupied space is provided via a DORS system; P P P P y or document compliance with C403.6.3Impracticality; or exception taken (buildings complying . with 0402:4.1.4 or C406.6 may not utilize exceptions) NA C404.10.4 (under Pools and permanent spas P p exhaust systems For buildings with pools or spas with water surface area > 200 sf, indicate exhaust air ER method and use of waste heat reheat ventilation air, pool water or hot water); or (preheat P ) exception taken NA 0403.7, Item 7 Maximum air terminal inlet velocity Identify air terminals with minimum primary airflow setpoints> 50% of maximum setpoint in equipment schedule or MECH-EQ form; indicate air terminal inlet velocity does hot exceed 900 fpm C404.11) (energy recovery) Indicate ER system has the rated effectiveness and is configured to decrease the exhaust air temperature at design conditions by a36°F NA C403.7, Item 8 Sequence of operation Indicate DDC system sequences of operation are designed and configured per ASHRAE GPC 36 NA C403.6.1 Energy recovery ventilation with DOAS For all DOAS systems, indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting y ° calculations. Indicate ER rated effectiveness that increases OSA enthalpyb a 50 /° based on delta between OSA and return air enthalpies at design conditions. Ener recovery For buildings with on-site steam heating systems, indicate condensate water ER g g y NA C403.7, Item 9 Maximum allowable system Y brake horsepower o Verify fan system is 5 90 /o of the bhp limit per Option 2 equation in Table C403.2.11.1 1 fy Y P� P� P P� t. q ) provide MECH-FANSYS form for each system NA 0403.5.2 9Y ry steam condensate systems For buildings that use off-site generated steam where condensate is not returned to the source, indicate on-site condensate water ER NA C403.6.2 Heating / cooling system controls with DOAS Indicate equipment associated with the delivery of zone level heating and cooling (fans, hydronic pumps, primary air dampers, etc) are configured to shut off, and central equipment is configured to turn down, when there is no call for heating or cooling in the zone they serve NA C403.7 Item 10 Fan -powered terminal unit motor and control Indicate all series and parallel terminal fans. have electronically commutated motors, Indicate D t DC control system is configured to vary air terminal fan speed as a function of the load; indicate fan speed during periods of low heating, low cooling, or ventilation only is,5 66% of peak design airflow or provide supporting documentation for applied exception If applying Exception to heating / cooling fans used for air mixing in the space during deadband periods, include fan watts per cfm in equipment schedule 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 7 of 7 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all t ;, Economizer...Exce tions., 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & 123 over 3 stones and all R1 Revised R1 ttt ECtJNQ January 2017 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all ; Economizer:Ex e Exceptions n ; ; c t a s .co t. MECH-ECC?{NQ 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stones and all R1 Revised R1 January 2017 ,.u~:. k3:kk+r€k+km" 'Spl4tPit,k'.t,. Meehan Mechanical I I Permit ca , . Plans Checklist , r r„ �/J�� ECH CHK. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance all for Commercial tial Bwldm s includingm R2& 3over3storiesandaI Revised January 2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2 017 Project Title: Date 8/8/2017 The following Washington Information is State Energy Code, necessary to check a permit application Commercial Provisions. for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the ECONOMIZER EXCEPTIONS - NEW CONSTRUCTION AND ADDITIONS, CONTINUED All coolingsystems shall be configured to air economizer operation, regardless of provideP 9 system capacity, for new construction and mechanical system alterations. Various exceptions to this requirement are available. Identify all systems that an economizer exception will be applied and additional information as noted below. For Building Dept. Use Applicable PP (yes,no,na) code section code Provision Information Required -Must be in permit documents q p Location In Documents 'Id' Department Building 9 P Notes Economizer Exception Exp 10 Cooling equipment for dedicated server, electronic equipment or telecom switch rooms. Per building limit for this exception is 240,000 Btu/h cooling capacity or 10% of required building air System ID Compliance O tion p Cooling Capacity Btulh (Btu/h) NA 0403.7, Item 11 Application of single ductto and fan -powered terminal units Indicate VAV terminal types on plans; verify fan -powered terminal units only perimeter zones with envelope loads; verify all other zones are served by single duct terminal units Summary economizer capacity, whichever is greater. Part load control Option a 29,500 NA 0403.7, Item 12 Fan -powered terminal unit primary air reset Indicate DDC controls are configured. to automatically reset the. primary supply air cfm setpoint of all fan -powered terminal units to the minimum required to maintain ventilation during occupied heating or deadband, based upon the VAV air handling unit OSA ventilation fraction required over 85,000 Btu/h. Additional requirements apply. Exception ECONOMIZER EXCEPTIONS - NEW CONSTRUCTION AND ADDITIONS ECONOMIZER Exp 1 Cooling equipment serving spaces that are provided with a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) per C403.6. Spaces served shall have year- System ID Lighting + Equipment Loads (W/sf) Option a - Cooling equipment efficiency shall be 15%o better than the WSEC required minimum efficiency.. Option b - Waterside economizer required. Cooling equipment efficiency shall be 5% better than the WSEC required NA 0403.7, Item 13 High occupancy space controls For spaces > 150 sf with occupant density a 25 people / 1000 sf, indicate space is served by a dedicated terminal unit with DCV control that resets terminal unit ventilation setpoint; also indicate occupancy sensor control that automatically reduces minimum ventilation to zero and sets back room heating and cooling setpoints by Z 5°F Summary round design cooling loads from lights and equipment less than 5 watts per minimum efficiency. square foot. Option c -.Waterside economizer required. All cooling equipment is subject to ASHARE Standard 127. Total Claimed Exempt Capacity: 29,500 NA C403.7, Item 14 Dedicated HVAC systems For server, electronic equipment, telecom or similar spaces with cooling loads > 5 W/sf, indicate spaces are served by independent HVAC systems that are separate from HPVAV systems serving rest of building; indicate dedicated HVAC systems have air economizer controls or energy recovery per C403.3 Exception a Refer to Section Total building air economizer capacity (if claimed > 240 kBtu/h): C403.3 for descriptions of Alternate Exp 10 Capacity Limit: Exp 2 Single zone unitary or package systems with dehumidification that affect System ID economizer 0403.7, Indicate whether systems are served by a high efficiency heating water plant, or a high efficiencychilled water plant...................._.._._....__.............._._..............................................__.............._............................_........_...._.......................__..._..._..._......._................_.................._....._._......_..........---•-----consumption. If complying via high efficiency heating water plant; Indicate all VAV terminals have hydronic heating coils served by heating water system with either gas-fired boiler(s) with thermal efficiency a 90%, air -to -water heat pumps, or heat recovery chillers others stems such that air economizer would increase energy Y 9Y provisions and ECONOMIZER EXCEPTIONS - MECHANICAL SYSTEM ALTERATIONS OR REPLACEMENT System ID Alt. Strategy exceptions. For C503.4 Pre -approved design alternative to full compliance with air economizer Refer to Section alterations refer Section Exp 1 requirement. An alternative for mechanical system alterations where existing C403,3 for descriptions Of Exp 3 High efficiency single zone unitary or packaged systems. Equipment System ID to C503.4 and building constraints make full compliance with air economizer requirement impractical. Provide calculations to the code official that demonstrate the NA item 15 Central plant efficiency If complying via high efficiency chilled water plant: Indicate all VAV air handlers have cooling coils served by chillers with rated IPLV efficiency that exceeds WSEC listed IPLV by at least 25% per Table 040323(7)(note water-cooled IPLV is max, all others are min);lndicate ° smallest chiller or compressor In plant Is 5 20% of total plant capacity, or provide thermal storage sized for 5 20% of total plant capacity economizer r coolie efficient shall be better than the WSEC required minimum g y q Table C503.4. proposed alternate design strategy provides similar energy savings to the provisions and efficiency by at least 64% in Climate Zone 4C and 59% in Climate Zone5B annual energy that would be saved by the cooling system with air economizer exceptions. Forper alterations refer Table C403,3, per C403.3. NA 0403.7, Item 16 Faun detection and diagnosticsand Indicate 000 system Includes a fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) system configured to monitor operation and provide fault reporting of required parameters for all VAV air handlers VAV air terminal units in the HPVAV system t0 Section C503.4 and Exp 4 Equipment that provides hydronic chilled water for chilled beams and . System ID ECONOMIZER EXCEPTIONS - SIMPLE SYSTEMS C503.4 Qualifying small equipment. Per unit limit less than 33,000 Btu/h. Per Exp 2 building limit for this exception is 72,000 Btu/h cooling capacity or 5% of System ID Cooling Capacity (Btulh) Table 0503.4: chilled ceiling systems that is served by a water economizer system per C403.3.4 in lieu of air economizer. HVAC Equipment Energy Use Metering required building air economizer capacity, whichever is greater. Cooling NA C409.3.1 HVAC equipment energy use metering For new buildings > 50,000 sf and building additions > 25,000 sf, verify energy use metering of all equipment used to provide space heating and cooling, dehumidification and ventilation will be provided per C409; lndicate equipment eligible for exception Ex 5 Wafer source heat um s with heat recovery. Heat um efficient shall p pumps nr pump y System ID equipment efficiency shall be 15% better than WSEC required minimum efficiency. Not eligible: non -unitary equipment, unitary equipment installed ° be 15% better than WSEC required minimum efficiency. Provide at outdoors or in meth room adjacentoutdoors, equipment installed during Documentation and System Specific Requirement To Support Commissioning minimum 60% air economizer. Energy recovery to preheat OSA shall new construction, tion, shell -and corr e construction, or initial tenant Indicate that all mechanical systems, equipment, and controls for which the WSEC requires control functions and / or configuration to perform specific functions are required to be commissioned; BMO.01 have at least 50% effectiveness. Additional system requirements apply. improvement. Exp 6 Cooling equipment serving Group R occupancies. Per unit limit is less than 20,000 Btu/h cooling capacity for equipment installed outdoors or in a mech room adjacent to the outdoors. For cooling System ID Equipment Location Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) Total Claimed Exempt Capacity: Yes 0408.2 Scope of mechanical systems commissioning For buildings with a 240,000 Btu/h total output cooling capacity or t 300,000 Btu/h total output heatingcapacity, systemscapacity p ty, indicate that all mechanicalregardless of individual ca act are required to be commissioned; or provide building heating / cooling capacity calculation demonstrating eligibility for exception Total buildingair economizer capacity If claimed P y > 72,000 Btu/h): Alternate C503.4 Exp 2 Capacity Limit: equipment installed in other locations the unit limit is less than C503.4 Equipment that provides hydronic chilled water for chilled water terminal Exp 3 units. Equipment part load cooling efficiency (IPLV) shall be better than. WSEC required minimum efficiency by at least 25%. Per building limit System ID Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 54,000 Btu/h. Efficiency shall be 15% better than WSEC required minimum efficiency. Indicate in plans and specifications that Cx per C408 is required for all applicable mechanical systems; BMO.01 Yes 04032.10 0408.1.1 0408.1.2 0408.1.4.2 Commissioning requirements in construction documents Include general summary with at a minimum of nems 1 thru 4 of the Cx plan per 0408.1.2 including: narrative description of activities, responsibilities of the Cx team, schedule of activities including verification of project close out documentation per C103.6, and conflict of interest plan (ff required); BM0.01 Exp 7 Variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems with energy recovery. Outdoor unit shall be a reverse -cycle heat pump with variable speed compressor(s) and condenser fan(s). Outdoor unit cooling capacity shall Outdoor Unit System 1D Cooling Capacity (Btulh) for this exception is 480,000 Btu/h cooling capacity or 20% of required building air economizer capacity, whichever is greater. Chilled water terminal units serving Group R occupancies are not included in the building capacity total. C103.6 Include in general summary that a Cx project report or Compliance Checklist (Figure 0408.1.4.2) shall be completed by the Certified Cx Professional and provided to the owner prior to the final mechanical inspection. BM0.01 be not less than 65,000 Btu/h. Energy recovery to preheat outdoor air . Total Claimed Exempt Capacity: shall have at least 50% rated effectiveness. System shall be capable of Total building air economizer capacity (if claimed > 480,000 Btu/h): providing simultaneous heating and cooling by tranferring recovered energy from zone(s) in cooling mode to other zone(s) that are in heating Yes 0408.2.2 Air system and hydronic system balancing Indicate in plans that air and fluid flow rates shall be tested and balanced within the tolerances defined in the specifications; indicate systems shall be balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses, then adjusted to meet design flow conditions BMO.01 Alternate C503.4 Exp 3 Capacity Limit: mode. Table Compliance Options for alteration or replacement of existing C503.4 mechanical cooling equipment per Table C503.4. Refer to table System ID Equipment Type Compliance Path Exp 8 Cooling equipment serving Controlled Plant Growth Environments. Equipment cooling efficiency shall be better than WSEC required System ID y SEER, EER, 8� IEER Yes C408.2.2.1 Air system balancing devices Indicate devices that provide the capability to balance all supply air outlets, zone terminals and air handling equipment requiring system balancing BM0.01 and all applicable table footnotes for full requirements. Applies to minimum efficiency by at least 20%- Not eligible: unitary and applied NA 0408.22.2heat Hydronic system balancing devices Indicate devices that provide the capability to isolate, balance and measure flow across all hydronic equipment requiring system balancing including heating and cooling coils and pumps the following retrofit condition s pumps. Option a - Any new nt r equipment of sam ety Yes 0408.2.3 Functional performance testing criteria Identify in plans and specifications the intended operation of all equipment and controls during all modes of operation, including interfacing between new and existing -to -remain systems BM0.01 Replacement Option b me type with same or Exp 9 Cooling equipment with energy recovery. Spaces served shall have Year-round design cooling loads from lights and equipment reater than 5 watts per square foot. Energy recovery system shall utilize recovered System ID Lighting + g g Equipment Loads (W/sf) salle coolinge out ut capacity.o P Option c - Replacement equipment of same type with large Project Close Out Documentation cooling output capacity. Yes C103.6 Documentation and project close out submittalcode; requirementsBM0.01 Indicate in plans that project close out documentation and training of building operations personnel (s required for all close out components, equipment and systems governed by this indicate close out documentation shall include: record documents, O&M manuals, applicable WSEC compliance forms and calculations energy for on-site space heating or preheating of service hot water. Option d - New equipment added to existing system or replacement equipment that is different than existing Provide calculations to the code official that demonstrate the amount of being replaced. recovered energy used for on-site heating purposes is equivalent to the annual energy that would be saved by the cooling system with air economizer per C403.3. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0t 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FOR SCO` COMPLIA ArPROVE OCT 1 017 of Tukwila 1LDING DJVISIO RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 2 3 2017 PERMIT CENT��,�Epo?f,srers:0%., rolluda architects architecture 1nnininterior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 V V TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 1 w00 w ccm 07. co O) H REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: RSH MAM RSH Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE FORMS Drawing Number CF.02 COPYRIGHT ©2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC BM0.01 - LEGEND.DWG O O 0 M 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 MECH-FANSYS-SUM Mechanical :Fan System Power Allowance 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Tukwilla Public Schools Technology & Maintenance Date 8/8/2017 For Building Dept. Use HVAC Air Distribution System Schedule List al! HVAC systems that have the capability to provide heating andiorr cooling to the spaces they serve. System or Primary Supply Fan ID Speed Control (Note 1) Description, (Note 2) System Total Nameplate HP (Note 3) Fan Power Calculation Required (Note 4) AC-01/CU-01 CV Split System Air Conditioner 0.069 No Note 1- Constant Volume (CV), Variable Air Volume (VAV), or Hospital/Lab CV system that qualifies for VAV budget per C403.2.11.1 Exception 1. Sing e zone VAV systems shall comply as CV. Note 2 - Describe system type and list all fans (or groups of fans) associated with the delivery and removal of conditioned air by the system. Include all supply, returnirelief, exhaust and exhaust hoods (>1 hp), make-up air, dedicated outside air (DOAS), booster fans, and series fan -powered terminals. VAV parallel fan powered terminals and economizer relief fans do not need to be included if the fans do not operate at peak conditions. Note 3 - Enter the total nameplate hp of all fans associated with the delivery and removal of conditioned air by the system. Note 4 - This form automatically identifies whether a MECH-FANSYS form is required to demonstrate compliance with the fan power allowance (Yes), or this information is not required because the system has a combined total nameplate motor hp that is 5 hp or less (No) MECH-FANSYS Forms A MECH-FANSYS form shall be provided for each system with total nameplate hp greater than 5 hp. Select (AddFan System Form) to generate an additional form. Added forms can be deleted with button in cell E32 of the added form. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC o% 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED F E COMP ANCE PED OC 2017 City of Tuk UILDING DIMS:. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2011 PERMIT CENTER SOW pg° AG^ 40 rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com w �woc) z Q J O 1- 1 L U VQ CD, w JO mo�>-z 0_ w 0 >-Oo < ° pw .1QZU J m D W w 1-‹ F-. .. E D h W CL c T CO 1- � o Ow 0� co . o�1-I- LA, WA 98168 206) 979-9370 w REVISION DATE Design: RSH Drawn: MAM Checked: RSH Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE. FORMS Drawing Number MCF.03 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC LEGEND.DWG T O 0 m Q 1.00 1 0 N O M ELECTRICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LIGHTING OR POWER PANEL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AND CONDUIT AS REQUIRED FOR CKTS DEVICES AND EQUIP INDICATED ON PLANS. (WIRING AND CONDUIT SIZE MAY NOT APPEAR ON PLANS). PROVIDE CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT PER NEC CODE. #12 AWG, 1/2"C. MIN. EMT OR RIGID STEEL 1 INDICATES EQUIP GND. } INDICATES ISOLATED GROUND. EQUIPMENT CONNECTION, SEE EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULES FOR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS. SPECIAL EQUIP CONNECTION WITH LIQUID TIGHT FLEX TO MATCH EQUIPMENT MOTOR CONNECTION CONDUIT EXPOSED NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH ---E— o CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING SPACE ONLY CONDUIT UNDER GROUND OR FLOOR EXISTING CONDUIT CONDUIT UP D FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH COMBINATION FUSED DISCONNECT/MAGNETIC STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH OVERLOAD PROTECTION ELECTRICAL CONTACTOR, TYPE AS INDICATED J I I .rvvvvvvv CONDUIT DOWN CONDUIT STUB OUT WITH PLASTIC BUSHING BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN GROUNDING ELECTRODE PER CODES FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FAP SINGLE PUSH BUTTON PUSH BUTTON SWITCH TO MATCH EQUIPMENT STARTER AND CONTROLLER RED EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF PUSH BUTTON FIRE ALARM PANEL L'J VA aom bVdb EL CODE SIZED JUNCTION BOX WITH COVER PLATE CORD REEL WITH 4PLEX OUTLET CEILING RECEPTACLE ELECTRICAL DEVICE AS INDICATED, A=ABOVE COUNTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, TAMPER RESISTANT TYPE TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES IN COMMON BACK BOX AND UNDER COMMON PLATE, TAMPER RESISTANT TYPE TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES IN COMMON BACK BOX AND UNDER COMMON PLATE SINGLE RECEPTACLE STAGE LIGHTING CONTROL RECEPTACLE FLUSH FLOOR BOX WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE GFCI TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE SURGE PROTECTION TYPE SPECIAL RECEPTACLE TYPE TO MATCH EQUIP SERVED, VERIFY REQUIREMENTS MULTI -GANG FLOOR BOX WITH DEVICES AS NOTED ON PLANS WITH 1"C.O. SPARE TO ADJACENT CEILING SPACE. ___._._........__.---------._............_.___._ SURFACE METAL RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED. PROVIDE COMPLETE DEVICES, FITTINGS AND ASSEMBLIES. OC. SPACING OF DEVICES ARE AS NOTED ON PLANS. LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE, WITH 'ELINDICATES WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR, DUCT TYPE FIRE ALARM HEAT DETECTOR, RATE -OF -RISE TYPE FIRE ALARM HEAT DETECTOR, FIXED TEMPERATURE TYPE FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR, PROJECTION BEAM TYPE FIRE ALARM CONNECTION, TYPE AS NOTED ON PLANS TAMPER SWITCH FIRE ALARM MONITORING CONNECTION FLOW SWITCH FIRE ALARM MONITORING CONNECTION FIRE ALARM AUDIO-VISUAL HORN/STROBE FIRE ALARM STROBE LIGHT FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION, D=DUAL ACTION TYPE. FIRE ALARM DOOR RELEASE CONNECTION FIRE ALARM COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER CEILING MOUNT FIRE ALARM AUDIO-VISUAL HORN/STROBE BELL/BUZZER SECURITY SYSTEM MOTION DETECTOR SECURITY SYSTEM CEILING MOUNT MOTION DETECTOR 360' SECURITY SYSTEM MAGNETIC CONTACT 4 0 $ LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE EXIT LIGHT WITH EGRESS LIGHTS AND EMERGENCY DRIVER EXIT LIGHT WITH EMERGENCY DRIVER TYPICAL LIGHTING FIXTURE DESIGNATION, SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE SINGLE POLE SWITCH THREE WAY SWITCH LOW VOLTAGE VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH WITH DIMMING CONTROL vs LOW VOLTAGE VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH ADM v O SECURITY SYSTEM KEY PAD SECURITY SYSTEM CARD READER REQUEST TO EXIT SENSOR SECURITY SYSTEM CAMERA LOCATION LOCK DOWN BUTTON (SECURITY/INTERCOM CONNECTIONS) INTERCOM CONSOLE INTERCOM DIGITAL DISPLAY INTERCOM CALL SWITCH INTERCOM HANDSET, ADM=ADMIN TYPE WITH DISPLAY D=DESK TYPE INTERCOM WALL OR CEILING SPEAKER O0C LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCH PILOT LIGHTED SWITCH KEY OPERATED SWITCH MANUAL DIMMER SWITCH WALL MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH CEILING MOUNTED PHOTO CELL/PHOTO SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROL OCCUPANCY SENSOR DUAL TECHNOLOGY (WALL MOUNT) LIGHTING CONTROL OCCUPANCY SENSOR DUAL TECHNOLOGY (CEILING MOUNT) LIGHTING ROOM CONTROLLER SWITCHED RECEPTACLE CONTROLLER THERMOSTAT SOLENOID VALVE AQUASTAT BY MC, CONNECTIONS TO CIRC PUMP BY EC TELECOMMUNICATIONS - OUTLET DEVICE (UTP RJ45 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) # = NUMBER INSIDE SYMBOL INDICATES THE QUANTITY OF TELECOMMUNICATION CABLE DROPS AND JACKS AT EACH OUTLET LOCATION. (LE. 1,2,3, ETC.) WAP ADJACENT TO SYMBOL = WIRELESS ACCESS POINT TELECOM CONNECTION CCTV ADJACENT TO SYMBOL = CLOSED CIRCUIT TV TELECOM CONNECTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS - FLOOR OUTLET DEVICE (UTP RJ45 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) # = NUMBER INSIDE SYMBOL INDICATES THE QUANTITY OF TELECOMMUNICATION CABLE DROPS AND JACKS AT EACH OUTLET LOCATION. (LE. 1,2,3, ETC.) INTERCOM WEATHERPROOF OUTDOOR HORN/SPEAKER MASTER CLOCK ANALOG CLOCK DIGITAL CLOCK ANALOG CLOCK/SPEAKER COMBINATION DIGITAL CLOCK/SPEAKER COMBINATION VOLUME CONTROL VIDEO PROJECTOR OUTLET. SOUND SYSTEM AMPLIFIER SOUND SYSTEM SPEAKER MICROPHONE JACK SOUND SYSTEM AUXILIARY INPUT TV OUTLET TELEVISION AUDIO-VISUAL INPUT JACK DAYLIGHT ZONE 1 (DZ1), DAYLIGHT ZONE 2 (DZ2), TOPLIGHT ZONE (TZ) AS REQUIRED BY WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE (SEE LIGHTING PLANS) HDML AV OUTLET (LOW) ADJACENT TELECOM OUTLET HDMI GROMMET PLATE (HIGH) ADJACENT WALL PROJECTOR AENE3RE V 14T I ON (4)V) ABBRV DESCRIPTION ABSRV DESCRIPTION AFF AL BB ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. ALUMINUM BASEBOARD HEATER MDP M.C. MLO MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MAIN LUG ONLY BKR BREAKER MH METAL HALIDE CKT C.O. COMM Cu CONDUIT CIRCUIT CONDUIT AND PULL WIRE ONLY COMMUNICATION COPPER OL PNL RH SB SC OVER LOAD PANEL RANGE HOOD SCORE BOARD SHOT CLOCK DH E.C. EF EQP FA DUCT HEATER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXHAUST FAN EQUIPMENT FIRE ALARM G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SDP SPECS SW TEL TEM P THRU SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION PNL SPECIFICATIONS SWITCH TELEPHONE TEMPERATURE THROUGH GFI IDF LCC LTG MDF GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION FRAME LIGHTING CONTROL CENTER LIGHTING MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME TV TYP WG WP XFMR. TELEVISION TYPICAL WIRE GUARD WEATHER PROOF TRANSFORMER APPLIANCES KEY LETTER E.C. TO PROVIDE RECEPTACLE FOR APPLIANCE AS SHOWN. VERIFY LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. CM : COFFEE MAKER CP : COPIER DW : DISHWASHER DY : DRYER FZR : FREEZER GD : GARBAGE DISPOSAL. H/HD : HAND OR HAIR DRYER IH : INSTANT HOT WATER HEATER IM : ICE MAKER MW: MICROWAVE REF : REFRIGERATOR VM : VENDING MACHINE NMWASHER NI t rest t;:arl3et a y 45 ri 1r r PROJEC 'LOCATI Wn,Id ;1 r t. Lib ▪ ► 9+1?t .i ,i i�°t.S1 S1 G VICINITY MAP SCALE: NONE iSSI Chureh,,Tui is GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ALL SHEETS 1. E.C. TO PROVIDE ALL MATERIAL AND LABOR FOR MAINTAINING FIRE RATING OF WALLS IN AREAS WHERE ELECTRICAL DEVICES PENETRATE IN OR THROUGH. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR FIRE WALL LOCATION. 2. E.C. TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR ALL FAN: SPEED SWITCHES. COORDINATE LOCATION AND CONNECTIONS WITH M.C. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL DEVICES LOCATED ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING. ALL EXTERIOR BUILDING MOUNTED DEVICES (EXCEPT FIRE ALARM DEVICES) SHALL HAVE FACTORY FINISH OR PAINT TO MATCH BUILDING SURFACE. 4. ALL FLUSH MOUNT EQUIPMENT, CABINET AND PANEL BOARD SHALL HAVE FACTORY TYPE FLUSH MOUNT TRIM KIT FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 5. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALTERNATE BID NUMBERS AND CORRESPONDING AREAS AND RELATED ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE PROVIDED. E.C. TO INCLUDE IN BASE BID, ALL ELECTRICAL WORK THAT IS REQUIRED FOR BASE BID AND IN THE ASSOCIATED AREAS OF CONSTRUCTION IF ANY OF THE ALTERNATE BIDS ARE TAKEN OR ACCEPTED. 6. REFER TO PLANS FOR LOCATION OF EMERGENCY LIGHTING BATTERY PACK AND FIXTURES. 7. PROVIDE COMPLETE WORK FOR REQUIREMENTS AS DESCRIBED ON LEGEND. 8. E.C. TO VERIFY WITH CABINET INSTALLER FOR ALL CABINET LOCATIONS, DIMENSIONS AND COUNTER HEIGHTS PRIOR TO OUTLET ROUGH -IN. OUTLETS LOCATED ABOVE COUNTER ARE TO BE INSTALLED TO CENTER LINE ABOVE COUNTER TOP OF BACK SPLASH. AS DIRECTED OR INDICATED IN SPECIFICATIONS. VERIFY HEIGHT WITH ARCH/ENG. OF ANY LOCATION THAT WILL NOT ACCOMMODATE MOUNTING HEIGHT. 9. ALL EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT, PANELS OR DEVICES SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND WITH NEMA -3R ENCLOSURE TYPE. 10. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WITH SERVING UTILITY COMPANIES FOR ALL UTILITY CHARGES AND TO INCLUDE SUCH CHARGES IN BID.. 11. CIRCUITS, WIRE SIZE AND WIRE HASH MARKS ARE SHOWN FOR CIRCUIT CLARITY, BUT MAY NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE COMPLETE WIRING COUNTS AND • MINIMUM SIZES FOR CONNECTING THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. E.C. TO INCLUDE IN THE BID, ALL THE REQUIRED WIRING SIZES AND NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN ORDER TO INSTALL ALL CIRCUITS SHOWN AS NECESSARY. 12. ALL LIGHT SWITCHES SHALL BE LOCATED AT STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR SWING. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS FOR DOOR LOCATIONS. SWITCHES THAT CAN NOT BE LOCATED ON STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR BECAUSE OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHALL BE AS DIRECTED IN FIELD. 13. DO NOT INSTALL ANY FLUSH WALL OUTLET BACK TO BACK. A MINIMUM OF 24" SEPARATION IS REQUIRED BETWEEN ANY OUTLET INSTALLED ON FIRE RATED WALL. 14. INSTALLATION OF NEW UNDERGROUND FEEDERS SERVING POWER, INTERCOM, TELEPHONE, FIRE ALARM, AND T.V. SHALL INCLUDE CUTTING, PATCHING, HAND DIGGING, ETC. DO NOT CUT OR DAMAGE ANY EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR BUILDING FOUNDATIONS. VERIFY ROUTE AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING FLOOR TILE IN AREAS THAT ARE TO BE CUT. ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITIES OR BUILDING STRUCTURE SHALL BE REPAIRED TO OWNER'S SATISFACTION AT THE CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO WORK. 15. ALL ONE LINES, RISERS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING ARE SCHEMATICS AND ARE NOT SHOWING EXACT PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT. WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS ALL JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES ARE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL OTHER FITTINGS AND PULL BOXES OF ADEQUATE SIZE IN THE RACEWAY SYSTEM WHEREVER NECESSARY OR REQUIRED BY NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PROVIDE EXPANSION JOINT FITTINGS FOR CONDUITS PASSING THROUGH NEW OR EXISTING EXPANSION JOINTS INSTALLED BETWEEN BUILDINGS. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND DETAILS OF EXPANSION JOINTS PRIOR TO WORK. COORDINATE ALL CONDUIT ROUTING, PULL BOX AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS. ALL EMPTY CONDUITS SHALL HAVE PULL WIRES. 16. E.C. TO PROVIDE 60 WATT LAMPS FOR ALL RANGE HOODS. - 17. NO ELECTRICAL CONDUITS ARE ALLOWED TO BE RUN IN ANY FLOOR SLABS. CONDUITS SERVING DEVICE LOCATED IN FLOOR SHALL BE SERVED FROM BELOW AND PASS THROUGH THE FLOOR SLAB. GENERAL NOTES IN AREAS WHERE ROOF STRUCTURE/DECKING IS EXPOSED E.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATE MEANS FOR DEVICE ATTACHMENT. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE UNISTRUT OR OTHER APPROVED METHODS FOR ATTACHMENT BETWEEN TRUSSES OR BEAMS. IN NO CASE SHALL ANY DEVICE BE MOUNTED ON THE EXPOSED UNDERSIDE OF THE ROOF DECK WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ARCH/MANUFACTURER. ALL SUPPORT ITEMS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACE. ALL MEANS OF SUPPORT/ATTACHMENT SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE. ARCH. REVIEWED FOR ODE COMPLIANCE E APPROVED ELECTRICAL SI-4EET LI BE0.01 BE0.02 BED1.01 6E2.01' BE3.01 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, NOTES AND SCHEDULES WSEC FORM DEMOLITION PLAN POWER & LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN - POWER & LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN - SYSTEMS BE3.02 BE5.O1 BE8.O1 BE8.02 FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FIRE ALARM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAM DEC. --0._2017 _ City of_.T_ukwila_. BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED - CITY OF TUKWILA.._.... AUG 23 2017 PERMIT' CENTER- _-/ EVICwtD ro COD. COMPLI CE A "` RO D n17 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE ..,,, . . . TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER LAMP INPUT WATTS City car. I ukwila BIDING DIVISION NAME CATALOG NUMBER QTY. TYPE P1 LINEAR DIRECT/INDIRECT FOCAL POINT FSM4BS FLFL 375DN 625UP 40K 1C UNV LD1 C24 WH INC. LED 44 OFFICE R1 1'X4' LAY -IN LED FOCAL POINT FEQ2 14 AC 4000L 40K 1C UNV LD1 G EM WH INC. LED 43 OFFICES, STORAGE GENERAL NOTES: SE R��T pND PA PRDI rolluda architects arch tecture punning Inter or design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 Vv TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N W Qw z LUQ � < iZ V 1- N G'- O CL O `-`^ • v) • I CI) I— J 71 !co z d- o H REVISION Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: FLR Project No. 331-16-01 DATE Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES Drawing Number E0.01LO ME0.01_TM_LEGEND.DWG 0 N Lfi COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC""' Lighting 2015 Washington ,F;S"Y,tl.' :Motor and Electrical State Energy Code Compliance Forms Permit ChecklisPg for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 3 LTG -CHK Revised August 2016 Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building (Date 7/17/2017 The following information is necessary to check a Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section I Component (Compliance information required in permit documents I Location in Documents Building Department Notes INTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY Yes C405.2 Yes 0405.4.1 0405.4.1 0405.4.2 Total connected interior lighting power Include all luminaires in lighting fixture schedule; indicate fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and manufacturer's rated watts per fixture; BE2.01 C405.2 Identify spaces eligible for lighting power exemption on plans and in compliance forms; indicate the exception applied; 13E2.01 Storag? room Identify lighting equipment eligible for lighting power exemption in fixture schedule and in compliance forms; indicate the exception applied; NA 0405.1 Indicate that exempt lighting equipment is in addition to general area lighting and is controlled independently NA Office: Enclosed Yes 0405.3 Exit signs Indicate location of exit signs on plans and rated watts per fixture in lighting fixture schedule (maximum 5 watts per fixture) gE2.01 BE2.01 NA C405.1 Lighting in dwelling units - lamp efficacy If high efficacy exception is applied to permanently installed lighting fixtures in dwelling units, indicate in lighting fixture schedule if lamps in fixtures are high efficacy per R404.1. Calculate percentage of fixtures with high efficacy lamps in project (min 75% to comply with exception). Indicate on plans which method of manual 50% lighting load reduction is provided, or whether lighting load is reduced via occupancy sensors or daylight responsive controls BE2.01 NA C406.3 Reduced lighting power density - dwelling unit lamp efficacy For project with dwelling units, to comply with additional efficiency package option indicate in lighting fixture schedule if lamps in fixtures have efficacy rating of 60 lumens per watt or more. Calculate percentage of fixtures with lamps that have this efficacy rating (min 95% to comply with option). Indicate on plans the method of automatic shut-off control during unoccupied periods (occupancy sensor or time switch) for all lighting zones; BE2.01 604 Lighting Power Calculation - Indicate compliance path taken Allowance from NA 0405.4.2.1 Building Area Method Complete required compliance forms - proposed wattage per building area does not exceed maximum allowed wattage per building area. Identify locations of building areas on plans 13E2.01 Yes 0405.4.2.2 Space -By -Space Method Complete required compliance forms - total proposed wattage does not exceed maximum allowed wattage. Identify locations of space types on plans, including retail display areas, lobby art & exhibit display areas, and ceiling heights as applicable BE0.02 Occupancy sensor controls - warehouses NA C406.3 Reduced lighting power density To comply with additional efficiency package option, demonstrate in compliance forms that total connected interior lighting wattage is 75% less than the total maximum allowed lighting wattage via Building Area Method or Space -By -Space Method C405.2.6 Digital timer switch EXTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY NA 0405.2.2.1 0405.5.2 Total connected exterior lighting power Include all luminaires in lighting fixture schedule; indicate fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and manufactures rated watts per fixture; NA Identify exterior applications eligible for lighting power exemption li s• indicate exception applied; on plans and in compliance forms; P Daylight zones - Sidelight and toplight Indicate primary and secondary sidelight daylight zone areas on. plans, include sq. ft.; Indicate that exempt exterior lighting is controlled independently Y from non-exempt exterior lighting; include exception claimed for each fixture or group of fixtures under exception category Indicate toplight daylight zone areas on plans, include sq. ft.; NA Table 0405.5.2(1) Exterior lighting zone g g Indicate building exterior lighting zone as defined bythe AHJ 9 9 9 NA NA 0405.5.1 Exterior building grounds lighting For building grounds fixtures rated at greater than 100 watts that are complying based on efficacy, indicate rated lamp efficacy (in lumens per watt) in fixture schedule Identify sidelight and toplight daylight zones that are not provided with daylight sensing controls and the exception(s) that apply; NA LightingMotor 2015 Washington 0405.5.2 State Energy Exterior lighting power calculations andElectrical Code Compliance Forms Complete required tom Iln e form - proposed wattage exterior lighting plus base site allowed does not exceed maximum allowed Permit Checklist for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories for F� fi: P4 and all R1 bA 3 J mx J S CH K TG LTG-CHK Revised August 2016 Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date 7/17/2017 The following information is necessary to check a Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes MOTORS & TRANSFORMERS Indicate manual and automatic lighting control method Checklist ` Permitt P � � } ..... .: .. ....... 7 for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stones and all R1 NA 0405.6 Electrical tranformers Include electrical transformer schedule on electrical plans; indicate transformer size, efficiency, or exception taken Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date NA 0405.7 Dwelling unit electrical energy consumption Indicate on electrical plans that each dwelling unit in Group R-2 has a separate electrical energy meter in the Applicability (yes,no,na) NA C405.8 Electric motor efficiency Include all motors, including fractional hp motors, in electric motor schedule on electrical plans; indicate hp, rpm, rated efficiency, or exception applied Building Department Notes NA NA 0405.9.1 Elevator cabs For luminaires in each elevator cab, protide calculated average efficacy of combined fixtures that indicates efficacy is not less than 35 lumens per watt; NA Indicate rated watts per cfm for elevator cab ventilation fans do not exceed 0.33 watts per cfm; Supplemental task lighting Indicate method and location of automatic shut-off vacancy control for supplemental task lighting, including under -shelf or under -cabinet lighting Indicate automatic controls that de -energize lighting and ventilation fans when elevator is stopped and unoccupied for a period of 15 minutes or more NA NA 0405.9.2 Escalators and moving walks Indicate escalators comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44; automatic controls are configured to reduce operational speed to the minimum permitted when not in use Indicate on plans that non -visual lighting are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; NA 0405.9.3 Regenerative drive Indicate all one-way down or reversible escalators are provided with a variable frequency regenerative drive NA Yes C405.10 Controlled receptacles Identify all controlled and uncontrolled receptables on electrical plans in each space in which they are required; include receptacle configuration such as spacing between controlled and uncontrolled, duplex devices, etc; BE2.01 Indicate method of manual lighting control and applicable automatic lighting control Indicate on plans whether the method of automatic control for each controlled receptable zone is by occupant sensor or programmable time -of -day control 13E2.01 Yea If "no" is selected for any question, provide explanation: End of Lighting, Motor & Transformer Permit Documents Checklist st .)xs• , ,. r'.: i n Yt.Jt ikk S9 { :"j;X LI htin Motor and 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms � ,..t.;. Electrlca :, :P': I t m }7 $), Ji } 4 1 t �)t Permi Checklist PgI for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stones and all R1 F.�. 3 k,,: <kJh Ti T - CHK; Revised August 20.6 Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building (Date 7/17/2017 The following information is necessary to check a Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents I Location in Documents I Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS Yes C405.2 Lighting controls, general For all lighting fixtures, indicate lighting control method on plans for spaces and lighting zone(s) served, or exception taken 13E2.01 NA C405.2 Luminaire level lighting controls (LLLC) Indicate on plans all fixtures provided with LLLC in lieu of C405.2 lighting controls; provide description of control capabilities and performance parameters Storag? room NA 0405.1 Lighting in dwelling units For permanently installed lighting fixtures in dwelling units, indicate lighting control method on plans for spaces and lighting zone(s) served, or demonstrate compliance with high efficacy exception Office: Enclosed Yes 0405.2.3 0405.2.1.1 0405.2.2.2 405.2.4 C405.2.5 Manual controls Indicate on plans the method of manual lighting control (whether combined with occupancy sensor, automatic light reduction, daylight responsive or specific application controls), location of manual control device and area or specifice application it serves BE2.01 Yea C405.2.2.1 C405.2.2.2 C405.2.3 Manual interior lighting controls Indicate on plans which method of manual 50% lighting load reduction is provided, or whether lighting load is reduced via occupancy sensors or daylight responsive controls BE2.01 Yea 0405.2.2 Method of automatic shut-off control Indicate on plans the method of automatic shut-off control during unoccupied periods (occupancy sensor or time switch) for all lighting zones; BE2.01 604 Indicate locations where automatic shutoff is provided by other methods (occupancy sensor or digital timer switch) or which time switch control exception applies BE2.01 Allowance from Yes 0405.2.1 0405.2.1.1 Occupancy sensor controls Indicate on plans the spaces served by occupancy sensors; 13E2.01 Indicate whether occupancy sensor controls are configured to be manual -on, automatic 50% -on, or serve a space eligible for automatic 100% -on per exception BE2.01 NA 0405.2.1.2 Occupancy sensor controls - warehouses Indicate aisleways and open areas in warehouse spaces provided with occupancy sensor controls that reduce lighting power by 50% NA C405.2.6 Digital timer switch Indicate required digital timer switch control function when control is used NA 0405.2.2.1 Automatic time switch controls Indicate locations of override switches on plans and the lighting zone(s) served, include area sq. ft. NA 0405.2.4.2 0405.2.4.3 Daylight zones - Sidelight and toplight Indicate primary and secondary sidelight daylight zone areas on. plans, include sq. ft.; Indicate toplight daylight zone areas on plans, include sq. ft.; For small vertical fenestration assemblies (rough opening less than 10 percent of primary daylight zone) where daylight responsive controls are not required, provide fenestration area to daylight zone calculation(s) NA 0405.2.4 Daylight responsive controls Indicate on plans lighting zone(s) served by daylight responsive controls; Identify sidelight and toplight daylight zones that are not provided with daylight sensing controls and the exception(s) that apply; Indicate on plans the lighting load reduction method - continuous dimming, or stepped dimming that provides at least two even steps between 0%-100% of rated power; Indicate that daylight sensing controls are configured to completely shut off all controlled lights in the lighting zone NA 0405.2.5 Additional controls Specific application lighting controls Identify spaces and lighting fixtures on plans that require specific application lighting controls per this section Lighting � 2015 Washington C405NA .5 Items 1&2 1&2 Motor M State Energy Display and accent lighting 7 ; and Electrical �xa Code Compliance Forms Indicate on plans that display and accent lighting, and display case lighting are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate manual and automatic lighting control method Checklist ` Permitt P � � } ..... .: .. ....... 7 for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stones and all R1 .'2 int LTG -CHK Revised August 2016 Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date 7/17/2017 The following Washington information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. requirements in the Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes NA 0405.2.5 - Item 3 Hotel/motel guest rooms Indicate method of automatic control - vacancy or captive key control of all installed luminaires and switched receptacles in P guest room NA 0405.2.5 - Item 4 Supplemental task lighting Indicate method and location of automatic shut-off vacancy control for supplemental task lighting, including under -shelf or under -cabinet lighting NA 0405.2.5 - Item 5 Lighting for non -visual applications Indicate on plans eligible non -visual lighting applications, include sq. ft. area of each lighting control zone; Indicate on plans that non -visual lighting are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate method of manual lighting control and applicable automatic lighting control NA 0405.2.5 - Item 6 Lighting equipment for sale or demonstration Indicate on plans that lighting equipment for sale or demonstration are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate method of manual lighting control and applicable automatic lighting control Yea 0405.2.5 - Item 7 Means of egress lighting Identify on plans egress fixtures that function as both normal and emergency means of egress illumination; BE2.01 Provide calculation of lighting power density of total egress lighting; BATTERY BACKED NA If total egress lighting power density is greater than 0.02 W/sq. ft., indicate on plans egress fixtures requiring automatic shut-off during unoccupied periods; Indicate method of automatic shut-off control BE2.01 NA 0405.2.7 Exterior lighting controls Indicate on exterior lighting plans and fixture schedules the automatic lighting control method, control sequence, and locations served; For building facade and landscape lighting, indicate automatic controls shut off lighting as a function of dawn/dusk and fixed opening/closing time; For all other exierior lighting, g g, indicate automatic controls shut off lighting as a function of available daylight; include control sequence that also reduces lighting power by at least 30% between 12am-6am, or from 1 hour after closing to 1 hour before opening, or based upon motion sensor NA 0405.5.1 Exterior building grounds lighting controls For building grounds fixtures greater than 100 watts, indicate on plans whether fixtures have efficacy greater than 80 lumens or, are controlled by motion sensor, or are exempt lighting per 0405.5.2 NA 0405.2.5 Area controls - Master control switches and circuit power limit Indicate location(s) of master control switch(es) intended to control multiple independent switches; circuit breaker may not be used as a master control switch; Verify that no 20 amp circuit controlled by a single switch or automatic control is loaded beyond 80% NA 0406.4 Enhanced digital lighting controls To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate on plans all interior lighting fixtures that are individually addressed and provided with continuous dimming, or exception taken; Include calculation of percent total installed interior lighting power that is configured with required enhanced lighting control functions (min 90% to comply with additional efficiency package option) NA 0405.13 C408.3 Lighting system functional testing If claiming lighting system commissioning exemption provide supporting calculation; EXEMPT, < 20KW Identify applicable commissioning documentation requirements per Section C408 or eligibility for exception; Provide written procedures for functional testing of all automatic controls and describe the expected system response Interior `Li g if t7: �4 } f; 2 'r; in S ace-By ace Method`: g K� Y-pn, TG -INT -SPACE 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised August 2016 Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date 7/17/2017 Calculation Area N° rE 9 0 New Construction 0 Addition - 0 Addition 0 Clear stand alone + existing 0 Spaces where < 50% of 0 Spaces where z 50% of 0 Spaces where the Use luminaires are replaced luminaires are replaced is changing (0505) For Building Department Use LPA Calculation Type 0 Standard 0 Additional Efficiency Package Option 0 Clear C406.3 Reduced Interior Lighting To comply with C406.3, the Proposed LPD shall be 25% lower than the Target LPA. Refer to C406.3 for additional requirements. Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage NOTE 1 Lighting Control (LLLC) Location (plan #, room #) Space Type Ceiling HeightNOTE 2 Gross Interior Area in ft2 Allowed Watts per ft2 Watts Allowed (watts/ft2 x area) Break Room 115 Lounge/breakroom: all other 142 0. 580 82 Training 107 Office: Enclosed 151 0.890 134 Storage 108 Storag? room 151 0.500 76 Office 109 Office: Enclosed 120 0.890 107 Office 110 Office: Enclosed 120 0.890 107 Office 111 Office: Enclosed 120 0.890 107 Lobby Art/Ethibit Display Allowance from LTG -INT -DISPLAY NOTE 8 Total Area Retail Display 604 LTG -INT -DISPLAY Allowed Watts Allowance from 613 Proposed Li • hting Wattage N°1E a Location (plan #, room #) Fixture Description NOTE 4, 5, 6 Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture NOTE 7 Type R1, LED, 0-10V Type P1, LED, 0-10V 10 2 43 44 Proposed Retail Display Lighting from LTG -INT -DISPLAY Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Lighting Total Proposed Watts Watts Proposed 430 88 518 Interior Lighting Power Allowance COMPLIES Note 1 - List all unique space types per Table 0405.4.2(2) that occur in the project scope. Select space type category ry per from drop down menu. Note 2 - Indicate ceiling height for atriums and spaces utilizing the ceiling height adjustment per Table C405.4.2(2), Footnotes d thni f. Note 3 - List all proposed lighting fixtures including exempt lighting equipment and existing -to -remain fixtures. Note 4 - For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track(in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. Note 5 - For lighting equipment el! ible for exemptionper C405.4.1 note exception number and leave Watts/Fixture blank. 9 99 P P Note 6 - Existing -to -remain fixtures shall be included in the Proposed Lighting Wattage table in the same manner as new fixtures. Identify as existing in fixture description. Note 7 - For proposed Watts/Fixture enter the luminaire wattage for installed lamp and ballast using manufacturer or other approved source. For luminaires with screw-in lamps, enter the manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not the lamp wattage). For low voltage lighting, enter the wattage of the transformer. For line voltage track/busway systems, enter the larger of the attached luminaire wattage or 50 watts/lineal foot, or enter the wattage limit of permanent current limiting device. Note 8 - Lobby Art/Exhibit Display Allowance is independent of the Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage. Note 9 - Calculation Area Details: a. Lighting fixtures in a building addition may comply as a stand alone project, or they may be combined with the overall existing building lighting systems to demonstrate compliance. Refer to C502.1. b. For alterations and building' additions, provide Space Types and gross interior areas in the Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage table. If a building addition will comply as combined with the overall existing building lighting systems, include all applicable existing Space Types and gross interior areas. c. If less than 50% of existing lighting fixtures will be replaced, provide total existing lighting wattage (prior to alteration) in the space provided in the Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage table. Lighting Summary LGT-SUM 2015 Washington State EnergyCode Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings includingR2, R3, R4 over stories and all R1 9 P 9 Revised August 2016 Project Info Compliance forms do not require a password to use. Instructional and calculating cells are write - protected. Project Title: Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date 7/17/2017 Applicant Information. Provide contact information for individual who can respond to inquiries about compliance form information provided. Company Name: Tukwila School District Company Address: 4640 S 144th St Applicant Name: David Henning Applicant Phone: 253-472-3300 Applicant Email: dph@treswestcom For Building Department Use Project Description El New Building ❑ Addition El Alteration I] Plans Included Include PROJ-SUM form (included in envelope forms workbook) with lighting complliance forms. Building Additions Refer to Section C502.2.6 for additional requirements. Compliance Method Interior lighting Exterior lighting Lighting systems in addition area comply with all applicable provisions as a stand alone new construction project Lighting systems in addition are combined with existing building lighting systems to demonstrate compliance Addition is combined with existing: For interior lighting projects, include new + existing interior lighting fixture wattage in Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD or LTG -INT -SPACE form. For exterior lighting projects, include new + existing exterior lighting fixture wattage in Proposed Tradable and Proposed Non -Tradable Lighting Wattage tables in LTG -EXT form. Interior and Exterior Lighting Alterations Select all Lighting Power and Lighting Control elements that apply to the scope of the retrofit project. If project includes a combination of spaces where less than 50% of the existing fixtures are replaced in some spaces, and 50% or more of the fixtures are replaced in others, then provide separate lighting power compliance forms for the two retrofit conditions. Spaces undergoing the same type of retrofit may be combined into one lighting power compliance form. Refer to Section C503.6 for additional requirements. All alteration lighting controls shall be commissioned per C408.3. ❑ No changes are being made to the interior or exterior lighting systems and existing space uses and configuration are not changed. Lighting Power Interior lighting Parking garage Exterior lighting 50% or more of existing are replaced Less than 50% of existing are replaced 0 Lamp and/or ballast replacement only - existing total wattage not increased 0 50% or more replaced - Total lighting power of new + existing -to -remain fixtures shall comply with total LPA per Sections C405.4.2 and C405.5.2. include new + existing -to -remain fixtures in Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD, LTG -INT -SPACE or LTG -EXT form. Less than 50% replaced - Total lighting power of new + existing -to -remain fixtures shall not exceed the total lighting powerr prior to alteration. Include new + existing -to -remain fixtures in the Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD, LTG -INT -SPACE or LTG -EXT form. 50% threshold applies to number of luminaires for interior spaces and parking garages, and total installed wattage for exterior luminaires. Lighting Controls Interior lighting Parking garage Exterior lighting New wiring installed to serve added fixtures and/or fixtures relocated to new circuit(s) 0 New or moved lighting panel Interior space is reconfigured - luminaires unchanged or relocated only New wiring or circuit - For interior lighting, provide required manual controls per C405.2.3, occupancy sensor controls per C405.2.1, daylight responsive controls per C405.2.4 and application specific lighting controlsper C405.2.5. For exterior lighting, provide required controls per C405.2.7. 9 9 9 9. New or moved panel - Provide all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring and automatic time switch controls per C405.2.2. Reconfigured interior space - Provide all required lighting controls that apply to a new interior space. Application specific lighting control provisions per C405.2.5 do not apply to reconfigured spaces. Change of Space Use ❑ Existing interior lighting systems in areas under -going a change in space use are upgraded to comply with LPAs for the new space types per Tables C405.4.2(1) or 0405.4.2(2). identify interior spaces requiring LPD upgrade to the current Code in Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG-iNT-BLD or LTG -INT -SPACE form. Lighting} Summary cont. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over stories and all R1. GT -SUMP Revised August 2016 Project Title:' Tukwila Public Schools - Tech & Maintenance Building Date 7/17/2017 Interior Lighting System Description Briefly describe interior lighting system type and features. New LED fixtures and controls for added spaces. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Method 0 Building Area Method 2 Space -by -space Method Select method used in project. Interior Lighting Controls I] All C405.2.1 - C405.2.8 Controls N 0405.2 Exception 5 Luminaire Level Lighting Control (LLLC) • Additional Efficiency. Package Option C406.4 Enhanced digital lighting controls To comply with C406.4, no less than 90% of the total installed interior lighting power shall comply with th required controls per C406.4. Dwelling Unit Interior Lighting Permanently installed interior lighting fixtures in dwelling units comply with: Di No Dwelling 0 0405.2 thru C405.5 Commercial Lighting Controls and LPA Units 0 0406.3 High Efficacy Lighting 0 R404.1 Residential High Efficacy Lighting. Dwelling unit lighting complies with WSEC Residential provisions in lieu of WSEC Commerical provisions. Exterior Lighting System Description Briefly describe exterior lighting system type and features. N/A REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC off- 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION ANCE VED 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISI RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 232011 PERMIT CENTER gEPARATE PER,^�11 ?PROM, REfl REQu rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 1.1k/VV TRES WEST ENGINEERS t TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www:treswest.com 00 CD r C3) "' C V y r _ W Il V o„,( Werl ,- z �- W V ir- co ^^ IU c o 0 0 V i -- 4640 S 144TH STREET ILA, WA 98168 (206) 979-9370 REVISION DATE Design: DPH Drawn: DPH Checked: DPH Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title WSEC FORM Drawing Number BEO.02 ME0.02 WSEC FORM.DWG COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC PNL A B/6=C= WP ' L --J PN B B/25 -' B/6 "7 I B /2 B/5 146 i$ 14 B/ A4'36 I ✓ A/38 J A/37 142J A/39 I i I A/32 `l -1)A/32 10 11 12 13 FLAN NOTES CONT', REMOVE EXISTING TELECOM OUTLET, BACKBOX, CONDUIT AND CABLING BACK TO SERVING PATCH PANEL. CAREFULLY DISCONNECT EXISTING EXIT/EGRESS WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE AND RELOCATE AS INDICATED ON SHEET 8E2.01. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE MAINTAIN JUNCTION BOX AND CIRCUIT WIRING TO CONNECT TO NEW FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED IN THIS LOCATION. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE, MAINTAIN CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TO ALL OTHER FIXTURES ON THESE CIRCUITS. EXISTING FIXTURE TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING SWITCH—LEG CONTROLLING THIS FIXTURE AND RECONNECT TO NEW SWITCH. SEE SHEET 6E2.01 FOR NEW SWITCH LOCATION. EXISTING FIXTURE TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING CIRCUIT AND SWITCH CONNECTION AND RE—CIRCUIT AND SWITCH AS INDICATED ON SHEET 8E2.01. B/3 —7.7_77_—__—__ �...__..._-7..7..7....7...__—__ ..7..7.7...7. ...._...._.. A/36 A/32 A/34 z` �fVM `2J L► III III I III �$ A/26 J A/26 I A/28 wPII 4 A� A/2E. 00 }4) /29 A/29 (FI) •A/9__ ..7.7.....7.7._.. - -7..7.7.7._._._. -._ ..7......7....7.7..__... .... ..._.._..._.__...._..._I - ---------7777-- .I I'I A/9 A/91 ,II II! - I II IIS A/9(..0 I A/9. 11„� lit ,II ISI III II A/9 /iJ`I Ij 'Il 0 ro 1l�l�l---- L4 kJ A/21 _E A/25 Ulf A/29 LLL A/20 /2A{1 A/25 A/25 A/23 cr. A/25 Pa- = - WP DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN -ELECTRICAL SCALE : 1/8" =11-0" / 4 E' PLAN NOTES O DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL WIRING AND FLOOR PEDESTALS FROM LIGHTED BOOKSHELVES TO BE DEMOLISHED. REMOVE EXISTING WIRING COMPLETELY OUT OF FLOOR DUCT AND SERVING PANEL. (TYPICAL). 02 REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR . RECEPTACLE, COVER PLATE AND WIRING COMPLETELY OUT OF FLOOR DUCT AND SERVING. PANEL. 0 REMOVE EXISTING RECEPTACLE POWER PEDESTAL AND WIRING COMPLETELY OUT OF FLOOR DUCT AND SERVING . • PANEL. 0 EXISTING FLOOR DUCT SYSTEM WITH POWER & DATA REMOVE ALL POWER CIRCUITS A/9,11,13,15,17,19 & 21 COMPLETELY OUT OF FLOOR DUCT SYSTEM AND -SERVING PANEL 'A'. VERIFY CIRCUITS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. 0 REMOVE ALL DATA PEDESTAL AND WIRING OUT OF FLOOR DUCT SYSTEM BACK TO SERVING PATCH PANEL. O REMOVE EXISTING RECEPTACLE, CONDUIT AND WIRING • BACK TO NEXT ACTIVE DEVICE OR JUNCTION BOX. MAINTAIN CONNECTION TO OTHER EXISTING CIRCUITS THAT MAY SHARE CONDUIT. O REMOVE EXISTING RECEPTACLE, CONDUIT AND WIRING BACK TO NEXT ACTIVE DEVICE OR JUNCTION. BOX. MAINTAIN CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TO OTHER DEVICES ON THIS CIRCUIT. r7777-� 1 1 I.--_-1 A /42 GENERAL NOTES EXISTING DASHED RECEPTACLES, GEAR AND OTHER ITEMS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND ARE TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. NOT ALL EXISTING DEVICES ARE SHOWN. 2. EXISTING DASHED LIGHT FIXTURES AND SWITCHES ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND ARE TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. NOT ALL EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES ARE SHOWN. A /6 A A/1 A/4 ..Q /4 A/6 A/6 A LI a 6 E A/42 A /6 I I J _ J A/2 {A/2 A/2 A /2 A/2 /L2 A/E, A/6 LJ A/6 -- A /4 A/2 -A/2 42 42 L A/1 r@- i A/3 74 I 1 1 L A/42 L i A/3 A/1 u A/3 A/3 A/1 A/42 A A/3 A/1 A/42 A/42 r --i L—J REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 06 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FOR DE COMPLIAN PROVED OCT ► 2017 'ooTfukwil UILDI?. 'DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 PERMIT CENTER DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - ELECTRICAL SCALE : 1/8" = 1,-0" 1� PEFM�TA D EQU R6D rolluda architects architecture panning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 Ilat VV— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N LIJ �r� W VJ E JUQ 0pQ O _ W E � Z (/) U W J 4 cs6 I— ~ mQ'zi DO_OW 00� < O0 r S '_5 D D W W I- < 1- (!) ILA, WA 98168 V 1-- N � J w 0 CC 00 =nom cn F– �`'S z .1- 0 r H REVISION DATE Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: FLR Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title DEMO PLANS ELECTRICAL Drawing Number ED1.01 MED1.01 DEMOPLANS.DWG COPYRIGHT 0 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC c1 FLAN NOTES coNT'D ®PROVIDE NEW SWITCHES AND CONNECT TO THE SIX EXISTING FIXTURES IN THIS ROOM AS INDICATED. 12 RECEPTACLES IN ROOMS 107, AND 109 THRU 111 SHALL BE CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES. SEE CONTROL DIAGRAMS ON SHEET BE8.02. PROVIDE ALL POWER PACKS, OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND LABELING OF RECEPTACLES AS INDICATED. 13 RECEPTACLES SHALL BE MOUNTED ON NEW 6 -FOOT WALL. LOCATE AT STANDARD HEIGHTS. TYPICAL. -EXIST CT CABINET -EXIST PNL 'A' -EXIST PNL 'B' B/6_I=a WP ELECTRICAL 114 EXISTING WIREMOLD 4000 —� MAINT/STOR. 113 BREAK OFFICE WORK ROO ECEM 116 A B/37,39,41 STORAGE HALLWAY CUSTODIAN 39 CONFERENCE 11 A/2 /29 44) A/25 44) A/25 STORAGE TRAINING ROOM 103 an— WOMEN A/2o A/23 IL' A/25 1-4 A/25 Pa_ twP 4� FLOOR PLAN - POWER SCALE 1/8" = 1'-0" FLAN NOTES 0 PROVIDE NEW LAY -IN LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE 'R1' AND CIRCUIT AS INDICATED. TYPICAL ROOMS 107 THRU 110. O PROVIDE NEW PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE 'P1' IN ROOM 111 AND CIRCUIT AS INDICATED. HANG PENDANTS. FROM STRUCTURAL CEILING DOWN TO 9 -FEET AFF. O PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH WITH DIMMING CONTROL IN ROOM 107, & 109 THRU 111: PROVIDE POWER PACKS AS REQUIRED. SWITCHES SHALL BE MANUAL ON AUTO OFF. SEE OFFICE LTG/RECEPT CONTROL DIAGRAM ON BE8.02. O PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH IN THIS ROOM. PROVIDE POWER PACK AS REQUIRED. SWITCH SHALL BE MANUAL ON AUTO OFF. O PROVIDE NEW LAY -IN FIXTURE TYPE 'R1' AND CIRCUIT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT A/6 AND SWITCH AS SHOWN. O PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH AT TWOLOCATIONS IN THIS ROOM. PROVIDE POWER PACK AND CONNECT TO NEW CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSOR. SWITCH SHALL BE AUTO ON AUTO OFF. O CIRCUIT EXISTING FIXTURES TO A/4 AND SWITCH AS INDICATED. O RELOCATE EXISTING EXIT/EGRESS LIGHT TO THIS LOCATION. CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT A/42. 09 REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURE FROM CIRCUIT A/1 AND CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT A/3 AND CONNECT TO NEW SWITCHES AS INDICATED. - 10 EXISTING FIXTURES TO REMAIN ON CIRCUIT A/3 BUT SHALL BE RECONNECTED TO NEW SWITCHES AS INDICATED. ELECTRICAL 114 N -MAIN I /810R. 113. H 1 L A/, 4d i : ' EAK RMS—d 1\15 /– I dyb A/6 A/ r –J H OFtFICE X11__ -H. 1 0 L --__J J$TOD N J OPEN OFFICE 112. HALLWAY 105 r� r� 441C/Nb. A/9 11 ENTRY LOBBY 100 / ia,b A GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL RECEPTACLES & LIGHT FIXTURES SHOWN IN SOLID LINE WEIGHT ARE TO BE PROVIDED NEW AND CIRCUITED. AS INDICATED. TYPICAL. 2. ALL RECEPTACLES AND LIGHT FIXTURES SHOWN WITH DASHED LINES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. j9 a,b L - 7-7 9.15- j 9 b 4 rolluda architects arch Lectureplanning later Or design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 08/10/17 TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com OFFII 11.0 TRAININ 107 A/ ,b 0 IFF CE — 111 STORAGE 0 CONFER N 106 a,b E REVISION a, A/3 A A A/3 MEN 101 FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" WOMEN. 102 44. STORAGE 104 I I / I I I I I I REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED TRAINING ROOM 103 r DEC 4a 2017 City of Tukwila I BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FO E COMPLI * ,SCE PROV Design: Drawn: Checked: FLR BT FLR Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance OCT 2017 PERMIT SET City of Tula EUJLO,.G�;stk Date: 8/10/2017 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2011 PERMIT CENTER Drawing Title FLOOR PLAN POWER/LIGHTING ME2.01_FLOOR PLAN PWR LTG.DWG Drawing Number E2.01 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC MAINT/STOR. 113 EXIST PNL A -EXISZPNL B ELECTRICAL 114 REAK RM 115 OPEN OFFICE,' r'n i ITh 112 'CU' ON ROOF `IV ABOVE WORK ROOM 118 OFFICE 119 MDFI 117, RECEIVING 116 CUSTODIA 120 — r ----I r ----I 7—.---1 r----1 1------1 r'T r"n I r"n 1=4 it -c4 1 I 4/ IL=4J I i 4) 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I —d HALLWAY 105 OFFICE 109 OFFICE 110 TRAINING 107 STORAGE 108 CONFERENCE 106 ENTRY LOBBY 100 MEN 101 WOMEN 102 STORAGE 104 TRAINING ROOM 103 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 0 ELECTRICAL 114 ELAN NOTES 01 PROVIDE NEW TELECOM . OUTLET IN NEW WALL AS INDICATED. ROUTE CABLING ABOVE CEILING TO NEW MDF ROOM 117. O REMOVE EXISTING TELECOM, FACEPLATES, JACKS AND CABLING, AND PROVIDE NEW CAT 6 JACKS FACEPLATES AND CABLING. ROUTE TO NEW MDF ROOM 117. PROVIDE NEW MDF FREE STANDING RACK, PATCH PANELS, WIRE MANAGERS, LADDER RACK AND ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED ON SHEET BE8.02. O EXISTING WALL MOUNTED TELECOM PATCH PANELS. REMOVE EXISTING TELECOM CABLING AND PATCH PANELS FROM THIS ROOM. �5 NEW CU -01 SHALL BE LOCATED ON ROOF ABOVE MDF ROOM 117. CIRCUIT CU -01 TO PANEL 'A' AS INDICATED ON MECH. EQUIPMENT AND PANEL SCHEDULES. PROVIDE NEMA 3R DISCONNECT SWITCH ADJACENT UNIT WITH LIQUID TIGHT FLEX CONDUIT FROM DISCONNECT TO UNIT. O AC -01 LOCATED IN MDF ROOM 117 SERVED BY CU -01. PROVIDE CONDUIT, WIRING AND ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AC -01 & CU -01 FOR COMPLETE OPERATION. PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH AS REQUIRED. MAINT/STOR. 113 -EXIST PNL A -EXISS PNL B 0 - --�{�`JC�`-U C—] J BREAK RM 115 < I DF WORK ROOM 118 1 J OFFICE 119 RE E VING 116 1 1 CUSTODIAN 120 OPEN OFFICE r, \� r\� ,_,1 112 'rE=Th V 8 ;j -_;j- I 8 it,4) HALLWAY 105 MEN 101 22\ it,4)IL4) I 1 1 OFFICE 109 I -' FFICE 110 OFF 111 CONFERENCE 106 ENTRY LOBBY 100 WOMEN 102 STORAGE 104 TRAINING ROOM 103 c 7 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED FLOOR PLAN -SYSTEMS SCALE : 1/8" =1'-0" DEC 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION FO �' ODS COMPLI .CI p>p`I .00TEVIEWEDOV.117 ity of Tlt ; i►il U:1LD3NG iDIMS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 2 3 2017 PERMIT CENTER N,` -PSP tiSS2t 0„. gkekj rolled architects arch tecture planning inter or design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 1kt1l V— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N W W Z Oa.W O I- (id Z ."7cr) UUP � CO WkJ I]0�1_� WCt 0P- z [1-1 �- W CL 0 0 co c0 Owcs,ti �Co Zco OT=ati ""jr-, 5 is DDWW 8 11,8clui:JI! I-- REVISION DATE Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: FLR Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FLOOR PLAN SYSTEMS AND MECHANICAL Drawing Number E3.01 ME3.01 FLOOR PLAN SYSTEMS.DWG CL N ori ti N 0) co COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC ELECTRICAL 114 MAINT/STOR. 113 EXIST PNL A t 1EXIQ PNL B EXISTING F.A. PANEL -o 0 WREAK RM 115 OPEN OFFICE WORK ROOM 118 %I/ F FFICE 119 CEIVING 116 fl CUSTODIAN (Di LI= I I rff- I I LiIj = I PaSTING F A. ANNUNCIATOR 112 IITh L_ I r=Th I rTh 1L41 H I-----4 I- -4 1 r'n Ir"n it -u1 L4J 1 Ir - - 1— --- HALLWAY 105 MEN 101 IJ FFICE 109 I- -- Ir=Th 1lU r==n _ FFICE 110 0 CONFERENCE 106 ENTRY LOBBY 0 WOMEN 102 100 DE STORAG' Lio1� 10 0 TRAINING ROOM 103 FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM 2 SCALE : 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 FLAN NOTES 0 REPLACE EXISTING DUCT DETECTOR IN SAME LOCATION ABOVE DROP CEILING. PROVIDE REMOTE TEST STATION ON CEILING BELOW DEVICE. 0 REPLACE EXISTING DEVICE WITH NEW. UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUIT AND WIRING. PROVIDE CONNECTION. 0 DEMO EXISTING FA DEVICE. TIE WIRES TOGETHER. PROVIDE COVER PLATE. • REPLACE EXISTING FA PANEL & REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR WITH NEW EST 101000 REFER TO SPEC. AND ONE -LINE DIAGRAM. ® PROVIDE NEW DEVICE AND CONNECT TO FIRE ALARM PANEL. D (170 A FLOOR PLAN CEILING LEVEL - FIRE ALARM SCALE : 1/8" /Th REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC O'a 2017 City of Tukwila— VIEWED For • OMPLi c;E AP O .,t) City of TukWila UILDINQ DWISION • RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 2 3 2017 PERMIT CEN ?I;DNIN NIO.v0k5° r()Iluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 till<ox TRES WEST ENGINEERS 1111111111•11111111 TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 0 0) 0) co 0 1— REVISION Design: DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BCY, BT FLR 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM Drawing Number E3.02 ME3.02_FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM.DWG 0) CO COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INC EXIST PANEL A LOCATION: SERVING: FED FROM: ELECTRICAL 114 LOAD 208/120 VOLT 400 AMP BUS RATING SCCR: 22,000 A 3 PHASE 400 AMP MAIN BREAKER AFC: 4 WIRE MOUNTING: SURFACE CONDUIT/WIRE SIZE PANEL A 4ANUAL MTF STARTER CKT LOAD DESCRIPTION TYPE KVA MP PHASE A/P KVA TYPE LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT 1 LIGHTING L 0.819 20/1 A 3/4"C, 3 #10 & #10 GND BY E.C. 20/1 1.470 L LIGHTING 2 3 LIGHTING L 0.728 20/1 1.260 B 30/2 20/1 0.609 L LIGHTING 4 5 LIGHTING L 0.624 20/1 C 20/1 1.246 L LITGHTING, EF -2 6 7 LIGHTING L 1.228 20/1 A 20/1 1.008 L LIGHTING 8 9 LIGHTING ROOMS 107-111 L 0.432 20/1 3.000 B WH -1 20/1 1.008 L SOFFIT LIGHTING 10 11 CU -01 & AC -01 M - 1.260 - 30/2 - 50/3 - - A C 20/1 1.008 L SOFFIT LIGHTING 12 13 A B 20/1 1.200 R RECEPTACLES ROOM 102 14 15 SPARE S H 20/1 18 B AC -3 20/1 0.600 R RECEPTACLES ROOM 102 16 17 SPARE S - 20/1 20 21 C 20/1 0.360 R RECEPTACLES 18 19 SPARE S - 20/1 A 20/1 0.390 20/1 0.540 R RECEPTACLES 20 21 SPARE S - 20/1 B 1.192 30/1 2.400 D DRY BLOWER 22 23 RECEPTACLES R 0.360 20/1 20/1 C. 20/1 0.180 R FLOOR RECEPTACLES 24 25 RECEPTACLES R 0.360 20/1 A 20/1 0.500 20/1 0.500 A COPIER 26 27 DRY BLOWER D 2.400 30/1 B - 20/1 0.700 A FAX RECEPTACLE 28 29 RECEPTACLES R 0.540 20/1 20/1 C 20/1 0.400 D AUTOMATIC DOOR MOTO 30 31 EXTERIOR SIGN L 0.750 20/1 A 20/1 0.720 20/1 0.540 R RECEPTACLES 32 33 RECEPTACLE MDF RM 117 D 1.000 20/1 B 0.720 20/1 0.360 R RECEPTACLES 34 35 RECEPTACLES R 0.360 20/1 20/1 C 20/1 0.500 R RECEPTACLES 36 37 RECEPTACLES R 0.500 20/1 A 20/1 0.720 20/1 0.500 R RECEPTACLES 38 39 RECEPTACLES R 0.500 20/1 B 20/1 - S SPARE 40 41 WATER COOLER D 0.430 20/1 LOAD TYPE C 20/1 0.000 L EMERGENCY LIGHTING 42 D A K LM TOTAL LOADS CONN. LOAD 1.58 11.66 32.39 0.75 7.60 PHASE LOAD PHASE A= 10.05 KVA PHASE B= 10.74 KVA PHASE C= 6.64 KVA CALC. LOAD 1.98 10.83 LOAD TYPE L R M H WH D A K LM TOTAL LOADS CONN. LOAD 10.93 7.40 1.26 6.63 1.20 1.26 27.42 KVA 76.11 AMP CALC. LOAD 13.66 7.40 1.26 6.63 1.20 0.32 30.47 KVA 84.57 AMP NOTES: BOLD TEXT INDICATES REVISIONS OR NEW LOADS TO THIS EXISTING PANEL. ALL OTHER CIRCUITS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER WHERE BREAKER IS IN BOLD TEXT. EXIST PANEL B LOCATION: SERVING: FED FROM: ELECTRICAL 114 LOAD 208/120 VOLT 400 AMP BUS RATING SCCR: 22,000 A 3 PHASE AFC: 4 WIRE MOUNTING: SURFACE CONDUIT/WIRE SIZE PANEL A 4ANUAL MTF STARTER CKT LOAD DESCRIPTION TYPE KVA A/P PHASE A/P KVA TYPE LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT 1 RECEPTACLES R 0.360 20/1 A 3/4"C, 3 #10 & #10 GND BY E.C. 20/1 0.360 R RECEPTACLES 2 3 RECEPTACLES R 0.720 20/1 1.260 B 30/2 20/1 0.360 R RECEPTACLES 4 5 RECEPTACLES R 0.500 20/1 C 20/1 0.180 R RECEPTACLES 6 7 AC -1 M - - 11.340 - - 50/3 - - A 20/1 0.200 D FIRE ALARM PANEL 8 9 B 20/2 -- 3.000 WH - WH -1 10 11 C 12 13 AC -2 M - - 13.068 - - 50/3 - - A 30/2 - 4.600 - WH - WH -2 14 15 B 16 17 C 20/1 0.750 H HOT WATER DISPENSER 18 19 AC -3 M - - 7.164 - - 30/3 - - A 20/1 0.360 R RECEPTACLES ROOF TOP 20 21 B 20/1 0.667 M EF -1 22 23 C 20/1 0.390 L SITE LIGHTING 24 25 SPRINKLER CONTROLLER D 0.180 20/1 A 20/1 1.192 L SITE LIGHTING 26 27 CIRCULATION PUMP M 0.150 20/1 B 20/1 0.500 D HVAC CONTROL 28 29 SPARE S - 20/1 C 20/1 0.500 D RECEPT DED. STAFF WORK AREA 30 31 RECEPT OFFICE 109, HALL 105 R 1.080 20/1 A 20/1 - S SPARE 32 33 RECEPT OFFICE 110 R 0.900 20/1 B 20/1 0.720 R RECEPT OPEN OFFICES 112 34 35 RECEPT OFFICE 111 R 0.900 20/1 C 20/1 0.720 R RECEPT OPEN OFFICES 112 36 37 RECEPT TRAINING RM 107 R 0.900 20/1 A 20/1 0.720 R RECEPT OPEN OFFICES 112 38 39 RECEPT HALL 105, RMS 106, 108 R 1.080 20/1 B 20/1 1.080 R RECEPT OPEN OFFICES 112 40 41 RECEPT COPIER HALL 105 D 1.000 20/1 C 20/1 0.720 R RECEPT OPEN OFFICES 112 42 PHASE LOAD PHASE A= 18.18 KVA PHASE B= 20.50 KVA PHASE C= 17.68 KVA LOAD TYPE L R M H WH D A K LM TOTAL LOADS CONN. LOAD 1.58 11.66 32.39 0.75 7.60 2.38 13.07 56.36 KVA 156.44 AMP CALC. LOAD 1.98 10.83 32.39 0.75 7.60 2.38 3.27 59.19 KVA 164.30 AMP NOTES: BOLD TEXT INDICATES REVISIONS OR NEW LOADS TO THIS EXISTING PANEL. ALL OTHER CIRCUITS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER WHERE BREAKER IS IN BOLD TEXT. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE MISC EQUIP. VOLT/ PHASE LOAD CIRCUIT CONDUIT/WIRE SIZE FUSED DISC. 4ANUAL MTF STARTER MAGNETIC 4TR STATE! PILOT SW AFC IN AMPS AT PANEL I REMARKS AMP KVA/W HP BKR PANEL Split -System Air -Conditioner Schedule 208 / 1 - 3/4"C, 3 #10 & #10 GND BY E.C. POWER CONNECTION SERVED FROM CU 01 RA loy(1) 208 11 - 1.260 - 30/2 A 3(1) #10 GND BY E.C. CONDENSING UNIT w 120/208V SERVICE L H - METER BASE AND SOCKET LOCATED ON EXTERIOR WALL PROPERTY LINE 30"x36"x11" METERING EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE WITH HINGED DOOR 541- 1"C. 41 1"C. WITH CONDUCTORS AS REQUIRED 30"x36"x11" UTILITY PULLBOX WITH HINGED DOOR --7 -I- I 41 . I L_ STREET CROSSING ALL WORK AND MATERIAL PROVIDED BY UTILITY -L 4 #500 MCM, 1 #2 GND. IN 3-1/2"C - 1 FLri I 1400A, 3P1 1 PNL A I PNL I B I. 1 3/0 Cu. 1 GROUND I UTILITY CONNECTION POINT 4" GRS 90' ELL 4" SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNDERGROUND SERVICE. CONDUIT FROM PROPERTY LINE. _ --1 . - 3/0 Cu. GROUND REFER - TO SECTION 1645 POWER ONS -LIN14AM SCALE: NONE NOTE: POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION GEAR IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. Dt1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 04 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION VIEWED FO )D OMPLi k ICE AP`":..D OCT 7 Y'17 of IrukOrb UL, RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2017 pEF Pg; PSC Pk - rill arc it cts arch Lecture planning inter Or design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 v V TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA.98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 4640 S 144TH STREET REVISION DATE Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: FLR Project No. 331-1.6-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES Drawing Number E5.01 ME5.01_POWER ONE LINE DIAGRAM.DWG 0 N 1.6 N COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INCo (E)EMCS CONTROL •4 --- RECONNECT EXISTING TWO (2) TELEPHONE LINES CONTROL RELAY i M -i -- LDJ - -- LDJ (E)DOOR HOLDER CIRCUIT PROVIDE AND CONNECT CONTROL -'� TO 120VAC POWER RELAY QM (E)FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER CIRCUIT RETURN -.8.----8 (E)FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL ALARM EXISTING FIRE ALARM SLC OF DEVICES AND DETECTORS PROVIDE REMOTE INDICATING LIGHT TO SIGNAL SMOKE DUCT DETECTOR ACTIVATION. MOUNT IN CEILING BELOW UNIT. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO. DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS FOR ALL MECHANICAL UNITS OF 2000 CFM AND OVER SEE MECH DRAWING EQUIP. SCHEDULES. r -I (E)HVAC DDC CONTROL HVAC ; PANEL L J i FOR HVAC SHUT DOWN NEW FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP DEVICES AND DETECTORS i > 1/1 DEDICATED 120V CIRCUITS, SEPARATE HOME RUN AND INSULATED GROUND. NEW EST I01000 F.A. PANEL NEW FA -NAC PANEL r/ - BATTERY CABINET FAA) LOOP CIRCUIT TYPICAL (E)AUDIO/VISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL (E)AUDIO/VISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL AUDIO/VISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL FIRE ALARM GRAPHIC MAP FIRE ALARM REMOTE. LCD ANNUNCIATOR GROUNDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE FIRE ALARM NOTES: REMOVE. EXISTING FIRE ALARM ��DIALER. 1. PROVIDE ALL J -BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING & CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES FOR COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 2. ALL DEVICES WILL BE MOUNTED IN AN ACCESSIBLE SPACE AND AT THE ELEVATION PER NFPA 72, ADA, AND AHJ CODES. 3. PROVIDE FLUSH MOUNT BACK BOXES FOR ALL DEVICES IN ALL FINISHED SPACE. 4. PROVIDE COMPLETE GROUNDING TO EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. 5. SEE FIRE ALARM SPECIFICATION FOR COMPLETE DETAILS. 6. PROVIDE NEW FIRE ALARM PANEL ADDRESSABLE. 7. PROVIDE SHUT DOWN CONNECTIONS FOR ALL 2000CFM HVAC UNITS WITH DUCT DETECTORS AS SHOWN. 8. SET ALL VISUAL DEVICES TO PROVIDE THE RIGHT COVERAGE OF CANDELA FOR THE SPACE PER NFPA 72 AND AHJ CODES. 9. SET ALL AUDIO DEVICES TO TEMPORAL AND TO BE 15dB ABOVE AMBIENT SOUND LEVEL OF THE ROOM PER NFPA 72 CODES TABLE. 10. ALL AUDIO AND VISUAL DEVICE WILL BE SYNC PER NFPA 72 CODES. 11. PROVIDE COMPLETE REPROGRAMMING OF SYSTEM TO UPDATE ALL ZONES, ADDRESSES, AND DIALER MONITORING BY POINTS. 12. PROVIDE COMPLETE SHOP PLANS FOR INSTALLATION AND AS -BUILT SET OF THESE PLANS NEXT TO FIRE ALARM PANEL ON COMPLETION. 13. PROVIDE CD-ROM, DVD, OR FINGER DRIVE OF PROGRAM DATA IN FIRE ALARM PANEL AS REQUIRED BY NFPA-72 CODES. 14. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM DIALER FOR MONITORING. 15. REPLACE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH NEW EST I01000 FIRE ALARM PANEL AND ALL FIELD DEVICES. UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUIT AND WIRING EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON FIRE ALARM FLOOR PLANS. ALL NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PROVIDE CONDUIT, CABLING, AND CONNECTIONS FOR A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. 16. FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR FIRE ALARM PERMIT BY TUKWILA BUILDING DEPARTMENT. 17. PROVIDE THE AHJ AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS: a. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS SHALL BE FULL CONSTRUCTION SET WITH REDLINE MARKUPS THAT CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING (ALL ZONING, DEVICE POINT NUMBERS, NEW DEVICE CONDUIT OR WIRING PATHWAYS, AND EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICES AND PANELS.) b. EXISTING AS -BUILT DRAWINGS SHALL HAVE ALL FIRE ALARM PANELS AND DEVICES. c. HAFT SIZE GRAPHIC MAP OF EACH FLOOR WITH ZONES AND ADDRESSABLE POINT DEVICES. (NO WIRE ) d. CENTRAL STATION MONITORING PRE-TEST REPORT OF ALL ADDRESSABLE POINTS. e. FIRE ALARM PANEL ALARM, SUPERVISORY, AND TROUBLE EVENT LOG REPORT OF ALL DEVICES: f. ADDRESSABLE POINTS LIST. g. WRITTEN DETAIL DESCRIPTION OF EACH DUCT DETECTOR LOCATION TO DIRECT A PERSON TO THAT LOCATION IN THE CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS. PROVIDE PHENOLIC LABEL INDICATING FOR ALL DUCT DETECTORS. h. COMPLETED NFPA 72 RECORD OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CURRENT FORMS TO OWNER AND AHJ. i. PROVIDE THE DIGITAL COPY OF ALL ABOVE ON ONE FOLLOWING (CD-ROM, DVD, OR FINGER DRIVE). j. PROVIDE ALL THE ABOVE DOCUMENTS IN O&M MANUALS BINDER. k. PROVIDE CD-ROM, DVD, OR FINGER DRIVE OF PROGRAM DATA IN FIRE ALARM PANEL AS REQUIRED BY NFPA-72 CODES. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC 0t. 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FO CO E COMPLI' PROV OCT 1 2017 of Tukwil B d ILDING DIVISIO. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 232011 PERMIT CEN 01\t,4i Pct© rolluda architects arch tecture planning inter or`design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com N WW V r, z V_IJ V Q O nQW O I- ss 0 co0 < W� o o CEI D a. V w W OWE • 1.(. O J � < U 5 >7 0 (-§" > i) REVISION 8 r < vJ 1— 1— W —1W0 CL cfl tea) g�Q � J y Co o REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. BCY, FLR BCY, BT FLR 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title FIRE ALARM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM Drawing Number E8.01 ONE LINE DIAGRAM.DWG 2 a co Co ti d7 COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INCo STRUCTURAL CEILING 0 SUSPENDED CEILING [FININSHED FLOOR TELECOM CONDUIT DETAIL SCALE: NONE 01 WALL TELECOM OUTLET DEVICES AND COVERPLATE. ALL WALL OUTLETS SHALL BE MOUNTED AT SAME HEIGHT AS ADJACENT POWER OUTLETS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTE. O2 STUB OUT 1" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. PROVIDE PLASTIC BUSHINGS FOR ALL CONDUIT ENDS. 120VAC POWER 5 NPP2OPLBP CONTROL RECEPTACLE PLUG LOAD CIRCUIT # SWITCHED RECEPTACLES SS buu 07 TO NEXT S SWITCHED RECEPTACLE SPLIT CONTROLLED RECEPTACLE DETAIL SCALE: NONE TO NEXT NON -SWITCH RECEPTACLE NOTE: 1. PROVIDE ALL DEVICES, J -BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING AND CONNECTIONS FOR COMPLETE OPERATION. 2. REFER TO ELECTRICAL POWER & LIGHTING PLAN SHEETS FOR DEVICE QUANTITY. 3. PROVIDE SPLIT CONTROLLED RECEPTACLE WITH CONTROL SYMBOL AND "CONTROLLED" ABOVE OR SIDE OF THE CONTROLLED OUTLET. PART NUMBER LEVITON 5262-S1G OR EQUAL. 4. OCCUPANCY SENSOR WILL CONTROL THE SWITCHED RECEPTACLE. DUAL RJ -45 JACK INSERT FOR UTP JACK IDENTIFICATION JACK IDENTIFICATION IDF-A-1-1 IDF-A-1-2 BLANK FILLERPLATE LABEL 16 POINT TYPE LETTERING BLACK ON WHITE DUAL RJ -45 JACK INSERT FOR UTP DUAL RJ -45 JACK INSERT FOR UTP SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE NOTES: 1. PROVIDE DOUBLE GANG COVERPLATES IN AREAS REQUIRING MORE DROPS THEN WILL FIT INTO A SINGLE GANG PLATE. 2. PROVIDE 5 SQUARE BACK BOXES AT ALL TELECOM OUTLET LOCATIONS. 3. DETAILS ARE SHOWN AS A GUIDELINE AND ARE NOT A REPRESENTATION OF EVERY SITUATION. 4. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 271000 FOR MORE REQUIREMENTS. 5. SEE FLOOR PLANS WHERE SUB -NUMBER IN SYMBOL INDICATES QUANTITIES OF DROPS PER OUTLET. TYPICAL TELECOM WALL OUTLET DETAILS SCALE: NONE UTP CABLE SCHEDULE EXISTING EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION IDDDDDD DDDDDD DDDDDD DDDDDD DODDDD DDDDDD DDDDDD DDDDDD 01 FOUR PAIR UTP CATEGORY 6 CABLE FOR DATA, DATA, QUANTITY PER DEVICE AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLANS 1,2 SCHEDULE NOTES: I 1. UTP CABLE ROUTED FROM OUTLETS IN CONDUITS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE THEN THROUGH J -HOOKS TO TELECOM RACK. 2. ALL TELECOMMUNICATION CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED AT e T EXISTING EQUIPMENT OPEN. SPACE T EXISTING EQUIP. t UTP CABLE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION REMARKS 01 FOUR PAIR UTP CATEGORY 6 CABLE FOR DATA, DATA, QUANTITY PER DEVICE AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLANS 1,2 SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. UTP CABLE ROUTED FROM OUTLETS IN CONDUITS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE THEN THROUGH J -HOOKS TO TELECOM RACK. 2. ALL TELECOMMUNICATION CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED AT A PATCH PANEL. DETAIL NOTES O1 SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS. PROVIDE QUANTITY OF CAT 6 DROPS PER OUTLET AS INDICATED INSIDE TELECOM SYMBOL ON FLOOR PLANS. ALL CABLING WILL PUNCH DOWN ON PATCH PANELS IN THE IDF-A. SEE THIS SHEET AND SPECIFICATION 271000 FOR ADDITIONAL OUTLET REQUIREMENTS. O NEW FREE STANDING UPRIGHT FLOOR MOUNTED RACK. O PROVIDE UTP WIRE MANAGEMENT PANELS AS SHOWN PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 271000. PROVIDE RACK MOUNTED CAT. 6 HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANEL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 271000 AND TERMINATE ALL UTP CABLES. TELECOM RACK MDF ROOM 117 SCALE: NONE NPODMDX WALL SWITCH NPP2OPLBP WHITE BLACK BLUE BLUE SWITCHED RECEPTACLE CONTROLLER POWER PACK NCMADCXDZRJB CEILING MOUNT DUAL ZONE PHOTO CELL NCMPDT9ARRJB CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSOR 11 NPP16D 0 3 00 00 © WHITE BLACK ORANGE BLUE BLUE VIOLET GRAY LIGHTING ROOM CONTROLLER DIMMING POWER PACK OFFICE LIC 4TING/RECEFTACLE CONTROL DIAGRAM NTS NOTE: PROVIDE ALL DEVICES, CONDUITS, WIRING AND CONNECTIONS FOR COMPLETE OPERATION. THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT REPRESENT EACH ROOM/SPACE/AREA EXACTLY PROVIDE ALL DEVICES AS REQUIRED FOR EACH LOCATION. NPP16D 0 WHITE BLACK ORANGE BLUE BLUE VIOLET GRAY LIGHTING ROOM CONTROLLER DIMMING POWER PACK WIRE LEGEND CAT 5-E (CLASS 2) LINE VOLTAGE 0.10 VDC LOW VOLTAGE (1A @ 40 VDC/VAC) 15-24 VDC POWER ETHERNET. LAN (CLASS 2) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED DEC Ott 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CIN OF TUKWILA AUG 23 2011 PERMIT CENTF��fc pN0 P6R�0�lP�- rollutla architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main Street Suite 323 Seattle, WA 98104 t: 206-624-4222 f: 206-624-4226 Inlet V V— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com co to 0 S REVISION DATE Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: FLR Project No. 331-16-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Date: 8/10/2017 Drawing Title SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAM Drawing Number E8.02 q 0 0 w z J w z a -- co >w 1– rn (I N Co w 2 ti 0 N 0) COPYRIGHT © 2015 ROLLUDA ARCHITECTS INCo